# Welcome

With **Microsoft 365**, **SharePoint Online**, and our **AI-based** components, we create a digital workspace where the intranet becomes the foundation for all the daily activities of your company.

### What can you find in this site?

In this website, you can find a **preview of who we are**, what we do, and **what services we offer**. 

Here you can also find **our manuals that explain how to configure all our web parts**. Search for the web parts that belong to your package and find out how you can configure them!

If you're not familiar with us yet, don't hesitate to **schedule a demo with our SharePoint experts**. 

The navigation menu on the left will also provide information on **how the product installation process works**, and you can find a **specific guide for each web part and functionality that we manage**.

### What we do

We have been operating in the corporate intranet technology sector for over 20 years with excellent results for international partners and clients.

More than 200 companies have built their Microsoft 365 digital workplace with us.

#### Communication and collaboration

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Sa606RiiQqs0OXAgcMO6" alt="" width="230"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

We simplify internal communication, collaboration among colleagues, and the sharing of corporate information.

***

#### The best integrated technology

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/q7bSXaBbrUqFSpIffwDR" alt="" width="207"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Besides Microsoft 365 and SharePoint, we offer AI-based components to increase productivity in your company.

***

#### Customization

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/ip8jTmVA4is8KMXAJhVy" alt="" width="206"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

We develop customized solutions to enhance your existing technology and build a Microsoft 365 digital workplace tailored to your company's needs.<br>

***

#### Constant support<br>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/GLflFPdzc1gJjLjyqEh2" alt="" width="205"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

We provide the necessary support to install, develop, and customize your SharePoint intranet, improving results even after the go-live.


# Why Intranet.ai

We offer a comprehensive and user-friendly SharePoint intranet to boost your company's productivity with a miniaml investment in costs, time and resources.

***

### Quick projects

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/T9bLILXEoO6ceLIh1Ugo" alt="" width="188"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Our solution is operational within 24 hours of purchase.

We can help you customize the site with useful content and automations for your company and train users in managing and using their new SharePoint intranet.

***

### Low costs

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/SQM2Qg4bvXloT2tlS24X" alt="" width="188"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Choose the plan that best suits your company and get over 45 vertical features for internal communication, training, daily task management, and knowledge base creation.

No additional development costs

***

### High engagement

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/ioWUhxESrYfmJpiDMQgV" alt="" width="188"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

We support your company in promoting intranet features with personalized communication campaigns, original informative content, and online training sessions to engage colleagues in the portal's launch and increase adoption rates.<br>

***

### Low risk

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/HWAIS6c1JlLpr3Y5TCxS" alt="" width="188"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Intranet.ai is based on a tested solution and implementation method to reduce the risk of unexpected expenses, delays, and malfunctions.

Trust a team with over 20 years of experience in building Microsoft 365-based intranets and a portfolio of 200+ satisfied clients.

***

Do you want to know more? Visit our dedicated site: [CLICK HERE](https://intranet.ai/why-intranetai/)


# Request a DEMO

Find out why 75% of our demos turn into purchases.

[CLICK HERE](https://intranet.ai/about/start-free-trial/) to book an appointment with our experts&#x20;


# Use cases

Free access to our guide with more than 100 ideas for building your SharePoint intranet.

Build and improve your digital workplace with more than **100 features and innovative, engaging and intelligent ideas**.

[CLICK HERE](https://intranet.ai/guides/100plusideas-for-your-intranet/) to get it for free. Fill out the form and receive your **free guide** now!

<figure><img src="/files/Y2JBOGBhY2eyS00M7vxV" alt="" width="344"><figcaption></figcaption></figure>


# Introduction

If you are here, it is because you're evaluating to create your new company communication portal using intranet.ai and that's wonderful :)

On this section you will find everything related to our intranet in-a-box solution, together with detailed information about:

* The two [hosting options](/sharepoint-intranet/hosting-options) we have for our customers
* Which are the [requirements](/sharepoint-intranet/requirements) of our product, and for final users
* How the [installation process](/sharepoint-intranet/installation/installation-process) will be
* How to [configure your intranet](/sharepoint-intranet/components)
* All the [new releases](/sharepoint-intranet/releases/version-1.1) that we are doing over the time

If you need any additional help just contact your intranet.ai's reference or drop us an e-mail from [this page](https://intranet.ai/about/contact-us/).

{% hint style="info" %}
Important: sometimes we will ask you to do some actions, especially for installation and configuration. Don't be afraid, they are very simple: you have just to fill the forms with the needed information.
{% endhint %}


# Plans

We have plans for small/medium companies and for enterprises, with the possibility to even compose the offer as you whish.

[CLICK HERE](https://intranet.ai/pricing/) to choose the intranet solution that best suits your needs.


# Hosting options

intranet.ai is designed for small business companies and enterprises, allowing you to build your intranet in half the time and for half the cost.

## Hosting options

intranet.ai has two different options for hosting.\
First of all the intranet will be created in your Microsoft 365 tenant, using your SharePoint Online instance. In this way, your users will access the company portal using their own credentials.

What you can choose is Azure.\
intranet.ai needs Azure for its features (like Teams push notifications, alerts, analytics, and others) and you can choose if you prefer to use your Azure subscription or to use our Azure subscription in a SAAS way.

#### SAAS

Because we believe in the power of the cloud, we provide a **software-as-a-service solution** that is fully integrated with SharePoint Online. You can save money on infrastructure and maintenance by delegating to us infrastructure monitoring and staying on top of new features.\
With the goal to install intranet.ai we need a person with a Global Administrator account.

#### Self-hosted

Our intranet-in-a-box can be installed in your Azure infrastructure to maintain everything within the company perimeter. In this case, you will have a consumption of all the Azure services needed for intranet.ai to work.\
With the goal to install intranet.ai we need a person with a Global Administrator account and owner of the Azure subscription in which we're going to install the solution.

{% hint style="info" %}
So, an Azure subscription in pay-as-you-go is needed to install intranet.ai solutions in self-hosted mode. The subscription must be already available and ready to use. If you want to check the availability of an Azure subscription in your environment, please take a look if you see any subscription here: <https://portal.azure.com/#view/Microsoft_Azure_Billing/SubscriptionsBladeV2>
{% endhint %}

Here are the types of resources that will be created:

* 1 Key Vault 
* 1 App service plan, used for hosting 5 Function App + 2 App Service + 1 Web App Bot 
* 1 API Management  
* 1 Cosmos DB 
* 1 Application Insight 
* 1 Cognitive Service
* 1 Search Service
* 1 Storage Account
* 2 Event Hub (1 only if you get intranet.ai analytics)
* 1 Data Explorer (only if you get intranet.ai analytics)

## FAQ

On our website, you can find [all the questions](https://intranet.ai/about/faq/) related to this topic.


# Requirements

In this page you can find all is needed to start a new project with intranet.ai ready-to-go solutions, for the creation of the communication portal within your company.

## Project requirements

Please find here below the requirements from the project management point of view, needed for both SAAS and Self-hosted.

* We ask two types of user accounts:
  * A personal account for each of our specialists, to be used for working on your Microsoft 365 environment
    * If this account is a SharePoint Online Administrator or a Global Administrator it is useful for us to proceed autonomously on some technical activities (like the creation of new sites, the creation of a custom theme, and many others). Otherwise we will need the support from the Customer to execute such activites.
  * A service account, to be used for content creation and migration needs. We usually call it "Intranet Editor" or something similar, with the goal to avoid having real people names for migrated content author.
* We ask the creation of a Teams group, inside the Customer tenant
  * This is useful for the collaboration during the project. We are going to use this group for all the communications during the project, for having one single repository for project's documents and files, for archiving meeting notes and managing tasks.&#x20;

## Technical requirements

Please find below all the technical requirements for final users and for the cloud environment in which we will install our solution.

### Users' system requirements

The Customer is required to use, maintain, and upgrade hardware and software to meet the evolving system requirements of our solution. Hardware and software requirements to be met are specified within the [Microsoft 365 documentation](https://www.microsoft.com/en-gb/microsoft-365/microsoft-365-and-office-resources).

#### Users' licenses

The intranet will be created on SharePoint Online and the following licenses are needed to use all the features available:

* SharePoint Online, for accessing the intranet portal
* Microsoft Teams, for receiving push notifications
* Power Apps for Office 365, for forms customizations or custom apps
* Power Automate for Office 365, for workflows
* Microsoft Stream, for videos and live streaming

These licenses are included in the following bundles:

* Microsoft 365 Business Basic / Standard / Premium
* Microsoft 365 E3 / E5 / F3
* Office 365 E1 / E3 / E4 / E5 / F3

Office 365 F1 and Microsoft 365 F1 licenses are also good, but only for accessing the intranet in SharePoint Online or Teams. Power Apps and Power Automate are not available.

SharePoint Online P1 or P2 licenses are also good, but only for accessing the intranet in SharePoint Online.

### System requirements

#### SharePoint Online

* A global App Catalog is needed to install intranet.ai solutions. You create your global App Catalog inside the SharePoint Online Administration portal following [these instructions](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/sharepoint/use-app-catalog). If there is already an App Catalog configured, just skip this step.
* intranet.ai needs at least one communication site in SharePoint Online to work. \
  If you already have an intranet in SharePoint Online and you want to enrich it with intranet.ai custom components, just send us the link.\
  If it is a new installation, please create a new communication site by following [these instructions](https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/office/create-a-communication-site-in-sharepoint-7fb44b20-a72f-4d2c-9173-fc8f59ba50eb) and choose the address of your brand new intranet (ex: <https://CONTOSO.sharepoint.com/sites/intranet>)

{% hint style="info" %}
**Important**: When choosing a template for your new communication site, please **select a** **blank template**. This approach ensures a smooth experience, especially when setting up a multilingual environment.
{% endhint %}

{% hint style="info" %}
**Important**: If you're planning to build a multi-language intranet or to have global/local communications, just skip this requirement. We will create the structure of your intranet's sites together.
{% endhint %}

#### Azure (only for Self-hosted installation)

An Azure subscription (pay-as-you-go, CSP, or with an Enterprise Agreement) is needed for server-side features of intranet.ai self-hosted.\
If a subscription is not available, we can re-sell the Azure subscription. Please talk about this possibility with your Sales account.

STEP 1\
Following [these instructions](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/azure-resource-manager/management/resource-providers-and-types), please register the service provider below:

* Microsoft.AlertsManagement
* Microsoft.ApiManagement
* Microsoft.BotService
* Microsoft.CognitiveServices
* Microsoft.DocumentDB
* Microsoft.Insights
* Microsoft.KeyVault
* Microsoft.ManagedServices
* Microsoft.Search
* Microsoft.Storage
* Microsoft.Web
* Microsoft.EventHub
* Microsoft.Kusto
* Microsoft.OperationalInsights

STEP 2\
Create a new resource group inside your Azure subscription following [these instructions](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/azure-resource-manager/management/manage-resource-groups-portal). \
Give "Contribute" access to this new resource group to intranet.ai's accounts.

STEP 3\
Following [these instructions](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/active-directory/develop/quickstart-register-app), please create a new app registration inside your Azure AD and configure it as below:

* Name: intranet.ai-managed
* Type: Multitenant

Then execute the following actions:

* Generate a new client secret with the maximum expiration date
* Configure the following permissions:
  * Microsoft Graph
    * Delegated
      * Directory.Read.All
      * Group.ReadWrite.All
      * User.Read
      * User.Read.All
      * User.ReadBasic.All
    * Application
      * Directory.Read.All
      * Group.ReadWrite.All
      * Notes.ReadWrite.All
      * User.Read.All
  * SharePoint
    * Application
      * Sites.FullControl.All
      * TermStore.ReadWrite.All
      * User.ReadWrite.All
* Give an admin consent to all of those permissions
* Add this app registration as an Owner of the resource group created in the previous step


# Installation

Here you can find all the information needed to fully understand how the installation processes of our solution will be.

Please read carefully the following topics:

* [Installation process](/sharepoint-intranet/installation/installation-process)
* [Action before the installation meeting](/sharepoint-intranet/installation/action-before-the-installation-meeting)


# Installation process

How will be your intranet.ai installation

{% hint style="info" %}
Information: our customers are not alone during intrante.ai installation. You will be followed by one of our technicians to have a quick and successful installation of our product.
{% endhint %}

## How we will install your intranet.ai

The installation process will be executed with the following steps:

1. The Customer completes the [requirements](/sharepoint-intranet/requirements) by itself, or with a support from our technicians.
2. In case of Self Hosted installation, the Customer completes the [Self-hosted](/sharepoint-intranet/requirements#azure-only-for-self-hosted-installation) requirements.
3. The Customer sends the [information needed](/sharepoint-intranet/installation/action-before-the-installation-meeting) to intranet.ai technicians
4. Within a Teams meeting, the Customer and intranet.ai technicians will complete the installation steps together


# Action before the installation meeting

With the goal to have our internal registry filled correctly, we ask to our Customers some information useful to have our technicians ready for the installation and to have the Customer's contact address for any need.\
Here the list of the information we need from you:

* Company name (ex: Contoso)
* Internal reference name and surname (ex: Mario Rossi)
* Internal reference e-mail (ex: <mario.rossi@contoso.it>)
* Technical reference e-mail (ex: <mario.rossi@contoso.it>)
* Tenant ID ([here is how to find it](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/active-directory/fundamentals/active-directory-how-to-find-tenant))
* Tenant domain (ex: CONTOSO.onmicrosoft.com or CONTOSO.sharepoint.com)
* The URL of the SharePoint site that will host the intranet ([refer to this step](/sharepoint-intranet/installation#communication-site))

For **Self-Hosted** installations, the following data is also required:

* ID of the Azure Subscription that will host the installation
* Name of the Resource Group that will host the installation
* Application Client ID and Client Secret Value of the "*intranet.ai-managed*" app registration created for the installation (refer to [these steps](broken://pages/0Bkh4wUXGJ7JuHI7sJTe#app-registration-creation) for the app registration creation process.

Please send the information needed by filling up this form

{% embed url="<https://forms.office.com/Pages/ResponsePage.aspx?embed=true&id=kE5ffpLHDUuWRtuZyazqKHN4CkJGjq9LklN9kdAHVqFUQVkxRllSNTdDUzhNT0hCSDY4OUZJV0taTS4u>" %}


# Components

In this section you can find all the information needed to configure intranet.ai's components without the support of our specialists.


# Advanced Search

The component that helps users find documents, contacts, and information in the Microsoft 365 environment within seconds.

## What is Advanced Search

Advanced Search is a search bar that **enhances the capabilities of SharePoint Online**, helping users find answers and content within the integrated Microsoft environment, as well as on the intranet. Advanced Search assists intranet users in locating:

* Documents, news, and useful content pages
* Company personnel
* Work applications
* Answers to frequently asked questions

In one centralized location, users can access everything they need to enhance their work.

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **Advanced Search** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/advanced-intranet-search/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the Advanced Search web part to a SharePoint page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part and you'll see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/l5ySSL5qOCO7zmUJPhxZ" alt="" data-size="line">&#x20;
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **Search** to quickly find and select the Advanced Search web part, which is named "IAI - Search".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/tgVsBQqKzbSyPSGXw0pG" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click the **Edit** **properties** <img src="/files/8VNq9IwC5pcyd2htapd3" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options such as View settings, Tab settings, People settings, Contact card settings, Language settings, and more. See below for more information on each of these options.

***

## Configuration

1. [View settings](#view-settings)
2. [Tab settings](#tab-settings)
3. [People settings](#people-settings)
4. [Contact card settings](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/advanced-search#contact-card-settings)
5. [Language settings](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/advanced-search#language-settings)
6. [Documents search settings](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/advanced-search#document-search-settings)
7. [News search settings](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/advanced-search#news-search-settings)
8. [Pages search settings](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/advanced-search#pages-search-settings)
9. [Apps search settings](#apps-search-settings)
10. [FAQ settings](#faq-settings)
11. [Category links settings](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/advanced-search#category-link-settings)
12. [Custom titles settings](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/advanced-search#custom-titles-settings)
13. [External links settings](#external-links-settings)
14. [General settings](#general-settings)
15. [Section order settings](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/advanced-search#section-order-settings)

### View settings

The view settings allows you to customize the appearance of your application by adjusting various layout settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/lGEhAcft8EFDmfsERnio" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By opening this first configuration, you will see the following options:

* **Do you want to hide the background?** You can choose to hide or display the webpart background The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a white background. If you enable this option, the white card background will be completely removed, allowing the content appear directly on the page. As a result, the webpart will be transparent, showing either the selected background image or the chosen SharePoint page color.
* **Do you want to hide the background shadow?** You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the webpart stand out more against the rest of the page. If you enable this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.
* **Select the type of background shadow:** if you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from High Contrast, Light, or Dark options.
  * If you select **High contrast**, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.
  * By choosing the **Light background shadow**, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.
  * Finally, the **Dark background shadow** style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more.

### Tab settings

Thanks to this configuration, you can control the visibility of content within the web part.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/eaCMHgFhh4LMLfXjjCjq" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Show Contacts** – Choose whether to display contact information.
* **Show Documents** – Choose whether to display document listings.
* **Show Pages** – Choose whether to display individual pages.
* **Show News Preview Image/Icon** – Choose whether to display a preview image or icon for news items.
* **Show Apps** – Choose whether to display applications.
* **Show FAQ** – Choose whether to display Frequently Asked Questions.
* **Show QnA** – Choose whether to display Questions and Answers.
* **Show AI Intranet Manager** – Choose whether to display the new AI-powered intranet assistant.

### People settings

Advanced search allows you to look up company contacts, making it easy to quickly find all your colleagues' information. Therefore, it's essential to include People Directory details in this section.

{% hint style="info" %}

* If you're not in edit mode already, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Select the Advanced Search web part, then click **Edit properties** <img src="/files/oM0Yt0xGSghoIczZplHx" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left side of the Advanced Search web part.
  {% endhint %}

Enter the **site URL** where the [People directory](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/people-directory) list has been installed.&#x20;

> For example: <https://intranetai.sharepoint.com/sites/my-hub/>

Choose the **People directory list**.

Select the **People Directory data source**, which can be either SharePoint or Graph. Since a SharePoint list can contain a maximum of 5,000 items, companies with more than 5,000 employees will be required to use Graph as the data source. For companies with fewer than 5,000 employees, the choice will be the SharePoint list of the people directory, which is synchronized daily with Azure AD contacts.

**Insert the additional graph query**: by default, all active users who have their full name and surname are taken, but with that field it is possible to insert an additional graph query to filter users based on their Azure Active Directory attributes.

> For example, you can set to display only users who have the officeLocation field set to a certain value in Azure AD by filling it in the Insert the additional graph query field.

Then, you need to select the field from the list where **the active/is-visible value is stored**, where you can choose between Active and No value.

Finally, you can choose whether to show the user's **Teams status** in the search bar.&#x20;

<img src="/files/d0Oilg1qOYCmVKhbwA0B" alt="" data-size="original">

{% hint style="info" %}
To activate the Teams status in the intranet web parts, a few actions in the SharePoint admin center are needed. The SharePoint admin center can be accessed with a SharePoint Admin account. So, you need to take the following steps with a SharePoint Admin account:&#x20;

* Go to <https://yourtenant-admin.sharepoint.com/> to **access the SharePoint admin center**.

<img src="/files/c7buZRyoPGK1b9jsm5BQ" alt="" data-size="original">

* Expand the **Advanced** section in the left-hand menu and click on **API access**.
* In the **Pending requests** section, you should have the following row: **Microsoft Graph - Presence.Read.All**.

<img src="/files/GdDEaycov2CE1ZSeC3SE" alt="" data-size="line">

* Select the row and click on **Approve** at the top left of the page.
  {% endhint %}

### Contact card settings

In this section, you need to choose **which information you want to display when searching for a contact** in the search bar and specify in which fields of Azure AD this information is stored.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/bj5mCxrzZSsyEMZ4Vs1A" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Contacts list field:** select the fields you **want to see** when a contact is searched, for example: Title (corresponding to Name and Surname of the contact), Department, Job Title.
* **Select the field where the name is saved:** specify in which field of Azure AD this information is stored; usually it is **Given Name**.
* **Select the field where the surname is saved:** specify in which field of Azure AD this information is stored; usually it is **Surname**.
* **Select the field where the business phone is saved:** specify in which field of Azure AD this information is stored; usually it is **Business Phones**.
* **Select the** **field where the mobile phone is saved:** specify in which field of Azure AD this information is stored; usually it is **Mobile Phone**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/hCkOOQRwaCBiGrFg5zGA" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Select the field where the image is saved:** specify in which field of Azure AD this information is stored; usually it is **Title**.
* **Select the field where the user principal name is saved:** specify in which field of Azure AD this information is stored; usually it is **User Principal Name**.
* **Enable phone icon:** this field is used to enable or disable the phone button, which allows you to call the contact directly from the Intranet if you have a **Voip system** when you access the person’s card. If you don't have a Voip system, remove the flag from Enable phone icon.
  * In the first field, enter the **telephone area code**, that must be preceded by "tel:". Example: tel:0039.
  * In the second dropdown, select the number to be used to **identify the user making the call** (the caller). Example: Mobile Phone.
  * In the third dropdown, **enter the URL with the placeholders** {caller} and {receiver} as the description of the field says. Example: <https://urldachiamare?caller={caller}\\&receiver={receiver}>.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/RHc2HIadhSeuhGqr8yX8" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Select the field where the mail is saved:** specify in which fields of Azure AD this information is stored; usually it is **Mail**.
* **Enable mail icon / enable teams icon:** here you can enable or disable the quick action buttons for mail and Teams, as you can see an example below:

<figure><img src="/files/eIdsNB28eGOSuamYOtUp" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<div align="left" data-full-width="false"><figure><img src="/files/IRMx5OxZfe9Jfgdd2RPM" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Do you want to insert the default message in Teams?** This setting allows you to automatically include a predefined message when initiating a Teams chat via the search bar webpart. If enabled, the default message will appear in the chat input field, helping users start conversations more efficiently.
* The final field, **Insert a link to the app you want to open when clicking on a person card**, is seamlessly integrated with the [People Directory](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/people-directory) or [My Profile](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/my-profile) application. You can insert a link to the page where the [People Directory](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/people-directory) or [My Profile](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/my-profile) is located. This way, when you click on the name of the person you've searched for, their personal card in the [People Directory](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/people-directory) or [My Profile](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/my-profile) opens, displaying all the relevant information.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/pP53YVZMlZpyz3Rbvik7" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### Language settings

{% hint style="info" %}
This area only concerns **multi-language intranets**.
{% endhint %}

As will be explained in the section named [FAQ settings](#faq-settings), Advanced Search allows you to search for information within SharePoint lists of FAQs or within a knowledge base created with **Language Studio**. If you choose the latter option, here you can select the **language in which results will be returned**. The language may be based on the page language or the site language.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/y3uBt2KUcvdNbzRfMahE" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### **Document search settings**

The Advanced Search feature allows you to **search through documents stored** in SharePoint Online. The search indexes both the title and the text of the documents. Therefore, if you search **for a word contained within a document**, the search bar will include that document in the results. In this section of the configuration panel, you can select the SharePoint sites for document searches and customize the display of the search results.

{% hint style="info" %}

* If you're not in edit mode already, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Select the Advanced Search web part, then click **Edit web part** <img src="/files/UFhC72tXYchTWhWzRQkA" alt="Web part edit button" data-size="line"> on the left side of the Advanced Search web part.
  {% endhint %}

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/eRniUWIHscKhZv8JHzr0" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Select sites:** here you can specify the source for your documents. Your documents can come from the site you are on while using the web part, or one or more individual sites. So, in this field, you need to select the sites where you have saved the documents you want to appear in the search.
* **Use the hub site?** If you enable this option, all the sites connected to the hub will be used for document search.&#x20;
* **Select the search order for documents:** you can choose between **More relevance** and **Last edit** to set the search order.
* **Choose whether to display the title or the file name with the extension:** you can choose whether to show the extension of the file or not.
* If you want to show metadata related to documents, you can open the **Configure the documents section properties** panel and insert the taxonomy. Filling this field is optional.
* In the next field, you can **insert the internal name of the language managed property** **if it has been manually edited**. Filling this field is optional. If you leave it blank, the default internal name is taken: owstaxIdIAILanguage.&#x20;
* In the next section, you can chose if you want **to download or open a document.**
* In the next section, you can choose if you want **to hide or show the download icon.**
* In the last section, you can choose if you want **to open the document in a new tab or not.**

### **News search settings**

The Advanced Search feature allows you to **search through news published** in SharePoint Online. In this section of the configuration panel, you can select the SharePoint sites for news searches and customize the display of the search results.

{% hint style="info" %}

* If you're not in edit mode already, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Select the Advanced Search web part, then click **Edit properties button** <img src="/files/UY3LHQUEnHDCG5D64F7z" alt="" data-size="line"> on the left side of the Advanced Search web part.
  {% endhint %}

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/OgWXFKk9JUmpyDjoGBGa" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Select sites:** here you can specify the source for your news. Your news can come from the site you are on while using the web part, or one or more individual sites. So, in this field, you need to select the sites where you have published the news you want to appear in the search.
* **Use the hub site?** If you enable this option, all the sites connected to the hub will be used for news search.&#x20;
* In the next section, you can choose if you **want to filter news by audience or not.** By enabling audience targeting, **specific content will be prioritized to specific audiences**.
* In the next section, you can choose if you want to **show news preview image or icon**.
* **Select the search order for news:** you can choose between **More relevance** and **Last edit** to set the search order.
* If you want to show metadata related to news, you can open the **Configure the news section properties** panel and insert the taxonomy. Filling this field is optional.&#x20;

### **Pages search settings**

The Advanced Search feature allows you to **search through pages published** in SharePoint Online. In this section of the configuration panel, you can select the SharePoint sites for pages searches and customize the display of the search results.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/dhgF2kXhh0vykpF6Ipsn" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Select sites:** here you can specify the source for your pages. Your pages can come from the site you are on while using the web part, or one or more individual sites. So, in this field, you need to select the sites where you have published the pages you want to appear in the search.
* **Use the hub site?** If you enable this option, all the sites connected to the hub will be used for page search.&#x20;
* In the next section, you can choose if you want to **show page preview image or icon**.
* **Select the search order for pages:** you can choose between **More relevance** or **Last edit** to set the search order.
* If you want to show metadata related to pages, you can open the **Configure the pages section properties** panel and insert the taxonomy. Filling this field is optional.&#x20;

### Apps search settings

{% hint style="info" %}
If you're looking for how to configure Company Apps, [**click here**](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/company-apps).
{% endhint %}

Advanced Search enables users to find [company apps](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/company-apps), which is why it's essential to configure in the Search the SharePoint list used to store these business applications.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/ygcmgrXicLMH08AKcfrw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Enter the **URL of the site** where the Applications list is saved.
* From the dropdown menu below, select the **name of the applications list**. Typically, this list is named **Apps list**.
* Then **set the fields** in the order as follows:
  * Select the file where the app icon is saved: **IconName**.
  * Select the file where the app title is saved: **Title**.
  * Select the file where the app url is saved: **Link**.

### **FAQ settings**

{% hint style="info" %}
If you're looking for how to configure FAQs, [**click here**](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/company-faq).
{% endhint %}

Advanced Search enables you to search through one or more lists of **FAQs saved on SharePoint** or within a knowledge base created using **Language Studio**. In this section, you can configure the settings for the FAQ search.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/X6NjMKdzLoPcjqH4wasK" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* To **Configure the FAQ list,** click on the button. You will see the following panel where you can enter:

<div align="left" data-full-width="false"><figure><img src="/files/ml8JHSjFdsK1368i46Yd" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

1. the URLs of **the sites where the FAQ lists are saved** (you can add several URLs from different sites).
2. the URLs of the **FAQ lists**.

* Once you have configured the FAQ lists, click on Save to close the panel.&#x20;
* Finally, you can choose the **number of FAQs to show**.

### Category link settings

In this section, you have the ability to **configure the fields that will increase the number of search results** and **enable the "Show more" option** for specific sections like contacts, documents, news, pages, and apps. You can define the links you want to appear within the "Show more" button, which becomes visible when you conduct a content search. **These links can direct users to the default SharePoint page for each section or to a dedicated page for a specific section**, such as the [News Archive](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/news-archive). Follow the instructions below to set this up.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/svrVvcNtJTFAkE29QPfa" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

#### More contacts:

In this section, we recommend adding a link to the page where you have set up the [People Directory](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/people-directory) web part. This will allow users who **couldn't find the contact they were looking for in the search results to search for the contact directly in the People Directory**. To activate the "More results" button, you need to enable the **Use above URL to search for more results** flag.

#### More documents:

In this section, we recommend **adding a link to the intranet's document area**. In case you haven't created a specific document area, you can link to the default SharePoint page that displays all the documents on the site. To do this, simply append the following extension to the intranet site's URL:

/\_layouts/15/search.aspx/sitefiles

> e.g. <https://intranetai.sharepoint.com/sites/my-hub/\\_layouts/15/search.aspx/sitefiles>

#### More news:

In this section, we recommend adding a link to the **intranet's** [**News Archive**](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/news-archive) page. In case you haven't created a News Archive page, you can link to the default SharePoint page that displays all the news on the site. To do this, simply append the following **extension** to the intranet site's URL:

/\_layouts/15/search.aspx/sitenews

> e.g. <https://intranetai.sharepoint.com/sites/intranet/\\_layouts/15/search.aspx/sitenews>

#### More pages:

Append the following **extension** to the intranet site's URL:

/\_layouts/15/search.aspx/siteall

> e.g. <https://intranetai.sharepoint.com/sites/intranet/\\_layouts/15/search.aspx/siteall>

#### More apps:

In this section, we recommend adding a link to the intranet's page where you have set up the [**Apps web part**](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/company-apps).

<div data-full-width="false"><figure><img src="/files/v3NnQcq7kDxxWaErKcVz" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### Custom titles settings

In this section, you can select a **custom title that will be displayed** as the heading for the various categories appearing in the search results. Just write the name you prefer:

* Enter the custom title for the contacts section.
* Enter the custom title for the documents section.
* Enter the custom title for the news section.
* Enter the custom title for the pages section.
* Enter the custom title for the apps section.
* Enter the custom title for the KB section.
* Enter the custom placeholder for the search bar.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/p6ir8lMSShSxYIfT2wO9" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### External links settings

This section allows you to enhance the Advanced Search web part by adding a link to an external source of information. For instance, you can add a button for searching on Google. &#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/rBPKWoLYdWfBM0VgyNGk" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* In the first field, enter the **button label text**, i.e., the text you would like to display on the button.&#x20;

> For example: Search on Google

* In the second field, enter the **URL** you would like to use followed by the **{searchText} placeholder**.&#x20;

> For example: <https://www.google.com/search?q={searchText}>

The button will look like this:&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/3OHWGNsMYXAvyuD9zWDT" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### General settings

* Enter the taxonomy unique id: the taxonomy unique id is used to retrieve tag labels in the correct language.
* In the next field, you can choose to leave default search bar of SharePoint active or not.
* In the last field, you can enter the **minimum number of characters for the search**.

<img src="/files/dVH2ocJhsjDMhjtEUP6m" alt="" data-size="original">

### Section order settings

Here you can choose the **order of the information shown** in the search bar. You can just drag and drop the tiles based on your choice.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/QSIVbTBgnclM5tMwUSfF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Alerts and service communications

The component that highlights the most important communications on every page of the SharePoint intranet.

## **What are Alerts and service communications**

Alert is a banner **showing important messages and service communications**. It provides visibility to the most important news by **pinning them on every page of the SharePoint intranet** and following users during navigation.&#x20;

They may refer to **all the employees** or **specific groups of people**. Also, it integrates with [Teams Push Notifications](https://intranet.ai/features/teams-push-notifications/) to ensure maximum reception.

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **Alerts and service communications** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/company-alerts/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add a new Alert to your SharePoint intranet

* In order to create an Alert, the first step is to log in with your Microsoft 365 account.&#x20;
* Once the home page of your Intranet is visible, please click on the **gear icon**, which is located on the top right of the page.
* Then please click the **Site contents** link.

<div align="left"><img src="/files/fLk47cyDJ9XhVEbfTDl9" alt=""></div>

* Open the list named **Corporate Messages**.

<div align="left"><img src="/files/DxVO7YLtDV2TRwdxBxy8" alt=""></div>

* Please click the **Add new item** button, on the top left of the page. A pop up will appear showing the fields to be filled.

<figure><img src="/files/tGDrDjlqkQTkhE6pgFRp" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Alert information&#x20;

A **pop up will appear** on the right side of the page, with the following fields:

<figure><img src="/files/r93VhL7vtwJqqvoiwKWe" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
The fields marked with (\*) are **mandatory**
{% endhint %}

* **Title\***: the name of the message. This also refers to the object of the alert to be shown to Intranet population.&#x20;
* **Message\***: a longer text explaining what the object refers to, providing more details and information. Here you can put bolds, italics, hyperlinks, bullet points.&#x20;
* **Destination groups**: this field is not mandatory since, once you leave it a blank space, you’d send the message to everyone. If you need a specific group to exclusively receive this message, you can tap the name of this group and only users belonging to that group will receive the notification and see the message.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
The destination groups are **Security Groups** that you previously created via your Azure AD.
{% endhint %}

* **To publish\***: this box allows people to see the banner in your Intranet. If this box is not flagged, the message will remain as a draft.
* **Expiration for Intranet\***: the date the banner will disappear from the Intranet.
* **Notification date**: this field is not mandatory, but once you set a date on it, every employee will receive a notification on their Teams. If you leave it blank, the notification date will correspond to the publishing date.&#x20;
* **Disable notification**: if this box is flagged, the previous voice (Notification date) won’t be active and users won't receive any notification in Teams. If you leave it unflagged, people will receive the notification.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
If you want to discover **how to configure our Bot Notification** [click here](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/creation-and-maintenance-for-push-notifications).
{% endhint %}

* **Color**: this field is not mandatory: if you leave it empty, the default color will be based on the site's graphic chart. To modify the alert color, please insert the hexadecimal codes of the requested color in the field. **Do not put the hashtag** in the Color area, only put hex code.

> For example: FF0000, 0000FF, 009900, FFFF00...

* **Publish date for the intranet:** this field allows you to publish a corporate message on a different day, so you can schedule it. If you leave it blank, this date will correspond to the creation of the corporate message.&#x20;

{% hint style="danger" %}
**Please note**: once you have completed all the information, be aware that if you click on **Save and you have not**: flagged the Disable notification field; set a date different from the publication date and set a notification date different from the publication date, **the notification will be sent on Teams**, and the message will be visible on the intranet.
{% endhint %}

* **Attachments**: you have the possibility to add attachments within the corporate message

**Language**: On **multilingual intranets**, an additional **Language field** can be activated. This allows you to publish multiple linguistic versions of a corporate message. The following example shows three translations of the same alert, with the corresponding **language tag inserted in the Language field**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/TExByqV6LHyw2C6zJL5K" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

To fill in the **Language** field, please click the **tag icon**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/W4gXvuDpeZenMB6bx7Oq" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

In the **Select: Language** panel, take the following steps:&#x20;

* Select the correct **language tag**;
* Press the **Select >>** button;&#x20;
* Click **Ok**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Y475P9KQIaugBJJUmkXE" alt="" width="438"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Remember to save any changes you make to the list item by clicking the **Save** button.

{% hint style="info" %}
**Please note**: **you can publish only one alert at a time**. When you publish a new Corporate Message, it replaces the previous one.
{% endhint %}

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Lq1pgKSKKjRtpPfkY0b4" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Anniversaries

The component in your SharePoint intranet that provides a new experience for getting to know colleagues, with a calendar of special events.

What is Anniversaries

With this web part, you can choose whether to display **company anniversaries** or **birthdays** on the SharePoint intranet.

Every day on the intranet, you can see the anniversaries or birthdays of the day, the week, or the month.

For both anniversaries and birthdays, the display for end-users includes:

* Display of the **colleague's photo** if uploaded to the 365 system
* Display of the **colleague's name and surname**
* Display of the **colleague's birthday/company anniversary**
* There will also be a short text, like "Celebrates 27 years"

<figure><img src="/files/Z8XvVM2pMAOaKPeBSRYN" alt=""><figcaption><p>Display of anniversaries on the intranet.</p></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/hQ5vadQL07Hh2TrYrjdS" alt=""><figcaption><p>Display anniversaries for the next 6 months on the intranet.</p></figcaption></figure>

The web part can be configured so that when you click on a user's profile image, you'll reach their detailed **personal profile.** Alternatively, when clicking on the user's photo, you can open a **Teams chat with a pre-set message** to wish them happy birthday or congratulate them on the milestone achieved.

{% hint style="info" %}
What is My Profile? [Click here](https://intranet.ai/features/my-profile/) to discover more about the feature.
{% endhint %}

Proceed with reading the guide to discover how to configure all these options.

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **Anniversaries** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/anniversaries/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the Anniversaries web part to a page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part and you'll see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/l5ySSL5qOCO7zmUJPhxZ" alt="" data-size="line">&#x20;
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **Birthdays** to quickly find and select the Anniversaries web part, which is named "IAI - Birthdays".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/kVVCfnii0PltFzkMsSpp" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click the **Edit** **properties** <img src="/files/W4GdEE7jtip0bGii8yI9" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options. See below for more information on each of these options.

***

## Configuration

1. [View settings](#view-settings)
2. [Lists settings](#lists-settings)
3. [Profile opening](#profile-opening)
4. [Customizations](#customizations)
5. [Set a default Team message](https://app.gitbook.com/o/9ZLjlnsDOESWNEndNpS8/s/riXlnuemuParrCf7Uotu/~/changes/229/configuration/anniversaries#set-default-team-message)

### View settings

The view settings allows you to customize the appearance of your application by adjusting various layout settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/jf4Q8ABcIzM0USSYEtFn" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By opening this first configuration, you will see the following options:

* **Do you want to hide the background?**\
  You can choose to hide or display the webpart background The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a white background. If you enable this option, the white card background will be completely removed, allowing the content appear directly on the page. As a result, the webpart will be transparent, showing either the selected background image or the chosen SharePoint page color.
* **Do you want to hide the background shadow?**\
  You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the webpart stand out more against the rest of the page. If you enable this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.
* **Select the type of background shadow**\
  If you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from High Contrast, Light, or Dark options.
  * If you select **High contrast**, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.
  * By choosing the **Light background** shadow, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.
  * Finally, the **Dark background** shadow style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more.
* **Do you want to hide the title?**\
  Here you can select whether to show the webpart title or hide it. If set to visible, the web part title will appear on the left side.
* **Do you want to hide the title icon?** Use this setting to customize the visibility of the title icon. If set to Yes, the cake icon will be displayed. If set to No, the icon will be hidden.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/aIIGD25OyCvskGNJ6yrH" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Here you can customize some elements of the web part.

* **Icon name**: by default, the web part is set to display birthdays, so you will see that the web part icon is a cake. If you want to change it, use [this link](https://developer.microsoft.com/en-us/fluentui#/styles/web/icons) to find the icon you prefer. Copy the link you see when hovering over the icons, and then paste the icon name into the dedicated box.
* **WP title**: here you can customize the name of the web part, which appears next to the icon. If you leave this field blank, the default name will be used: "Birthdays".
* Decide whether to leave all views active (today anniversaries, next week anniversaries, or next month anniversaries). By **default**, they are all **active**.

  If you want to disable one of these three options, simply click on the flag.
* Then choose **how to rename the three sections**. By default, they are named
  * "**Today section*****"***
  * ***"*****Next week section*****"***
  * ***"*****Next 6 months section*****"***

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/KVAM6sSlgbyTGVNKSYny" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% hint style="success" %}
If you don't like these names, write the name you would like the user to see on the intranet in the corresponding box.
{% endhint %}

### Lists settings

The Anniversaries web part allows you to celebrate together the years spent with the company by your colleagues. A moment of discovery and sharing that will stimulate the visibility of the SharePoint intranet and bring joy to those reaching these milestones.

If you choose to display anniversaries, through an **automatic sync** with the **Hire Date** **field in Azure AD**, users can see when colleagues celebrate a new work milestone.&#x20;

You can **choose the frequency of anniversaries** (every year, every 5 years, every 10 years, or the preferred time frame).

<figure><img src="/files/PFgye6xhRUoadiLeawF7" alt=""><figcaption><p>Display anniversaries on the Intranet.</p></figcaption></figure>

**Do you have colleagues who prefer not to appear in the web part?** With the **Hide person** feature, you can select the users who do not want to be displayed. Simply go to the **Birthdays** list and set the flag to ‘**Yes**’ next to their names.

<figure><img src="/files/HRzgp17q6Un6j9IfCFJU" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Discover how to configure the web part.

{% hint style="info" %}

* If you're not in edit mode already, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Select the Anniversaries web part, then click **Edit properties** <img src="/files/RfNeZu7kDkO3qj78BLvE" alt="" data-size="line"> **button** on the left side of the Anniversaries web part.
  {% endhint %}

Enter the **site URL** where the Birthdays list has been installed (usually on the hub site).

> For example: <https://intranetai.sharepoint.com/sites/my-hub/>

<figure><img src="/files/98zwYztA8YaihGnLRmmn" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* Choose the **Birthdays list**.

### Profile opening

You can enable users to visit the **personal profile of colleagues** celebrating their anniversaries by setting a link to the My Profile page in the dedicated box.

You can also choose whether to open the profile page in the current tab or a new one. If you choose  New page, the My Profile page will open in a new browser window.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Ee6xVgI0kjDXCnVDHK4f" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

With this box, you can also use it to enable users, when clicking on a colleague, to open a Teams chat with a pre-set message instead of opening the personal profile.

> eg: <https://teams.microsoft.com/l/chat/0/0?users={loginName}&message=Auguri!>

If you want to change the pre-set message, you just need to modify everything in the string written after the equals sign (=).

### Customizations

![](/files/V81fU09fESx1UbLV4KPC)

In the **Customizations** section, you can customize some elements of the web part.

* **No items message**: thanks to this box, you can change the text that appears when there are no anniversaries to display in a section. If you leave this field blank, the default text will be used: "No birthdays to display".
* **Show years span**: if you activate this option, a text of this kind will appear under the user's name: "Celebrates 27 years" (see picture below).
* **Hide full date**: you can decide to hide or show the birthday/anniversary date, which will appear under the user's name (see picture below).
* **Years span**: finally, you can set a specific year span, e.g., you can decide to display anniversaries every five years. In such a case, the current year will not be included.
* **Do you want to choose how many cards to display?**\
  If this option is set to **On**, an additional setting will appear allowing you to select the number of cards to show.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Nx2w2MUHDOH0AjqCIlwg" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### Birthdays settings

If you decide to show birthdays on the intranet, all your colleagues' birthdays will be displayed. How?

* You can choose whether to perform a bulk **import of dates** (make sure that your privacy policy allows for this option).&#x20;
* Alternatively, you can decide to **sync the component with the personal profile**.

By choosing this second method, every time users **enter their birthday in their personal profile** and leave the **Make it visible to your colleagues** flag active, it will be recorded and then displayed on the Anniversaries web part. You can choose to display only the day and month of the birthday on the home page, excluding the display of the full date (MM, DD, YYYY).

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/RG2O4ZtDwUI1OYXjpd8i" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% hint style="info" %}
If you don't know how to set up the profile page, [read the dedicated guide.](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/my-profile)
{% endhint %}

### Set default Team message

If you want to allow users to send wishes or congratulations to colleagues celebrating, you can proceed as follows:

You can use the Profile opening box to enable users, when clicking on a colleague, to open a Teams chat with a pre-set message instead of opening the personal profile.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/qLUuF5nHKbREF2w7U2g3" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% hint style="danger" %}
Attention: choose whether to enter the link to the personal profile page or use the box for sending wishes and congratulations.
{% endhint %}

Write in the box this path:

> <https://teams.microsoft.com/l/chat/0/0?users={loginName}&message=Auguri!>

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Breadcrumb

The component that simplifies navigation within the knowledge base by showing the path of the current page.

## What is Breadcrumb

Breadcrumb is one of the web parts designed by intranet.ai to help companies **create a corporate knowledge base** in SharePoint Online. Creating a corporate knowledge base provides numerous benefits, such as **quick access to information**, **reduced time waste**, **standardized information**, **knowledge retention**, and **more effective collaboration**.

The Breadcrumb web part **helps users navigate the knowledge base** by displaying the **hierarchical path of the current page**. It works like traditional breadcrumb navigation, showing **links to parent pages for easy backtracking**.

**Breadcrumb** is essential for creating a well-organized knowledge base on SharePoint Online. For additional tools to enhance your knowledge base, refer to the manuals for [**Pages Menu**](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/components/pages-menu), [**In This Page**](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/components/in-this-page), and [**Contributors**](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/components/contributors).

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of intranet.ai **Breadcrumb** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/breadcrumb/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the Breadcrumb web part to a SharePoint page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click on **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part. You will see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="https://docs.intranet.ai/~gitbook/image?url=https%3A%2F%2F2718234637-files.gitbook.io%2F%7E%2Ffiles%2Fv0%2Fb%2Fgitbook-x-prod.appspot.com%2Fo%2Fspaces%252FriXlnuemuParrCf7Uotu%252Fuploads%252FccHplKgXfibd4tktmhas%252Fadvanced-search-2.png%3Falt%3Dmedia%26token%3D7d703967-c3f7-4125-834b-f695362bf90b&#x26;width=40&#x26;dpr=4&#x26;quality=100&#x26;sign=34b00d6f&#x26;sv=2" alt="" data-size="line">.
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **Breadcrumb** to quickly find and select the Breadcrumb web part, which is named "IAI - Breadcrumb".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/LoVvtYaACkYvwweqryM2" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click the **Edit properties** <img src="/files/4IEcCfVS4e80KlqhXfq6" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane, which consists of one section: General settings. See below for more information on this section.

***

## Configuration

1. [View settings](#view-settings)
2. [General settings](#general-settings)
3. [Filters section](#filters-section)

### View settings

The view settings allows you to customize the appearance of your application by adjusting various layout settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/6001A6GpejCMYalKh0Ty" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By opening this first configuration, you will see the following options:

* **Do you want to hide the background?**\
  You can choose to hide or display the webpart background The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a white background. If you enable this option, the white card background will be completely removed, allowing the content appear directly on the page. As a result, the webpart will be transparent, showing either the selected background image or the chosen SharePoint page color.
* **Do you want to hide the background shadow?**\
  You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the webpart stand out more against the rest of the page. If you enable this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.
* **Select the type of background shadow**\
  If you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from High Contrast, Light, or Dark options.
  * If you select **High contrast**, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.
  * By choosing the **Light background** shadow, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.
  * Finally, the **Dark background** shadow style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more.
* **Enter the application title**\
  Thanks to this configuration, you can customize the application title. If you keep it blank, SharePoint will show the default title “Breadcrumb” at the top left angle of the webpart.
* **Do you want to hide the title?**\
  Here you can select whether to show the webpart title or hide it. If set to visible, the web part title will appear on the left side.

### General settings

The web part property pane includes the following settings:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/u0lRAkg5854rUzyIjrS1" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Enter the breadcrumb cutting path**: you can enter a cutting path to display only a part of the path. The first level (“Home”), corresponding to the home page of the site, is always shown.

> For example: <https://intranetai.sharepoint.com/sites/my-hub/KB/SitePages/SystemPages>

* **Enter the display name for the Home**: you can customize the name of the first level of the path. If you leave this field empty, the name will be “Home”.
* **Do you want to show the name or title of the pages?** You can choose to display the name or the title of pages.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/1KsQy6o1wjyODnEXXxR7" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Do you want to show the name or title of the folders?** Choose whether to display the **name** or the **title** of the folders you select.
* **Do you want to open the Homepage of the site collection** (if you are in a subsite): If you are currently in a subsite, select whether to open the **subsite homepage** or the **site collection homepage**.
* **Do you want to open the homepages in a new page?** Select **Yes** if you want the homepage to open in a new browser tab or window. Select **No** if you want the homepage to open in the current page.

### Filters section

In this section, you need to enter the folders you want to hide from the web part.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/ZoKF3ovz3soVLNeZN5Pa" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<figure><img src="/files/smtLgNwusONzgFUM829f" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Below is an example of how Breadcrumb is displayed within a SharePoint page:

<figure><img src="/files/y3AFjdhRdabxqfhPx5zp" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

**Please note**: **to activate the breadcrumb navigation links, a page named "Home" must be created at every level of the path**. For example, in the **Policies and Guidelines** subfolder, a page named "Home" must be created in order to activate the corresponding link.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/9CVbdGivniu6hO37TrBg" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

While the page **name** must be "Home", the page **title** can be different.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/TROHsOaR4De83AyzvSw5" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Each "Home" page can include the Breadcrumb web part to enable backward navigation, along with a descriptive text about the section and relevant links. The following screenshots show an example of a four-tier navigation path moving back from a specific article to the home page of the site:

**Tier 4**: a specific article within the **Policies and Guidelines** subsection.

<figure><img src="/files/V6r9vDvtQEBL4nGn3XGk" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

**Tier 3**: the **Policies and Guidelines** subsection, containing articles about key policies and corporate guidelines.

<figure><img src="/files/WV3HwyTDEHCM1RJ2Kzww" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

**Please note** that while the name of this page is "Home", its title is "Policies and Guidelines".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/NYlB4v0MGnaa4nn9xUdd" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

**Tier 2**: the **Documents** section, a collection of categorized resources.

<figure><img src="/files/9d0Xun86kLy85OwjH09V" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

**Tier 1** is the **home page** of the knowledge base.

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Bulletin Boards

The component to strengthen the corporate community with a space in your SharePoint intranet where to post personal announcements.

## What is Bulletin Boards

Our component facilitates the **exchange of information among intranet users**, motivating them to connect with colleagues for **buying or selling an item** or **organizing an event**. It strengthens the company community through a direct and spontaneous medium.

Everyone in the company has access to the bulletin board. The **free-text search bar** allows you to filter content to **find announcements** of your interest. Once found, simply click on the **email icon** to **get in touch** with the offer owner. The **side button** allows you to **publish an announcement** with a title, a description, and a photo from your personal profile.

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **Bulletin Boards** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/bulletin-boards/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the Bulletin Boards web part to a SharePoint page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part and you'll see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/l5ySSL5qOCO7zmUJPhxZ" alt="" data-size="line">&#x20;
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **Board** to quickly find and select the Bulletin Boards web part, which is named "IAI - Notice Board".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/NzjP77mUuDIIHGzFeTYl" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click the **Edit** **properties** <img src="/files/MpIA1eUTD332G3XozsZ9" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options such as View settings and General settings. See below for more information on these options.

***

## Configuration

1. [View settings](#view-settings)
2. [General settings](#general-settings)

### View settings

In this section you can customize the appearance of your application by adjusting various layout settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/C1tqFR12LiP2TtiMyMx5" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

First of all, the **layout of the web part** can be selected. Two options are available: **Default** and **Compact**. The Default layout is suggested when the web part is set up on a dedicated page, whereas the Compact layout is recommended if the web part is set up on a page that already has content, such as the home page.

Then, you're asked to set the following options:&#x20;

* **Do you want to hide the background?** You can choose to hide or display the web part background. The default setting is No. This means that, by default, the web part is characterized by a white background. If you enable this option, the white card background will be completely removed, allowing the content to appear directly on the page. As a result, the web part will be transparent, showing either the selected background image or the chosen SharePoint page color.
* **Do you want to hide the shadow?** You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is No. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the web part stand out more against the rest of the page. If you enable this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.
* **Select the type of shadow you want to use**: if you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from **High contrast, Light, or Dark** options.
  * If you select **High contrast**, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.
  * By choosing the **Light background shadow**, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.
  * Finally, the **Dark background shadow** style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more.
* **Enter the title of the application:** thanks to this configuration, you can customize the application title. If you keep it blank, SharePoint will show the default title "Notice board" at the top left angle of the web part.
* **Do you want to hide the title?** Here you can select whether to show the web part title or hide it. If set to visible, the web part title will appear on the left side.

### General settings

This section allows you to configure general settings such as the data source, the sorting criteria for the results, the number of posts to load, and more.

{% hint style="info" %}

* If you're not in edit mode already, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Select the Bulletin Boards web part, then click the **Edit properties** <img src="/files/dra5YyCZvJwSFrih9SrO" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left side of the Bulletin Boards web part.
  {% endhint %}

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/lXmo0oQV7akCtvyRT8BC" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Enter the site from which to take the list**: enter the URL of the site where the Notice Board Posts list is located. Usually, it is the intranet site.
* **Select the list**: select **Notice Board Posts**.
* **Enter the text for the add post button**: here, you can customize the **text of the button** that allows users to add posts. If you leave this field empty, the text "Add a post" will be displayed.
* **Select a property to sort documents**: here, you can choose from three ordering criteria: **Date created**, **Post title** and **Post author**.
* **Select the direction of the sort**: if you've selected **Date created** as an ordering criterion, here you can choose between **From the least recent** and **From the most recent**. If you've selected **Post title** or **Post author** as an ordering criterion, here you can choose between **From A to Z** and **From Z to A**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/tMhXJaz9U1MljmqipZFi" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Enabling approval?** You have the possibility to implement an **approval flow** whereby **advertisements are published** only **after an approver has checked and approved them**. In order to add this flow, two main actions are required:

1. Implement the flow manually with **Power Automate**;&#x20;
2. Activate the **Enabling approval?** option while configuring the web part.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/sgOYgmbG3j02mcPSF2Hx" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Select users or approver group**: enter the **Azure AD group** including the approvers.&#x20;
* **Enter the text to be shown as a disclaimer**: here you can **customize the text shown as a disclaimer**. This text informs the user that the post will be published after being approved. If you leave this field blank, the default text will be used, which is "The announcement will be visible after the approval". &#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/p5C9BgOvnsJ1H3sLcD1S" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Enter the number of posts to load**: specify how many advertisements you want to make visible in the web part.
* **Enter the duration of the posts (months)**: specify for how many months you want the posts to be visible in the web part.
* **Number of photos that can be uploaded**: set the maximum number of pictures the user can upload when creating a post. Please note that if you select 0, this feature will be deactivated, so users won't have the possibility to upload photos. &#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
If you change the maximum number of photos from 1-5 to 0, any pictures users may have attached to posts published previously will be hidden.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

* **Enter the link to the page with the extended version**: enter the link to the page in which the extended version of the web part is inserted. This field is to be filled in only if you have configured the web part with the Compact layout.

***

## Create a new post

Typically, end users add new posts to the bulletin board directly from the page where the web part is configured. To create a new post, you just need to click on **Add a post**. This opens a panel directly on the page, where you can write the **title** and the **text** of the post. You can also upload one or more pictures through the **Load images** button, if this functionality is active. Please note that the Load images button is visible only if a number from 1 to 5 has been set as maximum number of photos to be uploaded (see [General settings](#general-settings)). When you have completed the post, click on **Save** to publish it.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Y5uOqy8DoFwCl9FlAFT1" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Alternatively, posts can be created from the Notice Board Posts list, where all posts are saved.

<figure><img src="/files/ZO8NXgUiaWZPW1Y4XG47" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

To access the Notice Board Posts list, click the Settings icon in the top-right corner of your Intranet’s home page, then click **Site contents**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/gWCYEZYtLpWN385rb7Ni" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Select the list named **Notice Board Posts**.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/iltt2Luziep6eO6YpMac" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* As mentioned above, this list contains all posts added to the digital board. Here, you can add a new post thanks to the **+ Add new item** button.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/ohJ2ovkncpj4f7pEHIm8" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Clicking **+ Add new item** opens a panel with a number of fields to fill in:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/IM0gTT2qcEgs9mmVev2N" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* The **Title** and **Body** fields are mandatory: here, you need to type the title and the text of the post.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/gSXl5zopmPCtyiDpESiZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Approval date**, **Approver**, **Approvers emails**, **Status**: if you have decided to implement an approval system, the information related to the approval flow will be saved in these fields. For further information about the approval flow, see [General settings](#general-settings).
* **Attachments** such as photos can be added, if necessary.

Click **Save** to add the post to the digital board.

Here is an example of how the Bulletin Boards web part is displayed on the page:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/DKNUYlo0yRSh83fPLVmu" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

The web part is composed of the following elements:

* &#x20;A **list of posts**, which includes the title of the post, the name and profile picture of the author, the creation date and the text of the post.
* &#x20;An **email icon** which can be clicked to contact the post author.
* A **button** which can be clicked to **publish a new post**, as explained above.
* A **search bar** which allows you to find posts of your interest.

***

## Configure the Notice Board Posts list

The Notice Board Posts list requires a **specific configuration** so that SharePoint intranet visitors can **publish posts**. To learn how to configure this list, read the [dedicated guide](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/other-configurations/configuration-of-favorites-lists-and-user-lists). In particular, please refer to the **Second type of configuration** section.

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Comments Area Removal

The component for removing likes, views, and comments on SharePoint intranet pages that do not require interaction.

## What is Comments Area Removal

Comments Area Removal is the web part that helps you **restrict interactions** (likes and comments) on content pages, the homepage, and critical news, such as organizational changes.&#x20;

By default, SharePoint allows both pages and news to have likes and comments. With this web part, you can limit interactions where they are not needed.&#x20;

For corporate news and news related to individuals, we always **recommend leaving comments active to make the intranet a space for sharing**.

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai features by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the Comments Area Removal web part to a SharePoint page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part and you'll see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/l5ySSL5qOCO7zmUJPhxZ" alt="" data-size="line">&#x20;
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **Comments Section Remover** to quickly find and select the Comments Area Removal web part, which is named "IAI - Comments Section Remover".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/W84IxGbUgQ43qyK4eP1F" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

***

## Configuration

The Comments Area Removal web part allows you to disable comments, likes and views. We recommend keeping the web part consistently **placed at the bottom**. After adding all the necessary contents (photos, videos, text, image galleries, etc.), insert the web part to remove comments, likes and views. Keeping it consistently at the bottom ensures proper functionalit&#x79;**.**

**End users won't see the web part on the page**, while editors will see it when they enter editing mode:&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/BW24lHUcBQkhMZh8blxa" alt=""><figcaption><p>The Comments Area Removal web part doesn't take up space inside the page where it's inserted.</p></figcaption></figure>

If you don't want to completely disable interactions but only allow users to like and see views without commenting, you can skip adding the Comments Area Removal web part. Instead, simply **uncheck the comment option** directly on the SharePoint page or news post.

This way, users will be able to like and see views, but won’t be able to leave comments.

By default, the comment option is enabled.

<figure><img src="/files/REriBQUWpD75Kzt2yQSR" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

***

## How to moderate comments and when it would be beneficial to have or not to have them.

The comments section on a company intranet can be a powerful tool for engagement, knowledge-sharing, and feedback when it is thoughtfully moderated and purposefully used. Clear moderation guidelines, such as setting expectations for respectful language, relevance, and confidentiality, and assigning moderators to review and respond, help ensure discussions remain constructive and aligned with company values. &#x20;

Comments are generally recommended on **news**, as this type of content is inherently more dynamic and interaction‑oriented. In particular, news such as project updates, initiatives, calls for ideas, or learning‑related content are designed to spark engagement and conversation. In these cases, comments give employees a voice and surface insights that might otherwise be missed. &#x20;

On the other hand, comments are generally not recommended on:&#x20;

* **Pages** (e.g., “Code of Ethics”, “Our Values”, etc.)&#x20;
* **News** **items** that convey **sensitive, purely informational**, or **institutional content**&#x20;

In these scenarios, accuracy and consistency are critical, and open discussion could cause confusion or risk of misinterpretation. These are the cases where we highly recommend our Comments Area Removal web part.&#x20;

Knowing when to enable or disable comments allows the intranet to balance openness with clarity, making it a trusted and effective communication space.&#x20;

Remeber that: &#x20;

* User comments cannot be anonymous; the full name of the colleague who posts a comment will be visible. &#x20;
* Authors of news and pages receive a notification whenever a user leaves a comment on their content. The admis will be able to respond or delete the comment if required. &#x20;

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Company Apps

The public area in your SharePoint intranet where your company suggests users useful materials and apps for their daily activities.

## What is Company Apps

Company Apps is a feature that allows you to group company applications and links into a single space, categorize them, choose their icons, and assign read permissions to specific individuals. \
\
This feature allows the insertion of both **internal SharePoint links** and **external links**.

The apps can be **categorized** and **indexed** in [Advanced Search](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/advanced-search). This way, the intranet will show users the most relevant apps for their searches and work.

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **Company Apps** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/company-apps/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the Company Apps web part to a SharePoint page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part and you'll see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/l5ySSL5qOCO7zmUJPhxZ" alt="" data-size="line">&#x20;
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **Apps** to quickly find and select the Company Apps web part, which is named "IAI - Apps".

<div align="left" data-full-width="false"><figure><img src="/files/fqTxvMvJaIufiyQo8npA" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click the **Edit** **properties** <img src="/files/Q8zdSxihe4szq1uVXd24" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options such as Layout settings, Data sources, General settings, Display settings, Default display settings, List display settings, Order settings, and Personal App settings. See below for more information on each of these options.

***

## **Configuration**

1. [Layout settings](#layout-settings)
2. [Data sources](#data-sources)
3. [General settings](#general-settings)
4. [Display settings](#display-settings)
5. [Default display settings](#default-display-settings)
6. [List display settings](#list-display-settings)
7. [Order settings](#order-settings)
8. [Personal App settings](#personal-app-settings)

### Layout settings

The layout settings allow you to customize the appearance of your application by adjusting various layout settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/6mTmLl7LLaJJBjOCyxp5" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By opening this first configuration, you will see the following options:

* **Do you want to hide the background?** You can choose to hide or display the webpart background. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a white background. If you enable this option, the white card background will be completely removed, allowing the content appear directly on the page. As a result, the webpart will be transparent, showing either the selected background image or the chosen SharePoint page color.
* **Do you want to hide the shadow?** You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the webpart stand out more against the rest of the page. If you enable this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.
* **Select the type of shadow you want to use**: if you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from **High Contrast, Light, or Dark** options.
  * If you select **High contrast**, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.&#x20;
  * By choosing the **Light background shadow**, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.
  * Finally, the **Dark background shadow** style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more.
* **Do you want to hide the title?** Here you can select whether to show the webpart title or hide it. If set to visible, the web part title will appear on the left side.
* **Enter the title of the application**: thanks to this configuration, you can customize the application title. If you keep it blank, SharePoint will show the default title “Apps” at the top left angle of the webpart.
* **View mode**: you can choose between a default view (each item is represented in a square with an icon and title) or list view (list of saved items). If you choose the default mode, a specific configuration will appear, which is **Default display settings**. If you choose the list view, the specific setting will appear, which is **List display settings**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/iKueikQLkEdrUC4d72ad" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/SWKs6y7hq1WQMxkCWXsJ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### Data sources

In this section, you need to specify the **sources** from which the web part will **retrieve data**. In addition, you can set other general options.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/clAqudS9Qn89yerpDt0t" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Fill out the fields as follows:

* Enter the **site URL from which the apps will be taken from.**

> For example: <https://intranetai.sharepoint.com/sites/Intranet>

* Choose the Apps list data source, which by default is **Apps list**.
* Enter again the **site URL from which the favourites will be taken from.**

> For example: <https://intranetai.sharepoint.com/sites/Intranet>

* Choose the Apps favorites list data source, which by default is **Apps favorites**. &#x20;

### General settings

In this section, you need to set general options for the webpart, such as the showing the link on current page or from a new tab, as well as hiding webpart when no apps are present.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/vqStufWnvISe80qgK9AD" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* You can choose to open the link on a new tab from desktop.
* You can decide to hide the web part when there are no apps to view for the current user.
* You can customize the title of the favorites section. If this field is left blank, the default title "Favorites" will be applied.

### Display settings

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/bsxl3VLsXvPmm9548jLd" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* You can choose to show a search bar to help users find apps more quickly.

{% hint style="info" %}
The **search bar** is **useful** when the section includes **many apps**, as it allows users **to find** an application more **easily**.
{% endhint %}

* **Enable tab mode**: If you enable this option, the user will open the apps area by clicking on a small button. To configure the tab mode, follow these steps:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/cQZxverZYPv2NLfUzYe0" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Enter the **name of the icon** that will be used for the button. You can choose an icon from the library at [this link](https://developer.microsoft.com/en-us/fluentui#/styles/web/icons) and then copy-paste the name of the icon into this field.
* Define the **position** of the button on the page by entering the top margin and the right margin.

### Default display settings

If you have selected the **Default** layout, you will see the following fields::

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/leaWzA3EHBS5qV2Aiu7U" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Select to view tab options**: if you enable this setting, you can customize the font size of the text displayed on the tabs.
* You can choose to open apps in the **current tab** from Teams or from **a new one**.

### List display settings

If you have selected the **List layout**, you will see the following fields:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/EwYHtPnqHYAbMNAliEdE" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* You can choose whether the **Favorites** section will be expanded by default. If you don't enable this setting, the section will be collapsed by default.
* You can choose whether the **Personal apps** section will be expanded by default. If you don't enable this setting, the section will be collapsed by default.
* You can choose whether all **other categories** will be expanded by default. If you don't enable this setting, all sections will be collapsed by default.
* You can set the **height** of the web part. If you **enable** this option, an additional field will allow you to enter the height of the web part in pixels.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/2Lo7ceuvkQK9WPUq5ui5" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### Order settings

Here you can drag and drop the tabs to choose the order you want to display them.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/8CHJ2RMPPiFvHRLCp6jH" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### Personal App settings

Company Apps also allows you to have a section where users can save their **favorite personal links**, which can be both **internal** and **external** to SharePoint. For example: Corriere della Sera (newspaper headlines links)

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/NpveoTnhHkotZllHBw3I" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Complete the tabs as follows:

* In the first section, you can decide whether to **enable** the Personal Apps tab or **not**. Simply check **Yes** if you want it to be displayed. If set on **No**, the other options will not be possible to configure.
* To position the Personal App tab at the **beginning** of the other tabs, it's necessary to check the second option; otherwise, leave it **unchecked** to position it at the **end**.
* Enter the **site URL** where the list of personal apps is present. For example: <https://intranetai.sharepoint.com/sites/Intranet>
* Choose the list data source, which by default is **User apps list**.
* Enter the name of the tab to be displayed, or it will default to **My Links**.

And this is the front end result:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/ANlyNNZnQkFJA9Hq4xW2" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

***

## **Add a new company app to your SharePoint intranet**

* To add a business app to your SharePoint intranet, the first step is to log in with your Microsoft 365 account. &#x20;
* Once the homepage of your Intranet is visible, please click on the **Settings icon**, which is located on the top right of the page. Then click on the **Site Contents** link, corresponding to the third link in the settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/bnSitQjfbb5vQqxeiFW7" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* When you are in **Site Contents**, click on the **Apps list** link.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/HoVPL3roZ3AIKrpHlINs" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* &#x20;Click on the **New** button located at the top left.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/ra11WcL3MWKGawDJRxTG" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* A **pop up will appear** on the right side of the page, with the following fields:

<figure><img src="/files/7ly2VrQQ1Ltl68CiWATq" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
The fields marked with (\*) are **mandatory**.
{% endhint %}

* **Title\***: the name of the application you’d like to see in the homepage of your Intranet.&#x20;

> For example: Progress

* **Link**: the pathway referred to by the application (you can include both internal and external SharePoint links).&#x20;

> For example: <https://teams.microsoft.com/l/app/70009fe1-94c8-4379-aa54-b6b174794a3e?source=app-details-dialog>

* **Category\***: here, you can enter the various categories to which the applications belong. For example, websites, updates, search tools, travel, or any other categories your company requires. This information will enable users to view applications grouped by a specific logic when they log in to the Intranet page. A separate tab will be created for each category.
* **Icon name**: the graphic element, it’ll be visible in the homepage of your Intranet, near the Title. In order to choose the correct icon, please [see here](https://developer.microsoft.com/en-us/fluentui#/styles/web/icons) the corresponding code via mouse over it.

> For example: DateTime (calendar with a clock icon)

{% hint style="info" %}
You can also create custom icons, upload the images to SharePoint and insert the link image uploaded to SharePoint in this section.&#x20;

To **create the icon URL**, follow these steps:&#x20;

* Upload the picture to the Site Assets folder in the Site contents (or any other folder on your intranet).
* In the Site Assets document library, select the picture. (1)
* Click on the Info icon at the top right of the screen. (2)
* Click on the **Path icon** to copy the URL of the icon. (3)
* Finally, paste the icon URL into the required field. <br>

  <div align="center"><figure><img src="/files/7ycX91ZmlFhYTzwsL21T" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% endhint %}

* **Order**: the logic of visibility of the applications in the web part.
* Once every mandatory item is filled, please click on the **Save** button.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/GIMx0hlFfe4fNBD5C93E" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Business applications are visible on your intranet homepage or in the section where you have placed this webpart. However, you can search for them in the search bar at the top of the page.

***

## **Edit an existing application within your SharePoint intranet**

To edit an existing app, follow these steps:&#x20;

* Click on the **Settings** icon on the top right of the page, then click on **Site contents**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/nTlfbUPDqEpwMp47g6nJ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Select the **Apps list**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/1CcKOqLIPa5J5Aqlf5Gl" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* In the **Apps list** panel, please mouse over the application you’re interested in editing and please select it.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/3mBznsv2YDor1ux15TwE" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Once the application is selected, please click on the **Edit** button.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/roVIPZk4NrIVSmFpAEDQ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Here, the **same pop up** as the creation will appear, and it’ll be possible to amend it as needed. Once the amends are done, please click on **Save**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/3Z56TJlYjAjkNApqbHhQ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% hint style="info" %}
**Please note:** the creation of an application (and the amends on an existing one) can be visible in real time in the homepage of your Intranet, once you click on Save.
{% endhint %}

***

## Configure the Apps favorites list&#x20;

The Apps favorites list requires a **specific configuration** so that users can **interact with the list** and **mark items as favorites**. To learn how to configure this list, read the [dedicated guide](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/other-configurations/configuration-of-favorites-lists-and-user-lists). In particular, please refer to the **First type of configuration** section. &#x20;

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Company Documents

The system for storing, sharing, and indexing company documents from a single point on the SharePoint intranet.

## What is Company Documents&#x20;

Company Documents is a component that presents **documents in a unified space within the intranet**, bringing together **files from different SharePoint collections**, even if managed by different departments. It integrates with Microsoft 365 taxonomies and term sets, allowing users to **categorize** content through **tags** and save time in searches. Below is a list of the main features of this web part:&#x20;

* **Tags and categories**: editor users can customize categories and tags to **classify company documents** and easily retrieve procedures belonging to a specific team, department, event, or project.
* **Favorites**: every user can create their own **Favorites area** to keep useful documents always at hand.
* **Latest Files**: you can highlight the latest documents published on the intranet to **keep the company audience updated**.
* **Content indexing**: the Company Documents component **simplifies document access** by utilizing SharePoint's capabilities to analyze and index content for search. Simply **type a term** in [Advanced Search](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/advanced-search) to retrieve **files containing the searched word in the title or body of the text** (it also works with PDFs).

In addition to that, Company Documents **integrates with SharePoint**, providing users with essential features for effective document management and retrieval. These include:

* Versioning for tracking and recovering changes;
* Real-time sharing;
* Access control;
* Monitoring of approval workflows.
* Targeted notifications whenever a public file is modified;
* Indexing to make document content searchable.

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **Company Documents** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/company-documents/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the Company Documents web part to a SharePoint page&#x20;

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click on **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part. You will see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/l5ySSL5qOCO7zmUJPhxZ" alt="" data-size="line">.&#x20;
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **Documents** to quickly find and select the Company Documents web part, which is named "IAI - Documents".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/3jogZqOCUEz0zvgMY4q5" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click on the **Edit** **properties** <img src="/files/mvSa4jiuxACcpUjRhTYe" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options such as Layout settings, Data sources, Filters settings, General Settings, and Display settings. See below for more information on each of these sections.

***

## Configuration

1. [Layout settings](#layout-settings)
2. [Data sources](#data-sources)
3. [Filters settings](#filters-settings)
4. [General settings](#general-settings)
5. [Display settings](#display-settings)

### Layout settings

The layout settings allow you to customize the appearance of your application by adjusting various layout settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/mtYZkRUH2JVBRfLcrtuL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By opening this first configuration, you will see the following options:

* **Do you want to hide the background?** You can choose to hide or display the webpart background. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a white background. If you enable this option, the white card background will be completely removed, allowing the content appear directly on the page. As a result, the webpart will be transparent, showing either the selected background image or the chosen SharePoint page color.
* **Do you want to hide the background shadow?** You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the webpart stand out more against the rest of the page. If you enable this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.
* **Select the type of background shadow**: if you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from **High Contrast, Light**, or **Dark** options.
  * If you select **High contrast**, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.
  * By choosing the **Light background shadow**, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.
  * Finally, the **Dark background shadow** style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more.
* **Do you want to hide the title?** Here you can select whether to show the webpart title or hide it. If set to visible, the web part title will appear on the left side.
* **Enter the title of the application**: thanks to this configuration, you can customize the application title. If you keep it blank, SharePoint will show the default title “Documents” at the top left angle of the webpart.

### Data sources

In this section, you need to indicate the documents libraries from which the webpart will retrieve documents.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/hJVHvef13KQ3Sq354PHk" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Enter the **URL of the document library** in which your documents are collected. As explained, this component can bring together files from different document libraries; this means that here you can write different URLs, separated by a comma (please, do not use spaces).

{% hint style="info" %}
It is recommended to create a documents subsite to collect document libraries. See the section titled [Create a documents subsite](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/components/company-documents#create-a-documents-subsite) to learn how to do so.
{% endhint %}

* Enter the **URL of the favorite documents list**. This feature allows users to mark files as favorites and create an area of favorite files.
* Enter the **managed property** related to your list's Description field in order to display the description. To find out which value should be entered, see the section [Find the managed property for the Description field](#find-the-managed-property-for-the-description-field).

{% hint style="info" %}
Every time you add the Company Documents web part to a page, you should create a new list of favorite documents that will be associated to that documentary area. See the section titled [Create a new list of favorite documents](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/components/company-documents#create-a-new-list-of-favorite-documents) to learn how to do so.
{% endhint %}

* **Enter the path where the acknowledgment is located**: This field is to be filled in only if the Acknowledgement system has been activated. In such a case, here you need to enter the URL of the page where the Acknowledgement web part is configured. This way, all the documents will be opened through the "Acknowledgement" page, and users will have the possibility to confirm that they have read the files. If this field is left blank, the documents will be opened in a standard way. The following screenshots provide examples of these two possibilities:

<figure><img src="/files/9jnl48USL8BuLl3can1c" alt=""><figcaption><p>File opened through the "Acknowledgement" page</p></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/Z6A4eL8KWSxFwIgQXKWN" alt=""><figcaption><p>File opened in Word Online</p></figcaption></figure>

### Filters settings

You should fill out this section if you need to set which documents each user will see in the webpart. It helps to classify documents based on a specific metadata. For example, if documents items are tagged by “category,” only those from a specific category will be displayed.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/tJIsz2V1kf8grkfqgrbH" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Enter the column name**: enter “owstaxId” plus column name that you have set to assign documents tags. You must fill in this field if you prefer to pre-filter documents by tags. Only documents with specific tags will be included.
* **Enter the unique id of the term set**: copy and paste the id of the desired term set (which you can find in the Term store). You need to fill in this field only if your tenant has more than one Term store.

{% hint style="info" %}
[Click here](#access-the-term-store) to access the Term store.
{% endhint %}

{% hint style="info" %}
[Click here](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/other-configurations/creation-of-tag-systems-for-news-and-documents) for more information about the creation of tag systems for news and documents.
{% endhint %}

* Then, **select values to pre-filter the results**: you can choose the tags for the documents you prefer to display in the Documents webpart.
* **Configure filters/tags**: in this window, you can configure the various filters to be applied to your documents. By filling in this fields. the available filters for the documents will appear.

<figure><img src="/files/YnhEYQTrJpuCPPU2lnSn" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* In the first column, write: **owstaxId** + the name of the column used to assign metadata to the news. For example, owstaxIdIAINewsTags.
* In the second column, copy-paste the **id of the term set**. To do this, go to the Term store and find the id of the term set. **Enter the taxonomy’s unique id of the term set (scores included):** copy and paste the id of the desired term set (which you can find in the Term store), including scores. You need to fill in this field only if your tenant has more than one Term store.

{% hint style="info" %}
[Click here](#access-the-term-store) to discover how to configure the id of the term set store.
{% endhint %}

* In the third column, enter the **custom filter** name you wish to apply. This is a name used to identify a filter you are creating, which will be applied to the news items. The custom filter helps organize and narrow down the displayed content based on specific criteria.
* **Show filter?** Indicate whether the filter dropdown should be displayed to users. Flag this option if you want users to see and interact with the filter dropdown; leave it unflag it if you want to hide it.
* **Show tag?** Determine if the tags assigned to the news should be displayed in the news preview. Flag this option to show the tags; unflag it if they should be hidden from view.
* &#x20; **Show search field?** Specify if a search bar should be shown in the filter dropdown to allow users to search for a specific tag. If you want a search bar to appear, flag this option; otherwise, unflag it. This functionality can be useful in case you think you’re going to have a large number of tags.
* **Stop reordering**: This option prevents the ability to reorder items. By default, the webpart sorts tags alphabetically. However, there might be cases (such as the Months) you might need to sort by the same order set in the Term Store. That said, flag this option if you want to follow the same sorting order available in the Term store, or unflag it if you want to keep the alphabetical order.
* **Open filter by default?** Indicate whether the filter dropdown should be automatically applied when the page or view loads. Flag this option if you want the filter to be open as soon as the page starts; unflag it if you don’t.
* **Insert filter persistency?** When a user selects this filter configured as persistent within the web part settings, that filter will be stored for the individual user. As a result, if the user navigates away from the page and later returns to the Documents web part, the previously selected persistent filters will be automatically reapplied.
* **Configure date filters**: click on the configure fields button under the "Configure date filters" section. A collection data panel will be displayed:

![](https://docs.intranet.ai/~gitbook/image?url=https%3A%2F%2F2718234637-files.gitbook.io%2F%7E%2Ffiles%2Fv0%2Fb%2Fgitbook-x-prod.appspot.com%2Fo%2Fspaces%252FriXlnuemuParrCf7Uotu%252Fuploads%252FaeRbyNIS6tme3T9fkHjB%252Fdocuments-folders-dateFilters-controlPanel.png%3Falt%3Dmedia%26token%3D1f585fad-f88e-490d-b79d-9a4fd412109d\&width=768\&dpr=3\&quality=100\&sign=227066f2\&sv=2)

* Enter the **managed property** for the date criterium you want to apply. If you want to filter documents by the **last modified date**, enter "**Write"**, if you want to filter documents by the **creation date**, enter "**Created"**.
* Enter a **custom** title for the **"From" label**.
* Enter a **custom** title for the **"To" label**.
* Enter a **custom** label for the **filter name**.
* Choose if you want to **show/not to show** the filter.
* Choose whether or not you want the **accordion containing the calendar** for setting the date to be **open by default** when the page opens.
* Once you have configured the fields, **save** your changes.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/ufPaFHbdevCOygx5ETsH" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Select AD groups to manage the audience**: you can choose audiences by selecting one or more AD groups from a drop-down menu.
* **Insert the language managed property if it has been manually edited**: Here you need to insert the internal name of the language managed property if it has been manually edited. If you leave this field blank, the default internal name will be used: owstaxIdIAILanguage.
* **Hide filters**: this setting allows you to show or hide filters, such as the favorites filter, on the right side of the web part. If you select 'Yes,' the filters (also the search bar) will be hidden from the documents in the web part. If you select 'No,' the filters will remain visible.

### General Settings

In this section, you need to set general options for document management, such as the sorting direction, the number of documents to load, and other configurations.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/p8Xvl2BRIxEa4OA19trk" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Open or download the document?** You can choose whether the document will be opened in Word Online or downloaded when the user clicks on it. The former option is the default one.
* You can choose the **number of documents** to load.
* **Enter text for the button to see other documents**: This configuration allows you to enter custom text for the button. When clicked, the button will enable the user to view other documents.
* Set the **button** to load more documents or to **open a link**: you can customize the text of the Load more button. If you leave this field blank, the default text ("Load more") will be displayed. You can also decide whether the Load more button should simply load more documents or take you to a different page. If you choose the latter option, two additional fields will be activated: use them to enter the page URL and decide whether to open the link on a new page or the current page.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/7nh79ghbRTHVR47fF5NA" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Select a property to sort documents**: you can choose to sort documents by modification date, creation date, filename or title. Select your preferred option from the drop-down menu.
* **Select the direction of the sor**t: you can decide to order documents from the most recent or from the least recent.
* **Show documents with the searched word in the title first?** As regards the last option, it should be specified that the web part includes a search bar which allows you to quickly find content. if you enter a word in the search bar, the web part will show only documents that contain the searched word in the title and in the body of the text. If you enable the last option of the Order Settings, the documents that contain the searched word in the title will be shown first.

### Display settings

In this section, you can set options concerning the display order of your files.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/yNmdOgJBATdbejXZrvTY" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Show download icon?** You can decide to show or hide a download icon which you can click to download the document.
* First, you can decide to **show** or **hide** the **author** of the document. If you choose the former option, the author's name will be displayed under the title of the document. By using the drop-down menu below, you can choose to show the name of the actual author (select Author) or the name of the last user who modified the document (select Modified by).
* Second, you can decide to **show** or **hide** the **date** when the document was published. If you choose the former option, the date will be displayed under the title of the document.
* **Select to show the document title**: This visibility option allows you to include or exclude the file extension from the title of the document.
* You can choose to **show** or **hide** the **relative path** and the **absolute path** of the document. If you decide to show this information, it will appear under the author and the date.
* **Enter text for the "new" tag:** When a new document is uploaded, it will automatically display a **"New" tag** to highlight its recent addition. It is possible to **customize the label of this tag**. You just need to type the name you would like to use in the **Enter text for the "new" Tag** box. If no custom text is entered, the default "New" label will be used.

### Access the term store

1. Click on the settings icon at the top right of the page, then click on Site information.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/fmUS2UpEeTZnWhgKmtjr" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

2. Click on View all site settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/kJdEuBGEpcn0oqarFJsi" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

3. Under Site Administration, click on Term store management.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/3vnFNPAKUy5eJsa1JMFw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

3. You will land on the Term store, which is the area where you can create term sets and terms, i.e. tags to categorize your content. Here you can find the unique identifier of the taxonomy, which is a code composed of numbers, letters and hyphens.

<figure><img src="/files/mh1MUbWx8iWOKNyUCLWN" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

4. After having assigned tags to documents, you need to configure filters. This feature allows you to filter documents by specific tags; when you do so, the web part displays only documents that belong to the selected category or categories.

For example, if your document library contains files written in different languages, you may want to filter documents by language, e.g. English, French, Italian and so on.

Please refer to our guide ["Creation of tag systems for news and documents"](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/other-configurations/creation-of-tag-systems-for-news-and-documents) to learn how to create term sets in the Term store, add columns of the managed property type to a document library, and assign tags to documents.

{% hint style="info" %}
It is recommended to create a **documents subsite** to collect document libraries. See the section titled [Create a documents subsite](#create-a-documents-subsite) to learn how to do so.
{% endhint %}

{% hint style="info" %}
Here you need to insert the URL of the entire document library; it is not possible to insert the URL of a subfolder within it. If you want to show only specific documents within the library, you can use metadata and take advantage of the pre-filter option (see ["Document settings"](#document-settings)).
{% endhint %}

* Enter the **URL of the favorite documents list**. This feature allows users to mark files as favorites and create an area of favorite files.

{% hint style="info" %}
Every time you add the Company Documents web part to a page, you should create a new list of favorite documents that will be associated to that documentary area. See the section titled [Create a new list of favorite documents](#create-a-new-list-of-favorite-documents) to learn how to do so.
{% endhint %}

* Enter the **taxonomy's unique id**. You need to fill in this field only if your tenant has more than one Term store. To access the Term store, which is a section of the Administration Area of the site, you need to take the following steps:&#x20;

1. Click on the **Settings** icon at the top right of the page, then click on **Site information**.
2. Click on **View all site settings**.
3. Under Site Administration, click on **Term store management**.
4. You will land on the **Term store**, which is the area where you can create **term sets** and **terms**, i.e. **tags** to categorize your content. Here you can find the unique identifier of the taxonomy, which is a code composed of numbers, letters and hyphens.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/G9wvdB2wTzmw9q7DFgBN" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/iwQ3slrpap6r3grgAI4d" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/URfkOE1bwGhkb71GZb0x" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/hxotGi6oFlKc4RjovaW5" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* After having assigned tags to documents, you need to configure filters. This feature allows you to filter documents by specific tags; when you do so, the web part displays only documents that belong to the selected category or categories.&#x20;

> For example, if your document library contains files written in different languages, you may want to filter documents by language, e.g. English, French, Italian and so on.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
Please refer to our guide ["Creation of tag systems for news and documents"](/sharepoint-intranet/other-configurations/creation-of-tag-systems-for-news-and-documents) to learn how to create term sets in the Term store, add columns of the managed property type to a document library, and assign tags to documents.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

Here is an example of what Company Documents looks like once the configuration is complete:

<figure><img src="/files/FQ5eLKp7qwoH6tj9xtJG" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

The web part is composed of the following elements:&#x20;

* A **list of documents**, which includes an **icon** and the **information** you have chosen to show (e.g. author, date, file extension). As can be seen in the screenshot above, each file type is identified by a specific icon.
* &#x20;A **star icon** which allows you to mark documents as **favorites**. Just click on the icon to add an item to your list of favorite documents.&#x20;
* A **download icon**, if you have chosen to show it. By clicking on this symbol, you can download a document.
* A **search bar** which allows you find documents more quickly. You just need to type a word in the search bar to retrieve files containing the searched word in the title or in the body of the text.
* The **filters** section, which consists of drop-down menus. The first one is the **Favorites** filter, which allows you to filter results to view only the resources you marked as favorites. The other filters allow you to retrieve documents that belong to specific **categories**.

{% hint style="info" %}
The Company Documents web part does not read folders. This means that if the document library contains folders, the component will display all the files in the form of a list, without reproducing their organization into folders. However, if you wish to display folders in your documentary area, you can use the [Company Documents with Folders](/sharepoint-intranet/components/company-documents-with-folders) web part, which is explained in a dedicated guide.
{% endhint %}

***

## Create a documents subsite

A subsite is a site within a parent site that helps you organize and manage content. In particular, it is recommended to create a subsite to collect and manage document libraries. Here is how to do so:&#x20;

* Click on the **Settings** icon at the top right of the page, then click on **Site contents**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/cjQ5zfpMdKYpor6r3WTv" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click on **New > Subsite**.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/uSk2p3EVWmSYcNmechAk" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* You will land on an interface where information on the subsite is required. The first fields to fill in are Title, Description and URL name.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/hsqBS53PSyM4ZbQwxSVR" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Enter the **title**, i.e. the name of the site.

> For example: documents&#x20;

* If you want, you can also write a description, but this is not mandatory.
* Complete the **URL name** by entering the **title** you chose.

> For example: <https://intranetai.sharepoint.com/sites/my-hu&#x62;**/documents>\*\*

* Keep the default settings, except for the second to last choice: the default option is Yes, change it to **No**, so that the site will not be displayed on the top link bar of the parent site.

<figure><img src="/files/hN8WPQOiBFi8I7ZkDFMr" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* Finally, click on **Create**.

To create a **new document library** in your subsite, follow these steps:&#x20;

* Click on **New** > **Document library**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/j6HDr4NyWZGRZeM8bdND" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click on **Blank library**. The following pop-up will appear:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/SlZKbLVZMM8F8SGlzrNF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Enter the **name** of the document library. Please, avoid spaces; use capital letters instead, so that the library URL will be cleaner.

> For example: GraphicMaterials, Guidelines, Procedures

* If you want, you can also enter a description, but this is not mandatory.
* Leave the **Show in site navigation box flagged**.
* Click on **Create**.

Now, you just need to click on **Upload** to add files to the document library. When configuring Company Documents, you will need to copy and paste the URL of this document library into the related field in the General Settings, as explained in the sub-section titled [General Settings](#general-settings).

***

## Create a new list of favorite documents

As mentioned above, every time you add Company Documents to a SharePoint page, you should create a new list of favorite documents, which will allow users to build their own Favorites area.

> For example, if you use the web part to collect graphic materials in a unified space, you should create a list specifically for graphic materials.

{% hint style="info" %}
The list of favorite documents should be created in the parent site, not in subsites, otherwise the web part will not work.
{% endhint %}

To add a new list, take the following steps:&#x20;

* Click on the **Settings** icon at the top right of the page, then click on **Site contents**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/cjQ5zfpMdKYpor6r3WTv" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click on **New > List**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/RvLx0iVa6l5hU6RAE8cx" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* As you want to create a list from an existing list, click on **From existing list**. You will see all the lists available on the site; select **Documenti Preferiti IAI.**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/XXP5rcGDDxDi2wYs4ojk" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click on **Next**. A pop-up will appear; complete it as follows:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/WwiL96e8oqNlhogs4Vwb" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Give a **name** to the list. The name should tell you what the list is about. Please, avoid spaces; use capital letters and hyphens instead, so that the list URL will be cleaner.

> For example: IAIFavouriteDocuments-GraphicMaterials

{% hint style="info" %}
It is recommended to always name a list of favorite documents as **"IAIFavouriteDocuments" followed by the name of the document library**. This way, you will organize your lists of favorite documents in an orderly manner and you will easily find them. In addition, this is important in view of future updates of the web part.
{% endhint %}

* If you want, you can enter a description, but this is not mandatory.
* **Remove the flag from** the **Show in site navigation** box, so that the list will not appear in the site navigation.
* Click on **Create**.

When configuring Company Documents, you will need to copy and paste the URL of this list into the related field in the General Settings, as explained in the sub-section titled [General Settings](#general-settings).

### Configure a list of favorite documents

Now that you have created a list of favorite documents, you need to configure it so that users can interact with the list. To learn how to configure this list, read the [dedicated guide](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/other-configurations/configuration-of-favorites-lists-and-user-lists). In particular, please refer to the **First type of configuration** section. &#x20;

***

## Add a description to a document item

In order to **add a description to a document item**, follow these steps:

<div align="left"><img src="https://docs.intranet.ai/~gitbook/image?url=https%3A%2F%2F2718234637-files.gitbook.io%2F%7E%2Ffiles%2Fv0%2Fb%2Fgitbook-x-prod.appspot.com%2Fo%2Fspaces%252FriXlnuemuParrCf7Uotu%252Fuploads%252FjVCiYe38wDgyhnHXSmr9%252Fdetails.png%3Falt%3Dmedia%26token%3D91a3f296-5ac9-4c16-b67d-c511e211111c&#x26;width=768&#x26;dpr=3&#x26;quality=100&#x26;sign=de13df8d&#x26;sv=2" alt="" height="908" width="563"></div>

* Go to the settings of the single item and click on **Details.**

<div align="left"><img src="https://docs.intranet.ai/~gitbook/image?url=https%3A%2F%2F2718234637-files.gitbook.io%2F%7E%2Ffiles%2Fv0%2Fb%2Fgitbook-x-prod.appspot.com%2Fo%2Fspaces%252FriXlnuemuParrCf7Uotu%252Fuploads%252Fdhn2gfVYpG9NlIdrbHhY%252Fdocuments-description-details.png%3Falt%3Dmedia%26token%3Db2dab021-7ac0-4d15-b90b-d880862ff8d5&#x26;width=768&#x26;dpr=3&#x26;quality=100&#x26;sign=5c5f03dc&#x26;sv=2" alt="" height="603" width="313"></div>

* Inside the details properties, **type the description** of the item inside the Description field of your document library.

***

## Find the managed property for the Description field

To **retrieve the value** of the **managed property** you want to enter, follow these steps:

<div align="left"><img src="https://docs.intranet.ai/~gitbook/image?url=https%3A%2F%2F2718234637-files.gitbook.io%2F%7E%2Ffiles%2Fv0%2Fb%2Fgitbook-x-prod.appspot.com%2Fo%2Fspaces%252FriXlnuemuParrCf7Uotu%252Fuploads%252FWdOcxEF7px98F2v4D2WR%252Fsite-contents.png%3Falt%3Dmedia%26token%3Ddb35bbae-b91a-4228-8ade-dc504a031509&#x26;width=768&#x26;dpr=3&#x26;quality=100&#x26;sign=5361b5c&#x26;sv=2" alt="" height="500" width="320"></div>

* Open **Settings** and go to **Site contents.**

<div align="left"><img src="https://docs.intranet.ai/~gitbook/image?url=https%3A%2F%2F2718234637-files.gitbook.io%2F%7E%2Ffiles%2Fv0%2Fb%2Fgitbook-x-prod.appspot.com%2Fo%2Fspaces%252FriXlnuemuParrCf7Uotu%252Fuploads%252FQrA4Wuq7P6pN46GcXyfB%252Fsite-settings.png%3Falt%3Dmedia%26token%3Dda6a2819-8d85-46e5-984e-e90733c91219&#x26;width=768&#x26;dpr=3&#x26;quality=100&#x26;sign=5d1829a&#x26;sv=2" alt="" height="114" width="641"></div>

* Once you arrive at Site Contents, click on the **Site settings** button located at the top right of the page.

<div align="left"><img src="https://docs.intranet.ai/~gitbook/image?url=https%3A%2F%2F2718234637-files.gitbook.io%2F%7E%2Ffiles%2Fv0%2Fb%2Fgitbook-x-prod.appspot.com%2Fo%2Fspaces%252FriXlnuemuParrCf7Uotu%252Fuploads%252FLPRHhgeJR6iFlXkCFcm1%252FSchema.png%3Falt%3Dmedia%26token%3Da90c6ccc-5449-4255-85e9-452ab8e58e41&#x26;width=768&#x26;dpr=3&#x26;quality=100&#x26;sign=25a8d0ab&#x26;sv=2" alt="" height="466" width="577"></div>

* Inside site settings, find and click on the **Schema** item found within the **Search subsection**.

<div align="left"><img src="https://docs.intranet.ai/~gitbook/image?url=https%3A%2F%2F2718234637-files.gitbook.io%2F%7E%2Ffiles%2Fv0%2Fb%2Fgitbook-x-prod.appspot.com%2Fo%2Fspaces%252FriXlnuemuParrCf7Uotu%252Fuploads%252FsXIGPdfJFBxTOwkWED2a%252Fmanaged-property.png%3Falt%3Dmedia%26token%3D0c10775d-15a3-40b8-84c6-9ea685fb02ae&#x26;width=768&#x26;dpr=3&#x26;quality=100&#x26;sign=cca1ba71&#x26;sv=2" alt="" height="202" width="908"></div>

* In the **Managed property search bar**, **type the name** you gave to the list field containing the items' descriptions and click the green arrow to search the results. The name of the managed property will appear, which you must enter in the field. Typically, a managed property is written something like ***field name*****OWSText**.

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Company Documents with Folders

The component in your SharePoint intranet that presents company documents organized into folders.

## What is Company Documents with Folders

Company Documents with Folders is a component that helps you **manage the documentary areas of your SharePoint intranet** in an effective way. Just like [Company Documents](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/company-documents), **it** **collects files** such as guidelines, procedures, graphic materials, templates and so on. **The distinctive feature of this web part is that** **it reproduces document organization into folders**, unlike Company Documents, which does not read folders and reproduces files in the form of a list. It is important to specify that Company Documents still allows you to categorize content through the use of tags, which correspond to categories. However, if you wish to **display folders in your documentary area**, you can use the Company Documents with Folders web part, which is the topic of this guide.

Company Documents with Folders shares many **characteristics** and **benefits** with Company Documents, namely:

* **Tags and categories**: thanks to tags, users can easily retrieve documents associated with a specific team, department, event, or project.
* **Files selected by date**: users can view documents belonging to a specific time range which can be set through date filters.
* **Favorites**: every user can build their own **Favorites area** to easily find useful documents.
* **Latest Files**: you can highlight the latest documents uploaded to the intranet to **keep users updated**.
* **Content indexing**: document access is very easy thanks to SharePoint's capabilities to analyze and index content for search. By simply **typing a term** in [Advanced Search](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/advanced-search), you can retrieve **files containing the searched word in the title or body of the text** (it also works with PDFs).

In addition to that, the component **integrates with SharePoint**, offering users fundamental features for effective document management and retrieval. These include:

* Versioning for tracking and recovering changes;
* Real-time sharing;
* Access control;
* Monitoring of approval workflows.
* Targeted notifications whenever a public file is modified;
* Indexing to make document content searchable.

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **Company Documents** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/company-documents/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the Company Documents with Folders web part to a SharePoint page&#x20;

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click on **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part. You will see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/l5ySSL5qOCO7zmUJPhxZ" alt="" data-size="line">.&#x20;
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **Folders** to quickly find and select the Company Documents with Folders web part, which is named "IAI - DocumentsFolders".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/1bUkRSdRfnAHnRdFGq3u" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click on the **Edit** **properties** <img src="/files/C2eDN1A80KWYc2kfVJEV" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options such as Layout Settings, Data sources, Filters settings, General settings and Display settings. See below for more information on each of these sections.

***

## Configuration&#x20;

1. [Layout settings](#layout-settings)
2. [Data sources](#data-sources)
3. [Filters settings](#filters-settings)
4. [General settings](#general-settings)
5. [Display settings](#display-settings)

### Layout settings

The layout settings allow you to customize the appearance of your application by adjusting various layout settings.

By opening this first configuration, you will see the following options:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/V1hW5OLJiBZRdS9Q0vpS" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Do you want to hide the background?** You can choose to hide or display the webpart background. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a white background. If you enable this option, the white card background will be completely removed, allowing the content appear directly on the page. As a result, the webpart will be transparent, showing either the selected background image or the chosen SharePoint page color.
* **Do you want to hide the background shadow?** You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the webpart stand out more against the rest of the page. If you enable this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.
* **Select the type of background shadow**: if you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from High Contrast, Light, or Dark options.
  * If you select **High contrast**, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.
  * By choosing the **Light background shadow**, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.
  * Finally, the **Dark background shadow** style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more.
* **Do you want to hide the title?** Here you can select whether to show the webpart title or hide it. If set to visible, the web part title will appear on the left side.
* **Enter the application title**: thanks to this configuration, you can customize the application title. If you keep it blank, SharePoint will show the default title “Documents Folders” at the top left angle of the webpart.

### Data sources

In this section, you can specify the document library from which the web part retrieves files and configure the favorite document list.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/8UdR4qbFG6PzZc2CHEjK" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Enter the **URL of the site** where the **document library** is located.

{% hint style="info" %}
It is recommended to create a documents subsite to collect document libraries. See the section titled [Create a documents subsite](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/components/company-documents#create-a-documents-subsite) to learn how to do so.
{% endhint %}

* Select the document library containing the **files** you want to display.
* **Choose the field containing the description**: enter the **managed property** related to your list's Description field in order to display the description.
* **Enter the internal field name used for the description**: choose the item corresponding to the **Description** field from the dropdown options.
* Enter the **URL of the site where the favorites list is located**.
* **Select the favorites list**. Thanks to this feature, users can mark items as favorites and create an area of favorite documents.

{% hint style="info" %}
You should create a new list of favorite documents for every documentary area you build on your intranet. See the section titled [Create a new list of favorite documents](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/components/company-documents-with-folders#create-a-new-list-of-favorite-documents) to learn how to do so.
{% endhint %}

* **Enter the path where acknowledgment is located**: this field is to be filled in only if the Acknowledgement system has been activated. In such a case, here you need to enter the URL of the page where the Acknowledgement web part is configured. This way, all the documents will be opened through the "Acknowledgement" page, and users will have the possibility to confirm that they have read the files. If this field is left blank, the documents will be opened in a standard way. The following screenshots provide examples of these two possibilities:

<figure><img src="/files/zQQKVWqpXrEEAGmXFFIp" alt=""><figcaption><p>File opened through the "Acknowledgement" page</p></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/5BtAjYugk7boYvOeV44W" alt=""><figcaption><p>File opened in Word Online</p></figcaption></figure>

### Filters settings

This configuration allows you to **filter** documents by specific tags; when you do so, the web part shows only the files belonging to the category or categories you have selected. For example, if your document library contains files from different departments, you may want to filter documents by department, e.g. Marketing, IT, Sales and so on.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/xj0UksbTp0iVEh1dp46k" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Enter the taxonomy's unique id**. You need to fill in this field only if your tenant has more than one Term store.

{% hint style="info" %}
[Click here](#access-the-term-store) to access the Term Store.
{% endhint %}

* **Configure filters/tags**: in this window, you can configure the various filters to be applied to your documents. By filling in the fields, the available filters for the news will appear.

{% hint style="info" %}
Please refer to our guide ["Creation of tag systems for news and documents"](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/other-configurations/creation-of-tag-systems-for-news-and-documents) to learn how to create term sets in the Term store, add columns of the managed property type to a document library, and assign tags to documents.
{% endhint %}

* To open the filter configurator, click on **Configure filters/tags**. The following panel will appea&#x72;**:**

<figure><img src="/files/BMaFO6PaJ15Lk44MgvBI" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* In the first column, write: **owstaxId** + the **name of the column** used to assign tags to documents. For example, **owstaxIdDepartments**.
* **Field internal name**: enter the field internal name.

To open the **date filters** configurator, click on **Configure date filters**. The following panel will appea&#x72;**:**

<figure><img src="/files/0YrgF200qVUhAS2KJDjz" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* Enter the **managed property** for the date criterium you want to apply. If you want to filter documents by the **last modified date**, enter "**Write"**, if you want to filter documents by the **creation date**, enter "**Created"**.
* Enter a **custom** title for the **"From" label**.
* Enter a **custom** title for the **"To" label**.
* Enter a **custom** label for the **filter name**.
* Choose if you want to **show/not to show** the filter.
* Choose whether or not you want the **accordion containing the calendar** for setting the date to be **open by default** when the page opens.
* Once you have configured the fields, **save** your changes.
* **Configure date filters**: click on the configure fields button under the "Configure date filters" section. A collection data panel will be displayed:

<figure><img src="/files/0YrgF200qVUhAS2KJDjz" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* Enter the **managed property** for the date criterium you want to apply. If you want to filter documents by the **last modified date**, enter "**Write"**, if you want to filter documents by the **creation date**, enter "**Created"**.
* Enter a **custom** title for the **"From" label**.
* Enter a **custom** title for the **"To" label**.
* Enter a **custom** label for the **filter name**.
* Choose if you want to **show/not to show** the filter.
* Choose whether or not you want the **accordion containing the calendar** for setting the date to be **open by default** when the page opens.
* Once you have configured the fields, **save** your changes.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/NuNbvIrqO54HGlZ3wqcl" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Do you want to disable filters?** If you enable this property, the filters bar **will not be displayed**.
* Enter a **custom title** for the **favorites filter**.
* Enter a **custom title** for "**Your favorites**" label inside the filters dropdown.
* Enter a **custom title** for the "**All documents**" label inside the filters dropdown
* Enter a **custom label** for the **search bar** placeholder.

### How to get the field internal name

To get the field internal name, follow these steps:&#x20;

* Open the document library. Click on the **Settings** icon at the top right of the page, then click on **Library settings**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/6zNoG72Q7kXsjKKDHhGQ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click on **More library settings**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/hpiRlzQjgSfJoarkpXEr" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* In the Columns section, click on the **name of the column**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/XRjX6LeU6WTX2kKi74aa" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* A page will open; you can find the field internal name in the **URL** of this page, next to **"Field="**.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/sdJDIolSfU46ZzbxClkb" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Copy-paste the field internal name i**nto the required field of the Collection data panel header.

<figure><img src="/files/TGLcuqlQssC2SmguxdY0" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* Then, **copy-paste the id of the term set**. To do this, go to the Term store and find the id of the term set. To find this code, access the Term store by following the steps described above. In the Term store, click on Global term groups to see all the term groups that have been created. Then, click on the term group that contains the term set you need, and finally select the term set: on the right of the page, you will see the unique identifier of the term set. Copy-paste the code into the required field of the Collection data panel header.
* Enter the **custom filter name** you wish to apply, which will be displayed on the right side of the application, under the Favorites filter, such as Departments. This is a name used to identify a filter you are creating, which will be applied to the documents items. The custom filter helps organize and narrow down the displayed content based on specific criteria.
* **Show filter?** Indicate whether the filter dropdown should be displayed to users. Flag this option if you want users to see and interact with the filter dropdown; leave it unflag it if you want to hide it.
* **Show tag?** Determine if the tags assigned to the documents should be displayed in the documents preview. Flag this option to show the tags; unflag it if they should be hidden from view.
* **Show search bar?** Specify if a search bar should be shown in the filter dropdown to allow users to search for a specific tag. If you want a search bar to appear, flag this option; otherwise, unflag it. This functionality can be useful in case you think you’re going to have a large number of tags.
* **Stop reordering**: This option prevents the ability to reorder items. By default, the webpart sorts tags alphabetically. However, there might be cases (such as the Months) you might need to sort by the same order set in the Term Store. That said, flag this option if you want to follow the same sorting order available in the Term store, or unflag it if you want to keep the alphabetical order.
* **Indicate whether the filter is open by default**: here you can choose if the drop-down menu of the filter will be open or close by default. If you flag this box, it will be open by default, otherwise it will be close by default.
* **Insert the language managed property if it has been manually edited:** you need to insert the internal name of the language managed property if it has been manually edited. If you leave this field blank, the default internal name will be use&#x64;**: owstaxIdIAILanguage**.

{% hint style="info" %}
[Click here ](#access-the-term-store)to discover how to configure the id of the term set store.
{% endhint %}

{% hint style="info" %}
It is recommended to create a **documents subsite** to collect document libraries. See the section titled [Create a documents subsite](#create-a-documents-subsite) to learn how to do so.
{% endhint %}

### General Settings

In this section, you can configure several settings that define how documents are managed and displayed.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/kMcelxBTBFXGXf0B2KT8" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Open or download the document?** You can choose whether the document will be opened in Word Online or downloaded when the user clicks on it. The former option is the default one.
* **Select a property to sort documents**: here you can choose to sort documents by last modified, creation date or file name. Choose an option from the drop-down menu.
* **Select the direction of the sort**: you can decide to order documents from the most recent or from the least recent.
* **Folder display order**: Finally you can choose the folder display order: from A to Z or from Z to A.
* **Show documents with the searched word in the title first**? As regards the last option, it should be specified that the web part includes a search bar which allows you to quickly find content. if you enter a word in the search bar, the web part will show only documents that contain the searched word in the title and in the body of the text. If you enable the last option of the Order Settings, the documents that contain the searched word in the title will be shown first.
* Enter a **custom label** for the "**Load more**" button.
* **Enter the desiderad language**: by typing the desired language in this field, **you can set the language** in which you want the web part to be displayed. The correct format for the language is lowercase, with no spaces or punctuation (e.g., to display the web part in Italian, type **itit**).

Here is an example of **Documents folders:**

<figure><img src="/files/LYTBySg043QSxQ4WId12" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

The web part is composed of the following elements:

* A **list of folders** identified by a folder icon. Click on a folder to see the documents it contains. The documents are presented in the form of a list, which includes an **icon** and the **information** you have chosen to show (e.g. author, date, file extension). Each file type is identified by a specific icon.
* A **list of documents** which are not included in any folder. The list is characterized by the same elements described above.
* A **star icon** which allows you to mark documents as **favorites**. Click on this icon to add an item to your favorites list.
* A **download icon**, if you have chosen to show it. If you want to save a document, you just need to click on this symbol.
* A **search bar** which allows you find documents more quickly. You just need to type a word in the search bar to retrieve files containing the searched word in the title or in the body of the text.
* The **filters** section, which is made up of drop-down menus. The first one is the **Favorites** filter, which allows you to filter results to see only the resources you marked as favorites. Through the other filters you can filter documents by **category**.

### Display settings

In this section, you can set options concerning the display order of your files.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/bvK0OlMZh2HqNKRoSeHg" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Show download icon?** You can decide whether to display or hide the download icon.
* **Show author:** You can decide whether to show the author of the document. If you choose to show it, the author's name will appear under the title of the document. By using the drop-down menu below, you can choose to show the name of the actual author (select Author) or the name of the last user who modified the document (select Modified by).
* **Hide root label:** you can choose to **hide the root label of the breadcrumb when you are viewing the root folder**. You just need to activate the **Hide root label** option.
* **Custom root label:** Thanks to an update of this component, it is possible to **customize the name of root label** of the breadcrumb. You just need to type the name you would like to use in the **Custom root label** box. If you don't write anything in this field, the name of the document library will be used.
* **Show date?** You can decide whether to show the **date** when the document was published. If you choose to show it, the date will appear under the title of the document.
* **Select to show the document title**: The next visibility option allows you to show or hide the **file extension** in the title of the document.
* **Show relative path?** You can choose whether to show the **relative path** and the **absolute path** of the document. If you decide to include this information, it will appear under the author and the date.
* **Component height**: you can adjust the webpart height.
* **Enter text for the "new" tag:** When a new document is uploaded, it will automatically display a **"New" tag** to highlight its recent addition. It is possible to **customize the label of this tag**. You just need to type the name you would like to use in the **Enter text for the "new" Tag** box. If no custom text is entered, the default "New" label will be used.

### Access the term store

To access the Term store, which is a section of the Administration Area of the site, you need to take the following steps:&#x20;

1. Click on the **Settings** icon at the top right of the page, then click on **Site information**.
2. Click on **View all site settings**.
3. Under Site Administration, click on **Term store management**.
4. You will land on the **Term store**, i.e., the area where you can create **term sets** and **terms** to categorize your content. Here you can find the unique identifier of the taxonomy, which is a code composed of numbers, letters and hyphens.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/FjYKE2Zpsp4GUzp7klHQ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/nvQWNRIdYCF4cTANLnC7" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/0z14sMRpkLm0zf4MUHHz" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/hxotGi6oFlKc4RjovaW5" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Enter the unique id of the managed property term set**: write the **unique identifier of the term set**. To find this code, access the Term store by following the steps described above. In the Term store, click on **Global term groups** to see all the term groups that have been created. Then, click on the **term group** that contains the term set you need, and finally select the **term set**: on the right of the page, you will see the unique identifier of the term set. Copy-paste the code into the required field of the Collection data panel header.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Y2DIFY4hakpVp5WENRdn" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

***

## Create a documents subsite

A subsite is a site within a parent site where you can store, organize and manage content. In particular, it is recommended to create a subsite to collect document libraries. Below is a guide on how to do so:&#x20;

* Click on the **Settings** icon at the top right of the page, then click on **Site contents**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/cjQ5zfpMdKYpor6r3WTv" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click on **New > Subsite**.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/uSk2p3EVWmSYcNmechAk" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* You will land on an interface where you need to insert information on the subsite. The first fields to fill in are Title, Description and URL name.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/hsqBS53PSyM4ZbQwxSVR" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Enter the **title**, i.e. the name of the site.

> For example: documents&#x20;

* If you want, you can also write a description, but this is optional.
* Complete the **URL name** by writing the **title** you chose.

> For example: <https://intranetai.sharepoint.com/sites/my-hu&#x62;**/documents>\*\*

* Keep the default settings, except for the second to last choice: the default option is Yes, change it to **No**, so that the site will not be displayed on the top link bar of the parent site.

<figure><img src="/files/hN8WPQOiBFi8I7ZkDFMr" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* Finally, click on **Create**.

To create a **new document library** in your subsite, follow these steps:&#x20;

* Click on **New** > **Document library**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/j6HDr4NyWZGRZeM8bdND" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click on **Blank library**. The following pop-up will appear:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/SlZKbLVZMM8F8SGlzrNF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Enter the **name** of the document library. Please, avoid spaces; use capital letters instead, so that the library URL will be cleaner.

> For example: GraphicMaterials, Guidelines, Procedures

* If you want, you can also enter a description, but this is optional.
* Leave the **Show in site navigation box flagged**.
* Click on **Create**.

Now, you just need to click on **Upload** to add files to the document library. When configuring Company Documents with Folders, you will need to select the document library in the General Settings, as explained in the [dedicated section](#general-settings).

***

## Create a new list of favorite documents&#x20;

As mentioned above, you should create a new list of favorite documents for each documentary area you build on your intranet. This will allow users to create their own Favorites area.

> For example, if you create a documentary area collecting guidelines, you should add a list specifically for guidelines.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
The list of favorite documents should be created in the parent site, not in subsites, otherwise the web part will not work.
{% endhint %}

To add a new list, take the following steps:&#x20;

* Click on the **Settings** icon at the top right of the page, then click on **Site contents**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/cjQ5zfpMdKYpor6r3WTv" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click on **New > List**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/RvLx0iVa6l5hU6RAE8cx" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* As you want to create a list from an existing list, click on **From existing list**. Select **Documenti Preferiti IAI** among the lists available on the site.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/XXP5rcGDDxDi2wYs4ojk" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click on **Next**. A pop-up will appear; complete it as follows:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/hN2xnNJbZ8xGdjaB9iJo" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Give a **name** to the list. The name should inform you on the content of the list. Please, avoid spaces; use capital letters and hyphens instead, so that the list URL will be cleaner.

> For example: IAIFavouriteDocuments-Guidelines

{% hint style="info" %}
It is recommended to always name a list of favorite documents as **"IAIFavouriteDocuments" followed by the name of the document library**. This way, you will organize your lists of favorite documents in an orderly manner and you will easily find them. In addition, this is important in view of future updates of the web part.
{% endhint %}

* If you want, you can enter a description, but this is optional.
* **Remove the flag from** the **Show in site navigation** box, so that the list will not appear in the site navigation.
* Click on **Create**.

When configuring Company Documents with Folders, you will need to select the list of favorite documents in the General Settings, as explained in the [dedicated section](#general-settings).

### Configure a list of favorite documents

After adding a new list of favorite documents, you need to configure it in order to enable users to interact with the list. To learn how to configure this list, read the [dedicated guide](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/other-configurations/configuration-of-favorites-lists-and-user-lists). In particular, please refer to the **First type of configuration** section. &#x20;

***

## Add a description to a document item <a href="#add-a-description-to-a-document-item" id="add-a-description-to-a-document-item"></a>

In order to **add a description to a document item**, follow these steps:

![](https://docs.intranet.ai/~gitbook/image?url=https%3A%2F%2F2718234637-files.gitbook.io%2F%7E%2Ffiles%2Fv0%2Fb%2Fgitbook-x-prod.appspot.com%2Fo%2Fspaces%252FriXlnuemuParrCf7Uotu%252Fuploads%252FjVCiYe38wDgyhnHXSmr9%252Fdetails.png%3Falt%3Dmedia%26token%3D91a3f296-5ac9-4c16-b67d-c511e211111c\&width=768\&dpr=3\&quality=100\&sign=de13df8d\&sv=2)

* Go to the settings of the single item and click on **Details.**

![](https://docs.intranet.ai/~gitbook/image?url=https%3A%2F%2F2718234637-files.gitbook.io%2F%7E%2Ffiles%2Fv0%2Fb%2Fgitbook-x-prod.appspot.com%2Fo%2Fspaces%252FriXlnuemuParrCf7Uotu%252Fuploads%252Fdhn2gfVYpG9NlIdrbHhY%252Fdocuments-description-details.png%3Falt%3Dmedia%26token%3Db2dab021-7ac0-4d15-b90b-d880862ff8d5\&width=768\&dpr=3\&quality=100\&sign=5c5f03dc\&sv=2)

* Inside the details properties, **type the description** of the item inside the Description field of your document library.

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Company Locations

The dynamic map that displays company locations and provides useful information for organizing trips and meetings.

## What is Company Locations

Our Company Locations webpart allows you to **show all your companies’ locations in a world map** through a map **integrated with Google Maps**. You can navigate through the map, see where your companies are located in a very dynamic way, and get to know company locations thanks to **detailed and customizable information cards**.

This component allows you to:

* Locate your company's offices, branches, warehouses, and facilities.
* Discover the local time, activities, and address of each facility.
* Coordinate work with colleagues from other locations.

{% hint style="info" %}

### Please note: t**he component utilizes Google resources**.​

Google Maps APIs offer a limited number of free calls per month, after which you switch to a paid plan. The free calls are 28,500 per month,​ and you can find the information here:  <https://mapsplatform.google.com/pricing/>
{% endhint %}

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **Company** **Locations** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/sharepoint-company-locations/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the Company Locations web part to a SharePoint page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part and you'll see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/l5ySSL5qOCO7zmUJPhxZ" alt="" data-size="line">&#x20;
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **Locations** to quickly find and select the Company Locations web part, which is named "IAI - Company Locations".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/d6ihxidwSx8zvF0zlrk5" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click the **Edit** **properties** <img src="/files/VCuAAmWVtsH2PFwenykh" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options such as Layout settings, Data sources, General settings and Display settings. See below for more information on each of these options.

The procedure for configuring the Company Locations web part is divided into two parts: actions to be performed from the **user interface** and actions to be performed in a **SharePoint list**. The following section concerns the user interface, specifically the configuration pane of the web part.

***

## Configuration

1. [Layout settings](#layout-settings)
2. [Data sources](#data-sources)
3. [General settings](#general-settings)
4. [Display settings](#display-settings)

### **Layout settings**

The layout settings allow you to customize the appearance of your application by adjusting various layout settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/bF3XZjwnZMwLMJdr4rvP" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By opening this first configuration, you will see the following options:

* **Do you want to hide the background?** You can choose to hide or display the webpart background The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a white background. If you enable this option, the white card background will be completely removed, allowing the content appear directly on the page. As a result, the webpart will be transparent, showing either the selected background image or the chosen SharePoint page color.
* **Do you want to hide the background shadow?** You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the webpart stand out more against the rest of the page. If you enable this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.
* **Select the type of background shadow**: if you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from **High Contrast, Light, or Dark** options.
  * If you select High contrast, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.
  * By choosing the Light background shadow, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.
  * Finally, the Dark background shadow style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more.
* **Do you want to hide the title?** Here you can select whether to show the webpart title or hide it. If set to visible, the web part title will appear on the left side.
* **Enter the title of the application**:thanks to this configuration, you can customize the application title. If you keep it blank, SharePoint will show the default title “Company Locations” at the top left angle of the webpart.

### Data sources

Our Company Locations component uses Google Maps, so it's necessary to have your Google account key to configure it.

{% hint style="info" %}
The Google Maps API has a number of free calls, around 28500 per month, before upgrading to the paid plan (by credit card).
{% endhint %}

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/n3m8wCiwJJbCucSrwKcT" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Here is what you can do from the user interface:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/CqgR6wnLVsQtTxlE8k2k" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Enter site URL**: select the **Intranet site link**.
* **List locations**: insert the list named **Company locations**.
* **Enter the access key**: insert the company’s **Google API access key.** If you don't have this key, the web part doesn't work.

### **General settings**&#x20;

The possibility of **opening the map in a specific area** has recently been added, so the web part has three new properties:

* **Latitude**
* **Longitude**
* **Zoom level** (the default value is 1)

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/mPe0u6oYMGnMnziEGXOw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Enter the latitude coordinates:** you need to enter the latitude coordinates of the company location.
* **Enter the longitude coordinates**: you need to enter the longitude coordinates of the company location.
* **Enter the zoom level from a value of 1 to a value of 20**: with this setting, you can choose the zoom level to be applied to the map so that you can better see locations that are in a smaller area.

> For example, by zooming in on Europe you can have the following view:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/ZPsgsaBjUYBBVIiUeEND" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% hint style="info" %}
You can use **Google Maps** to **get the latitude and longitude coordinates** of the location you want to display at the centre of the map. Look for the exact location on Google Maps and right-click on the red pin corresponding to that position. You will see two values separated by a comma: the first value corresponds to latitude, the second one corresponds to longitude.
{% endhint %}

### Display settings

In the display settings, you can also choose to show a **description**, the **local time**, the **company name** and the **company address**. This information will be visible by clicking on the pin marking the position of the locations.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Umw9yMQj6kEHEpPnINJD" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Show description**: by marking the flag on this option, the description will be visible.
* **Show local time**: marking the flag on this option will display the local time of the reference location.
* **Show company**: by ticking the flag on this option, the company name will be visible.
* **Show address**: by ticking the flag on this option, the company address will be visible.
* **Enter the link to the marker image**: enter the **link of the image you want to use for pins**. By default, the image is the Google pin, but if you want to change it, please note that it will be the same for every cluster. The image has to be uploaded to a document library where all users have at least view access, otherwise they will not be able to see the pin. The image link should not contain special characters.
* You can then choose **the color, the size and the position of the small numbers** indicating how many offices there are in a cluster. For example, if a cluster includes two locations, you will see a pin with number 2 in this part of the map. Then, if you zoom in, you will see the geographical position of these locations in detail. Here, you can change the text color, the font size and the position of these numbers to obtain a good graphic effect.

<div><figure><img src="/files/72JwPe3zPERl1fvzXGdH" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/zpQ2fbbAAyDUWpDelY06" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

***

## **Create new locations**

In order to create a new location, a few steps are required, which are listed below:

* Access the **Site contents** by clicking on the Settings icon, which is located on the top right of your Intranet’s homepage.

<figure><img src="/files/1aIl3EGFkezut4hbePJJ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* Access the list named **Company locations**, where you need to enter the various sites you want to view one by one.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Ieu0WcQEkdrtdFj93EYw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click on **New** and a window will open with fields to be filled in.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/GZT1SBi3CHmWm4VoiXiK" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Fill in the following fields. The fields marked with an **asterisk (\*)** are **mandatory**:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/awKypWbAo8OvcEWcgPFB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Title**: enter the name of the site.
* **Company**: enter the name of the company located in that site.
* **Location Type**: you can enter a brief description of the site you have created (e.g., production office).
* **Country:** enter the name of the country where the site is located.
* **Address:** enter the address of the office.
* **Street number:** enter the street number of the location.
* **Postal code:** enter the postal code of the location.
* **Time zone:** to get the name of the time zone, you need to access this link: <https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_tz_database_time_zones> . You will find the correct name in  the TZ database name column. Write it in the Time zone box on the SharePoint list.
* **Latitude:** enter the latitude of the location.
* **Longitude:** enter the longitude of the location.

{% hint style="info" %}
To **get latitude and longitude coordinates**, look for the exact location on **Google Maps** and right-click the red pin corresponding to that position. You will see two values separated by a comma: the first value corresponds to latitude, the second one corresponds to longitude.
{% endhint %}

* **Marker url:** : enter the url of the picture you want to use as a pin. You can have a different pin for each location you enter (e.g., for production sites, you may insert he image of a factory). In this case, you need to insert a specific image for each location. Please, refer to the [final section of this guide](#save-the-pin-location-preview-image) to learn how to create the picture url.
* **Description:** enter a text to describe the company or the particular location/office you are dealing with. You can also link to a page or a website by typing the sentence you want to read and then embedding the url into the text (e.g., “Discover more”).

To insert the hyperlink in the description field, follow the steps below:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/6wRKNUaoqOsgJ0BIOfAo" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click on the pencil icon to edit the description.
* **Text space**: type the display text inside the text space.
* **Select the text**: select all the written text.
* **Three-dot button**: click on the “…” button in the top right-hand corner and then click on **Add or edit hyperlink**.
* **URL**: insert the url of the page you want to link to.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/oy1gmakjecYdL19v7th4" alt="" width="365"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

***

## Save the pin location preview image

The pin on the map is fully customizable and an image can be added.

To add a **different preview image** to the location, the image needs to be saved in the intranet. Just like the cluster image, this picture has to be uploaded to a document library where all users have at least view access, otherwise they will not be able to see the pin. The image link should not contain special characters.

In the **homepage** of your intranet, please click on **Site contents** inside the Settings section.

<figure><img src="/files/1aIl3EGFkezut4hbePJJ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Once the Site contents page is open, please create a **new folder** by clicking on **New** on the top left of the page. Select **Document library** and give it a name, e.g., “**Company-locations-images**”:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/k0WwPESRmnY5I070PQwM" alt="" width="464"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% hint style="warning" %}
Before clicking Create, remember to **unflag** the **Show in site navigation** box:
{% endhint %}

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/pZBOmNgMIjZbib5pPu9w" alt="" width="416"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Once created, the document library will automatically open and look like this:

<figure><img src="/files/n3auluCuzeXP1myLfM1o" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Here it’s possible to drag and drop the preview image.

Once the picture is uploaded to the document library, please **select it**, and click on the **three dots** icon on top of it.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/wir1CrjOMyV4JoZ4PzXL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

The following pop-up menu will appear, then please click on **View original**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/XgoSjL65yf0465Ms0Djq" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

A new tab will open, showing the picture; **please consider this URL as the correct one to be pasted in the Marker Url field.**

Then, come back to the Company locations list, select again the location, click on Edit and insert the url you’ve just created.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/bGyAJx1OSVJmybQPqDBl" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Now, click on Save.  The pin with the personalized image is ready!

<figure><img src="/files/N54dh3xdmfGHA3rEbTVY" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Company News

Tagged and targeted news for the SharePoint intranet.

## **What is Company News**

This web part allows you to **create news aligned with your brand**, facilitate communication through likes and comments, and develop news showcases dedicated to **specific topics or user groups**.&#x20;

This web part provides the possibility to **categorize news through metadata (tags)** and also **create audiences to target the news**. This enables users to easily discover content that is useful and specific to their activities. In addition, the web part has a specific **Filter view mode** that allows you to filter the news according to the desired criteria.

The Company News web part is integrated with our [Alerts](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/alerts-and-service-communications) and [Teams Push Notifications](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/creation-and-maintenance-for-push-notifications) features, so it ensures users **stay informed and engaged**. Indeed, users receive **instant and customizable notifications** on their desktop and mobile devices through the **Teams app.** They simply need to click on the message to open the news on the company website.

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **News and Communications** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/company-news/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the Company News web part to a SharePoint page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part and you'll see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/l5ySSL5qOCO7zmUJPhxZ" alt="" data-size="line">&#x20;
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **News** to quickly find and select the Company News web part, which is named "IAI - News".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/6FuwxEYwS1cENjXHPvDw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click the **Edit** **properties** <img src="/files/8fjNJkFh5fC5tod5r2Ng" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options such as Layout settings, Data sources, Filters settings, General settings and Display settings. See below for more information on each of these options.

***

## Configuration

1. [Layout settings](#layout-settings)
2. [Data sources](#data-sources)
3. [Filters mode settings](#filter-mode-settings)
4. [Filters settings](#filters-settings)
5. [General settings](#general-settings)
6. [Display settings](#display-settings)

### Layout settings

The layout settings allow you to customize the appearance of your application by adjusting various layout settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/5g0AB9CrerQDeYIqOwLt" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By opening this first configuration, you will see the following options:

* **Do you want to hide the background?** You can choose to hide or display the webpart background. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a white background. If you enable this option, the white card background will be completely removed, allowing the content appear directly on the page. As a result, the webpart will be transparent, showing either the selected background image or the chosen SharePoint page color.
* **Do you want to hide the background shadow?** You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the webpart stand out more against the rest of the page. If you enable this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.
* **Select the type of background shadow**: if you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from High Contrast, Light, or Dark options.
  * If you select **High contrast**, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.
  * By choosing the **Light background shadow**, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.
  * Finally, the **Dark background shadow** style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more.
* **Do you want to hide the title?** Here you can select whether to show the webpart title or hide it. If set to visible, the web part title will appear on the left side.
* **Enter the application title**: thanks to this configuration, you can customize the application title. If you keep it blank, SharePoint will show the default title “News” at the top left angle of the webpart.
* **View mode**: by enabling this view mode, you can filter news according to your desired criteria, which you can configure in the appropriate property. The filters will be present at the top of the web part and will appear as clickable buttons.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/8J1dC5ANMee08quy4tVO" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### Data sources

These settings allow you to specify the data sources to be linked to the web part. In this section, you can also select the specific sites from which to retrieve news.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/GZhihwmFDUOCnyQGELPg" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Select sites**: select the sites from which you want to take the news to show in the web part. If you have several sites attached to your hub site, you can either select all of them to display all their news, or select just a few. If you don't select any site, news will be taken from the current site.
* **Taking news from hub site?** You can choose to take news from the hub site or not. If you select Yes, the web part will automatically take all the news from the hub site.

### Filter mode settings

If you choose the **Filters view** mode, the **Filter mode settings** will appear within the configuration settings, which allow you to set the fields through which you want the news to be filtered.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/KoLC905GhHsxcMzEypzw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Filter term store id**: enter the term store ID of the filter group you want to apply.
* **Open filter configurator**: these settings let you define which tag you want to filter news.

<figure><img src="/files/dDx5gFvtEn4cIMYfbeb9" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* In the first column, write: **owstaxId** + the **name of the column** used to assign metadata to the news.
* In the second column, enter the unique **id of the managed property term se**t. To do this, click here to go to the Term store and find the id of the term set.
  * Once you've finished, click on Save.
* **Choose the filters to visualize**: by opening this field, you can select the filters you want to display from those you set in the previous field.

<figure><img src="/files/iGgtNpeI4ss4iFyTpb9z" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Enable pagination**: by choosing this option, the various news items can be browsed using a slider, otherwise they will all appear in the same section.
* **Choose the news limit**: indicate the maximum number of news you want to display.
* **Show "Read more" button**: by enabling this option, a "show more" button will appear under each news item, which will allow you to access the individual news item's page so you can read it better.
* You can type a **custom title** for the "**View all**" link.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/3f3M7Ts2L352ZkqDePOW" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Do you want to filter news by audience?** If you **enable** this option, news will be visible only to the targeted groups. If you **disable** it, all news will be accessible to everyone within the Intranet, regardless of their group or role.
* **Hide untranslated news**: on translated pages, by default the web part also shows news that hasn't been translated. This option allows you to display only the news articles that have been translated into the language of the page. If you **disable** this option, untranslated news will also be visible, appearing in their original language if a translation is not available.

### Filters settings

If you chose "Classic view" from the layout settings, you should fill out this section if you need to set which news each user will see in the webpart.

This helps to outline the following fields:

* Classify news based on a **specific metadata**. For example, you can decide to show only news tagged as "Highlights" or "Company news"
* **Audience targeting**. You can also filter news based on audience targeting, ensuring that different users see only the news relevant to them based on their membership to a specific group.
* **Show or hide untranslated news**. In case of multilingual news content, the web part can display articles in the user’s preferred language, providing a personalized reading experience.

These settings help tailor the news display to specific user groups, enhancing relevance and accessibility.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/sXuNiiiNqmE6DTblB3Hm" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Open filter configurator**: these settings let you define which tag you want to filter news.

<figure><img src="/files/VKMHj4DfEwypIQTYpfej" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* In the first column, write: **owstaxId** + the **name of the column** used to assign metadata to the news.
* In the second column, enter the unique **id of the managed property term se**t. To do this, click here to go to the Term store and find the id of the term set.
  * Once you've finished, click on Save.
* **Do you want to filter news by audience?** If you **enable** this option, news will be visible only to the targeted groups. If you **disable** it, all news will be accessible to everyone within the Intranet, regardless of their group or role.
* **Hide untranslated news**: on translated pages, by default the web part also shows news that hasn't been translated. This option allows you to display only the news articles that have been translated into the language of the page. If you **disable** this option, untranslated news will also be visible, appearing in their original language if a translation is not available.

### General settings

This section allow you to configure the generic layout of the web part: this includes the number of news to be displayed vertically and horizontally, as well as other display options to be defined for the user experience.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/pnjpjKDQkLvgRTnTWxzQ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Select where to open the news**: For the user experience, you can choose to open the news in a new page or load it on the current page.
* You can choose how **many news items you want to display horizontally** in the web part. You can go from a minimum of 1 to a maximum **of 6 news items.** The web part will automatically adjusts to the screen size (the smaller the screen, the more the web part will adapt to it and display fewer news).
* The second setting lets you select **the number of news items to be displayed vertically** (max. 3).
* The third parameter allows you to select the **number of news items to be displayed in the mobile version**, which is more extended (max. 8).

### Display settings

In this section, you can customize the display settings to define the aesthetic aspects of the web part, such as visibility of elements and interaction options for a tailored user experience.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/QBx041w4RqYDzEYPLDYQ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* You can choose to make the **publication date** visible or to hide it.
* **Enable the "New" tag:** you can choose to activate the display of the **"new" tag**. By default, it will not be visible.
* **Insert the "new" tag label**: it is possible to **customize the label of this tag**. You just need to type the name you would like to use in the **"Insert the "new" tag label"** box. If no custom text is entered, the default "New" label will be used.
* **Days after publication date in wich the tag "new" remains visible:** you can define the number of days the "New" tag will stay visible after the content is published.
* **Do you want to show tags?** You can choose to make the tag linked to the news visible.
* **Enter the taxonomy’s unique id**: you need to copy-paste the **taxonomy's unique id**. To do this, go to the Term store and find the unique identifier of the taxonomy.
* **Open tags configurator**: you must fill in this field only if you prefer to show tags in the news. Enter “**owstaxId**” plus **column name** of the **tags** you want to show in each single news.

<figure><img src="/files/HXSNZPwYbfUY8ii2rkUa" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
[Click here](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/other-configurations/creation-of-tag-systems-for-news-and-documents) for more information about the creation of tag systems for news.
{% endhint %}

* **Enter the url for the “view all” link**: this field corresponds to the See all news button and it’ll appear on the top right of the webpart. You can choose what page the user will land on by clicking on this button. This could be highlights page with all the news of the site, for example.
* **Do you want to open the “View all” link on the current page?** If you select the Current page option, SharePoint will reload the page you are navigating, displaying the news. If you choose the New tab option, SharePoint will open a new browser window where the news will appear.
* **Enter the name of the “view all” link**: enter the name (or label) to be displayed for the 'View All' link. If you keep this field blank, the default wording will be View all.

### Access the term store

To access the Term store, take the following steps:&#x20;

1. Click on the **Settings** icon at the top right of the page, then click on **Site information**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/RXuP5t41gLNF5QLJEEQ2" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

2. Click on **View all site settings**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/hwXI2qVylObpZmuyVBNm" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

3. Under Site Administration, click on **Term store management**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/GnnsxahmlXc7L2Mtk3JB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

4. You will land on the **Term store**, which is the area where you can create **term sets** and **terms**, i.e. **tags** to categorize your content. Here you need to copy the unique identifier of the taxonomy, which is a code composed of numbers, letters and hyphens.

<figure><img src="/files/UgrSKlwLEvtWSunaAsTc" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
If you want to discover more about filters and the Term store management, [click here. ](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/creation-of-tag-systems-for-news-and-documents)
{% endhint %}

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/XbFDkk8NbEbhfIolzLp5" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Open tags configurator:** these settings let you define which tag you want to display and make it visible into the web part.

<figure><img src="/files/NrTNc1C50uFNpHCwpWQd" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* In the first column, write: **owstaxId** + **the name of the column used to assign metadata to the news**.
* In the second column, enter the unique id of the managed property term set. To do this, go to the Term store and find the id of the term set (see photo below).

<figure><img src="/files/XCQ8pXuyYj3c99J8GXgi" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
If you want to discover more about filters and the Term store management, [click here. ](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/creation-of-tag-systems-for-news-and-documents)
{% endhint %}

* Once you're done, click on Save.

<figure><img src="/files/lq39TgN7TVYq3h8AAUdY" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Don't forget to click on **Apply** to save your backup and then click on **Republish** to publish the page with all these updates.&#x20;

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Content Translation

The intelligent support for translating your SharePoint intranet's content into 100+ languages in seconds.

## What is Content Translation

Content Translation allows you to efficiently **translate the content of your SharePoint intranet** while **maintaining the same layout and formatting** for each piece of content. It's a feature that provides quick and accurate translation, eliminating language barriers, enabling seamless collaboration and fostering a more inclusive work environment.

{% hint style="info" %}
**Please note**: the component **utilizes Azure resources**. The consumption is low because Azure resources are only used when content is translated by editors. When end users access the translated content, there is no additional Azure consumption.​

You can find a Microsoft brochure with the costs at this link: [https://azure.microsoft.com/en-us/pricing/details/cognitive-services/translator/​ ](https://azure.microsoft.com/en-us/pricing/details/cognitive-services/translator/?/)
{% endhint %}

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **Content Translation** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/multi-language-intranet/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Use the Content Translation web part on a SharePoint page or news item

* First of all, go to the page where you want to translate the content. Click on **Edit** on the right top of the page:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/fmvZrfnuKOcXjgaz4VEI" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Select the text you want to translate and then click on the **Translate** button at the right bottom of the page (identified by the picture of the world):

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/zxGWD8OLrgSymiRiynkb" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Select the source and the target language, then click on **Preview**:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/XCkxxAa1D1Bl7I976MJ7" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* If the content is ok, click on **Translate and replace**:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/myGhVjjGixep2HMPAumg" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* The text is automatically created keeping the same style and formatting of the previous one.
* Once you finish your translation, click on **Republish** to save the new content and publish the new version of the page.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/dPEucIh9jmBELRLoOaPT" alt="" width="375"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% hint style="info" %}
It is possible to **translate all the text** on SharePoint **pages and news**.
{% endhint %}

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Contributors

The web part that highlights page contributors, making it easy to recognize editors, track updates, and identify subject matter experts.

## What is Contributors

Contributors is one of the web parts designed by intranet.ai to help companies **create a corporate knowledge base in SharePoint Online**. Creating a corporate knowledge base provides numerous benefits, such as **quick access to information**, **reduced time waste**, **standardized information**, **knowledge retention**, and **more effective collaboration**.

The Contributors web part is designed to **enhance knowledge-sharing** by **automatically displaying users who have contributed to a page**. Specifically, the web part identifies users who have clicked **Edit** and then republished the page. Additionally, it allows for **manual customization**, enabling administrators to **add or remove users** as needed. By highlighting key contributors, this web part makes it easier to **track updates, recognize editors, and quickly identify subject matter experts**, fostering **transparency** and **collaboration** within the organization.

**Contributors** is essential for creating a well-organized knowledge base on SharePoint Online. For additional tools to enhance your knowledge base, refer to the manuals for [**Pages Menu**](<https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/components/pages-menu >), [**In This Page**](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/components/in-this-page), and [**Breadcrumb**](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/components/breadcrumb).

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **Contributors** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/contributors/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the Contributors web part to a SharePoint page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click on **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part. You will see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="https://docs.intranet.ai/~gitbook/image?url=https%3A%2F%2F2718234637-files.gitbook.io%2F%7E%2Ffiles%2Fv0%2Fb%2Fgitbook-x-prod.appspot.com%2Fo%2Fspaces%252FriXlnuemuParrCf7Uotu%252Fuploads%252FccHplKgXfibd4tktmhas%252Fadvanced-search-2.png%3Falt%3Dmedia%26token%3D7d703967-c3f7-4125-834b-f695362bf90b&#x26;width=40&#x26;dpr=4&#x26;quality=100&#x26;sign=34b00d6f&#x26;sv=2" alt="" data-size="line">.
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **Contributors** to quickly find and select the Contributors web part, which is named "IAI - Contributors".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/ItBxgeweRaWrQzdybWfK" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click the **Edit properties** button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options such as General Settings and View Settings. See below for more information on each of these sections.

***

## Configuration

1. [View settings](#view-settings)
2. [General settings](#general-settings)

### View settings

The view settings allows you

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/EcX1JLey1eEgTfoBvzXw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By opening this first configuration, you will see the following options:

* **Do you want to hide the background?**\
  You can choose to hide or display the webpart background The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a white background. If you enable this option, the white card background will be completely removed, allowing the content appear directly on the page. As a result, the webpart will be transparent, showing either the selected background image or the chosen SharePoint page color.
* **Do you want to hide the background shadow?**\
  You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the webpart stand out more against the rest of the page. If you enable this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.
* **Select the type of background shadow**\
  If you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from High Contrast, Light, or Dark options.
  * If you select **High contrast**, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.
  * By choosing the **Light background** shadow, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.
  * Finally, the **Dark background** shadow style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more.
* **Enter the application title**\
  Thanks to this configuration, you can customize the application title. If you keep it blank, SharePoint will show the default title “Contributors” at the top left angle of the webpart.
* **Do you want to hide the title?**\
  Here you can select whether to show the webpart title or hide it. If set to visible, the web part title will appear on the left side.

### General settings

The General settings are as follows:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/0CcoGpYgYVxLfFGLXoMv" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Add users**: this property allows administrators to **manually select and add users to the Contributors section**, even if they have not edited the page.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/weYDnGgAZVp99HlH4L6Q" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% hint style="success" %}
A common scenario for using the **Add users** property is when a subject matter expert provides critical input for a knowledge base article but does not edit the page directly. In this case, an administrator can manually add their name to acknowledge their contribution and make it clear who to contact for further insights.
{% endhint %}

* **Hide users**: this property enables the **removal of specific users from the list**, even if they have edited the page.

The **Contributors** section is displayed as follows:

<figure><img src="/files/MJuOloZWvTpk5ztepkTe" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Hovering over a user's profile picture allows you to see their email address and contact them via email or Teams.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/inhFwNUMtJMfB7SUI1K8" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Departments

The sites that help departments to make themselves known within the company and manage their communication.

## What is Departments

Department areas are designed to **provide each team or department with a dedicated space on the SharePoint intranet**. These areas can be structured as **specific sites or pages**, allowing departments to manage and share content relevant to their activities.

This approach helps **strengthen internal communication and facilitate the efficient exchange of information** across the organization.

Each department has its own space to present itself and highlight relevant updates, services, and key contacts for colleagues. Moreover, **the Departments web part can be used to introduce the department manager**, displaying their name, photo, and contact details.

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **Departments** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/company-departments/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## **Add the** Departments web part to a SharePoint page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part and you'll see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/l5ySSL5qOCO7zmUJPhxZ" alt="" data-size="line">&#x20;
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **Department** to quickly find and select the Departments web part, which is named "IAI - Company Department".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/gKzBbvexth5ig9aZxA4N" alt="" width="544"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Click the **Edit** **properties** <img src="/files/vMc90TG1EFypinoFuXNz" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options such as Layout settings, Data sources, Person settings<sub>,</sub> General settings, and Display settings. See below for more information on each of these options.

***

## Configuration

* [Layout settings](#layout-settings)
* [Data sources](#data-sources)
* [Person settings](#person-settings)
* [General settings](#general-settings)
* [Display settings](#display-settings)

### **Layout settings**

The layout settings allow you to customize the appearance of your application by adjusting various layout settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/1MaEOOaSKNuZJhk6MOUt" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By opening this first configuration, you will see the following options:

* **Do you want to hide the background?** You can choose to hide or display the web part background. The default setting is No. This means that, by default, the web part is characterized by a white background. If you enable this option, the white card background will be completely removed, allowing the content to appear directly on the page. As a result, the web part will be transparent, showing either the selected background image or the chosen SharePoint page color.
* **Do you want to hide the shadow?** You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is No. This means that, by default, the web part is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the web part stand out more against the rest of the page. If you enable this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.
* **Select the type of shadow you want to use**: if you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from High contrast, Light, or Dark options.
  * If you select **High contrast**, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.
  * By choosing the **Light background shadow**, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.
  * Finally, the **Dark background shadow** style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more.
* **Do you want to hide the title?** Here you can select whether to show the web part title or hide it. If set to visible, the web part title will appear on the left side.
* **Enter the title of the application**: thanks to this configuration, you can customize the application title. If you keep it blank, SharePoint will show the default title “Company department” at the top left angle of the web part.

### Data sources

As mentioned above, Departments introduces a person in the company, e.g., the manager of a specific department. The web part includes buttons through which you can contact this person. Therefore, it's essential to include [People directory ](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/components/people-directory)details in this section, so that the application can retrieve the user’s contact information.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/zNUnoX80MuOtYlyMp4T6" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Select the **data source**, which can be either SharePoint or Graph. Since a SharePoint list can contain a maximum of 5,000 items, companies with more than 5,000 employees will be required to use Graph as the data source. For companies with fewer than 5,000 employees, the choice will be the **People directory list**, which is synchronized daily with Azure AD contacts.
* **Contacts list**: enter the URL of the [**People directory**](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/people-directory) list.&#x20;

> For example: <https://intranetai.sharepoint.com/sites/intranetai/Lists/IAIPeopleDirectory/All%20contacts.aspx>

* **Favourite contacts list**: insert the URL of the **People directory favorites** list.

### Person settings

In this section, you can choose the name of the person to display. After writing the person’s name or surname, **select the correct user** from the search results.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/lBg35Mdd0kE7ANTAMkAt" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### **General settings**

In this section, you need to configure general options, such as selecting the field where the profile picture is stored and other related settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Y2Hrfwkn82498mbiOE7L" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Select the field where the **profile picture** is stored: specify the Azure AD field where this piece of information is saved. Usually, it is **Title/User Principal Name**.
* Select the field where the **username** is stored: specify the Azure AD field where this piece of information is saved. Usually, it is **User Principal Name**.
* Select the field where the **phone number** is stored: specify the Azure AD field where this piece of information in saved. Usually, it is **Business Phones/Mobile Phone.** In order to add the phone shortcut and make calls, you need a **Voip System.** [Click here](https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/microsoft-teams/voip-voice-over-ip) to go to the guide that explains this aspect.&#x20;
* Select the field where the **mail** **address** is stored: specify the Azure AD field where this piece of information is saved. Usually, it is **Mail**.&#x20;

### Display settings

In this section, you need to select the information that will be visible in the person’s card.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/SH1pUcx92wW3tAm6NlQT" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Choose title, subtitle and sub-subtitle**: select the options you want to see in the person’s preview card.

> For example: Title (corresponding to the user's full name), Department, Job Title.

* **Do you want to show the favourite shortcut in profile section?** Choose if you want to show the favourite shortcut in the profile section or not. If the favourite button (the star) is clicked, the user's profile will be added to the list of favourite contacts in the People Directory.
* **Do you want to show the phone shortcut in profile section?** Choose if you want to show the phone shortcut in the profile section or not. In order to add the phone shortcut and make calls, you need a Voip System. [Click here](https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/microsoft-teams/voip-voice-over-ip) to go to the guide that explains this aspect.
* **Do you want to show the Teams shortcut in profile section?** Choose if you want to show the Teams shortcut in the profile section or not. Thanks to the Teams shortcut, it will be possible to start a Teams chat with the user.
* **Do you want to show the mail shortcut in profile section?** Choose if you want to show the mail shortcut in the profile section or not. Thanks to the mail shortcut, it will be possible to contact the user via e-mail.

Here’s an example of how the Departments web part is displayed on the page:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/RR2EBVwsiVslGYA0Hf8c" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% hint style="info" %}
We suggest configuring this web part in a narrow section; for example, you can create a wide section with the description of the department, and next to it, you can create a narrower column with the presentation of the manager. This will allow users that visit the department's page to immediately see who the manager of that department is.
{% endhint %}

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Digital signage

The intranet component designed to display your most relevant content on information screens, clearly, automatically, and always up to date.

## What is Digital Signage?

Digital Signage is a display page designed for monitors, corporate TVs, or shared screens. Its purpose is to automatically display the most relevant information to people in the office or common areas, without requiring technical interaction.

On a single screen, users can view:

* screen logo, title and subtitle;
* date and time updated;
* featured news;
* latest news;
* events agenda.

Content is updated based on information already published in SharePoint. This means that, in most cases, no direct intervention on the Digital Signage page is needed: simply keeping news and events updated in the relevant intranet areas is sufficient.

## Who needs it?

Digital Signage is useful for:

* communicating important news in reception areas, lobbies, common spaces, or facilities;
* displaying upcoming events and daily appointments;
* enhancing internal communications already published on the intranet;
* providing a constantly updated, easy-to-read view.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/NjHZV8Pt1iLWdt7HP2Cn" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

## Configuration

Digital Signage is configured via Azure and managed by the technical team. This means that structural changes cannot be made independently by end users and must be requested from the technical team.

The main configurable options, are the following:

1. [#general-screen-information](#general-screen-information "mention")
2. [#highlighted-news-section](#highlighted-news-section "mention")
3. [#news-section](#news-section "mention")
4. [#events-section](#events-section "mention")

### General screen information

You can define:

* the screen name (which appears at the top left);
* an optional subtitle, such as the location or reference area;
* the logo to display at the top;
* the main theme color used;
* the language and localization of the date, time and strings;
* the enabling or disabling of a specific screen;
* automatic page refresh, so that content aligned with the linked sources is always displayed.

### Highlighted News Section

For the main news area, you can configure:

* whether or not to display featured news;
* whether to show a visual label on featured news items;
* which categories or tags to show;
* the section title;
* from which intranet site to retrieve the news;
* how many news items to display.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/yAdJ1KGq9uZxAgpqpinX" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### News section

For the secondary news section, you can define:

* whether the section should be visible or not;
* the section title;
* from which intranet site to retrieve the news;
* how many news items to display;
* how to lay out news items on the screen (number of items per row and column);
* whether to display the date;
* whether to also display the news item's text description.

<figure><img src="/files/L48VdKzKgZ9nFFg4d3lU" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Events section

For the events section, you can configure:

* whether or not to display the events section;
* the section title;
* the maximum number of events to display;
* which calendars to use as event sources (multiple calendars are supported).

<figure><img src="/files/GirJ51bmjtN8aJIKwzZO" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>


# Disclaimer

The component to display important disclaimers on your SharePoint intranet.

## What is Disclaimer

Disclaimer is a web part designed to **display important disclaimers, legal notices, and policy acknowledgments** on your SharePoint intranet, ensuring that all users are informed and compliant with necessary regulations and guidelines.&#x20;

By integrating the Disclaimer web part into your SharePoint sites, you can ensure that **vital information is communicated efficiently and effectively**, fostering a **culture of transparency and compliance** within your organization.&#x20;

Whether it’s a legal disclaimer, a privacy policy notification, or any other important message, this web part allows you to display your content in a consistent and professional manner.

Concretely, the web part consists of a **pop-up** with a **text** and **two buttons: Accept** and **Cancel**. The pop-up appears every time the user refreshes the page or accesses a new page, until they click on **Accept**. After the user has pressed the Accept button, they will no longer see that specific disclaimer. You can also force the user to accept the disclaimer, which means that they won't be able to navigate the intranet until they do so. [See below](#disclaimer-information) for a detailed explanation of the options available.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **Disclaimer** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/disclaimer/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add a new disclaimer to your SharePoint intranet

Disclaimers are created by filling in a SharePoint list named **Disclaimers List**. To add a new disclaimer to this list, take the following steps:&#x20;

* Click on the **Settings** icon on the top right of the page, then click on **Site contents**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/fnCmJTUTf8gKBwoqn2zD" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Scroll down and click on **Disclaimers List**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/K5Ze4WGU8JIVg8qsHQXN" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Press the **New** button to add a new item to the list.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Ruyy7QxfFFcgahgsGmXV" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* A panel appears with a number of fields to fill in. The fields marked with **asterisks** are the **mandatory** ones.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/NLaElHtudKFdu1bZfexL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Disclaimer information

* **Title**: enter the **title** of the disclaimer.&#x20;
* **Is active**: tick this box to **activate** the disclaimer and make it visible.&#x20;
* **Disclaimer content**: write the **text** of the disclaimer. You have several possibilities to customize your content. For instance, you can add **formatting** and include **hyperlinks** or **images**. When you have completed the text, click on **Save** in the lower-right corner of the text bo&#x78;**.**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/yAw8dmKNBYxq7Qy4vgck" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/vIlcmm9aSqW0kNd7aCsT" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Date from**: this is an optional field which allows you to **schedule** your disclaimer. This means that the disclaimer will be displayed starting from the selected date. The component considers this piece of information **only if you have ticked the Is active checkbox**.
* **Date to**: this is an optional field which allows you to set an **expiry date** after which the disclaimer will no longer be visible. The component considers this piece of information **only if you have ticked the Is active checkbox**.
* **Forced to accept**: tick this box to **force users to accept** the disclaimer. This implies that the **Cancel** button **will not be available**, and users **won't be able to navigate the intranet** until they press the **Accept** button.
* **Attachments**: please, ignore this field.&#x20;

When you have completed the panel, click on **Save**. The result will look like this:&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/i3vH7OV8w7S6RKoNgdqZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% hint style="info" %}
You can create multiple disclaimers. All active disclaimers will be displayed one after the other from the most recent to the least recent.
{% endhint %}

{% hint style="info" %}
If you edit the content of the disclaimer, the updated version will not appear to users who have already clicked on Accept. If you want everyone to see an important change, you'd better create a new disclaimer.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

### Add disclaimers in multiple languages

If you have a multilingual intranet, you may need to translate a disclaimer into multiple languages. In particular, the fields to translate are **Title** and **Disclaimer content**. To carry out this translation activity, you need to create **two additional fields for each language**. Specifically, you need a **Title field** and a **Disclaimer content field** with **specific nomenclatures**. The nomenclature to adopt is as follows:&#x20;

* **IAIDisTitle + language code**
* **IAIDisText + language code**

[**This link**](https://pkbullock.com/resources/reference-sharepoint-online-languages-ids) offers a list of language tags. However, please use only **lower case letters** and **no hyphen** between the first and the second part of the tag. &#x20;

> For example, the language code for French is **frfr**. The complete nomeclature for the Title and Disclaimer content fields would be:
>
> * **IAIDisTitlefrfr**
> * **IAIDisTextfrfr**

A detailed explanation of the steps of this process is offered below:

* To create **an additional Title field**, click on **+Add column**. Select **Text** and click on **Next**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/0Iaf5T4XKHDExZkqmh20" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* In the **Name** field, enter the name of the column. Make sure to adopt the **nomenclature** described above, and save. &#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/3tPs2dJ8pwcZe9q0CQOB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* To create **an additional Disclaimer content field**, click on **+Add column**. Select **Multiple lines of text** and click on **Next**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/iVtACBV4iZu6SgXO5bBC" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* In the **Name** field, enter the name of the column. Make sure to adopt the **nomenclature** described above.
* In addition, make sure to click on **More options** and activate the **Use enhanced rich** **text** option, which will allow you to add formatting, hyperlinks, images, and so on. Finally, click on **Save**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/SuLGltNqJa8r85KM7tTU" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Now, select the disclaimer you want to translate, click on **Edit**, and **add the translations** by filling in the newly created fields. Then, click on **Save**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/8zL7aaZKghVhexAQpPt7" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% hint style="info" %}
It is important that you localize both columns (Title and Disclaimer content).&#x20;

When you create a column, it is fundamental that you adopt the correct naming convention. Then, you can edit the display name of the column to make it more user-friendly (e.g., "French Title", "French Content").
{% endhint %}

***

## Configure the Disclaimer Users list&#x20;

The Disclaimer web part relies on two SharePoint lists: Disclaimers List is used for creating disclaimers, while **Disclaimer Users** is used for saving information related to users who have clicked on **Accept**. Indeed, when a user presses the Accept button, this action is saved in the Disclaimer Users list. To make this happen, you need to configure the Disclaimer Users list so that intranet visitors can interact with it. To learn how to configure this list, read the [dedicated guide](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/other-configurations/configuration-of-favorites-lists-and-user-lists). In particular, please refer to the **First type of configuration** section. &#x20;

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Discussion and Project Groups

The component that simplifies the creation of standardized Teams groups from the SharePoint intranet.

## What is Discussion and Project Groups

This webpart allows you to have a **mirror of everyone's Teams groups**. Our component **integrates with Microsoft Teams**, the most widely used collaboration app in the company.

This helps reduce emails and **enables more effective collaboration** with colleagues through group chat and numerous real-time information sharing features.

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **Discussion and Project Groups** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/my-workplace/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the Discussion and Project Groups web part to a SharePoint page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part and you'll see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/l5ySSL5qOCO7zmUJPhxZ" alt="" data-size="line">&#x20;
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **Workspace** to quickly find and select the Discussion and Project Groups web part, which is named "IAI - Workspace".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/B6I04XMxrA1Q40audbWB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click the **Edit** **properties** <img src="/files/rmwZ2Uw2BdRVNzwm2N6Z" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options such as General settings, Layout settings, Profile settings, Department settings and Category settings. See below for more information on each of these options.

***

## Configuration

1. [General settings](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/discussion-and-project-groups#general-settings)
2. [Layout settings](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/discussion-and-project-groups#layout-settings)
3. [Profile settings](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/discussion-and-project-groups#profile-settings)
4. [Department settings](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/discussion-and-project-groups#department-settings)
5. [Category settings](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/discussion-and-project-groups#category-settings)

### General settings&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}

* If you're not in edit mode already, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Select the **Discussion and Project Groups** web part, then click **Edit properties** <img src="/files/voyfgw5rZyB0pv8spAzb" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left side of the web part.
  {% endhint %}

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/CKeUS2xPqLp7Lg20L9I9" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

As a first step, please **select which tabs you'd like to be shown** in the webpart or not:&#x20;

* **Projects**: this tab directly matches with each user's MS Teams. So everyone can quickly reach the Teams projects they're part of.
* **Groups**: this tab directly matches with each user's MS Teams. So everyone can quickly reach the Teams groups they belong to. &#x20;
* **Profile:** this tab is a link to the [My Profile](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/my-profile) area.

{% hint style="info" %}
If you're looking for how to **configure My Profile**, [**click here**](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/my-profile).&#x20;
{% endhint %}

* **Department:** you can decide whether to show or hide the Department tab. By clicking on the tab, you will open the link inserted in the [Department settings](#department-settings).
* **Write account email:** when this field is left blank, and users are allowed to create groups or projects via the Workspace web part, the user who creates the group or project will automatically be assigned as the owner of the group or project. Instead, if an email address is entered in this field, the specified account will be designated as the owner of the Teams group or project, even though users will still have the ability to create groups and projects autonomously.
* **Do you want to show the button for the groups creation:** this feature will allow you to show or hide the button for Project and Group creation. If you don't want users to create them, simply select No.

{% hint style="warning" %}
If users **don't have the permissions** to create new Teams groups, they should **deactivate** the button; otherwise, users will see the button, but when they try to create the Teams group, they **encounter an error**.
{% endhint %}

{% hint style="info" %}
In Microsoft Teams, Teams Projects are **specialized groups with preconfigured templates** for enhanced project management, including features like **meeting notes** and **Planner integration**. Our webpart distinguishes them from regular Teams Groups, which are used for general collaboration purposes. Teams Projects ensure organized and efficient project management, while regular Teams Groups are used for broader team communication and collaboration.
{% endhint %}

### Layout settings

Discussion and Project Groups allows you to **personalize the tabs** from the webpart. Also, it's possible to select a specific height of the webpart.

{% hint style="info" %}

* If you're not in edit mode already, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Select the **Discussion and Project Groups** web part, then click **Edit properties** <img src="/files/XYdxcWEApA8SLRbkSZQu" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left side of the web part.
  {% endhint %}

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/iqP95KJ3pFwQCCCnYLzu" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

This area will allow you to have a **personalized wording** for the tab to be shown in the webpart. You can both **edit them or leave them blank**. If you leave them blank, the default wordings to be shown in the webpart will be:&#x20;

* Projects&#x20;
* Groups
* Profile
* Department

As a last configuration for this area, you can decide the **heigh of the webpart**. By **default, it's 500px** - Minimum is 220px, maximum 2000px. This will allow you to align the webpart to other elements in the page if needed.&#x20;

### Profile Settings

Discussion and Project Groups allows you to have a **direct link to** [**My Profile**](https://intranet.ai/features/my-profile/) **area**.

{% hint style="info" %}

* If you're not in edit mode already, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Select the **Discussion and Project Groups** web part, then click **Edit properties** <img src="/files/mprYuS0lyAwfW51oML5V" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left side of the web part.
  {% endhint %}

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/C9RwXbZvrNfjUTIPx27W" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

This area simply require you to put a link, by clicking on the tab, the user will be redirected to the page you linked here.&#x20;

This area should redirect every user to the page where [My Profile](https://intranet.ai/features/my-profile/) webpart is set.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
To learn how to configure **My Profile**, [**click here**](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/my-profile).&#x20;
{% endhint %}

### Department settings

Discussion and Project Groups allows you to have a **direct link to the Department area**.

{% hint style="info" %}

* If you're not in edit mode already, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Select the **Discussion and Project Groups** web part, then click **Edit properties** <img src="/files/ISksSzvQ4ytUk84shdES" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left side of the web part.
  {% endhint %}

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/v2PuycA8e6Xthb5G2h3A" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### Category settings

This field allows you to **add a custom prefix to the created project**. The prefix is added to the mail of the created team and is used to identify projects. This field is optional; if you don't fill it in, the web part will automatically use the prefix "prj".&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}

* If you're not in edit mode already, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Select the **Discussion and Project Groups** web part, then click **Edit properties** <img src="/files/BSDHh8RWSaM7vqZY7Qqt" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left side of the web part.
  {% endhint %}

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/CRwhSTLoogKblLCso8Xu" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Once you're done with these configurations, **always remember to click Save as draft to have the preview. Once you're happy with the final result, click Republish to make the area visible for all the users in the SharePoint intranet**.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/0jDsq8gblBfbHuMrKS64" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Engagement Board

The web part that allows you to collect, vote, and share proposals with your colleagues.

## What is Engagement Board

Engagement Board is a web part designed to facilitate the **collection of ideas** within your organization. Thanks to this innovative solution, employees can take advantage of the **corporate intranet** to actively contribute **suggestions**, **proposals**, and **feedback**, creating a collaborative and stimulating environment.

Engagement Board functions as a **virtual bulletin board** where users can **post their ideas** and **vote on those of others**. The following steps describe the essential workings of the component:

* **Idea submission**: users can easily add new ideas by describing their content and objectives. They simply need to click the **Add** button **(1)**.
* **Approval**: an approval flow can be implemented so that ideas are published only after being approved by selected people.
* **Voting**: each user can vote for the ideas they find most valuable and promising. The number of likes (votes) is displayed on each post **(2)**.
* **Filtering**: ideas can be filtered and organized based on various criteria, such as the number of likes **(3)** or the category they belong to **(4)**.&#x20;
* **Leaderboard**: users who have proposed the most ideas are displayed on a leaderboard **(5)**, which further incentivizes participation.

<figure><img src="/files/YQVj8qEn5rmjSAha3nre" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

The use of Engagement Board brings numerous advantages to your organization, including:

* **Creativity encouragement**: it allows all intranet users to contribute their ideas, fostering a creative and innovative environment.
* **Employee engagement**: it increases the sense of belonging and involvement of employees, who feel they are an active part of the decision-making process.
* **Decision support**: it provides a solid basis for making informed and strategic decisions, thanks to the collection of feedback and the active participation of employees.

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **Engagement Board** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/engagement-board/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the Engagement Board web part to a SharePoint Page <a href="#add-the-instant-form-web-part-to-a-sharepoint-page" id="add-the-instant-form-web-part-to-a-sharepoint-page"></a>

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part and you'll see a line with a circled +, like this: ![](https://docs.intranet.ai/~gitbook/image?url=https%3A%2F%2F2718234637-files.gitbook.io%2F%7E%2Ffiles%2Fv0%2Fb%2Fgitbook-x-prod.appspot.com%2Fo%2Fspaces%252FriXlnuemuParrCf7Uotu%252Fuploads%252FccHplKgXfibd4tktmhas%252Fadvanced-search-2.png%3Falt%3Dmedia%26token%3D7d703967-c3f7-4125-834b-f695362bf90b\&width=40\&dpr=4\&quality=100\&sign=34b00d6f\&sv=2)
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **Engagement** to quickly find and select the Engagement Board web part, which is named "IAI - EngagementBoard".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/2VdYtO6ISEIhEJxKZd8d" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click on the **Edit** **properties** <img src="/files/jOvZCFj4AWA6thb7eUhJ" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options such as View settings, List settings, Filter settings, Display order and pagination settings, and Text settings. See below for more information on each of these sections.

***

## Configuration

1. [View settings](#view-settings)
2. [List settings](#list-settings)
3. [Filter settings](#filter-settings)
4. [Display order and pagination settings](#display-order-and-pagination-settings)
5. [Text settings](#text-settings)

### View settings

The view settings allow you to customize the appearance of your application by adjusting various layout settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/e0crL4cIh9rQvbxZn7X7" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By opening this first configuration, you will see the following options:

* **Do you want to hide the background?** You can choose to hide or display the webpart background The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a white background. If you enable this option, the white card background will be completely removed, allowing the content appear directly on the page. As a result, the webpart will be transparent, showing either the selected background image or the chosen SharePoint page color.
* **Do you want to hide the background shadow?** You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the webpart stand out more against the rest of the page. If you enable this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.
* **Select the type of background shadow**: if you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from High Contrast, Light, or Dark options.&#x20;
  * If you select High contrast, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.
  * By choosing the Light background shadow, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.
  * Finally, the Dark background shadow style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more.
* **Enter title of the application**: thanks to this configuration, you can customize the application title. If you keep it blank, SharePoint will show the default title “Engagement Board” at the top left angle of the webpart.
* **Do you want to hide the title?** Here you can select whether to show the webpart title or hide it. If set to visible, the web part title will appear on the left side.

### List settings

In this section you need to specify the lists from which the web part will retrieve information. Specifically, Engagement board relies on three SharePoint lists:

* **Engagement Posts**: this list stores the posts containing users' ideas.
* **Engagement Likes**: this list stores the likes given to the posts.
* **Engagement Categories**: this list is used by the intranet's administrators to create categories. To learn how to create categories, please read the [dedicated section](#create-categories-in-the-engagement-categories-list).

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/98VyDT8CVzGcTjVjxcnU" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/7OoILfM1QlF3Y5kDbNDA" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Enter the **URL of the site** where the **Engagement Posts** list is located.
* Select the **Engagement Posts** list from the drop-down menu.
* Enter the **URL of the site** where the **Engagement Likes** list is located.
* Select the **Engagement Likes** list from the drop-down menu.
* Enter the **URL of the site** where the **Engagement Categories** list is located.
* Select the **Engagement Categories** list from the drop-down menu.

Each post on the idea board appears as a **card** with the following information:

* The **title** of the idea;
* The **author** of the idea (this information can be hidden);
* The **publication date** (this information can be hidden);
* The **category**, identified by an **icon** (this information can be hidden);
* The number of **likes**;
* A **button** to **copy the link** to the post (this button can be hidden).

Clicking on the card opens a panel which shows the **description** of the idea. The description may include one or more **images**.

<figure><img src="/files/cp4ddPST4KO6g4mHZFOB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

This section of the property pane includes a number of settings to **hide** the following elements:

1. The **category name**;
2. The **category icon**;
3. The **author** of the post;
4. The **publication date**;
5. The **Copy link** button

<figure><img src="/files/bLeoHmXjlnSiXwRyG6Rw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Finally, you have three options to:

* **Enable image loading**: if you activate this option, users will be able to load pictures to better illustrate their ideas. As mentioned above, these images will appear in the description of the idea.
* **Set the maximum number of images** that can be uploaded: here you need to select a number **from 1 to 5**.
* **Show the "Category" field when adding a new item**: by enabling this feature, when you open the panel to create a new post, you will be able to insert the post into a category, otherwise there will be no need to associate a category to the created post.

### Filter settings

This section serves the main purpose of configuring filters and pre-filters.

{% hint style="info" %}

* If you're not in edit mode already, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Select the Engagement Board web part, then click **Edit web part** <img src="https://docs.intranet.ai/~gitbook/image?url=https%3A%2F%2F2718234637-files.gitbook.io%2F%7E%2Ffiles%2Fv0%2Fb%2Fgitbook-x-prod.appspot.com%2Fo%2Fspaces%252FriXlnuemuParrCf7Uotu%252Fuploads%252FifneHevoPoiqOf3I4qhG%252Fadvanced-search-4.png%3Falt%3Dmedia%26token%3D0f786f56-083c-4bea-9dfe-c278f007284d&#x26;width=41&#x26;dpr=4&#x26;quality=100&#x26;sign=31dac97c&#x26;sv=2" alt="" data-size="line"> on the left side of the Engagement Board web part.
  {% endhint %}

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/NXXGXS9AqIT33qEXSp1Q" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Firs of all, click on **Configure filters** and complete the panel as follows:

<figure><img src="/files/77VOL55OKir2YC3RRXaP" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Choose filter**: Category.
* **Enter custom filter name**: type the name of the filter, which will be displayed on the right side of the application.

> For example: "Category"

* Choose **whether to show the search field**: tick this box if you want to show a search bar in the drop-down menu of the filter. This search bar allows you to search for categories, so it is particularly useful if you have a significant number of categories, as it allows you to find them more quickly.
* Indicate **whether the filter is open by default**: here you can choose if the drop-down menu of the filter will be open or close by default. Tick this box if you want it to be open by default.

When the configuration is complete, click **Save** to close the panel.

Then, you can decide to:&#x20;

* **Hide filters**: if you enable this option, the **filter panel** won't be displayed.
* **Hide the ranking**: if you enable this option, the **leaderboard** won't be displayed.
* **Hide the Add button**: if you enable this option, the **Add** button won't be displayed.&#x20;

{% hint style="success" %}
This functionality may be useful in the following use case: imagine creating a themed idea board where users can submit ideas and suggestions during a specific time frame. Once the submission period ends, the **Add** button can be hidden. This prevents users from adding new ideas while still allowing them to view the board and interact with existing posts. This functionality is particularly useful for managing **time-sensitive initiatives or campaigns**.
{% endhint %}

Finally, you can configure a **pre-filter** to display only ideas that belong to a **specific category**. The steps to take are as follows:&#x20;

* **Choose the field for the pre-filter**: select **Category** from the drop-down menu.
* **Enter the value for the pre-filter**: type the **name of the category** you would like to display.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/8gSzB3oOO0hfATDjfqoR" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### Display order and pagination settings

In this section you can set the number of posts to display.

{% hint style="info" %}

* If you're not in edit mode already, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Select the Engagement Board web part, then click **Edit web part** <img src="https://docs.intranet.ai/~gitbook/image?url=https%3A%2F%2F2718234637-files.gitbook.io%2F%7E%2Ffiles%2Fv0%2Fb%2Fgitbook-x-prod.appspot.com%2Fo%2Fspaces%252FriXlnuemuParrCf7Uotu%252Fuploads%252FifneHevoPoiqOf3I4qhG%252Fadvanced-search-4.png%3Falt%3Dmedia%26token%3D0f786f56-083c-4bea-9dfe-c278f007284d&#x26;width=41&#x26;dpr=4&#x26;quality=100&#x26;sign=31dac97c&#x26;sv=2" alt="" data-size="line"> on the left side of the Engagement Board web part.
  {% endhint %}

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/2Dc9DN4Gd7XjvKOYcvMj" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Set the **number of ideas to display** by selecting a number **from 1 to 6**. Users will be able to view more posts by cliking the **Load more** button.

### Text settings

This section allows you to customize some labels of the web part.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/ANlDJVyLD9586KrrQ2uT" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Specifically, you can type a custom name for:&#x20;

* The **Add** button;&#x20;
* The **scoreboard**;
* The **All** button;
* The **Most voted** button.

When the configuration is complete, click on **Publish** or **Republish** to publish your changes.

***

## Submitting ideas: how does it work?

Intranet visitors can add new ideas to the board by clicking the **Add** button in the upper right corner of the application. Clicking the **Add** button opens the **Create new** panel, with a number of fields to fill in. The fields marked with an **asterisk (\*)** are **mandatory.**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/rpCkAIiJXWO69wppHMEm" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Insert title**: here the user is asked to type the title of the post.
* **Insert description**: the user can use this field to describe their idea more in detail.
* **Select category**: a category must be selected from the drop-down menu, which displays the categories previously created by the intranet's administrators. To learn how to create categories, please read the [dedicated section](#create-categories-in-the-engagement-categories-list).
* **Upload image**: if this option is enabled, the user can upload one ore more images to better illustrate their suggestion.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/3uDgMsc4t7cPyHgYHH3E" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

After completing the panel, the user needs to click on **Submit**. If an approval flow has been implemented, the idea won't be added to the board until it is approved. Otherwise, it will immediately be displayed on the board. For further information on the approval flow, please read the [dedicated section](#implement-an-approval-flow).

***

## Create categories in the **Engagement Categories list**

This section explains how to add categories to the **Engagement Categories** list.

* First of all, click on the **Settings** icon at the top right of the page, then click on **Site contents**.
* Scroll down and select the list named **Engagement Categories**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/uXCzYaXrn39aH7WlRRsu" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* To add a new category, click on **+ Add new item**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/tor52ZojRwvlo3Lesv11" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Fill in the **Title** field with the **name of the category**. This is the only **mandatory** field, as indicated by the asterisk.
* If you have created a custom icon and uploaded it to SharePoint, complete the **IconUrl** field with the picture URL.

{% hint style="info" %}
To create the icon URL, follow these steps:&#x20;

1. Access the folder where you have uploaded the image. Usually, pictures are uploaded to the **Site Assets** document library.
2. Select the picture.&#x20;
3. Click on the **Info** icon at the top right of the screen.
4. Click on the **Path** icon to copy the URL of the icon.&#x20;
5. Finally, paste the **icon URL** into the required field.&#x20;
   {% endhint %}

* Alternatively, you can choose an icon from [this library](https://developer.microsoft.com/en-us/fluentui#/styles/web/icons) and fill in the **IconName** field with the name of the selected icon.

When you have completed the panel, click on **Save**.

***

## Implement an approval flow

As mentioned previously, an approval flow can be implemented so that ideas are added to the board only after being approved by selected people. To add this flow, two actions are required:

**1)** Create the flow manually with **Power Automate**;

**2)** Configure the **Engagement Posts** list by **changing the** **default value** of the **Approved** field. By default, the default value of this field is **Yes**: in this case, you need to change the defealt value to **No**. To do so, take the following steps:&#x20;

* Click on the **Settings** icon at the top right of the page, then click on **Site contents**.
* Scroll down and select the list named **Engagement Posts**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/yKSKZl2gjdg4Ys9OTOSX" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Select the **Approved** column and click on **Column settings > Edit**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/AdV9FwFvAkE4BRTj6Fy0" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Change the default value **from Yes to No**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/ee3XOJdbDVzqqBxUo2ik" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click on **Save**.

***

## Configure the Engagement Posts and Engagement Likes lists

The **Engagement Posts** and **Engagement Likes** lists require a **specific configuration** so that intranet visitors can interact with the idea board. To learn how to configure these lists, read the [dedicated guide](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/other-configurations/configuration-of-favorites-lists-and-user-lists). In particular, please refer to the **Second type of configuration** section.

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Event Calendar

The shared calendar for organizing and promoting company events on the SharePoint intranet.

## What is Event Calendar

Event Calendar assists you in **organizing and promoting events, initiatives, and meetings** on your SharePoint Online intranet. Whenever an event is scheduled on the calendar, the integrated **push notification system** notifies users with a personalized message on Microsoft Teams. Users simply need to click on the notification to access the event page on the intranet.

{% hint style="info" %}
For further information about notification groups, please refer to our guide [Creation and maintenance for push notifications](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/creation-and-maintenance-for-push-notifications).
{% endhint %}

Event Calendar allows you to:

* Communicate **corporate closures**
* Promote **events** and **initiatives**
* Publish **deadlines**

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **Event Calendar** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/business-calendar/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the Event Calendar web part to a SharePoint page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click on **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part. You will see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/l5ySSL5qOCO7zmUJPhxZ" alt="" data-size="line">.&#x20;
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **Events** to quickly find and select the Event Calendar web part, which is named "IAI - Events".

<div align="left"><img src="/files/nqirlEzcs4lnchfLtDUm" alt="" width="545"></div>

* Click on the **Edit properties** <img src="/files/lurqYyNJjaOXJgy1mRCh" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane, which includes the following sections: Layout settings, Data Sources, General Settings, Display settings, Horizontal display settings, Compact display settings and Compact details display settings. See below for more information on each of these sections.

***

## Configuration

1. [Layout settings](#layout-settings)
2. [Data sources](#data-sources)
3. [General settings](#general-settings)
4. [Display settings](#display-settings)
5. [Horizontal display settings](#horizontal-display-settings)
6. [Compact display settings](#compact-display-settings)
7. [Compact details display settings](#compact-details-display-settings)

### Layout settings

The layout settings allow you to customize the appearance of your application by adjusting various layout settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/enDuCNkNSI3MyvYdIbw0" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By opening this first configuration, you will see the following options:

* **Do you want to hide the background?** You can choose to hide or display the webpart background. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a white background. If you enable this option, the white card background will be completely removed, allowing the content appear directly on the page. As a result, the webpart will be transparent, showing either the selected background image or the chosen SharePoint page color.
* **Do you want to hide the shadow?** You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the webpart stand out more against the rest of the page. If you enable this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.
* **Select the type of shadow you want to use**: if you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from High Contrast, Light, or Dark options.
  * If you select **High contrast**, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.
  * By choosing the **Light background** shadow, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.
  * Finally, the **Dark background** shadow style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more.
* **Do you want to hide the title?** Here you can select whether to show the webpart title or hide it. If set to visible, the web part title will appear on the left side.
* **Enter the title of the application**: thanks to this configuration, you can customize the application title. If you keep it blank, SharePoint will show the default title “Events” at the top left angle of the webpart.
* **Choose the view**: you can choose from three layouts: **Horizontal, Compact,** and **Compact with details**. Depending on your selection, a corresponding setting will appear under Display settings to configure the chosen layout. for example: **Horizontal display settings, Compact display settings,** **Compact with details display settings,** or **Events only display settings**.

All available layouts are shown below. If you select the **Compact** layout, you can choose to view events with a **slider** or a **list** (see pictures below).

<figure><img src="/files/laAz0vUEXrW4srzkRJNb" alt=""><figcaption><p>Horizontal layout</p></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/Qbswu0ac7Pja40jWCUqQ" alt=""><figcaption><p>Compact layout with a slider</p></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/MeaQyqzHWwUgzb3Tdgik" alt=""><figcaption><p>Compact layout with a list</p></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/YWWtjN7D4RNwq0EM7uYC" alt=""><figcaption><p>Compact with details layout</p></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/bbO7Nm3SRmalPdOmYN5i" alt=""><figcaption><p>Default event highlighted: slider</p></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/nkeFo8OE6wd7otPYjqoT" alt=""><figcaption><p>Default event highlighted: list</p></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/GuqhtMMbw28A2sTlT71O" alt=""><figcaption><p>Next event highlighted: slider</p></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/tR59tj2Un8qi1z41FqfC" alt=""><figcaption><p>Next event highlighted: list</p></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/2oPufl2UKINOrfD9PGtZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Data sources

In this section, you need to indicate the sources from which the web part will retrieve information. Event Calendar can display events from multiple Events lists. SharePoint Events lists are calendar-shaped lists collecting events.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/bckCNUKHYq7C1bquRazi" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Event lists configuration**: click on “**Configure**” to configure one or more Events lists.

<figure><img src="/files/KXPHDlkj0mdTprTYGQ0l" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* Complete the configuration pane as follows:

  o   Enter the URL of the site where the Events list is located.

  o   Enter the list URL in the required format (/sites/site/Lists/List, e.g., /sites/iai-demo- saas/Lists/Events). The Events list of the current site is added by default.

  o   To add more lists, click the + symbol on the right and repeat the same steps.

When the configuration is complete, click **Save**.&#x20;

* **Enter category site url**: enter the URL of the site where the category list is located. This allows you to assign a category to the event.
* **Select category list**: select **Event categories** from the drop-down menu.

### General settings

Thanks to this configuration, you can decide the number of events to display in the slider of events, as well as whether to show or hide the event description.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/oeEfUhx3HJdCxgA1ELKf" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **You can also choose whether to show or hide the event description.** To view the description, click on the event itself — a pop-up will appear displaying the event details.
* Additionally, by enabling the **Filter by audience** property, events will be filtered by recipient groups.

<figure><img src="/files/O8TbzEGSfnEsANWU2nyc" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Display settings

In this section, you will find a number of options to customize the layout of your calendar.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/N8SLmmZRW3R4RnogmxPl" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Do you want to show the site name?** Choose whether the web part will display the s**ource site** name. The screenshot below offers an example.
* **Do you want to show the list name?** Choose whether the web part will display the **source list** name. The screenshot below offers an example.

<figure><img src="/files/MS77AH3jrcU7YD98ByWz" alt=""><figcaption><p>INTRANET is the source site. Events is the source list.</p></figcaption></figure>

* **Choose to highlight the default event or the next event**: you can also choose to highlight the default event or the next event. If you choose the former option, a colored circle will highlight the default event. The slider will show only the default event, while the list will show all the events of the month. If you choose the latter option, a colored circle will highlight the next event. The slider will show only the next event, while the list will highlight the next event and the following ones; if you want to see the previous events, you need to scroll up.

### Horizontal display settings

In this section, you can decide whether to show the legend within the webpart or to hide it. You can also customize the legend button name.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/68wx3eu7mSEMVPl67utZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

**Here is the result with the legend**:

<figure><img src="/files/dJ7TmPAX95KwkG984j4D" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Do you want to customize the color of the current day in case of an event?** You can select a specific color for the current day in case of an event.

### Compact display settings

Thanks to this configuration, you can customize the display of the selected layout—for example, by marking holiday colors or setting a custom name for the legend button.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/8bMRVK4UwW8HDMU2lkke" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Show legend?** You can decide whether to show the legend within the webpart or to hide it.
* **Enter legend button name**: you can also customize the legend button name.
* **Choose to view events with a slider or a list**: you can choose to view events with a slider or a list (see pictures below)

<figure><img src="/files/teyNnbGxVHa9QuqVXZIi" alt=""><figcaption><p>Event: list</p></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/LrE3vInMA3EBv9UB96o1" alt=""><figcaption><p>Event: slider</p></figcaption></figure>

* **Choose if the Sunday should be marked as a working day or a holiday**:
  &#x20;regarding holidays, Sundays will not be automatically highlighted as non-working days. This function allows you to choose whether to show Sunday as a working day or a holiday.

### Compact details display settings

In this section, you can customize the colors of the calendar as you prefer, extending the calendar view, but also activating the scroll for the description of the event.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/L6JMPWVKRqJ0qyNlcPyB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Customize the colors?** You can select a specific color for the current day in case of an event.
* **Enable extended calendar view?** You can enable the extended view, which specifically applies to the Compact with details layout. This option (which works only in 1/1 and 2/3 sections) provides a cleaner layout when there is more than one event on the same day.
* **Do you want to activate the scroll for info?** If you select the **Compact with details** layout, you also have the possibility of activating a scroll bar for the information box. If you **enable** this option, the possibility of setting the **height** of the info section becomes available. This means that you can set a fixed height for this section and use the scroll bar to read its content. This may be useful when you have long descriptions and you don't want this section to take up too much space.

Here is the result of **scrolling through the event's description**:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/b7VEVPpK0s0hD5KeTsSj" alt="" width="448"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### Evens Only display settings

In this section, you can display only the events included in the web part. This way, event previews will appear without the calendar.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/2oPufl2UKINOrfD9PGtZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

**Do you want to show the next event?** You can select the option in the dedicated tab:&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/6CA6OoqVrQO6vZaPhB4k" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

In the section dedicated to the ‘Events Only’ display settings, you will find additional options to enhance the view.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/LYEG24UDFo5kT2Bk3EgE" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Show legend?** You can decide whether to show the legend within the webpart or to hide it.
* **Enter legend button name**: you can also customize the legend button name.
* **Show "All events" button:** with this option, you can choose whether to display all published events.
* **Open all events in a new tab**: you can choose to display the button that opens events in the dedicated page. This layout allows you to keep the ‘Events Only’ web part on a content page as a preview, and then have a detailed page where you can use other calendar views that show both days and events.
* **"All events" button text**: you can customize the button to show all events.
* **"All events" button link:** if you have selected the option to open all events in a new tab, you can use this field to enter the URL of the detail page that contains the calendar in its full view.

**Here is the result with the next event selected, the legend and "All evens" button:**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/aw63xy4sOWoPUSQESOk6" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

***

## Create a company event

To create a new event, take the following steps:&#x20;

* Click on the **Settings** icon on the top right of the page, then click on **Site contents**.

<div align="left"><img src="/files/kSeQJrC1dWjE3ttm19Sr" alt=""></div>

* Scroll down and select the **Events** list.

<div align="left"><img src="/files/KGuYlJK4rRf1hhZGRyI9" alt=""></div>

* When you click on the list, a calendar will appear. Choose the **event day** and click on **+ Add**.

<div align="left"><img src="/files/s3mJNbag1remOitGC4VZ" alt=""></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/nHXuhK8gRihyRmhy9EH2" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* The following panel will appear. The fields marked with **asterisks** are the **mandatory** ones.

<div align="left"><img src="/files/gJwWgqGUhaEcfKeJRnGM" alt="" width="474"></div>

* **Title**: write the title of the event.

> For example: Bank holiday, Corporate convention, Webinar

* **Location:** write the location of the event.&#x20;
* **Start Time**: enter the start time of the event.
* **End Time**: enter the end time of the even&#x74;**.**&#x20;
* **Description**: here you can write information and details about the event. This is the description that you will view by clicking on the Info icon ([see above](#layout-settings)).
* Category:&#x20;
* **All Day Event**: if the event does not start or end at a specific hour, you can mark it as an all-day activity by flagging this box.&#x20;
* **Recurrence**: you can indicate that the event is a repeating one by flagging this box.
* **Disable notification**: you can disable Teams notifications by flagging this box. If you keep notifications enabled, users will be notified via Teams whenever a new event is published.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
For further information about notification groups, please refer to our guide [Creation and maintenance for push notifications](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/creation-and-maintenance-for-push-notifications).
{% endhint %}

* **Audience**: this field allows you to make the event visibile only to a specific group of people. If you leave this field empty, the event will be visible to the whole intranet population.
* **Notification date**: by default, users are notified via Teams when a new event is published, but if you do not want the notification date to correspond to the publication date, you can enter a specific date in this field.&#x20;
* **Category**: here you can assign a category to the event, which will be identified by a specific icon ([see below](#create-event-categories)).
* **Language**: this field only concerns **multilingual intranets**. Click on the tag icon on the right side of the field, select a **Content Language** to localize the event, press Select and then OK.
* The **Compact with details layout** allows you to **display a picture in the event details** (see below for an example). If you want to include a picture, please click on **Attach File** in the top bar, and then on **Choose File** to upload an image from your computer. After having uploaded the image, click on OK.&#x20;

<div><figure><img src="/files/LzK5nDyqaieujFMf8jWR" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/MqDXOSBLwCBFAcm13E18" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Once you have completed the configuration, remember to click on **Save**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/s4GjWv6D95tH9BCXxeky" alt=""><figcaption><p>Picture in the event details (only supported by the Compact with details layout) </p></figcaption></figure></div>

***

## Create event categories

You can customize an event by adding a **category** associated with a specific **icon**.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/t7pvMeTIMuC3gm1hyrP9" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

To create a category, take the following steps:&#x20;

* Click on the **Settings** icon on the top right of the page, then click on **Site contents**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/kSeQJrC1dWjE3ttm19Sr" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Select the **Event** **categories** list.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/qDWYeQIj7ZE9ctqLuoeH" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click on **+New**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/8WkitSmO7ur8AP8X4JJI" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* A panel will appear with a number of fields to fill in.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/baQpMBWBxQStRIxeIdZz" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Title**: enter a title for your category.
* **Icon Url**: copy-paste the URL of the icon you have chosen to illustrate your category. This should be a picture previously saved on SharePoint.
* Click on Save.

To create the icon URL, follow these steps:

* Upload the picture to the Site Assets folder in the Site contents (or any other folder on your intranet).
* In the Sites Assets document library, select the picture.&#x20;
* Click on the Info icon at the top right of the screen.
* Click on the **Path icon** to copy the URL of the icon.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/GxVJSKlri1lYsKUq4wA9" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Finally, paste the icon URL into the required field.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/wN1qm76T8JkXLjHHpNb5" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# FAQs

The web part that collects, publishes, and indexes in search the answers to frequently asked questions within the SharePoint intranet.

## What is FAQs

FAQs enhances the user experience by **presenting frequently asked questions in a smart and user-friendly format**. Users can access concise answers, valuable resources, and instructions for infrequently performed procedures through the FAQs section.

You can view questions and answers in a user-friendly format, facilitated by a **filtering system** that makes it easy to gather questions on a specific topic. Additionally, you have the option to **bookmark your favorite questions**, ensuring quick access to your personalized FAQs.

Our FAQ pages are integrated with [Advanced Search](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/advanced-search), allowing users to **find answers to their questions within seconds.**

Our FAQs are also integrated with[ Intranet Analytics](https://intranet.ai/features/intranet-analytics/), allowing you to **monitor the most frequently asked questions** within the SharePoint intranet. This integration enhances your understanding of the most sought-after information. The data analysis component offers **valuable insights**, contributing to the **continuous improvement of both the portal and business processes**.

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **FAQs** by [**clicking here** ](https://intranet.ai/features/company-faq-page/)to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the FAQs web part to a SharePoint page&#x20;

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part and you'll see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/l5ySSL5qOCO7zmUJPhxZ" alt="" data-size="line">&#x20;
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **FAQ** to quickly find and select the FAQs web part, which is named "IAI - FAQ".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/TW4uAaHxW2aZTm53UpUV" alt="" width="447"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click the **Edit** **properties** <img src="/files/3NusM7PyGy6CtExLVX0e" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options such as Layout settings, Data sources, Filter settings, General settings, Display settings settings and Fields settings. See below for more information on each of these options.

> You can create as many FAQ lists and FAQ areas as you like. For example,  you can divide your FAQs by department or by topic, and create specific pages with specific FAQ lists.

***

## Configuration

1. [Layout settings](#list-settings)
2. [Data sources](#data-sources)
3. [Filter settings](#filter-settings)
4. [General settings](#general-settings)
5. [Display settings](#display-settings)
6. [Fields settings](#fields-settings)

### Layout settings <a href="#list-settings" id="list-settings"></a>

The layout settings allow you to customize the appearance of your application by adjusting various layout settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/rZ2gEMtGyYTQv5BOG8ZG" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By opening this first configuration, you will see the following options:

* **Do you want to hide the background?** You can choose to hide or display the webpart background The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a white background. If you enable this option, the white card background will be completely removed, allowing the content appear directly on the page. As a result, the webpart will be transparent, showing either the selected background image or the chosen SharePoint page color.
* **Do you want to hide the shadow?** You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the webpart stand out more against the rest of the page. If you enable this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.
* **Select the type of shadow you want to use**: if you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from High Contrast, Light, or Dark options.
  * If you select **High contrast**, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.
  * By choosing the **Light background shadow**, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.
  * Finally, the **Dark background shadow** style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more.
* **Do you want to hide the title?** Here you can select whether to show the webpart title or hide it. If set to visible, the web part title will appear on the left side.
* **Enter the title of the application**: thanks to this configuration, you can customize the application title. If you keep it blank, SharePoint will show the default title “FAQ” at the top left angle of the webpart.

### Data sources

This section allows the webpart to take elements from the selected lists.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/nzctijoMIKfwTF2fbKlu" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* In the first fields, you need to paste the URL of your intranet site and the select the **FAQ list** you want to display in the web part.
* You need to do the same in the next two fields: copy paste the URL of your intranet site and select the **favorites list** associated to the FAQ list just chosen.

### Filter settings

This section is divided into two sub-sections.

1. The **prefilter configurator** allows you to show only FAQs that belong to specific categories.
2. The **filter configurator** allows you to add filters to the web part to help users find information quickly. These filters are used to categorize FAQs.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/KrChzYKahatY7VYf8m49" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

1. **Open the prefilter configurator**: click on **Configure prefilters** and a dialog box will open with two fields to fill in:

<figure><img src="/files/zHGWWDXB8erUC5gUBgHc" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* In the **first** box, you need to choose the filter: select the single option, **Categories**.
* In the **second** box, you need to insert the categories you want to show, divided by the | symbol. For example: TFR|Injury.

> In this example, only the FAQs related to the selected topics (TFR and Injury) are shown in the web part:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/9wKDSyEJrCrJD9GSUEJV" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

2. **Open filter configurator:** click on **Configure filters** and a dialog box will open with a few fields to fill in:

<figure><img src="/files/zvDE9CDveSluOhbeWXX9" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* In the first box, you need to choose the filter: select the single option, **Categories**.
* In the second box, you can **customize** the name of the filter.

> For example: Categories, Typologies, Topics.

* With the third option, you can choose to show the **search bar** inside the filters (this is interesting when there are a lot of filters).
* Finally, with the fourth option, you can choose to display the filter box open or close by default.

Here’s an example of the filter box opened by default with the search bar:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/hqijkR1s9i1mUYGYUi9G" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Hide filters**: you can choose whether to show or hide the filters on the right side of the web part.

### General settings

These settings allow you to choose the number of FAQs to display inside the web part.

In these settings, you’re asked to:

* Select the number of FAQs you’d like to display as a preview.
* Select the sorting logic: you can decide to sort FAQs by title (i.e., alphabetically), or by the Order field. The Order field is an entry required while putting FAQs in the dedicated list (more information is available in the [final section of this guide](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/components/faqs#configuration)). If you enable this option, FAQs will be displayed according to the specific order you have selected while filling out the list.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Pq1nvoAKflAuC4zgjIAf" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### Display settings

Thanks to this section, you can customize the favorite section for your selected FAQs. You should fill in some configuration such as the name of the section, the name for opening other faqs and more.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/GGXCV7T19BmzS2FIPvzF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Favorite section name**: here you can customize the name of the Favorite section. If you leave this field empty, the web part will use the default name, which is “Only favorites”.
* **Section name all FAQs**: here you can customize the name of the section containing all the FAQs. If you leave this field empty, the web part will use the default name, which is “All FAQs”
* **Enter text for the button to see other faqs**: choose the name for the button regarding loading other faqs
* **Set the button to load more faqs or to open a link?** Here two options are available:
  * You can decide to load additional FAQs or redirect users to a specific link.
  * If you choose the second option, another configuration is needed, which is inserting the URL to open when clicking the button.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/yv09aKjEn307tLbVlMiV" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Finally, you can choose whether to open the link on the same page or on a new one.
* **Show the last modified item**: you can choose to include a section named "Last modified" in the Favorites drop-down menu. This filter will allow you to display recently updated questions.

### Fields settings

These settings allow you to customize some of the web part's fields and link the various FAQ list columns to the web part.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/1txqivnSFjAsonoBptWL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* For the first fields, you need to select the fields to refer to: by clicking the several dropdowns, you’ll be asked to select between one or two entries. For the Question, please select **Question**. For the Answer, please select **Answer**. For the Categories, choose **Categories**. For the Order, select **Order**, and for the Last modified, choose **Last Modified**.

{% hint style="info" %}
Once you’re done with this quick configuration, please always remember to click on **Republish** to save what you’ve done right now.
{% endhint %}

The web part is composed of the following elements:

* A **number of boxes containing the questions**. Each card features a star icon which can be clicked to add the respective FAQ to the favorites list. If you click on a box, another box will appear showing the answer. This box also features a button allowing you to mark a FAQ as favorite.
* A **search bar** which allows you to quickly find FAQs.
* The **Favorites filter**, which is composed of two or three sections: the Favorite section, the All FAQs section and the Last modified section, if you have decided to show it.
* The **Categories filter**, which allows you to filter FAQs by category.

<figure><img src="/files/szehTRR24QXK1xnadlDB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

***

## Create FAQ categories and add new elements to the FAQ list

This section will show you how to create FAQ categories inside your FAQ list, as well as how to add new items (question-answers) to the list.

* First, click on **Site Contents**.

<figure><img src="/files/7UWe2Mtr7IHqoxmK8LDx" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* Then please scroll down until the **FAQ list** and click on it:

<figure><img src="/files/EFRjhvrK4wgqopJ38WOx" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* You’ll see an empty list, the first step is to create FAQs categories: please click on **Categories > Column Settings > Edit:**

<figure><img src="/files/4BoIiTqWpqvdsU0bLZrZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

A sidebar will appear on the right side of the page.

* To add a new filter, please click on **+Add Choice**.
* Then write the filters you’d like to consider for the FAQs. Once you’re done, please click on **Save**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/UqDuEkis3e1IDbrKPIXB" alt="" width="199"><figcaption></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/XZPiJz5vtS7eyuJsd3yZ" alt="" width="196"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Now, let’s add the FAQs, by clicking on **+New** on the top right of the page:

<figure><img src="/files/dhdvg39MW0415zQ2HZkC" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* Once you click the New button, a sidebar will appear on the right, with the following fields to be filled in:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/zW60DjtPt7NPHntvYYv1" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Question**: write the question that the user will see.
* **Answer**: write the answer to the question you are asking.
* **Categories**: choose one of the categories you created earlier.
* **Order**: this field corresponds to the sorting logic. You need to fill it in if you want to set a specific display order. Also, while configuring the [Display order settings](#display-order-settings) of the web part, you need to activate the option for sorting the FAQs according to the Order field.

> For example, if you want an important FAQ to be shown first, you need to enter number 1 in the Order field.

* &#x20;**Last Modified**: indicate the date and time when you’re creating the FAQ.
* Once you’re done, please click on **Save**.

{% hint style="info" %}
You can also add new elements using the **grid view**. This allows you to copy-paste more elements as in an Excel file and save time. Once you've finished adding items to the list, don't forget to click on **Exit grid view**.
{% endhint %}

***

## Configure the Faq favorites list

The Faq favorites list requires a **specific configuration** so that users can **interact with the list** and **mark FAQs as favorites**. To learn how to configure this list, read the [dedicated guide](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/other-configurations/configuration-of-favorites-lists-and-user-lists). In particular, please refer to the **First type of configuration** section. &#x20;

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Graphic Buttons

The component to highlight key contents and enhance the SharePoint site's aesthetics.

## What is Graphic Buttons

Graphic Buttons is a **dynamic and visually appealing web part** designed to **attract the user's attention** and **enhance user engagement**. The component allows you to create **customizable buttons** with **eye-catching graphics** and **intuitive functionality**. The **key features** of Graphic Buttons include:&#x20;

* **Customizable design**: you can add images to your buttons for enhanced visual appeal and recognition, as well as customize the color of the title.
* **Easy navigation**: you can link your buttons to any internal or external URL, making it simple for users to navigate to important pages, documents, or resources. You can also configure buttons to open links in the same tab or a new tab.
* **Interactive elements**: the web part includes hover effects and animations to create a more interactive and engaging user experience.

The Graphic Buttons web part can be used to **present company values**, **promote significant initiatives**, or **highlight important actions**, such as registering for events, submitting forms, or downloading materials.  &#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **Graphic Buttons** by [**clicking here** ](https://intranet.ai/features/graphical-buttons/)to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the Graphic Buttons web part to a SharePoint page&#x20;

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part and you'll see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/l5ySSL5qOCO7zmUJPhxZ" alt="" data-size="line">&#x20;
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **Graphic** to quickly find and select the Graphic Buttons web part, which is named "IAI - GraphicButtons".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/T1eYS8d364X6Qtr8zK8U" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click on the **Edit** **properties** <img src="/files/UKH32A0IwtovbkWwNCiO" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options such as General settings, Photo settings, and Display settings. See below for more information on each of these sections.

***

## Configuration

1. [View settings](#view-settings)
2. [General settings](#general-settings)
3. [Photo settings](#photo-settings)
4. [Display settings](#display-settings)

### View settings

The view settings allows you to customize the appearance of your application by adjusting various layout settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/OUZ81c5Q1Ewc0N1HkvBt" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By opening this first configuration, you will see the following options:

* **Do you want to hide the background?**\
  You can choose to hide or display the webpart background The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a white background. If you enable this option, the white card background will be completely removed, allowing the content appear directly on the page. As a result, the webpart will be transparent, showing either the selected background image or the chosen SharePoint page color.
* **Do you want to hide the background shadow?**\
  You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the webpart stand out more against the rest of the page. If you enable this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.
* **Select the type of background shadow**\
  If you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from High Contrast, Light, or Dark options.
  * If you select **High contrast**, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.
  * By choosing the **Light background** shadow, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.
  * Finally, the **Dark background** shadow style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more.
* **Do you want to hide the title?**\
  Here you can select whether to show the webpart title or hide it. If set to visible, the web part title will appear on the left side.
* **Enter the application title**\
  Thanks to this configuration, you can customize the application title. If you keep it blank, SharePoint will show the default title “Graphic buttons” at the top left angle of the webpart.

### General settings

In this section, you need to specify the list which serves as data source for this web part.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/QuxmfdNaqHvDFqnXAHTE" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Enter the site URL**: enter the **URL of the site** where the list is located.&#x20;
* **Select the list where to take photos**: select the **Graphic buttons list** from the drop-down menu, which shows you all the lists available on the site.&#x20;

### Photo settings

As mentioned above, you can associate each button to an internal or an external link, so that it takes you to a page, a document, or a resource. In this section, you can **decide whether to open the links in a new page**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/DRk0ApbwdjQ3b3Wlw1Qk" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

The **default option** is **No**, but you can switch it to **Yes**. This way, each link will be opened in a new page.

### Display settings

In this section, you can set a number of display options.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/9ARkfiInXw90FdyvXtli" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Do you want to activate scrolling?** If you activate this option, a **scrollbar** appears on the right-hand side of the web part. If you select **Yes**, the **Enter webpart height** option becomes available, which means that you can choose the height of the web part. This way, you can set a fixed height and scroll up and down to see contents. This may be useful if you have a lot of buttons and you don't want the web part to take up much space.
* **Enter webpart height**: as described above, this option allows you to **choose the height of the web part**, which is measured in pixels.
* **Do you want to turn off the entrance animation?** By default, the web part includes an entrance animation, but you can deactivate it with this option.

***

## Fill in the Graphic buttons list

As explained above, the Graphic Buttons web part retrieves information from the Graphic buttons list. This section describes the steps to fill in the Graphic buttons list.

* First of all, click on the **Settings** icon on the top right of the page, then click on **Site contents**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/FEvdzNMogwiDuA9okVQO" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Scroll down and select the **Graphic buttons** list.

<figure><img src="/files/dtBw5x2rUSyeXUID14va" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* When you click on **New**, a panel appears with a number of fields to fill in. The fields marked with **asterisks** are the **mandatory** ones.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/aBCz7wC8XYqaE4MregOo" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Title**: enter the title of the button.
* **Order**: enter a **number** to decide the order in which your buttons will appear.
* **Url**: enter the **link to the page or resource** that will be opened by clicking on the button. In this example, the field contains the URL of a video.
* **Title position**: choose the title position from the drop-down menu, which includes two options: **top** or **bottom**.
* **Card size**: choose the button size from the drop-down menu, which includes three options: **small**, **medium** or **large**.
* **Short description**: here you can write short description. You will see the description when mousing over the card.
* **Image**: **upload the picture** that will be displayed on the card.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/gS6RmM4d1k5wkbCZ6DEO" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Visible**: **tick the checkbox** to make the button visible.
* **Subtitle**: here you can enter an **optional subtitle**. The subtitle will appear under the title.&#x20;
* **Title color**: thanks to this field, you can **customize the color of the title**. By default, the title is white, but you can enter the name of a different color here. Please refer to this [list of HTML color names](https://www.w3schools.com/colors/colors_names.asp).&#x20;

When you're done, click on **Save**.

You can add as many buttons as you like. The example below is taken from a departmental page: here, five Graphic Buttons are used to present the values of the department in an attractive way.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/scgBLpFHhpot1L4GcfZI" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Graphic Dividers

The component that helps you differentiate intranet content by extending the shape and color of a SharePoint page sections.

## What is Graphic Dividers

Graphic Dividers is a feature that allows you to create **dividers** not only in **different colors** but also with **shapes** like the triangle, the wave, the angle and the swift tail. These shapes can **add motion** to your SharePoint pages and provide them with a **stylish touch**, making them even more appealing.

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai features by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the Graphic Dividers web part to a SharePoint page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part and you'll see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/l5ySSL5qOCO7zmUJPhxZ" alt="" data-size="line">&#x20;
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **IAI - Divider** to quickly find and select the Graphic Dividers web part, which is named "IAI - Divider".

{% hint style="info" %}
We recommend using the divider in a full-width section to ensure it covers the entire page width.
{% endhint %}

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/aTpOl6OJxnAGCiuXVkYv" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click on the **Edit** properties <img src="/files/RcBkkQxxDmQaslBQybX5" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane, where you will have a few sections to configure. See below for more information on each of these sections.

***

## Configuration

1. [Layout settings](#layout-settings)
2. [Triangle settings](#triangle-settings)
3. [Wave settings](#wave-settings)
4. [Angle settings (Trapezoidal shape)](#angle-settings-trapezoidal-shape)
5. [Swift Tail settings](#swift-tail-settings)

### **Layout settings**

* **Choose a layout**: in this section, you can choose the divider layout from the drop-down menu. Your options include triangle, wave, trapezoidal shape (angle) and swift tail.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/6RYJLNftrqaBLv7saX2v" alt="" width="375"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Choose divider**: here you can select the divider color by simply moving the circle on the color palette or by entering the hexadecimal and/or RGB code.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Use6AjDGXPqC7NRK7Lbg" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Choose background color**: here you can select the background color by simply moving the circle on the color palette or by entering the hexadecimal and/or RGB code.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/wbmsDYnCtqYaK6upnuyH" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Webpart height**: by adjusting the slider within the bar, you can choose the divider thickness. The thickness will depend on how prominently you want the chosen layout effect to be visiblei

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/KZft9vAlCGG8Alb78aRK" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### **Triangle settings**

* **Edit the tip direction:** here you can decide whether to change the direction of the tip (if you have chosen the triangle layout). If you enable **Yes**, you will have the option to **select the tip direction** by moving within the bar.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/I1ZYMDDIxPWjkTd7qSJu" alt="" width="375"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### **Wave settings**

* **Choose the wave**: you can choose the desired wave effect by moving within the bar.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/mIllzwQh62ER3NbK13IK" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### **Angle settings (**&#x74;rapezoidal shape)

* **Trapezoidal direction:** here you can decide the direction of the trapezoid angle. By default, it is set to the right, but you can enable the button to orient it to the left.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/fdSuOqVcZcIyKeAyi0rs" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### Swift Tail settings

* **Edit the tip direction:** here you can decide whether to change the direction of the tip. You will have the option to **select the tip direction** by moving within the bar.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/z4pVsa4JP616lAsd97lg" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

***

## Create a colored divider line

The Graphic Dividers web part can also be used to create a colored divider line. In this case, we suggest creating a **section that is not full-width** and adding our graphic divider web part as [described at the beginning](#add-the-graphic-dividers-web-part-to-a-page) of this guide.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/aTpOl6OJxnAGCiuXVkYv" alt="" width="375"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Once the web part is added, **choose any of the layouts** from the web part's properties.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/6RYJLNftrqaBLv7saX2v" alt="" width="375"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Choose the **same color** for both the **divider's color** and its **background**.&#x20;

> For example: Pink (#e83782 or RGB 232, 55, 130)

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/S5mcS7NU09JyiSCCa38d" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% hint style="info" %}
**Please note**: the chosen layout doesn't matter, but it's **essential to set the same color** for both the **divider** and the **background**.
{% endhint %}

* **Select the height** you want the divider to have. In our example, we've set it to 2.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/KlrItAJdx2XObrva3zOX" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Here's how it would look as a divider in a column.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/GFxoScGU6NgcYmtqoN0t" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Highlights

The dynamic slideshow for your most important news within the SharePoint intranet.

## What is Highlights

Highlights is the news web part that allows you to **dynamically showcase your company's news**.&#x20;

You can display **various types of news** in this web part, and the "Highlight&#x73;*"* title can be customized according to your preference.&#x20;

News can be tagged and are presented with an automatic slideshow. You can choose whether to display them at a glance:

<figure><img src="/files/U67LKSoRAKH2FE40RHsl" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* Web part title
* Show description&#x20;
* Show likes and comments
* Show news author
* Show publication date

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **News and Communications** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/company-news/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the Highlights web part to a SharePoint page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part and you'll see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/djIngsygCKbR1w7Yq14q" alt="" data-size="line">
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **Highlights** to quickly find and select the Highlights web part, which is named "IAI - Highlights".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/ZWLuQE7Ev9j5q0TVMaOT" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click the **Edit** properties <img src="/files/auJnZsBcsshcWVJ2J9fk" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options. See below for more information.

***

## Configuration

1. [Layout settings](/sharepoint-intranet/components/highlights#layout-settings)
2. [Data sources](/sharepoint-intranet/components/highlights#data-sources)
3. [Filters settings](#filters-settings)
4. [General settings](#general-settings)
5. [Display settings](/sharepoint-intranet/components/highlights#display-settings)

### Layout settings

The layout settings allow you to customize the appearance of your application by adjusting various layout settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/xqN5rwu1H2pYrpVVoGEp" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By opening this first configuration, you will see the following options:

* **Do you want to hide the background?**
  &#x20;You can choose to **hide** or **display** the webpart background. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a white background. If you **enable** this option, the white card background will be completely **removed**, allowing the content appear directly on the page. As a result, the webpart will be **transparent**, showing either the **selected background image** or the **chosen SharePoint page color**.
* **Do you want to hide the background shadow?**
  &#x20;You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the webpart stand out more against the rest of the page. If you **enable** this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.
* **Select the type of background shadow**: if you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from **High Contrast, Light**, or **Dark** options.
  * If you select **High contrast**, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.
  * By choosing the **Light** background shadow, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.
  * Finally, the **Dark** background shadow style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more
* **Do you want to hide the title?**
  &#x20;Here you can select whether to show the webpart title or hide it. If set to **visible**, the web part title will appear on the left side.
* **Enter the application title**
  : thanks to this configuration, you can **customize the application title**. If you keep it **blank**, SharePoint will show the default title “Highlights” at the **top left angle** of the webpart.

### Data sources

These settings allow you to specify the data sources to be linked to the web part. In this section, you can also select the specific sites from which to retrieve news.

Complete the section as follows:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Yjib3Oj4d46Wfv0mENIn" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Select sites**: here you can specify the **source** for your news. Your news can come from the site you are on while using the web part, or one or more other individual sites. So, in this field, you need to select the sites where you have published the news you want to show (for example: news from the Marketing site)
* **Use the hub site? Enabling** this option sets the hub site as the news source, displaying all news published there in the web part. If **disabled**, news will be sourced from the current site or from the specific sites you previously selected.
* **How many news do you want to show?** This option allows you to choose **how many news articles you want to display in the slider** (from a minimum of 1 to a maximum of 10).

### Filters settings

In this section, you can configure the various filters to be applied to your news. This is useful if you want only news with a specific tag to be displayed in this news section. For example, if the news are tagged by “category”, only those from a specific category will be displayed.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/iLO51MwfVu0vWlP04iVf" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Configure filters**

{% hint style="info" %}
Before configuring this section, make sure that the tag system is **active** on the intranet.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/ej8od7AAtlHNfH24CJmk" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
If you don't configure the tags, the web part will indiscriminately display all published news.
{% endhint %}

* In the first column, write: **owstaxId + the name of the column** used to assign metadata to the news. For example, owstaxIdTagAnnouncement.
* In the second column, write the **exact name of the tag** (e.g., Show in home page). If you want to display news with different tags, enter the names of the tags, using a comma and no space between one tag and the other.
* **Do you want to filter news by audience?** If you **enable** this option, news will be visible only to the targeted groups. If you **disable** it, all news will be accessible to everyone within the Intranet, regardless of their group or role.
* **Hide untranslated news:** on translated pages, by **default** the web part also shows news that hasn’t been translated. The Hide untranslated news option allows you to display only the news articles that have been translated into the language of the page.

{% hint style="info" %}
If you create a translation and save it as draft, it won’t be visible until it’s published.
{% endhint %}

### General settings

This section allows users to customize the display and management of news within the web part.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/IPyaGliXsbjnZizCT3v6" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Select where to open the news**: through this option, you can choose whether to open the news in a new page or in the current page.
* **Setting up automatic sliding?** Choose whether to set up the automatic sliding; otherwise, users can navigate through the news by clicking on the arrows to move forward and backward.
* **Enter the URL for the “view all” link**: this field corresponds to the See all news button and it’ll appear on the top right of the webpart. You can choose what page the user will land on by clicking on this button. This could be highlights page with all the news of the site, for example.
* **Enter the display name of the “view all” link**: enter the name (or label) of the 'View All' link.
* **Do you want to open the “View all” link on the current page?** If you select the Current page option, SharePoint will reload the page you are navigating, displaying the news. If you choose the New tab option, SharePoint will open a new browser window where the news will appear.
* **Enter the name of the field to sort by**: by default, the webpart sorts news by First Publish Date. This feature allows you to sort them by a different field. To do so, you need to enter the name of a managed property, which must be defined as sortable in the SharePoint admin area.
* **Hide webpart if there is no result**: by enabling this property, the webpart won't be displayed if there are no news.

### Display settings

In this section, you can proceed to configure all the information that will be displayed on the news:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/iKx0PAcJzOZMoHelQ3E8" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Enable the "New" tag:** you can choose to activate the dispaly of the **"new" tag**. By default, it will not be visible.
* **Insert the "new" tag label**: it is possible to **customize the label of this tag**. You just need to type the name you would like to use in the **"Insert the "new" tag label"** box. If no custom text is entered, the default "New" label will be used.
* **Days after pubblication date in wich the tag "new" remains visible:** you can define the number of days the "New" tag will stay visible after the content is published.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/hucdC9bvPck7IDmAjooO" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

1. Showing the title in upper case?: by default, the title will be dispalyed in **uppercase.** If you disable this setting, the title will appear in **lowercase** instead.
2. Choose whether to enable the display of the **description**.
3. Choose whether to show the **date**.
4. Choose whether to show the number of **likes**, **comments** and **views**. You can choose to display or hide the number of **likes**; to display or hide the number of **comments**; to display or hide the number of **views**.
5. Choose whether to display the **tag name**.

* **Enter the tag field name to show the tag**: you must fill in this field only if you prefer to show news by tags. Enter “**owstaxId**” plus **column name** of the **tags** you want to show in each single news.
* **Enter the unique id of the tags' term set**: copy and paste the **id** of the corresponding tags’ term set (you can find this ID in the corresponding group available in the Term store).

{% hint style="info" %}
[Click here](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/other-configurations/creation-of-tag-systems-for-news-and-documents) for more information about the creation of tag systems for news.
{% endhint %}

{% hint style="info" %}
[Click here](/sharepoint-intranet/components/news-archive#access-the-term-store) to learn how to configure the id of the term set store.
{% endhint %}

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Image Slider

The ideal component to grab users' attention.

## What is Image Slider

Our component is an effective way of **communicating important information through visual elements**.

The slider allows **several images to be displayed in sequence**, and has strengths such as being able to **automatically rotate** images and **adjust the height** of the web part according to the image and the space available.&#x20;

It can be used to **highlight corporate initiatives**, or to **bring together the company's values** in one place, and you can insert both graphics and photos in it, therefore **it is fully customizable!**

{% hint style="info" %}
Discover the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **Image Slider** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/image-slider/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the Image Slider web part to a SharePoint page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part and you'll see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/l5ySSL5qOCO7zmUJPhxZ" alt="" data-size="line">&#x20;
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **Image** to quickly find and select the Image Slider web part, which is named "IAI - ImageSlider".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/rPxBVC8piTNbFcXqaGJJ" alt="" width="551"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click the **Edit** **properties** <img src="/files/Y906IFDSTdHxzvhsQXZR" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options. See below for more information on these options.

***

## Configuration

1. [View settings](#view-settings)
2. [Options](#options)

### View settings

The view settings allows you to customize the appearance of your application by adjusting various layout settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/2NU2k306HxFPEY7qoXw6" alt="" width="304"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By opening this first configuration, you will see the following options:

* **Do you want to hide the background?**\
  You can choose to hide or display the webpart background The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a white background. If you enable this option, the white card background will be completely removed, allowing the content appear directly on the page. As a result, the webpart will be transparent, showing either the selected background image or the chosen SharePoint page color.
* **Do you want to hide the background shadow?**\
  You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the webpart stand out more against the rest of the page. If you enable this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.
* **Select the type of background shadow**\
  If you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from High Contrast, Light, or Dark options.
  * If you select High contrast, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.
  * By choosing the Light background shadow, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.
  * Finally, the Dark background shadow style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more.
* **Do you want to hide the title?**\
  Here you can select whether to show the webpart title or hide it. If set to visible, the web part title will appear on the left side.
* **Enter the application title**\
  Thanks to this configuration, you can customize the application title. If you keep it blank, SharePoint will show the default title “Image Slider” at the top left angle of the webpart.

### Options

In this configuration, you need to select both the document libraries containing the images and the display settings for the web part (e.g., the number of seconds between image changes and the height of the display).

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/pMZn6dWL7bqI0MnodneL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* As a first step, you need to enter the link to the site where the Image Slider document library is registered, usually coinciding with the intranet site.
* In the second field, you need to select the document library called **Slider Images**, where the images are collected, from the drop-down menu. The [final section of this guide](#image-slider-list) explains you how to upload pictures to the document library.
* Select the time in seconds in which the slider will change the image automatically: The configuration allows you to select the display time: by dragging the slider in the section called **Select the time in seconds in which the slider will change the image automatically**, you can set the time.
* Enter the height of the slider: In the section called **Enter the heigh of the slider**, you can enter the height of the images in pixels. This can be useful when you want to select a portion of a large image or to determine the exact space the web part should occupy within a page.
* **Left arrow:** by activating this field, the arrow for **scrolling images to the left** will be visible.
* **Right arrow:** by activating this field, the arrow for **scrolling images to the right** will be visible.
* **Current image selection indicators:** by activating this field, dots will be visible under the images indicating the number of images in the collection, and the darker dot will indicate the current image.

***

## Add pictures to the Slider Images document library

In order to create a new set of images for the Image Slider web part, a few steps are required, which are listed below:

* Access the **Site contents** by clicking on the Settings icon, which is located on the top right of your Intranet’s homepage.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/hadm75hX9mhpTToMBPaq" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Access the document library named **Slider Images**. Here you need to upload the images you want to view.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/oDQPkaxI6wN3gHZy0R19" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click on **Upload** and then on **Files** to upload all the images you want to view.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Y8C96X1j0BXxzJ2RlKOP" alt="" width="343"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* The **Url column** allows you to **add a link to an image**, so that the image will be clickable.  To associate links to your images, you need to click on **Edit in grid view**: this will allow you to edit the items included in the document library. Then, **copy-paste the URL** you want to add to each picture into the corresponding box. Finally, click on **Exit grid view** to save your changes.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/mTsl1ia6Q2u7Zjhg8w3I" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* The **Order column** allows you to choose the **order in which pictures will be displayed**. To establish the order of images, you need to click on **Edit in grid view**: this will allow you to edit the items in the document library. Then, **assign a number to each picture** and click on **Exit grid view** to save your changes.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/cI4xlBrN2YmAAktGxvQB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Here is an example of what the Image Slider web part looks like on the page:

<figure><img src="/files/aKuAzZ6Xg6mzjtfVlFce" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
This web part is particularly suitable for rectangular, low and wide images, but its adaptability in a vertical direction will also allow you to use vertical images.
{% endhint %}

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Informative Buttons

The component to enrich your SharePoint intranet's pages without making navigation cumbersome.

## **What is** Informative Buttons

This web part facilitates the promotion of **corporate initiatives**, showcases **intranet features**, and ensures convenient access to **external websites** through captivating new graphics.

You can personalize button icons to offer clues about their content, enticing users to explore further without navigating away from the current page. By hovering the cursor over the graphics, hidden information is unveiled.

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Informative Buttons by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/button-with-pop-up-content/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the Informative Buttons web part to a SharePoint page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part and you'll see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/l5ySSL5qOCO7zmUJPhxZ" alt="" data-size="line">&#x20;
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **Hover Button** to quickly find and select the Informative Buttons web part, which is named "IAI - Hover button".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/sh7xFrps4eeVnODdC7OJ" alt="" width="406"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click the **Edit properties** <img src="/files/lYdozncvYseEg7whjpsu" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options such as Front button settings, Back button settings, and Colors settings. See below for more information on each of these options.

{% hint style="info" %}
Please note, the button takes up **the entire size of the SharePoint section**.

Therefore, you need to select the section size choosing from the different layouts, and the button size will adapt accordingly, as shown below:&#x20;
{% endhint %}

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/fgpYiW0447Twq6tFHrNx" alt="" width="375"><figcaption><p>Layout section with one column</p></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/NeWmfsnsTHbwg1xcMoY4" alt="" width="375"><figcaption><p>Layout section with two columns</p></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="center"><figure><img src="/files/KKYiiG4OV9m5e0miA2Xj" alt="" width="375"><figcaption><p>Layout section with three columns</p></figcaption></figure></div>

***

## Configuration

1. [View settings](#view-settings)
2. [Front button settings](#front-button-settings)
3. [Back button settings](#back-button-settings)
4. [Colors settings](#colors-settings)

### View settings

The view settings allows you to customize the appearance of your application by adjusting various layout settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/xYlYxknkEFUZcwGfgAny" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By opening this first configuration, you will see the following options:

* **Do you want to hide the background?** You can choose to hide or display the webpart background The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a white background. If you enable this option, the white card background will be completely removed, allowing the content appear directly on the page. As a result, the webpart will be transparent, showing either the selected background image or the chosen SharePoint page color.
* **Do you want to hide the background shadow?** You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the webpart stand out more against the rest of the page. If you enable this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.
* **Select the type of background shadow:** If you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from High Contrast, Light, or Dark options.
  * If you select High contrast, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.
  * By choosing the Light background shadow, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.
  * Finally, the Dark background shadow style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more.

### Front button settings

In this section, you can configure the **icon** and the **title** associated to the button.

Buttons are strategically crafted to grab users' attention, enticing them to delve into hidden content. The titles and icons are there to guide them to the information they seek, saving time that would otherwise be spent searching or navigating various pages on the website.

{% hint style="info" %}

* If you're not in edit mode already, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Select the Informative Buttons web part, then click **Edit properties** <img src="/files/MQPlOjE6GnpoI8Anmuqt" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left side of the Informative Buttons web part.
  {% endhint %}

This section includes the following fields:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/zGhlBWzQ19WnCH73ewtu" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

In the first field, copy and paste the **link of the icon** you want to use to illustrate the title.

{% hint style="info" %}
You need to **upload the icon in advance** to a folder on SharePoint Online, specifically in the Site contents of the intranet, where **all users** have access (see below).
{% endhint %}

#### How to upload a picture to SharePoint?

* Click on the **Settings** icon at the top right of the page, and then on **Site contents**.

<figure><img src="/files/7UWe2Mtr7IHqoxmK8LDx" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* Select the folder where you want to upload your icon (e.g., **Site Assets**) and upload the picture.
* Select the image and click on the **Info** icon on the right of the top bar.

<figure><img src="/files/aqFCjpzh9yT3Xt7JHctW" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* Scroll down the window and **copy the image path** by clicking on the **Path** icon ![](/files/2pr8IohMt9WP6TwxMHsb).

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/l5bvr68xONwAaUXGLD19" alt="" width="248"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Go back to the page with the Informative Buttons web part and insert the path of the icon in the required field.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/nA48Tvgl7ZvSjj2a4aFp" alt="" width="285"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Below is an example of an icon added to a button:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/ZL6lbAcebHHqnuUyDFiC" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

In the **Title** field, write the title of the button. The title appears to the right of the icon, as shown in the example below:&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/K8DHcUcwVG2XBrfzFTkZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/t7xYTqg607vp01t8QTQO" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### Back button settings

This section allows you to enrich your button with additional information, enabling users to explore further.

{% hint style="info" %}

* If you're not in edit mode already, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Select the Informative Buttons web part, then click **Edit properties** <img src="/files/DgyupiGlxzkFztpolie0" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left side of the Informative Buttons web part.
  {% endhint %}

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/5aowJulNgqR02773z7Ue" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Here you can input the **title** of the back button and a **text** with additional information. Users will be able to read this text by hovering their cursor over the button. See an example below:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/PeOJR9TTsNFY8IQwzK6a" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

For further customization, a **hyperlink** can be added to the back button paragraph. This will encourage users to click the link and explore content. To insert a hyperlink, take the following steps:

* First of all, write your text in the **Paragraph** field.
* Choose where you want to insert the link (at the beginning, in the middle or at the end of the text) and copy and paste the following code:

\<a href="<mark style="background-color:yellow;"><https://www.google.it/></mark>" target="\_blank" style="<mark style="background-color:yellow;">color:red</mark>; text-decoration:none"><mark style="background-color:yellow;">Clicca qui</mark>\<a/>

{% hint style="info" %}
Highlighted in yellow are the sections to be modified according to your preferences.

* [<mark style="background-color:yellow;">https://www.google.it/</mark>](https://www.google.it/) = the link you wish to insert in your text.

* <mark style="background-color:yellow;">Red</mark> = the color you want to appear in your text. You can change the color by writing the appropriate color in English.

* <mark style="background-color:yellow;">Clicca qui</mark> = Call To Action inviting the user to access the link. You can modify the CTA text as you wish.
  {% endhint %}

* Below is an example of custom text with a link using the following code: \<a href="<https://www.google.it/>" target="\_blank" style="color:red; text-decoration:none">Clicca qui\<a/>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/vvoZBSke894lSHFVx9xD" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Alternatively, you can copy and paste an internal or external link into the **Button url** field. Users will simply need to click the button to access the link and explore content. Thanks to the **Open on a new tab** field, you can choose whether to open the link on the same tab or a new tab.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/WMjwcxBMRizJMCRv06JA" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% hint style="info" %}
It is not possible to customize the color of the back button title.
{% endhint %}

### Colors settings

This section allows you to customize the different button colors. If you want more possibilities with respect to your graphic theme, you can modify the colors of the text and the background both in the front button and in the back button.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/u2GbvWniRFY8ANZ5BKD3" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Do you want to customize colors?** This option allows you to choose and customize the colors of the front button. You can select the background and the text color by using the color picker or by entering a specific hex code.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/df4vnlf7YF2CNd8tudzA" alt="" width="175"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

See an example below with red background and black text:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/WErXgT9d8ANOBmt5B5Lf" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Customize hover colors?** This option allows you to customize hover colors, that is to say the colors of the back button. You can select the background and the text color by using the color picker or by entering a specific hex code.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/CNfQyrbBlHjjnVM1uwEO" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

See an example below with pink background and black text:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/oQZrHvbAPx5Sar4ifrCr" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

When you are done,  don't forget to publish your edits by clicking on **Republish** at the top right of the page.

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# In This Page

The component that dynamically creates a table of contents.

## What is In This Page

In This Page is one of the web parts designed by intranet.ai to help companies **create a corporate knowledge base in SharePoint Online**. Creating a corporate knowledge base provides numerous benefits, such as **quick access to information**, **reduced time waste**, **standardized information**, **knowledge retention**, and **more effective collaboration**.

In This Page is a web part designed to **create a table of contents**, particularly useful for text-heavy pages. This component **automatically detects and displays the section headings of the page** (Heading 2, Heading 3, and Heading 4). Clicking on any item in the index will take the user directly to the corresponding section. **The web part updates automatically** whenever changes are made to the page, **ensuring the index remains accurate and up to date**.

**In This Page** is essential for creating a well-organized knowledge base on SharePoint Online. For additional tools to enhance your knowledge base, refer to the manuals for [**Pages Menu**](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/components/pages-menu), [**Breadcrumb**](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/components/breadcrumb), and [**Contributors**](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/components/contributors).

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **In This Page** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/in-this-page/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the In This Page web part to a SharePoint page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click on **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part. You will see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="https://docs.intranet.ai/~gitbook/image?url=https%3A%2F%2F2718234637-files.gitbook.io%2F%7E%2Ffiles%2Fv0%2Fb%2Fgitbook-x-prod.appspot.com%2Fo%2Fspaces%252FriXlnuemuParrCf7Uotu%252Fuploads%252FccHplKgXfibd4tktmhas%252Fadvanced-search-2.png%3Falt%3Dmedia%26token%3D7d703967-c3f7-4125-834b-f695362bf90b&#x26;width=40&#x26;dpr=4&#x26;quality=100&#x26;sign=34b00d6f&#x26;sv=2" alt="" data-size="line">.
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **InThisPage** to quickly find and select the In This Page web part, which is named "IAI - InThisPage".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/BS8GKdIA4v1dGLq00QjU" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click the **Edit properties** <img src="/files/frkUd5DM2cZrGG9H97Hr" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options such as View settings. See below for more information on each of these sections.

***

## Configuration

1. [View settings](#view-settings)

### View settings

The view settings allows you to customize the appearance of your application by adjusting various layout settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/1TBl3n8i8rcc5MG9Vd1b" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By opening this first configuration, you will see the following options:

* **Do you want to hide the background?**\
  You can choose to hide or display the webpart background The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a white background. If you enable this option, the white card background will be completely removed, allowing the content appear directly on the page. As a result, the webpart will be transparent, showing either the selected background image or the chosen SharePoint page color.
* **Do you want to hide the background shadow?**\
  You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the webpart stand out more against the rest of the page. If you enable this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.
* **Select the type of shadow you want to use**\
  If you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from High Contrast, Light, or Dark options.
  * If you select **High contrast**, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.
  * By choosing the **Light background** **shadow**, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.
  * Finally, the **Dark background shadow** style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more.
* **Enter the application title**\
  Thanks to this configuration, you can customize the application title. If you keep it blank, SharePoint will show the default title “Search” at the top left angle of the webpart.
* **Do you want to hide the title?**\
  Here you can select whether to show the webpart title or hide it. If set to visible, the web part title will appear on the left side.
* **Do you want to collapse all levels?** If you enable this setting, all levels will be collapsed by default. We suggest leaving them expanded. This way, users can see the page structure and freely interact with it by closing and expanding sections.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/xMDRuW0s2JqaEhkaimWh" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>


# Intranet Tour

The dynamic and customizable guide to show users the features of the SharePoint intranet.

## What is Intranet Tour

Intranet Tour helps you **learn more about your SharePoint intranet** and **guides you step by step** on how to use its features for your tasks. Thanks to this component, users can make the most of the intranet by understanding all its elements.&#x20;

Intranet Tour is the first step toward an effective use of the SharePoint intranet.

* Intranet managers can **select which components to explain** and build a **personalized journey**.
* The guide **automatically starts** when users **first access** the company site.
* Explanations are **dynamic** and delve into all integrated functions with a wizard.
* Users can follow the tour from **any device**.
* Navigation is **flexible**, allowing users to skip explanations and revisit them in the future.
* After the initial consultation, Intranet Tour remains **available from the home page**.

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **Intranet Tour** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/intranet-tour/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the Intranet Tour web part to a SharePoint page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click on **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part. You will see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/l5ySSL5qOCO7zmUJPhxZ" alt="" data-size="line">.&#x20;
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **Tour** to quickly find and select the Intranet Tour web part, which is named "IAI - Tour".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/sHWJdQYcU6d5w48sTagy" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click on the **Edit** **properties** <img src="/files/gmJ5XNTaOiOfp4SONrE8" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and configure the Layout settings and the Visibility settings. See below for more information on these properties.

{% hint style="info" %}
The guided tour can be set up on any page of the SharePoint intranet. As its function is to explain the elements that make up a page, it is recommended to set it up on the home page and on pages that are rich in functionalities and applications.
{% endhint %}

***

## Configuration

1. [Layout settings](#layout-settings)
2. [Visibility settings](#visibility-settings)

### **Layout settings**

In this section, you can customize the graphic aspects of the web part and configure the tour steps.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/vE86ZIqd9IcuAr83K30b" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* First of all, in the **Button title of the guided tour** field, you can insert a title for the tour button. This is the title that will be displayed in the label of the tour button, which is located at the top right of the page where you have set up Intranet Tour. If you leave this field empty, the label will display the default title, which is “New intranet’s functionalities”.

<figure><img src="/files/CBapUqmunfcVtj53dYAR" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* Click on **Configure tour steps** to configure the different steps of the guided tour. A panel with different boxes will appear. Here, you need to select the web parts that make up the page e enter the descriptions you want to be displayed. Below is a detailed guide to this part of the configuration:

<figure><img src="/files/dBtfhXXYxtZmiBak0kpf" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* Use the drop-down menu to choose the **web part** you want to describe. The menu proposes the different web parts of the page in the order in which they have been added to the page.
* Enter a **descriptive text** that explains the functions of the web part.
* Choose the **order** in which each step will be shown.
* Leave the **Enabled** box flagged so that the step will be shown in the guided tour.&#x20;
* To add a new step, click on the **+ button**: a new line will appear. Repeat the process until you complete the configuration, and when you are done, click on Save.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/YRVQ2w5eAv1MdaYCC4jf" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* You can also choose the **background color of the tour button**. You can either type the hex color code or choose a color directly from the panel.
* To customize the **button font color**, you can either type the hex color code or choose a color directly from the panel.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/aIvbMKRl8GX73o2efbpi" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Finally, you can choose where exactly to display the button by changing the **distance of the button from the right** on your desktop and in Teams.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/iuCfaIIzyAdjsk5IQAsn" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Finally, you can choose where exactly to display the button by changing the **distance of the button from the right** on your desktop and in Teams.
* You also have the possibility to to **disable the automatic tour loading.** If set to 'Yes', the tour will only be displayed when its button is clicked

### **Visibility setting**

The guided tour starts automatically the first time you access the intranet, then it does not start automatically anymore (however, you can always start it by pressing the tour button at the top right of the page). In case you want to activate it again, the tour will start automatically the next time a person logs in, even if they have already seen it. To do so, click on **Invalidate cookies** and republish the page.

The pictures below show an example of guided tour. Use the **right arrow** to move on to the next step and the **left arrow** to go back to the previous one.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/514wHYxYVGj86D20ks10" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<figure><img src="/files/rCgm8sZFstUTcKCk2Ysd" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/qpgznsfTa7oQcmyCO8vm" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/un6OyAzNipJoFve05WAv" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/jALtmeHMWDsacQZx9H8h" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/tQqjkKO0EiW0B8N28lES" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/bSdG3l1qEzpzRTrfRzCi" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/1PWViAXwWhZYaWQGDvgb" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/Ta5Kiio9n4y0JuR2GVps" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/aAr8u6Z2b5SpwRxV1T1E" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/4yMGzjD7NxgqD5015O1j" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/XXz6FdltChZSUD3dy8uS" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/2PEkg57Ib7xWYEjAxhFu" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
Please note: Intranet Tour is visibile only if you access the intranet via web, and not via Teams. This means that it does not work with [Viva Connections](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/viva-connections), because the component relies on cookies to function properly.
{% endhint %}

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Job Posting

The dedicated HR department area to promote open positions and highlight internal talent.

## What is Job Posting?

Job Posting is the dedicated area on the SharePoint intranet for HRs, who can use this feature to promote open positions and highlight internal talent.

Job Posting helps quickly **find ideal candidates** for open positions and identify the skills needed for the company's continued growth.

Users can easily **apply for open positions** in the company by filling in the job application in the web part. The Job Posting area offers them opportunities for **career advancement** or **changing their roles** within the company.

The web part has a double display: by clicking on a published position, the user will be able to read all the requirements for the job position. By clicking on Apply, he/she can then fill in the fields prepared by the HR department to complete the application. Once he/she has finished filling in, he/she can send the application and it will be registered automatically.

Job Posting integrates with [My Profile](https://docs.intranet.ai/intranet-sharepoint/configurations/my-profile), enabling users to apply for open positions using their personal SharePoint intranet profiles.

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **Job Posting** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/job-posting/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the Job Posting web part to a SharePoint page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part and you'll see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/l5ySSL5qOCO7zmUJPhxZ" alt="" data-size="line">&#x20;
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **Job** to quickly find and select the Job Posting web part, which is named "IAI - Job Posting".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/bpMM2sNRLOljYs4hNDja" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click the **Edit** properties <img src="/files/zPcEVA0te4n99s5w0mp4" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options such as  View settings, List and field settings, General settings and more. See below for more information on each of these options.

***

## Configuration

* [View settings](#view-settings)
* [List and field settings](#list-and-field-settings)
* [General settings](#general-settings)
* [Order settings](#order-setting)
* [Job application settings](#job-application-settings)

### View settings

The view settings allows you to customize the appearance of your application by adjusting various layout settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/p3hz8ErhzxE6YgvzOLJ5" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By opening this first configuration, you will see the following options:

* **Do you want to hide the background?** You can choose to hide or display the webpart background The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a white background. If you enable this option, the white card background will be completely removed, allowing the content appear directly on the page. As a result, the webpart will be transparent, showing either the selected background image or the chosen SharePoint page color.
* **Do you want to hide the background shadow?** You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the webpart stand out more against the rest of the page. If you enable this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.
* **Select the type of background shadow:** if you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from High Contrast, Light, or Dark options.
  * If you select High contrast, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.
  * By choosing the Light background shadow, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.
  * Finally, the Dark background shadow style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more.
* **Do you want to hide the title?** Here you can select whether to show the webpart title or hide it. If set to visible, the web part title will appear on the left side.
* **Enter the application title:** Thanks to this configuration, you can customize the application title. If you keep it blank, SharePoint will show the default title “Job Posting” at the top left angle of the webpart.

If the web part has been placed on the home page, you can use the widget size option, which allows you to have a compact view of the web part. Then, you can enter the url of the page dedicated to job posting. In this way there will be a cross-reference to the page and the user will be able to view the job offers in the full size web part on the dedicated page.

* **Insert the url** to the page where the app is displayed in full size: you can insert the url of the page dedicated to job posting.
* **Widget size**: the widget size option consists in a compact view of the web part. It is advisable if the web part has been placed on the home page or on another page where you do not want it to take up too much space.
* **Full size**: it is advisable if the web part has been placed on a page dedicated exclusively to job posting.
* **Number of job offers to load**: here you can choose the number of job advertisements to load.

> If you enter number 10, at first the page will display ten offers; when you click on the Load more button, ten more offers will be shown.

By entering an unrealistically high number (e.g., 999), all the offers will be shown.

### List and field settings

In this section, you need to enter the url of the site where the job posting lists were created, generally coinciding with the intranet site.

{% hint style="info" %}

* If you're not in edit mode already, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Select the Job Posting web part, then click **Edit properties** <img src="/files/w3Hm0XNCiC7v9lhBD14n" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left side of the Job Posting web part.
  {% endhint %}

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/QcNNuW4banHC5tdlDlzI" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Enter the site URL**: in this section, you need to enter the url of the intranet site.
* **Select the jobs list**: in this section, you need to select the list called **Job advertisements**.
* **Select the job applications list:** in this section, you need to select the list called **Job applications**.

Then, by clicking on **Open filter configurator**, you can configure the fields you want to display on the Job Posting web part. These are filters that can help you search for a job offer faster.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/e47DBGwFWpw2PCzgb30Z" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### General settings

This section allows you to set job offer fields such as job title, position description, start date and more.

{% hint style="info" %}

* If you're not in edit mode already, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Select the Job Posting web part, then click **Edit properties** <img src="/files/J2FUR9Qe6qS7BRYrC3HY" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left side of the Job Posting web part.
  {% endhint %}

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/MKFF2vjeznDydi9cPJbl" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By clicking on **Open filter configurator**, you can configure the fields you want to display in the job advertisement. These fields are contained in the Job advertisements list.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Am5rKv9nDs3gkTrIRlzc" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Choose fields:** choose the field you want to show.
* **Insert field custom name**: enter the name you want to show that corresponds to the field.
* **Do you want to show this field in the detail section?** If you flag this option, the field will be included in the detail section, i.e., a box containing a complete description of the position.
* **Do you want to show this field in the card?** If you flag this option, the field will be included in the preview card, which displays the most important information on the position. You just need to click on this card to open the detail section, where you can read more detailed information on the job offer.

When you are done, click on **Save** and go back to the main configuration panel to set further options.

* **Do you want to show attachments?** This option gives you the possibility to make visible any attachments that have been included in the job offer.
* **Write the message you want to be displayed when the job application is sent correctly:** this option gives you the possibility to write a personalized message that will be visible to the applicant when sending the application.

### Order setting

This option gives you the possibility to choose the field by which you want to sort the job advertisements in the web part.

> For example, they can be sorted by disciplinary area, start date and so on.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/GTFk5qDap0cDoyQevh5b" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### Job applications settings

This section allows you to configure the fields to be filled in on the application.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/8hcRsAocpgFzNIhTmXMe" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By clicking on **Open filter configurator**, you can configure the fields you want to display in the job application. These fields are contained in the Job applications list.

<figure><img src="/files/igjNIsK5BaOQh8J9EU7P" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Choose fields:** choose the field you want to show.
* **Insert field custom name**: enter the name you want to show that corresponds to the field.

When you are done, click on **Save** and go back to the main configuration panel to set further options.

* **Enable CV request?** This option allows you to ask the candidate to attach their CV. If you activate this option, it will be requested and mandatory; if you leave the option deactivated it will not be requested.

***

## The Job Advertisements list

In order to create a new **Job Advertisement**, a few steps are required, which are listed below:

* Access the **Site contents** by clicking on the Settings icon, which is located on the top right of your Intranet’s homepage.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/77Tzlm4LeUHBP4RbolW6" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Access the list named **Job advertisements**. Here you need to enter the various advertisements you want to view one by one.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/7Xjvf05FQHTWfL6epoSW" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click on **New** and a window will open with fields to be filled in.

<figure><img src="/files/ynnKxsZNaXWKapMbqszF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* Fill in the following fields:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/EemgHn8vp8gCtafJ4RRD" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Title**: in this field you need to enter the title of the advertisement you want to create, which corresponds to the job title. As you can see from the asterisk, it is mandatory to fill in this field.
* **Description**: enter the description of the role the candidate will be filling in the position.
* **Start date**: enter the date you wish to indicate as the start date of the job position you are offering. This date can coincide either with the first day of work for the position offered or with the opening day of the advertisement.
* **Expiration date**: this date coincides with the closing day of the advertisement. After this day, the advertisement will automatically disappear. It is an option that you may not fill in, but it is strictly recommended that you do **not delete this field**, as the process to reconfigure it is complicated and requires our intervention.
* **Working schedule**: enter the expected working hours for the offered position.
* **Salary**: enter the salary offered for the position.
* **Holidays**: enter if any holidays are planned for the position offered.
* **Benefits**: enter the benefits provided for the position offered.
* **Experience**: enter the experience the candidate should have in order to fit the profile you are looking for.
* **Skills**: it is necessary to **click on the label** on the right **and enter the soft skills** that fall within the parameters of the job offer.

{% hint style="info" %}
In this case, the tags visible on the side are used to enter data. Simply click on the label and a list appears from which you can select options.
{% endhint %}

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/ArS25lYEgCMWQy5UyhUz" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/0We3IBzQ9slZ9GdBROlN" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Academic degree**: as in Skills, it is necessary to **click on the label** on the right **and enter the Academic degree** required to apply for the offer.
* **Disciplinary area**: as in Skills, it is necessary to **click on the label** on the right **and enter the disciplinary area** in the company where the position offered belongs.
* **Contract type**: as in Skills, it is necessary to **click on the label** on the right **and enter the type of contract** offered for the position.
* **Languages**: as in Skills, it is necessary to **click on the label** on the right **and enter the languages** required for the position.
* **Relocation**: flag this option if the position offered requires the candidate to be transferred.
* **Workplace**: specify the place of work where the candidate will have to go.
* **Technical skills**: as in Skills, it is necessary to **click on the label** on the right **and enter the technical skills** required for the position offered.
* **Require CV:** flag this option if the position offered requires the candidate to upload his resume.\
  It is strictly recommended that you **do not delete this field**, as the process to reconfigure it is complicated and requires our intervention.
* **Attachments**: attachments can be added if necessary.
* **Save**: remember to save at the end.

***

## The Job Applications list

This list contains the fields the candidate will have to fill in to submit a job application. While configuring the Job Posting web part, you need to choose the fields you want to include in the application form, as explained in the sub-section titled [Job application settings](#job-applications-settings). To apply for a job, the candidate needs to click on the **Apply** button and insert the required information. The fields available on the list are described below:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/RjnXCRcbuO9pfFNO8btp" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Title**: this field will be automatically filled out with the job position the candidate is applying for.
* **Username**: this field will be automatically filled out with the candidate’s username.
* **Name**: in this field, you ask the candidate to enter his/her name.
* **Hire date**: in this field, you ask the candidate to enter the hire date of his/her current position.
* **Current role**:  in this field, you ask the candidate to specify his/her current role.
* **Skills**:  in this field, you ask the candidate to select his/her skills by choosing from the tag list.
* **Application reason**: in this section, you ask the candidate what his/her reasons are for applying for the position.
* **Experience**: in this section, you ask the candidate about his/her work experience.
* **Academic degree**: in this section, you ask the candidate to specify his/her level of education by choosing from the tag list.
* **Languages**: in this section, you ask the candidate to specify which languages he/she knows by choosing from the tag list.
* **Technical skills**: in this section, you ask the candidate to specify his/her technical skills by choosing from the tag list.
* **Interests**: in this section, you ask the candidate what his/her interests are.
* **Disciplinary area**: in this field, you ask for the disciplinary area of the company to which the candidate's current position belongs.
* **Relocation**: in this field, you ask the candidate if he/she is willing to move.
* **Job ID**: this field will be automatically filled out with the ID of the job the candidate is applying for.
* **Attachments**: this field corresponds to the option that allows the candidate to attach his/her CV to the application form. As explained above, this option has to be enabled while configuring the Job Posting web part.
* **Save**: remember to save at the end.

Here are two examples of how the job advertisement and job application parts are displayed on the page:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/KJDumqVpn4kvYwFCYcB5" alt=""><figcaption><p>Job advertisement</p></figcaption></figure></div>

<figure><img src="/files/zCgO6kWSzFStSG6IAX3X" alt=""><figcaption><p>Job application</p></figcaption></figure>

### Configure the Job Applications list&#x20;

The Job Applications list requires a **specific configuration** so that users can **interact with the list** and **apply for positions**. To learn how to configure this list, read the [dedicated guide](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/other-configurations/configuration-of-favorites-lists-and-user-lists). In particular, please refer to the **First type of configuration** section.

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Key Initiatives

The component to bring together the most important company initiatives and events in a single space on the SharePoint intranet.

## What is Key Initiatives

Present a thorough **summary of organizational initiatives** by consolidating them in a unified section on the SharePoint intranet.

This webpart **facilitates the promotion of significant initiatives** and events through a contemporary and adaptable design, encouraging users to **explore the content** and not just stop at the portal's homepage.

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **Key Initiatives** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/key-initiatives/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the Key Initiatives web part to a page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part and you'll see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/l5ySSL5qOCO7zmUJPhxZ" alt="" data-size="line">&#x20;
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **Key Initiatives** to quickly find and select the Key Initiatives web part, which is named "IAI - Key Initiatives".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/mhp8H7Xy50Rujd2iTSkq" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click the **Edit** **properties** <img src="/files/KxW2zxO15ddMcdiVsEFx" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options such as View settings, Lists initiatives settings and Mask settings. See below for more information on each of these options.

***

## Configuration

1. [View settings](#view-settings)
2. [Lists initiatives settings](#lists-initiatives-settings)
3. [Mask settings](#mask-settings)

### View settings

The view settings allow you to customize the appearance of your application by adjusting various layout settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Gd1pfru8nyTwX48rISsC" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By opening this first configuration, you will see the following options:

* **Do you want to hide the background?** You can choose to hide or display the webpart background The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a white background. If you enable this option, the white card background will be completely removed, allowing the content appear directly on the page. As a result, the webpart will be transparent, showing either the selected background image or the chosen SharePoint page color.
* **Do you want to hide the background shadow?** You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the webpart stand out more against the rest of the page. If you enable this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.
* **Select the type of background shadow**: if you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from High Contrast, Light, or Dark options.&#x20;
  * If you select **High contrast**, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.
  * By choosing the **Light background shadow**, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.
  * Finally, the **Dark background shadow** style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more.
* **Enter the title of the application**: thanks to this configuration, you can customize the application title. If you keep it blank, SharePoint will show the default title “**Key Initiatives**” at the top left angle of the webpart.
* **Do you want to hide the title?** Here you can select whether to show the webpart title or hide it. If set to visible, the web part title will appear on the left side.

### Lists initiatives settings

Key Initiatives allows you to take the **most important initiatives** from a specific SharePoint list. Moreover, if you choose the Normal style, you'll see a **button** that allows you to land to a page that collects all your company's initiatives.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/V9CoCKEgxQ6PjAuiTaOd" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Insert the site URL**: here, put the SharePoint site where the Key Initiatives list is stored.

> For example: <https://intranetai.sharepoint.com/sites/my-hub/>

* **Select List:** here you have a drop down menu of all the lists stored in the site you just linked. Here please **select Key Initiatives**.&#x20;
* **Insert "View More" Url**: here you can put the link of another page where all the initiatives are stored. If you decide to put a link, a "View all initiatives" button will be visible in the bottom part of the webpart. If you decide to leave this field blank, you won't see the button.&#x20;
* **Where do you want to open the "view all initiatives" link:** here you can decide to open the "View all" link on a new page or on the current page.&#x20;
* **Where do you want to open the initiative:** here you can decide to open a specific initiative link on a new page or on the current page.
* **Show "Read" button**: choose whether to display the "Read" button that appears below the initiative.

### Mask settings

Key Initiative allows you to personalize the mask of the pictures in the webpart. In default mode, photos are **square-shaped with rounded edges**. However, thanks to this feature, you can **choose the shape you prefer** (the logo mask, a circle, a square without rounded edges...).

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/1TuaTt4yomlW1WakygC5" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Here you can create your own mask and, once you choose the mask you'd rather, you can **upload it to the Site Assets** of your SharePoint portal and **copy its path inside this area**.&#x20;

If you leave it blank, you'll have the **square-shaped with rounded edges**.

{% hint style="info" %}
If you need **more information about the format and dimensions** of the picture to be used as mask, [click here](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/useful-dimensions).
{% endhint %}

Once you're done with these configurations, **always remember to click Save as draft to have the preview. Once you're happy with the final result, click Republish to make the area visible for all the users in the intranet**.&#x20;

***

## Create a new Key Initiative

As seen before, key initiatives are all gathered in the corresponding list. To add a new initiative, follow these steps.&#x20;

Click on the **Settings** icon on the top right of the page, then click on **Site contents**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/sFOER5MtUBw9dRh9p1UR" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Scroll down until you see the list named **Key Initiatives**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/uaEAvWHYrVMPpkB5XTH4" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

To add a new initiative, click on **New**. The following panel will appear. The fields marked with an **asterisk (\*)** are **mandatory:**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/v3cUX2H4BKLFLEy9Y8fc" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Title:** the title of the initiative
* **Description:** a short text explaining what the initiative is about
* **Image:** this field requires the preview image to be shown in the webpart
* **Url:** the link corresponding to the initiative, to discover more about it. This field is not mandatory, since as we previously saw, the Compact layout does not have the READ button. If you leave this field blank, the READ button won't appear in the Normal layout either.&#x20;
* **Order:** this field allows you to choose a specific order of appearance in the webpart.&#x20;

Once you're done with fillings the fields, always remember to click on **Save**.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
The existing Key Initiatives can be edited or removed. In order to do so, select the initiative and click on **Edit** or **Delete**.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Leadership Team

The component that helps you get to know the members of management and the key contacts in each department.

## What is Leadership Team

Our feature complements the [organizational chart](https://intranet.ai/features/oganizational-chart/) by **showcasing the company's structure**, clarifying departmental organization, and **identifying key personnel**.

Users can view the management team **in a single area of the SharePoint intranet**, discovering their roles and how to contact them when needed.

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **Leadership Team** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/leadership-team/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the Leadership Team web part to a SharePoint page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part and you'll see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/l5ySSL5qOCO7zmUJPhxZ" alt="" data-size="line">&#x20;
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **Leadership Team** to quickly find and select the Leadership Team web part, which is named "IAI - Leadership Team".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/VwjRItGs90ctFlp3MR0I" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click the **Edit** **properties** <img src="/files/x7o9IZMI1yYfBgOnwAb4" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options such as Layout settings, List settings, Metadata settings, Filter section, and Display settings. See below for more information on each of these options.

***

## Configuration

1. [Layout settings](#layout-settings)
2. [List settings](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/leadership-team#list-settings)
3. [Customize header](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/leadership-team#customize-header)
4. [Metadata settings](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/leadership-team#metadata-settings)
5. [Filter section](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/leadership-team#filter-section)
6. [Display settings](#display-settings)

### Layout settings

The layout settings allows you to customize the appearance of your application by adjusting various layout settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/oxxXYZUr2VNMjx2vQf95" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By opening this first configuration, you will see the following options:

* **Do you want to hide the background?** You can choose to hide or display the webpart background The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a white background. If you enable this option, the white card background will be completely removed, allowing the content appear directly on the page. As a result, the webpart will be transparent, showing either the selected background image or the chosen SharePoint page color.
* **Do you want to hide the shadow?** You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the webpart stand out more against the rest of the page. If you enable this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.
* **Select the type of shadow you want to use:** if you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from High Contrast, Light, or Dark options.
  * If you select High contrast, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.
  * By choosing the Light background shadow, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.
  * Finally, the Dark background shadow style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more.
* **Do you want to hide the title?** Here you can select whether to show the webpart title or hide it. If set to visible, the web part title will appear on the left side.
* **Enter the application title:** thanks to this configuration, you can customize the application title. If you keep it blank, SharePoint will show the default title “Leadership Team” at the top left angle of the webpart.
* **Edit header description:** The Leadership Team webpart allows you to put a **personalized text for the title and the introduction** to the webpart. This section is not mandatory: if you decide to **leave it blank**, this area of the webpart won't be shown in the layout.

### List settings

Leadership Team allows to you to show specific people from the Top Management. This is possible thanks to the specific SharePoint lists you'll put in the dedicated area. Also, it's possible to put the sections that better fit with your company structure. &#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}

* If you're not in edit mode already, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Select the **Leadership Team** web part, then click **Edit properties** <img src="/files/kThzPvKP6mOmOGLqEFdD" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left side of the web part.
  {% endhint %}

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/rqdl8ZTrHFGVQvvSMLxp" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

In this section, you're asked to select the member list and the section list from two drop-down menus which show all the lists of the current site. Select **Leadership Team** from the first drop-down menu and **Leadership Team Sections** from the second drop-down menu.

### Metadata settings

{% hint style="info" %}
**Please note:** we recommend checking this aspect with your IT department colleagues.

If you want to learn more about creating metadata for your SharePoint sites, [**click here**](https://docs.intranet.ai/intranet-sharepoint/other-configurations/creation-of-tag-systems-for-news-and-documents).
{% endhint %}

In this area, the web part requires **information from your SharePoint Global Admin Center**. It is essential to land on the **Term Store Management**, where all the metadata created for your SharePoint sites is stored. The metadata used for the Leadership Team includes **two term sets**, which usually identify the person's department and role or, alternatively, their location.

<figure><img src="/files/vwD3ZfJT6MQ4kDgdS4I7" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Taxonomy Group ID:** copy-paste the unique ID of the term group used for the Leadership Team.
* **Termset ID for the first metadata:** copy-paste the unique ID of the first term set. The corresponding information will be shown in the person's card, in the person's detail area and in the filter section as a filter.&#x20;
* **Display name for the first metadata:** enter the name of the first term set. The name will be shown in the filter section.&#x20;
* **Termset ID for the second metadata:** copy-paste the unique ID of the second term set. The corresponding information will be shown in the person's detail area and in the filter section as a filter.&#x20;
* **Display name for the second metadata:** enter the name of the second term set. The name will be shown in the filter section.&#x20;
* **Detail icon for the second metadata:** enter the name of the icon to be shown nearby the second metadata in the person's detail area.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
You can select the icon you'd rather from [**this list**](https://developer.microsoft.com/en-us/fluentui#/styles/web/icons). Alternatively, you can upload a **personalized icon on your site assets** and paste its link here.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/wSYLiYCesXgeoGJDeoPW" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### Filter section

The Leadership Team webpart allows you to set an area with filters. This area is one of the already existing ones.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/s3Nq181Wk8jt6btVEvNk" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Enable filtered section:** select Yes if you want this section to be visibile in the page. Select No if you don't want to.&#x20;
* **Name of the filtered section:** type the name of the section you'd like to be filtered. The name of the section has to correspond to the name typed in the Section column.&#x20;

### Display settings

These options allow you to decide **how many cards will be shown on each line**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Dnvpqljo6EbI0US9BACo" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* The first two fields refer to the **sections without filters**. In the first field, select **Yes** if you want to choose the number of cards to display on each line. In the second field, enter the **number** of items you want to see on each line.
* The third and the fourth fields refer to the **section with filters**. If you want a specific number of users to be displayed on each line, repeat the steps described above.

***

## Add users to the Leadership Team list

As seen before, the users to be put in the Leadership Team webpart are all gathered in the corresponding list. To add/remove/edit users, follow these steps.&#x20;

Click on the **Settings** icon on the top right of the page, then click on **Site contents**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/sFOER5MtUBw9dRh9p1UR" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Scroll down util you see the list named **Leadership Team**.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Wu38H3QWPmyqpacc6dSZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

To add a new person, click on **New**. The following panel will appear. The fields marked with an **asterisk** are **mandatory:**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/k78aqaOqYfJLYsoz36lh" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Title:** name and surname of the user. This will be visible in the preview card of the user and in the user details.&#x20;
* **Team member:** here type the name and select the corresponding user. This part is needed to retrieve the user's info that uploaded in your Azure AD.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
**Please note:** in this phase please be sure that the fields in your Azure AD are properly filled in. If some information does not correspond and/or is incorrect, please talk to your IT in order to adjust it.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

* **Member bio:** a short description of the user. This area will be visible in the user details.&#x20;
* **Member picture:** here please attach the picture of the user. This picture will be visible both in the user's card and the user's details.&#x20;
* **Order:** the number that sorts the order of appearance of the users.&#x20;
* **Section:** here select between the existing sections. This selection will allow you to group users in the dedicated areas. This field is linked to the **Leadership Team Sections** list. [See below](#add-new-sections-to-the-leadership-team) to  learn how to add/remove/edit sections.
* **Department:** here select the corresponding department metadata to the user. This filter is linked to the Term Store Management in your SharePoint administration.&#x20;
* **Location:** here select the corresponding location metadata to the user. This filter is linked to the Term Store Management in your SharePoint administration.&#x20;

Once you're done with these information, remember to click on **Save**.&#x20;

{% hint style="danger" %}
If there are **issues with picture display**, go to the list settings and select **Advanced settings**. In the **Attachments** section, please **disable attachments**. Then, save.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add sections to the Leadership Team

As seen before, the users' sections to be put in the Leadership Team webpart are all gathered in the corresponding list. To add/remove/edit sections, follow these steps.&#x20;

Click on the **Settings** icon on the top right of the page, then click on **Site contents**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/sFOER5MtUBw9dRh9p1UR" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Scroll down util you see the list named **Leadership Team Sections**.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/a2mzBZCKD2PYpLsIJo7l" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

To add a new section, click on **New**. The following panel will appear. The fields marked with an **asterisk** are **mandatory:**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/yZRvtR2DGIMz4H3IxCMC" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Title:** the name of the section to be shown as title of the area.&#x20;
* **Description:** a short description to be shown as subtitle of the area.&#x20;
* **Order:** the number that sorts the order of appearance of the sections.&#x20;

Once you're done with this information, remember to click on **Save**.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/wt2VL9tpDEy5uaSjXHdb" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/dCCrtmqARjGNJFKPFnbj" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Media Library

The component that helps you easily browse, preview, and access documents and assets.

## What is Media Library

Media Library is a component that presents **documents and assets in a unique wall within the intranet**, bringing together **files from different SharePoint collections**, even if managed by different departments. It integrates with Microsoft 365 taxonomies and term sets, allowing users to **categorize** content through **tags** and save time in searches. Below is a list of the main features of this web part:

* **Tags and categories**: editor users can customize categories and tags to **classify company documents** and easily retrieve procedures belonging to a specific team, department, event, or project.
* **Latest Files**: you can highlight the latest assets published on the intranet to **keep the company audience updated**.
* **Content indexing**: the Media Library component **simplifies files access** by utilizing SharePoint's capabilities to analyze and index content for search.

In addition to that, Media Library **integrates with SharePoint**, providing users with essential features for effective document management and retrieval. These include:

* Versioning for tracking and recovering changes;
* Real-time sharing;
* Access control;
* Monitoring of approval workflows.
* Targeted notifications whenever a public file is modified;
* Indexing to make document content searchable.

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **Media Library** by **clicking here** to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the Media Library web part to a SharePoint page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part and you'll see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/l5ySSL5qOCO7zmUJPhxZ" alt="" data-size="line">&#x20;
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **MediaLibrary** to quickly find and select the Media Library web part, which is named "IAI - MediaLibrary".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/BpnAv4J3ZPLkoNyX6Aj2" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click the **Edit** **properties** <img src="/files/x7o9IZMI1yYfBgOnwAb4" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options such as Layout settings, Data sources, Filter settings, and General settings. See below for more information on each of these options.

***

## Configuration

1. [Layout settings](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/components/media-library#layout-settings)
2. [Data sources](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/components/media-library#data-sources)
3. [Filters settings](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/components/media-library#filters-settings)
4. [General settings](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/components/media-library#general-settings)

### Layout settings

The layout settings allows you to customize the appearance of your application by adjusting various layout settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/m7xhmrm9QFpgeUxPNDvO" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By opening this first configuration, you will see the following options:

* **Do you want to hide the background?** You can choose to hide or display the webpart background The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a white background. If you enable this option, the white card background will be completely removed, allowing the content appear directly on the page. As a result, the webpart will be transparent, showing either the selected background image or the chosen SharePoint page color.
* **Do you want to hide the shadow?** You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the webpart stand out more against the rest of the page. If you enable this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.
* **Select the type of shadow you want to use:** if you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from High Contrast, Light, or Dark options.
  * If you select High contrast, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.
  * By choosing the Light background shadow, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.
  * Finally, the Dark background shadow style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more.
* **Do you want to hide the title?** Here you can select whether to show the webpart title or hide it. If set to visible, the web part title will appear on the left side.
* **Enter the application title:** thanks to this configuration, you can customize the application title. If you keep it blank, SharePoint will show the default title “Media Library” at the top left angle of the webpart.

***

### Data sources

In this section, you need to indicate the documents libraries from which the webpart will retrieve documents.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/pAzaNjyXZyEBARk7EvjW" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Enter the **URL of the document library** in which your documents are collected. As explained, this component can bring together files from different document libraries; this means that here you can write different URLs, separated by a comma (please, do not use spaces).

{% hint style="info" %}
It is recommended to create a documents subsite to collect document libraries. See the section titled [Create a documents subsite](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/components/media-library#create-a-documents-subsite) to learn how to do so.
{% endhint %}

**Enter the path where the acknowledgment is located**: This field is to be filled in only if the Acknowledgement system has been activated. In such a case, here you need to enter the URL of the page where the Acknowledgement web part is configured. This way, all the documents will be opened through the "Acknowledgement" page, and users will have the possibility to confirm that they have read the files. If this field is left blank, the documents will be opened in a standard way. The following screenshots provide examples of these two possibilities:

<figure><img src="/files/5IJX6XkluG3g9TY2TGww" alt=""><figcaption><p>File opened through the "Acknowledgement" page</p></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/nU8nEjvGUiGCrNGiO3nb" alt=""><figcaption><p>File opened in Word Online</p></figcaption></figure>

***

### Filters settings

You should fill out this section if you need to set which assets each user will see in the webpart. It helps to classify documents based on a specific metadata. For example, if items are tagged by “category,” only those from a specific category will be displayed.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/aBtImT1tIc5gCD6KfzEh" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Enter the column name**: enter “owstaxId” plus column name that you have set to assign documents tags. You must fill in this field if you prefer to pre-filter documents by tags. Only documents with specific tags will be included.
* **Enter the unique id of the term set**: copy and paste the id of the desired term set (which you can find in the Term store). You need to fill in this field only if your tenant has more than one Term store.

{% hint style="info" %}
[Click here](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/components/media-library#access-the-term-store) to access the Term store.
{% endhint %}

{% hint style="info" %}
[Click here](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/other-configurations/creation-of-tag-systems-for-news-and-documents) for more information about the creation of tag systems for news and documents.
{% endhint %}

* Then, **select values to pre-filter the results**: you can choose the tags for the documents you prefer to display in the Media Library webpart.
* **Configure filters/tags**: in this window, you can configure the various filters to be applied to your documents. By filling in this fields. the available filters for the documents will appear.

<figure><img src="/files/YOtwp8oULqZL1ubRt5KT" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* In the first column, write: **owstaxId** + the name of the column used to assign metadata to the documents. For example, owstaxIdIAICategory.
* In the second column, copy-paste the **id of the term set**. To do this, go to the Term store and find the id of the term set. **Enter the taxonomy’s unique id of the term set (scores included):** copy and paste the id of the desired term set (which you can find in the Term store), including scores. You need to fill in this field only if your tenant has more than one Term store.

{% hint style="info" %}
[Click here](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/components/media-library#access-the-term-store) to discover how to configure the id of the term set store.
{% endhint %}

* In the third column, enter the **custom filter** name you wish to apply. This is a name used to identify a filter you are creating, which will be applied to the news items. The custom filter helps organize and narrow down the displayed content based on specific criteria.
* **Show filter?** Indicate whether the filter dropdown should be displayed to users. Flag this option if you want users to see and interact with the filter dropdown; leave it unflag it if you want to hide it.
* **Show tag?** Determine if the tags assigned to the news should be displayed in the items preview. Flag this option to show the tags; unflag it if they should be hidden from view.
* **Show search field?** Specify if a search bar should be shown in the filter dropdown to allow users to search for a specific tag. If you want a search bar to appear, flag this option; otherwise, unflag it. This functionality can be useful in case you think you’re going to have a large number of tags.
* **Stop reordering**: This option prevents the ability to reorder items. By default, the webpart sorts tags alphabetically. However, there might be cases (such as the Months) you might need to sort by the same order set in the Term Store. That said, flag this option if you want to follow the same sorting order available in the Term store, or unflag it if you want to keep the alphabetical order.
* **Open filter by default?** Indicate whether the filter dropdown should be automatically applied when the page or view loads. Flag this option if you want the filter to be open as soon as the page starts; unflag it if you don’t.
* **Insert filter persistency?** When a user selects this filter configured as persistent within the web part settings, that filter will be stored for the individual user. As a result, if the user navigates away from the page and later returns to the Media Library web part, the previously selected persistent filters will be automatically reapplied.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/14ODPXUj6eqGlJpWURVK" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Insert the language managed property if it has been manually edited**: Here you need to insert the internal name of the language managed property if it has been manually edited. If you leave this field blank, the default internal name will be used: owstaxIdIAILanguage.
* **Hide filters**: this setting allows you to show or hide filters, such as the favorites filter, on the right side of the web part. If you select 'Yes,' the filters (also the search bar) will be hidden from the documents in the web part. If you select 'No,' the filters will remain visible.

***

### General settings

In this section, you need to set general options for document management, such as the sorting direction, the number of documents to load, and other configurations.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/UJNMTmQqahy1Bx2Wwbzr" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* You can choose the **number of assets** to load.
* You can decide how many items you'd like to show **per line**.
* **Enter text for the button to see other documents**: This configuration allows you to enter custom text for the button. When clicked, the button will enable the user to view other documents.
* **Select a property to sort documents**: you can choose to sort documents by modification date, creation date, filename or title. Select your preferred option from the drop-down menu.
* **Select the direction of the sor**t: you can decide to order documents from the most recent or from the least recent.
* **Show documents with the searched word in the title first?** As regards the last option, it should be specified that the web part includes a search bar which allows you to quickly find content. if you enter a word in the search bar, the web part will show only documents that contain the searched word in the title and in the body of the text. If you enable the last option of the Order Settings, the documents that contain the searched word in the title will be shown first.

## Access the term store

1. Click on the settings icon at the top right of the page, then click on Site information.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/JbRSP7TkmEPdMx0xiMMZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

2. Click on View all site settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/bicmYMwcS4mBF1JACIUY" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

3. Under Site Administration, click on Term store management.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/1pmphSyn4egUthp6MRw3" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

4. You will land on the Term store, which is the area where you can create term sets and terms, i.e. tags to categorize your content. Here you can find the unique identifier of the taxonomy, which is a code composed of numbers, letters and hyphens.

<figure><img src="/files/vFT0FrmVbnV0x6DF9INW" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

5. After having assigned tags to documents, you need to configure filters. This feature allows you to filter documents by specific tags; when you do so, the web part displays only documents that belong to the selected category or categories.

Please refer to our guide ["Creation of tag systems for news and documents"](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/other-configurations/creation-of-tag-systems-for-news-and-documents) to learn how to create term sets in the Term store, add columns of the managed property type to a document library, and assign tags to documents.

{% hint style="info" %}
It is recommended to create a **documents subsite** to collect document libraries. See the section titled [Create a documents subsite](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/components/media-library#create-a-documents-subsite) to learn how to do so.
{% endhint %}

{% hint style="info" %}
Here you need to insert the URL of the entire document library; it is not possible to insert the URL of a subfolder within it. If you want to show only specific documents within the library, you can use metadata and take advantage of the pre-filter option (see "[Filters settings](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/components/media-library#filters-settings)").
{% endhint %}

* Enter the **taxonomy's unique id**. You need to fill in this field only if your tenant has more than one Term store. To access the Term store, which is a section of the Administration Area of the site, you need to take the following steps:
  * Click on the **Settings** icon at the top right of the page, then click on **Site information**.
  * Click on **View all site settings**.
  * Under Site Administration, click on **Term store management**.
  * You will land on the **Term store**, which is the area where you can create **term sets** and **terms**, i.e. **tags** to categorize your content. Here you can find the unique identifier of the taxonomy, which is a code composed of numbers, letters and hyphens.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Jn6yuDg9LUmiIRrpJFLL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/bicmYMwcS4mBF1JACIUY" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/1pmphSyn4egUthp6MRw3" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<figure><img src="/files/aDLYdzvOG97WDpRqJr16" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* After having assigned tags to documents, you need to configure filters. This feature allows you to filter documents by specific tags; when you do so, the web part displays only documents that belong to the selected category or categories.

> For example, if your document library contains files written in different languages, you may want to filter documents by language, e.g. English, French, Italian and so on.

{% hint style="info" %}
Please refer to our guide ["Creation of tag systems for news and documents"](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/other-configurations/creation-of-tag-systems-for-news-and-documents) to learn how to create term sets in the Term store, add columns of the managed property type to a document library, and assign tags to documents.
{% endhint %}

Here is an example of what Media Library looks like once the configuration is complete:

<figure><img src="/files/yVsm26QtLt2l6R8ih4lO" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

The web part is composed of the following elements:

* A **wall of assets**, which includes the **preview** and the corresponding **information:** filename and tags. As can be seen in the screenshot above, each file type is identified by a specific icon.
* A **download icon**. By clicking on this symbol, you can download a document.
* A **search bar** which allows you find documents more quickly. You just need to type a word in the search bar to retrieve files containing the searched word in the title or in the body of the text.
* The **filters** section, which consists of drop-down menus. They allow you to retrieve documents that belong to specific **categories**.

{% hint style="info" %}
The Media Library web part does not read folders. This means that if the document library contains folders, the component will display all the files in the form of a wall, without reproducing their organization into folders. However, if you wish to display folders in your documentary area, you can use the [Company Documents with Folders](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/components/company-documents-with-folders) web part, which is explained in a dedicated guide.
{% endhint %}

## Create a documents subsite

A subsite is a site within a parent site that helps you organize and manage content. In particular, it is recommended to create a subsite to collect and manage document libraries. Here is how to do so:

* Click on the **Settings** icon at the top right of the page, then click on **Site contents**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/SV3Plo4VB4TryzzSnyUd" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click on **New > Subsite**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/FhO782brNyNgUBma5FDQ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* You will land on an interface where information on the subsite is required. The first fields to fill in are Title, Description and URL name.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/fvjpgjklijLuRGi5Ulq1" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Enter the **title**, i.e. the name of the site.

> For example: documents

* If you want, you can also write a description, but this is not mandatory.
* Complete the **URL name** by entering the **title** you chose.

> For example: <https://intranetai.sharepoint.com/sites/my-hu&#x62;**/documents>\*\*

* Keep the default settings, except for the second to last choice: the default option is Yes, change it to **No**, so that the site will not be displayed on the top link bar of the parent site.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/yR3CHE5rd6Z9Asu2WUHz" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Finally, click on **Create**.

To create a **new document library** in your subsite, follow these steps:

* Click on **New** > **Document library**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/bP1mQ2P37t9xYNLTX57n" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click on **Blank library**. The following pop-up will appear:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/NcT6VwJg26ChtB0FXbZ6" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Enter the **name** of the document library. Please, avoid spaces; use capital letters instead, so that the library URL will be cleaner.

> For example: GraphicMaterials, Guidelines, Procedures

* If you want, you can also enter a description, but this is not mandatory.
* Leave the **Show in site navigation box flagged**.
* Click on **Create**.

Now, you just need to click on **Upload** to add files to the document library. When configuring Media Library, you will need to copy and paste the URL of this document library into the related field in the General Settings, as explained in the sub-section titled [General Settings](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/components/media-library#general-settings).

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Mood

The web part which encourages self-expression and provides insights into the collective mood of your team.

## What is Mood

Mood is a web part designed to foster a sense of **community** and **emotional awareness** within your organization. By allowing each user to select an **emoticon** that best represents their **mood of the day**, this web part encourages **self-expression** and provides valuable insights into the **overall well-being of your team**. The web part is composed of three sections:&#x20;

* **The user's daily mood**: each user can choose from a variety of emoticons to represent their mood for the day. The interface is simple and intuitive, making it easy for users to update their mood with just a few clicks.
* **The user's mood history**: this section displays a personalized history of the user’s moods over the past week.&#x20;
* **The team's daily mood**: this section of the web part highlights the most selected emoticon by the user's colleagues on the current day.&#x20;

In addition, you can create a **dedicated page for administrators** to view the **overall history of moods across the organization**. Admins can see the **moods selected by all company members on any given day**, allowing for the identification of broader emotional patterns and potential areas of concern.

The Mood web part **encourages engagement**, inviting users to **express their emotions** and fostering a **more connected workplace community**. Moreover, the Admin View functionality provides administrators with valuable data that can aid in making informed decisions to **support employee well-being** and **enhance workplace morale**.

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **Mood** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/mood/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the Mood web part to a SharePoint page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part and you'll see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/l5ySSL5qOCO7zmUJPhxZ" alt="" data-size="line">&#x20;
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **Mood** to quickly find and select the Mood web part, which is named "IAI - Mood".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Zbrhzeaa8DuqFBiaW1br" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click on the **Edit** **properties** <img src="/files/rT3J1AawfrRgrRSwVBRQ" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options such as General settings and Display settings. See below for more information on each of these sections.&#x20;

***

## Configuration&#x20;

1. [Display settings](#display-settings)
2. [General settings](#general-settings)

### Display settings

The display settings allows you to customize the appearance of your application by adjusting various layout settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/ZYNVz8e1aJt6ZGd9kpyJ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By opening this first configuration, you will see the following options:

* **Do you want to hide the background?** You can choose to hide or display the webpart background The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a white background. If you enable this option, the white card background will be completely removed, allowing the content appear directly on the page. As a result, the webpart will be transparent, showing either the selected background image or the chosen SharePoint page color.
* **Do you want to hide the shadow?** You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the webpart stand out more against the rest of the page. If you enable this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.
* **Select the type of shadow you want to use:** if you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from High Contrast, Light, or Dark options.
  * If you select High contrast, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.
  * By choosing the Light background shadow, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.
  * Finally, the Dark background shadow style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more.
* **Do you want to hide the title?** Here you can select whether to show the webpart title or hide it. If set to visible, the web part title will appear on the left side.
* **Enter the application title:** thanks to this configuration, you can customize the application title. If you keep it blank, SharePoint will show the default title “Mood” at the top left angle of the webpart.
* **Which view do you want to see?** Here you can choose between two options: the **User view** allows users to select their daily mood, whereas the **Admin view** allows administrators to view the overall history of moods across the company.&#x20;

> You could adopt the User view on the home page of your intranet, and the Admin view in a dedicated sub-page. The specific features of the Admin view are explained [below](#create-the-mood-history-page).

* **Do you want to hide the mood of the day section?** This option allows you to hide the section highlighting the most voted mood on the current day. The **default option** is **No**, but you can switch it to **Yes** to **hide this section**.
* **Hide report section?** This option allows you to hide the section displaying the history of your moods  over the past week. The **default option** is **No**, but you can switch it to **Yes** to **hide this section**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/f2kZLtIUREy62mFPs6n5" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Enter the title of the report section:** this property allows you to customize the title that appears in the **Report Section**. By default, the title will be **"You've been feeling yourself lately"**, but you can **personalize it freely** to better reflect the tone or content of your report.
* **Enter the title of the mood of the day section:** this property allows you to define the title for the **Mood of the Day section**. By default, the title will be **"Your colleagues are"** followed by the selected mood, but you can **customize it as you prefer** to suit the tone or message you want to convey.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/N9hXII6Kq04XsE8103ZT" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Enable scrolling?** If you activate this option, a **scrollbar** appears on the right-hand side of the web part. If you select **Yes**, you'll be able to **choose the height of the web part**. This way, you can set a fixed height and scroll up and down to see content. This may be useful if you have a lot of content to display and you don't want the web part to take up too much space.

### General settings

In this section, you need to specify the sources from which the web part will retrieve information.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/ddg8UYkBc6DlrJKKlxpA" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* In the first field, you need to insert the **URL of the site** where the list named **Mood list** is located.&#x20;
* In the **Select the mood list** field, you need to select **Mood list** from the drop-down menu. This is the list which contains the emoticons.
* In the third field, you need to enter the **URL of the site** where the list named **User mood record** is located.&#x20;
* In the **Select the list** field, you need to select **User mood record** from the drop-down menu. This is the list where the moods selected by users are saved.&#x20;

***

## Fill in the Mood list

As explained above, the Mood web part retrieves information from the list named Mood list. This section describes the steps to fill in the list.

* First of all, click on the **Settings** icon on the top right of the page, then click on **Site contents**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/FEvdzNMogwiDuA9okVQO" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Scroll down and select **Mood list**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/8kF6AprASsNEtOusfDNO" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Each item on this list is a mood**. To add a new mood, click on the **New** button.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/mtz1cPQFlKsGVgxL8jyy" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* When you click on the New button, a panel appears with a number of fields to fill in. The fields marked with **asterisks** are the **mandatory** ones.

<figure><img src="/files/JhPbmoIW2bJZldcpIwH8" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Title**: enter the title of the mood. The title will appear under the emoticon in the first section of the web part.&#x20;

> For example, "Happy", "Sad", "Excited", "Angry", etc.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/UiBBcGD8Nf1pXBoglHxh" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Description**: here you can enter a **short descriptive text**. You will see the description when mousing over the emoticon.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/NXWyEbdSO9J3kJ4Ey9Uo" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Order**: enter a **number** to choose the order in which the emoticons will be displayed.&#x20;
* **Mood icon**: to add an emoticon, you can choose an icon from the list available at [**this link** ](https://www.unicode.org/emoji/charts/full-emoji-list.html)and copy-paste the correspoding **code** into the Mood icon field. When pasting the icon’s code, **make sure to remove any space that may be automatically added**. If not removed, this space can cause the semicolon (;) to appear next to the icon on the page, affecting the visual layout.
* **Mood icon url**: alternatively, you can create a **custom image**, upload it to a document library in your intranet (e.g., the Site Assets folder) and copy-paste the **image URL** into this field.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
If you decide to create a custom icon, it is important that you adopt a **square image**. Good results are obtained with **50 x 50** images.
{% endhint %}

* When you're done, click on **Save**.

When the configuration is complete, the web part looks like this:&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/rloM8D8Fp9nQM5BlpeGr" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% hint style="info" %}
The screenshot above shows the User view, which allows users to select their current mood. Continue reading to learn more about the Admin view, which is designed for administrators.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

### Add moods in multiple languages&#x20;

If you have a multilingual intranet, you may need to translate the data inserted in the Mood list into multiple languages. In particular, the fields to translate are **Title** and **Description**. This will allow you to configure Mood in different linguistic versions of the same page.&#x20;

To carry out this translation activity, you need to create **two additional fields for each language**. Specifically, you need a **Title field** and a **Description field** with **specific nomenclatures**. The nomenclature to adopt is as follows:&#x20;

* **IAIMTitle + language code**
* **IAIMDescription + language code**

[**This link**](https://pkbullock.com/resources/reference-sharepoint-online-languages-ids) offers a list of language tags. However, please use only **lower case letters** and **no hyphen** between the first and the second part of the tag.&#x20;

> For example, the language code for French is **frfr**. The complete nomeclature for the Title and Description fields would be:&#x20;
>
> * **IAIMTitlefrfr**
> * **IAIMDescriptionfrfr**

A detailed explanation of the steps of this process is offered below:

* To create **an additional Title field**, access the Mood list and click on **+Add column**. Select **Text** and click on **Next**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/n1KcDDi4dJJ1t0brBLEw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* In the **Name** field, enter the name of the column. Make sure to adopt the **nomenclature** described above, and save. &#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/fRHl2LZ8MMkz0bvnd1nE" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* To create **an additional Description field**, click on **+Add column**. Select **Multiple lines of text** and click on **Next**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Gxqk7qTBul5J1ffQowUy" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* In the **Name** field, enter the name of the column. Make sure to adopt the **nomenclature** described above, and save.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/XObCx7KMWBK4TVSNAOas" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Now, select an item in the list, click on **Edit**, and **add the translations** by filling in the newly created fields. Then, click on **Save**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/NxN2KNCLk5j0rSkQ2NOd" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Repeat these steps for all the items in the list.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
It is important that you localize both columns (Title and Description).&#x20;

When you create a column, it is fundamental that you adopt the correct naming convention. Then, you can edit the display name of the column to make it more user-friendly (e.g., "French Title", "French Description").
{% endhint %}

***

## Create the "Mood history" page for admins

As mentioned in the introductory section, a "Mood history" page can be created for administrators to view the moods selected by all users on any given day. This is possible thanks to the **Admin view**, which is an alternative to the User view described above. The mood history is presented in the form of **cards** showing the **profile picture** of the user, their **name**, and the **mood** they chose on the selected day.

To build such a page, first of all you need to **create a new page**. To do so, take the following steps:

* Click on the **gear icon** at the top right of the page, and then on **Site contents**.
* Scroll down until you see the **Site Pages** folder and click on it.
* Click on the **SystemPages** folder.
* Click on **New > Site Page** to create an empty page.
* Add a **title** to the page, and choose your preferred layout for the title area.

### Add and configure the Mood web part

* Add the Mood web part by following the steps described in the [Add the Mood web part to a page](#add-the-mood-web-part-to-a-page) section.&#x20;
* Then, configure the General settings section of the property pane as described in [General settings](#general-settings).
* Now, in the **Display settings** section, select the view you want to adopt. In this case, it is the **Admin view**.
* **Enable scrolling?** Just like the User view, the Admin view allows you to activate a **scrollbar**. If you select **Yes**, you'll be able to **choose the height of the web part**. This means that you'll set a fixed height and scroll up and down to see the cards.&#x20;
* **Do you want to choose the number of cards to show?** If you activate this option, you'll be able to choose the number of cards to display.
* **How many users do you want to show?** Here you need to specify the number of cards to show. A **Show other users** button will appear, allowing you to display more cards.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/9yZX2mG9pSvRq4D0tV2E" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

The "Mood history" page looks like this:&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/69Rou0X8irgxY0YAY87f" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### Features of the "Mood history" page

As described above, the web part consists of **cards showing the moods expressed by intranet users on a given day**. By default, the web part shows the moods of the current day, but you can select a different date. You just need to click on the date box to open a calendar where you can choose any of the previous days.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/O1TM8C4W2qnSEcXjmIhr" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

The web part also features a **search bar** where you can search for a specific user or a specific mood.&#x20;

* If you type the **title of a mood**, you can see **who chose that mood** on the selected day.
* If you type the **name of a user**, you can see **what mood they expressed** on the selected day.

<figure><img src="/files/cpDhHW6M5MIXMzGNTAlD" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

***

## Configure the User mood record list

The User mood record list requires a **specific configuration** so that intranet visitors can select their mood of the day. To learn how to configure this list, read the [dedicated guide](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/other-configurations/configuration-of-favorites-lists-and-user-lists). In particular, please refer to the **Second type of configuration** section.

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# My Apps

A personal area on the SharePoint intranet where users can collect and organize files, apps, and content they want to keep at hand.

## **What is My Apps**

**My Apps** is a personal area where only you can **collect and organize links, file, apps, and content you want to keep at hand**. Thanks to this feature, which brings together all your favorite business apps, you can make the intranet a tool tailored to your work.&#x20;

Another important aspect is that you can classify links to personal business apps, making them easier to find in the SharePoint intranet and saving you time in searches. In addition, you can choose from over 100 icons to customize your dashboard.

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **My Apps** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/my-apps/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the My Apps web part to a SharePoint page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part and you'll see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/l5ySSL5qOCO7zmUJPhxZ" alt="" data-size="line">&#x20;
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **My Apps** to quickly find and select the My Apps web part, which is named "IAI - My Apps".

<figure><img src="/files/F8zamHQbWmqlnuhcP9VM" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Click the **Edit** **properties** <img src="/files/AKZ7Y6NkuEDmLxorSPhD" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options such as Layout settings, Data sources and General settings.  See below for more information on each of these options.

***

## **Configuration**

1. [Layout settings](#layout-settings)
2. [Data sources](#data-sources)
3. [General settings](#general-settings)

### Layout settings

The layout settings allow you to customize the appearance of your application by adjusting various layout settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/dQP3FW4cTwZrCVxDFpfx" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By opening this first configuration, you will see the following options:

* **Do you want to hide the background?** You can choose to hide or display the webpart background. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a white background. If you enable this option, the white card background will be completely removed, allowing the content appear directly on the page. As a result, the webpart will be transparent, showing either the selected background image or the chosen SharePoint page color.
* **Do you want to hide the background shadow?** You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the webpart stand out more against the rest of the page. If you enable this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.
* **Select the type of background shadow:** if you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from **High Contrast, Light,** or **Dark** options.
  * If you select **High contrast**, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.
  * By choosing the **Light background shadow**, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.
  * Finally, the **Dark background shadow** style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more.
* **Do you want to hide the title?** Here you can select whether to show the webpart title or hide it. If set to visible, the web part title will appear on the left side.
* **Enter the title of the application**: thanks to this configuration, you can customize the application title. If you keep it blank, SharePoint will show the default title “My apps” at the top left angle of the webpart.
* **View options**: you can choose between a list view (list of saved items) or title view (each item is represented in a square with an icon and title).

### Data sources

Thanks to this section, you can specify the list where saved links, files, and apps will be stored.

* **Url list**: enter the site URL. For example: <https://intranetai.sharepoint.com/sites/iai-dev-saas-playground/>
* **Select the list where the apps are located**: choose the list named User apps list from the dropdown menu.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/o4YQoghdWruM5mfoRfMr" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### General settings

In this section, you can choose whether to activate the visualization with the scroll and decide how many lines to display

* **Do you want to activate the visualization with the scroll?** It is set to **No** by default. If you want the display with **scrolling**, enable this button by clicking on it.
* **Choose how many lines to display**: if you have chosen to **enable** scrolling, you can set the number of lines to be shown before you have to scroll down to see more content.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/kfcKDjYWeDcpA8FVThsc" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Now you’re set!

***

## Add personal apps - User experience

Here you can personalize your own favorite links and apps the way you want!

Complete the tabs as follows:

* Click on the **+ Add** button.

<figure><img src="/files/HgsCpU3lyJjfo7MxLxed" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* Then on the new window, click on the **+ Add** button again.

<figure><img src="/files/15xIOflgqCqriINcOX07" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

A line appears, with the following fields:

* **Name:** insert the name you want to use for your link.

> For example: Google

* **Url:** insert the link you want to save.

> For example: <https://www.google.com/>

* **Category:** here you can enter the various categories to which your applications belong. This way, you can group different elements by categories and make them easier to search. You can create as many categories as you want, and name them the way you prefer.

> For example: Websites, Newspapers etc.

<figure><img src="/files/wKYcvppO5ZwQNmEvSVAw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Icon:** by clicking on the **Icon** button, a pop-up will appear where you can choose the icon that best represents the link you are adding. **Select it and save.**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/jKp223YRJr5WJYQUXUYB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

This is how it would look after selecting the icon.

<figure><img src="/files/ZeDuPSUESKMfXn6pt7Dn" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

&#x20;After that, click on the!\[Immagine che contiene testo, schermata, ricevuta, Carattere

Descrizione generata automaticamente]\(/files/OnoITvs106VMEGH6CHCD) button and it's done!

<figure><img src="/files/KDdjA6DE2NGGhAbsVlzQ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

***

## Delete a personal app - User experience

To delete an app, simply follow these steps:

* You need to go to the row where the app you want to delete is located and **click on the Bin** **icon** at the bottom right.

<figure><img src="/files/TaioeTFOa93RIsxXEX7j" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* A message will appear asking if you are sure you want to delete it. Click on the!\[Immagine che contiene testo, schermata, ricevuta, Carattere

  Descrizione generata automaticamente]\(/files/OnoITvs106VMEGH6CHCD) button, and you're done.

<figure><img src="/files/uJAQLDZo7tKq6vtw3IgF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
We remind you that the **saved apps/links are personal** and can be **both internal and external** to SharePoint.
{% endhint %}

***

## Configure the User apps list list

As mentioned above, the My Apps web part relies on a list named User apps list, which requires a **specific configuration** so that intranet visitors can add their personal links. To learn how to configure this list, read the [dedicated guide](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/other-configurations/configuration-of-favorites-lists-and-user-lists). In particular, please refer to the **First type of configuration** section.

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# My Favorites

The component that brings together the news, contacts, documents, and apps in the SharePoint intranet you want to keep at hand.

## What is My Favorites&#x20;

My Favorites is a **web part that collects your favorite contacts, FAQs, news, apps and documents in one single point on the SharePoint intranet**. This allows you to **immediately find contents you saved in the different web parts** **of your SharePoint intranet**. Thanks to this feature, such contents will always be at your fingertips and you will not waste time on searches. My Favorites **automatically updates** with content saved in the SharePoint web parts where contacts, FAQs, apps, communications and documents are published.

This web part is divided into **five sections**, which bring together favorites from:&#x20;

* The [People Directory](https://docs.intranet.ai/intranet-sharepoint/configurations/people-directory)
* The [FAQs](https://docs.intranet.ai/intranet-sharepoint/configurations/faqs) pages
* The [Company Apps](https://docs.intranet.ai/intranet-sharepoint/configurations/company-apps) web parts
* The [News Archive](https://docs.intranet.ai/intranet-sharepoint/configurations/news-archive)
* The [Company Documents](https://docs.intranet.ai/intranet-sharepoint/configurations/company-documents) web parts

The web parts listed above offer the user the possibility to save items as favorites thanks to a star icon. The user just needs to click on this symbol to add contacts, FAQs, apps, news or documents to the corresponding favorites lists. The sections which compose My Favorites collect all the items the user marked as favorites. The company can decide to activate all the sections or just some of them, according to its needs.

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **My Favorites** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/my-favorites/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the My Favorites web part to a SharePoint page&#x20;

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part and you'll see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/l5ySSL5qOCO7zmUJPhxZ" alt="" data-size="line">&#x20;
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **Favorites** to quickly find and select the My Favorites web part, which is named "IAI - Myfavorites".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/MhwWZBQWUBhBTLfWOU12" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click the **Edit** properties <img src="/files/8WlaCl3QvoOFy4u6Jamy" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options such as People settings, FAQ settings, Settings apps, News settings, Documents settings and Viewing options. See below for more information on each of these options.

***

## Configuration

1. [People settings](#people-settings)
2. [FAQ settings](#people-settings)
3. [Settings apps](#settings-apps)
4. [News settings](#news-settings)
5. [Documents settings](#documents-settings)&#x20;
6. [Viewing options](#viewing-options)

### People settings

In this section, you are asked to configure the web part so that it shows the user's favorite contacts in the dedicated area. Therefore, you need to enter **information on the** [**People Directory**](https://docs.intranet.ai/intranet-sharepoint/configurations/people-directory), which is the component that collects company contacts.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/bXj0frtv2zMd3xUbI7od" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* First of all, enter the **link of the site** where the People directory list is stored.&#x20;
* Then, select the **People directory list** from the drop-down menu.
* In the third field, enter the **link of the site** where the People directory favorites list is stored.&#x20;
* In the fourth field, select the **People directory favorites list** from the drop-down menu.
* Finally, enter the link to the **page** where the **People Directory web part** is installed.&#x20;

### FAQ settings

In this section, you are asked to configure the web part so that it shows the user's favorite[ FAQs](https://docs.intranet.ai/intranet-sharepoint/configurations/faqs) in the dedicated area. Therefore, you need to associate the **Faq list** and the **Faq favorites list** with the webpart.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/KhVSOmfjPfNe1q0lar91" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Click on **Configure** to open the configuration panel and configure the lists.

<figure><img src="/files/dZ5SvLSTwAsBb03hgX6P" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* Enter the **URL of the site** where the Faq list is stored.
* Enter the **URL of the Faq list** in the required format.
* Enter the **URL of the site** where the Faq favorites list is stored.
* Enter the **URL of the Faq favorites list** in the required format.

**You can configure as many lists as you want**. If you have multiple Faq lists, repeat the steps described above for each list. When you have completed the configuration, click on **Save** to close the panel.

### Settings apps

In this section, you are asked to configure the web part so that it shows the user's favorite [apps](https://docs.intranet.ai/intranet-sharepoint/configurations/company-apps) in the dedicated area. Therefore, you need to associate the **Apps list** and the **Apps favorites list** with the webpart.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/lXimISjRFh8y5QKTAmym" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Click on **Configure** to open the configuration panel and configure the lists.

<figure><img src="/files/6261iUGLYJifHAw58NXt" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* Enter the **URL of the site** where the Apps list is stored.
* Enter the **URL of the Apps list** in the required format.
* Enter the **URL of the site** where the Apps favorites list is stored.
* Enter the **URL of the Apps favorites list** in the required format.

**You can configure as many lists as you want**. If you have multiple Apps lists, repeat the steps described above for each list. When you have completed the configuration, click on **Save** to close the panel.

### News settings

In this section, you are asked to configure the web part so that it shows the user's favorite news from the [News Archive](https://docs.intranet.ai/intranet-sharepoint/configurations/news-archive) in the dedicated area. Therefore, you need to associate **one or more lists of favorite news** with the web part.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/lpT1004RsfE87CammZgt" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Click on **Configure** to open the configuration panel and configure the lists.

<div align="center"><figure><img src="/files/woryInH5rJUUhlU96RgN" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Enter the **URL of the site** where the list of favorite news is stored.&#x20;
* Enter the **URL of the list of favorite news** in the required format.&#x20;

**You can configure as many lists as you want**. If you have multiple lists of favorite news, repeat the steps described above for each list. When you have completed the configuration, click on **Save** to close the panel.

### Documents settings

In this section, you are asked to configure the web part so that it shows the user's favorite [documents](https://docs.intranet.ai/intranet-sharepoint/configurations/company-documents) in the dedicated area. Therefore, you need to associate **one or more lists of favorite documents** with the webpart.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/AC2klRmITuTSAn1dzvzZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Click on **Configure** to open the configuration panel and configure the lists.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/MJmTAdGQigtdXVmeWcBn" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Enter the **URL of the site** where the list of favorite documents is stored.&#x20;
* Enter the **URL of the list of favorite documents** in the required format.&#x20;

**You can configure as many lists as you want**. If you have multiple lists of favorite documents, repeat the steps described above for each list. When you have completed the configuration, click on **Save** to close the panel.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/AC2klRmITuTSAn1dzvzZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Fill in the remaining fields as follows:&#x20;

* Insert the **internal name of the language managed property if it has been manually edited**. By default, the internal named used to get localized documents is owstaxIdIAILanguage. Filling in this field is optional.
* Decide whether to **show or hide the download icon**, which allows users to **save documents** on their computers. By default, the download icon is not displayed in the web part. If you want to show it, change the default option from **Yes** to **No**. When the configuration of the web part is complete, the download icon, which is identified by an arrow, will appear to the right of the document title.

### Viewing options

In this part of the configuration, you can decide to **hide one or more sections** of the web part and **customize the title** of each section.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/KRlNrYYXJmkyx76nRGDi" alt="" width="296"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* You can specify the maximum **number of elements** displayed per tab. This setting is generic, so each tab will have the same item limit, and you cannot assign different numbers to individual tabs.
* Set the **button to load more**: you can modify the behavior of the 'Load More' button, allowing it to redirect to a link. The text of the 'Load More' button is also customizable. These properties are available for each tab

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/TRfFFJSpP82nOMxBAEFh" alt="" width="267"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* For each section, you are asked whether you want to hide it. You can do this by **activating the corresponding option**, which will change the default value from **No** to **Yes**. By default, all the sections are visible.&#x20;
* You also have the possibility to customize the title of each section. To do so, **type the name** **you would like to use in the corresponding box**. If you do not write customized names, the web part will use the default ones, which are: "Favorite people", "Favorite FAQ", "Favorite apps", Favorite news", "Favorite documents". &#x20;

> For example, you can change the title of the people section from "Favorite people" to "Favorite contacts".&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/3Vk8OalZFR1YwUZt8V4j" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

The last option allows you to **hide the web part when there are no favorites** to be displayed.

Once the configuration is complete, the web part looks like this:&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/pPDK4lt4qQMwyzocr7Wu" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/rOkOrMb4inxd3XGNiOS1" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/KsUZagIh4vvw6U6atjB8" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/inP0K3XLf40aczBlrGoN" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/7CfCHOjtgIvn7fA5L3rk" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

The component allows you to interact with individual resources to:

* **Access tabs with your contacts' details**: if you click on a contact, you will be redirected to that contact's profile section on the People Directory Page.
* **View answers to your frequently asked questions**: if you click on a FAQ, a box will appear showing you the question and the full answer.
* **Use the apps for your daily activities**: you just need to click on a button to access the link associated with it.
* **Delve into the news that interests you**: if you click on a news, you will access the full news post.
* **Read or download your documents**: to read a document, you just need to click it; to save the document on your computer, you need to click the download icon, identified by an arrow.

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# My Profile

The indexed profile in the SharePoint intranet to make oneself known in the company based on personal skills.

## What is My Profile

Our component is a **digital resume integrated with Microsoft Viva**, the platform dedicated to employee experience and sharing corporate information.&#x20;

Our feature allows you to get to **know your colleagues** **and showcase** your **education**, **skills**, and **interests** to support the intranet's [People Directory](https://intranet.ai/features/people-directory/).

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **My Profile** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/my-profile/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## **Add the My Profile web part to a** SharePoint **page**

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part and you'll see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/l5ySSL5qOCO7zmUJPhxZ" alt="" data-size="line">&#x20;
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **Profile** to quickly find and select the My Profile web part, which is named "IAI - My Profile".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/NmddxSNHBnxUF0DGQzRp" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click the **Edit** **properties** <img src="/files/81M2TDDuDIPwiRifwdyT" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options such as as Layout settings, Data sources, General settings, Display settings, Skills settings, Project settings, and Order settings. See below for more information on each of these options.

***

## Configuration

1. [Layout settings](#layout-settings)
2. [Data sources](#data-sources)
3. [General settings](#general-settings)
4. [Display settings](#display-settings)
5. [Skills settings](#skills-settings)
6. [Project settings](#project-settings)
7. [Order settings](#project-settings)

### **Layout settings**

The layout settings allow you to customize the appearance of your application by adjusting various layout settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/8Rw2QL2pQUeUFwVHyFu5" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By opening this first configuration, you will see the following options:

* **Do you want to hide the background?** You can choose to hide or display the webpart background The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a white background. If you enable this option, the white card background will be completely removed, allowing the content appear directly on the page. As a result, the webpart will be transparent, showing either the selected background image or the chosen SharePoint page color.
* **Do you want to hide the background shadow?** You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the webpart stand out more against the rest of the page. If you enable this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.
* **Select the type of background shadow**: if you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from **High Contrast, Light,** or **Dark** options.
  * If you select **High contrast**, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.
  * By choosing the **Light background shadow**, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.
  * Finally, the **Dark background shadow** style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more.
* **Do you want to hide the title?** Here you can select whether to show the webpart title or hide it. If set to visible, the web part title will appear on the left side.
* **Enter the title of the application**: thanks to this configuration, you can customize the application title. If you keep it blank, SharePoint will show the default title “My Profile” at the top left angle of the webpart.

### Data sources

My Profile allows you to to get to know and reach out to all the people and view contact information retrieved from the [People Directory](https://intranet.ai/features/people-directory/). Therefore, it's essential to include people directory details in this section.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/LVpEw6IMcAKuxHCWIObA" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Data source**: select the **People Directory data source**, which can be either **SharePoint** or **Graph**. Since a SharePoint list can contain a maximum of 5,000 items, companies with more than 5,000 employees will be required to use Graph as the data source. For companies with fewer than 5,000 employees, the choice will be the SharePoint list of the people directory, which is synchronized daily with Azure AD contacts.
* Then, enter the site URL where the [People Directory](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/people-directory) list has been installed. For example: <https://tenantname.sharepoint.com>
* Choose the **People Directory** list.
* Insert the site url where the badges lists are: enter the site URL. For example: <https://tenantname.sharepoint.com/sites/Intranet>
* Choose the **badge categories** list: select the Badge categories list.
* Choose the **people badge** list: select the People badges list.

### General settings

In this section, you should configure general options, such as selecting the fields to be displayed when clicking on a person's card, as well as other options related to the aesthetic aspects.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/b6mo4qclt5x8LAUzVLG4" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Open field configurator**: you must configure the fields you want to display on the person’s card by clicking on **Configure Fields**.

<figure><img src="/files/GentsY84koFf2PD2WRQN" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* By clicking on **Configure Fields**, the Collection data panel header will be opened, where you have to choose the fields you want to display.
* **Choose fields**: you choose the field from your Azure AD you want to show on the page.
* **Insert field custom name**: you type the name you want to be displayed for that section.
* Click on the + button to add another line.

Here’s an **example** of that panel already configurated.

Always remember to click **Save** at the bottom of the page.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Oy2ySbrhk1wni4a7LOHQ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Then, if you want to add tags to appear in the skills, you can add them having previously set metadata: on this field you must insert the **main taxonomy id** (scores included). Alternatively, if you do not fill them in, the default ones are set up if you want to create tags to fill the skills and projects boxes.&#x20;
* Select the option where the **profile picture** is stored: **Title**.
* Select the option where the **user login name** is stored: **User Principal Name**.
* As the final configuration step, you can choose **which boxes** you want to display on the My Profile page. You can choose as many boxes as you like, and if there are some you are not interested in, you can simply **uncheck** them, so they will **not appear** on the page.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Sc7aiilmKxUg1g3j4oZX" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### Display settings

In this section, you need to choose whether or not to allow the person to change their image options.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Hg7iz4EGrbz8ZVIQ5iBq" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Show presence**: the first option allows you to show the user's Teams status next to his or her name. To activate this option, select **Yes**.

{% hint style="info" %}
To activate the Teams status in the intranet web parts, a few actions in the SharePoint admin center are needed. The SharePoint admin center can be accessed with a SharePoint Admin account. So, you need to take the following steps with a SharePoint Admin account:&#x20;

* Go to <https://yourtenant-admin.sharepoint.com/> to **access the SharePoint admin center**.

<img src="/files/c7buZRyoPGK1b9jsm5BQ" alt="" data-size="original">

* Expand the **Advanced** section in the left-hand menu and click on **API access**.
* In the **Pending requests** section, you should have the following row: **Microsoft Graph - Presence.Read.All**.

<img src="/files/GdDEaycov2CE1ZSeC3SE" alt="" data-size="line">

* Select the row and click on **Approve** at the top left of the page.
  {% endhint %}

* **Disable profile picture editing**: by putting a flag on this option, you can choose to allow the person to change his profile picture or not.

* **Disable editing of the cover**: you can choose to allow the person to change his cover picture or not.

* **Disable tag editing**: you can choose to allow the person to change his tag or not (tags are frames that surround the user's photo and allow the insertion of an inscription such as “hiring” or “open to work”).

* **Enter the URL of the cover that will be inserted by default**: if you want to set up a single cover image for everyone, just upload the image to SharePoint and paste the link into this field. A preview image will be shown if you choose this option.

* **Show tag name**: you can decide to show the name of the tag in the selection of tags to be applied to the profile picture.

Here you can customize the **label of the buttons** used to add information:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/24JpDrIizAUZrwOhrAzw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### Skills settings

This is an optional field, if it is not filled in, the default ones are prepared. Otherwise, if you want to create tags to fill the skill box, you need to:

* **Do you want to use the preset skill list?** Flag this button.
* Insert the **term store's unique id** with the skills list inside (scores included).

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/TnDQeglksghth1eY1KcY" alt="" width="446"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### Project settings

This is an optional field. This option is useful if the user has carried out or is involved in specific projects, so that he/she can add the projects he/she is working on to his/her profile. If you want to create tags to fill the projects box, here is the procedure:

* **Do you want to use the preset projects list?** Flag this button.
* Insert the **term store's unique id** with the projects list inside (scores included).

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/hirV6hySy2nWPbpZ2uu9" alt="" width="441"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### Order settings

Here you can choose the order of the information shown on the My Profile page. You can just drag and drop the tiles based on your choice.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/NZ1qGlxZTccDqsdwA8Nd" alt="" width="257"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

***

## Add tags

You can **personalize your image** by adding a **tag**. Tags are frames that surround the user's photo and allow the insertion of an inscription such as “hiring” or “open to work”. To do this, you need to upload the images associated with the tag to the document library titled **My profile tags**. These images should have only the tag, with the rest of the image being transparent. This way, the tag can be overlaid onto your existing profile picture seamlessly.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/HZRqZbFIC8gLstyvI4Kp" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% hint style="info" %}
**Please note: it is important that tag images are 150x150 in size**; otherwise, the tag will not be visible.
{% endhint %}

With that option, **the user can choose his own tag** to his profile photo **by clicking on**:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/6xPEPmCeILCyvrQsPY9q" alt="" width="299"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/pQH6QObrVidOamPY1Fap" alt="" width="375"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Once everything has been filled in, the My Profile page looks as follows:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/AFXG71cO8mXwrLKdiIQm" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Each user can fill in all the chosen fields by clicking on each of them and entering personal information. By default, the information is flagged as visible; if the user does not wish to make certain fields visible, the flag has to be removed.

***

## Configure the My profile images and My profile info lists

The My Profile web part relies on two lists where users' images and details are saved: **My profile images** and **My profile info**. These lists require a **specific configuration** so that users can interact with them. To learn how to configure these lists, read the [dedicated guide](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/other-configurations/configuration-of-favorites-lists-and-user-lists).&#x20;

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# New employees

## What is New Employees?

New Employees is the dedicated area on the SharePoint intranet designed to welcome and introduce new team members to the company. This feature allows HR and department leads to showcase recent hires, helping everyone recognize and connect with new colleagues.&#x20;

New Employees supports smoother onboarding by fostering a sense of belonging and encouraging early engagement. Each profile includes key details such as role, department, and a short bio, making it easier for existing staff to reach out and collaborate.&#x20;

The web part has a dual display: by clicking on a new employee’s profile, users can view their background and responsibilities. This visibility promotes internal networking and helps build a more connected workplace from day one.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/jvkyteNRlWimkH7k1fPM" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

***

## Add the New Emplyees web part to a SharePoint page&#x20;

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click Edit at the top right of the page.&#x20;
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part and you'll see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/GyopbANYQGrdGXC1R3AL" alt="" data-size="line">
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter Job to quickly find and select the Job Posting web part, which is named “IAI – New Employees”&#x20;

<div align="left"><img src="/files/Djnlc1wZI7o0K6RlWdCK" alt=""></div>

* Click the Edit properties button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options such as View settings, List and field settings, General settings and more. See below for more information on each of these options.&#x20;

***

## Configuration <a href="#configuration" id="configuration"></a>

1. [Layout settings](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/components/news-announcements#layout-settings)
2. [Data sources](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/components/news-announcements#data-sources)
3. Filters
4. [General settings](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/components/news-announcements#general-settings)
5. [Display settings](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/components/news-announcements#display-settings)
6. Field settings

### Layout settings

The layout settings allow you to customize the appearance of your application by adjusting various settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/694l5WhEkZpOA3QnGyIR" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By opening this first configuration, you will see the following options:&#x20;

* **Do you want to hide the background?** You can choose to hide or display the webpart background the default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a white background. If you enable this option, the white card background will be completely removed, allowing the content to appear directly on the page. As a result, the webpart will be transparent, showing either the selected background image or the chosen SharePoint page color.&#x20;
* **Do you want to hide the background shadow?** You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the webpart stand out more against the rest of the page. If you enable this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.&#x20;
* **Select the type of background shadow**: if you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from High Contrast, Light, or Dark options.&#x20;
  * If you select **High contrast**, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.&#x20;
  * By choosing the **Light background shadow**, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.&#x20;
  * Finally, the **Dark background shadow** style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more.&#x20;
* **Do you want to hide the title?** Here you can select whether to show the webpart title or hide it. If set to visible, the web part title will appear on the left side.&#x20;
* **Enter the application title**: Thanks to this configuration, you can customize the application title. If you keep it blank, SharePoint will show the default title “Job Posting” at the top left angle of the webpart.&#x20;

### Data sources

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/nvzwEwyQLitHau70hPKt" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Query type**: select the People Directory data source, which can be either SharePoint or EntraID. Since a SharePoint list can contain a maximum of 5,000 items, companies with more than 5,000 employees will be required to use Graph as the data source. For companies with fewer than 5,000 employees, the choice will be the SharePoint list of the People Directory, which is synchronized daily with Azure AD contacts.&#x20;
* **Enter the site URL where the People directory list has been installed**. For example: <https://intranetai.sharepoint.com/sites/my-hub/>&#x20;
* **Choose the People list**: select People directory list.
* **Insert the url where the People page is located** within the intranet.

### Filters

The function allows users to **filter profiles based on hiring dates**, enabling targeted and dynamic selection.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/LxyzxU8nFyI9MizsGkDN" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Filter by days**: users can set a specific time range (e.g., “last 30 days) to display only the profiles hired within that period

### Display settings

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/pvsezGG2CTtl0EpX7xcq" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Do you want to hide the profile image?** You can choose to hide or display the profile image. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by the absence of profile picture.&#x20;
* **Do you want to hide the Teams icon?** You can choose to hide or display the Teams Icon. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by the absence of this icon.&#x20;
* **Do you want to hide the Email icon?** You can choose to hide or display the Email Icon. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by the absence of this icon.&#x20;

### Field settings

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/CUwJDrAxuSjrK2MmxcIy" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>


# News Announcements

Organizational announcements to keep users informed about the most relevant news for their work.

## What is News Announcements

Announcements are a **more operational** type of news, so they don't require elaborate graphic layouts. Visually, they are presented in an extremely simple yet clear and linear manner. This component allows you to give them the right graphic emphasis without the need for excessive effort at the level of individual news.

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **News and Communications** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/company-news/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the News Announcements web part to a SharePoint page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part and you'll see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/l5ySSL5qOCO7zmUJPhxZ" alt="" data-size="line">&#x20;
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **NewsAnnouncements** to quickly find and select the News Announcements web part, which is named "IAI - NewsAnnouncement&#x73;**"**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/vruNiRAteC4d5Ig3FP8D" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click the **Edit** **properties** <img src="/files/FF6kKRJSnhXAQOwuG0lH" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options such as Layout settings, Data sources, Filters settings, General settings, Display settings and Colors settings. See below for more information on each of these options.

***

## Configuration

1. [Layout settings](#layout-settings)
2. [Data sources](#data-sources)
3. [Filter settings](#filter-settings)
4. [General settings](#general-settings)
5. [Display settings](#display-settings)
6. [Colors settings](#colors-settings)

### Layout settings

The layout settings allow you to customize the appearance of your application by adjusting various layout settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Z09YDHQPSvl0EP4SDMta" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By opening this first configuration, you will see the following options:

* **Do you want to hide the background?** You can choose to hide or display the webpart background. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a white background. If you enable this option, the white card background will be completely removed, allowing the content appear directly on the page. As a result, the webpart will be transparent, showing either the selected background image or the chosen SharePoint page color.
* **Do you want to hide the background shadow?** You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the webpart stand out more against the rest of the page. If you enable this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.
* **Select the type of background shadow**: if you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from **High Contrast, Light, or Dark** options.
  * If you select **High contrast**, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.
  * By choosing the **Light background shadow**, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.
  * Finally, the **Dark background shadow** style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more.
* **Do you want to hide the title?** Here you can select whether to show the webpart title or hide it. If set to visible, the web part title will appear on the left side.
* **Enter the application title**: thanks to this configuration, you can customize the application title. If you keep it blank, SharePoint will show the default title “Announcements” at the top left angle of the webpart.

### Data sources

These settings allow you to specify the data sources to be linked to the web part. In this section, you can also select the specific sites from which to retrieve news.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/c3EMU2Jt1NuZdStSEDDL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Search and select sites**: here you can select the source site where to take the news from. For example: My Hub.
* **Use the hub site?** This option allows you to directly take the complete hub as source for the news. If disabled, news will be sourced from the current site or from the specific sites you previously selected.

### Filter settings

You should fill out this section if you need to set which news each user will see in the webpart.

This helps to outline the following fields:

* Classify news based on a **specific metadata**. For example, you can decide to show only news tagged as "Highlights" or "Company news".
* **Audience targeting**. You can also filter news based on audience targeting, ensuring that different users see only the news relevant to them based on their membership to a specific group.
* **Show or hide untranslated news**. In case of multilingual news content, the web part can display articles in the user’s preferred language, providing a personalized reading experience.

These settings help tailor the news display to specific user groups, enhancing relevance and accessibility.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/SjvgbrKa9NV0IaS1t8tL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Configure filters/tags**: in this window, you can configure the various filters to be applied to your news. By filling in this fields, the available filters for the news will appear.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/bWZAfTbDi9zcQ91FVRPw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* In the first column, write: **owstaxId** + the **name of the column** used to assign metadata to the news.
* In the second column, copy-paste the id of the term set. To do this, go to the term store and find the id of the term set.
* **Show filter?** Indicate whether the filter dropdown should be displayed to users. Flag this option if you want users to see and interact with the filter dropdown; leave it unflag it if you want to hide it.
* **Show tag?** Determine if the tags assigned to the news should be displayed in the news preview. Flag this option to show the tags; unflag it if they should be hidden from view.

{% hint style="info" %}
[Click here](/sharepoint-intranet/components/news-archive#access-the-term-store) to discover how to configure the id of the term set store.
{% endhint %}

* **Do you want to filter news by audience?** Please select to have the news filtered by audience or not.

{% hint style="info" %}
This On/Off command will allow you to have the news filtered by audience: if you put a specific Security AD Group in Audience property of the news, this will be proposed to the users inside that specific group. If you leave this property blank, the news will be visible for everybody. If you want to discover more about SharePoint audience feature, [click here](https://support.microsoft.com/en-au/office/target-content-to-a-specific-audience-on-a-sharepoint-site-68113d1b-be99-4d4c-a61c-73b087f48a81).
{% endhint %}

* **Hide untranslated news**: on translated pages, by default the web part also shows news that hasn't been translated. This option allows you to display only the news articles that have been translated into the language of the page. If you disable this option, untranslated news will also be visible, appearing in their original language if a translation is not available

### General settings

This section allows you to sort the news by filter and/or to show these filters as tags in the news themselves. This setting allows you to view exclusively the news with determined tags assigned.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/2FmAMxOtPZDpgsL6P4wq" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Select whether to open the news on the **current page** or on a **new page**.
* Select whether to have the **automatic sliding**. If you put **Yes**, news will slide in carousel mode every 5 seconds. If you put **No**, the sliding will be manually made by the user, via the arrows on the bottom of the webpart.
* **Indicate the number of news to load**: this feature will allow you to choose how many news to show up in the webpart itself.
* **Enter the name of the field to sort by**: by default, the webpart sorts news by First Publish Date. This feature allows you to sort them by a different field. To do so, you need to enter the name of a managed property, which must be defined as sortable in the SharePoint admin area.
* **Select the sorting of the results**: this allows you to select an ascending or descending order.

### Display settings

The Display Settings allow you to customize how content is presented on the screen. With various options, you can control the visibility of elements, adjust layouts,  enable automatic sliding, and configure navigation settings. These features help enhance user experience and ensure the content is displayed according to your preferences.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/PpU7dwGagtQXcIIybO1J" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Show news site**: you can choose whether to display the name of the news site.
* **Invert title and content**. The default option is No: in this case, you have the news content on the first line of the preview and the news title on the second line. If you select **Yes**, the position of these two elements will be inverted, with the title on the first line and the content underneath. See below for examples of these two layouts.
* **Showing the views?** You can decide to display or hide the number of views.
* Select whether want to **hide the news publication date:** if set to **Yes**, the date will be hidden; if set to **No**, it will be visible.
* **Enable the "New" tag:** you can choose to activate the display of the **"new" tag**. By default, it will not be visible.
* **Insert the "new" tag label**: it is possible to **customize the label of this tag**. You just need to type the name you would like to use in the **"Insert the "new" tag label"** box. If no custom text is entered, the default "New" label will be used.
* **Days after publication date in wich the tag "new" remains visible:** you can define the number of days the "New" tag will stay visible after the content is published.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/A1LtxaaEAqXDfl1nYzrx" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Enter the url for the “view all” link**: this field corresponds to the See all news button and it’ll appear on the **top right** of the webpart. You can choose what page the user will land on by clicking on this button. This could be another news announcements page with all the news of the site, for example.
* **Do you want to open the “view all” link on the current page?** If you select the Current page option, SharePoint will reload the page you are navigating, displaying the news. If you choose the New tab option, SharePoint will open a new browser window where the news will appear.
* **Enter the name of the “view all” link**: enter the name (or label) of the 'View All' link.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/8ozGLhXR3nfmHxNi4oHK" alt="" width="508"><figcaption><p>Invert title and content: No (default option)</p></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/1if7XcKchrJMFEOTX0p5" alt="" width="563"><figcaption><p>Invert title and content: Yes</p></figcaption></figure></div>

### Colors settings

News Announcements allows you to **select a personalized color** for webpart background, the news titles and the text colors.

{% hint style="info" %}

* If you're not in edit mode already, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Select the **News Announcements** web part, then click **Edit web part** <img src="/files/UFhC72tXYchTWhWzRQkA" alt="Web part edit button" data-size="line"> on the left side of the web part.
  {% endhint %}

You'll see this **three choices to be selected:**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/RqclN9tNIJgkOE04aFCo" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

If you leave it as **No**, the webpart will take the colors **directly from the graphic theme you installed**: the title of the webpart, the CTA for the news archive, the buttons for the slider and the news titles will take the **primary color**. The webpart background will take the **NeutralLighter color code**. The remaining texts (news description, date and views) **will be in black**.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
These colors will be selected via the webpart **only if you put it in a white section**. If you decide to change the section background shading, **SharePoint will adapt the colors accordingly**. This happens because SharePoint can select the colors that better match with your primary colors, **to improve the readability of the texts**.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

Once you click on **Yes**, you'll be able to **select the three different colors**, both via the hex code, the RGB codes and to directly select it via the board.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Tlx0jE8SFhzQh3QFhPjW" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Once you're done with these configurations, **always remember to click Save as draft to have the preview. Once you're happy with the final result, click Republish to make the area visible for all the users in the intranet**.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/hArT6NIuggx1bo9QMSa6" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# News Archive

The SharePoint list that hosts the news published in the SharePoint intranet, sorted by publication date and filterable by category.

## **What is News Archive**

This web part facilitates access to all the intranet's news articles, thoughtfully **sorted by publication date and filterable by category.** This functionality allows users to **effortlessly navigate** through the archive, ensuring a straightforward and **tailored approach to information retrieval**. **Customize and configure filters** according to your preferences to enhance your intranet browsing experience.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **News and Communication**s by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/company-news/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the News Archive web part to a SharePoint page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part and you'll see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/l5ySSL5qOCO7zmUJPhxZ" alt="" data-size="line">&#x20;
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **News Archive** to quickly find and select the News Archive web part, which is named "IAI - NewsArchive".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/ioJnQWA0rJN1C7Fgvnik" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click the **Edit properties** <img src="/files/wgQnvVlm2nqL1MeS6Pcp" alt="" data-size="line"> **button** on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options such as Layout settings, Data sources, General settings, Default view settings, Compact view settings and Summary view settings. See below for more information on each of these options.

***

## Configuration

1. [Layout settings](#layout-settings)
2. [Data sources](#data-sources)
3. [Filter settings](#filter-settings)
4. [General settings](#general-settings)
5. [Default view settings](#default-display-settings)
6. [Compact view settings](#compact-display-settings)
7. [Summary view settings](#summary-display-settings)

### Layout settings

The layout settings allow you to customize the appearance of your application by adjusting various layout settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/xvlA2WjxPoGR1BTAXBhq" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By opening this first configuration, you will see the following options:

* **Do you want to hide the background?**
  &#x20;You can choose to **hide** or **display** the webpart background. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a white background. If you **enable** this option, the white card background will be completely **removed**, allowing the content appear directly on the page. As a result, the webpart will be **transparent**, showing either the **selected background image** or the **chosen SharePoint page color**.
* **Do you want to hide the background shadow?**
  &#x20;You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the webpart stand out more against the rest of the page. If you **enable** this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.
* **Select the type of background shadow**:
  &#x20;if you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from **High Contrast, Light**, or **Dark** options.
  * If you select **High contrast**, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.
  * By choosing the **Light** background shadow, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.
  * Finally, the **Dark** background shadow style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more.
* **Do you want to hide the title?**
  &#x20;Here you can select whether to show the webpart title or hide it. If set to **visible**, the web part title will appear on the left side.
* **Enter the application title**
  : thanks to this configuration, you can customize the application title. If you keep it **blank**, SharePoint will show the default title “News Archive” at the **top left angle** of the webpart.
* **Select view mode**
  : finally, you can select the preferred view mode. There are three different choices: **Default**, **Compact** or **Summary** view mode, to define how the content is shown. These settings help you create a tailored and visually optimized interface.
  * **The Default display mode** provides a **standard** layout with a balanced amount of information and spacing, ensuring clarity and ease of navigation. In this view mode, you can configure filters and tags for news. Moreover, the default display mode is usually used on the **News Archive page**.
  * **The Compact display mode** reduces spacing and **condenses the content**, allowing more items to be displayed on the screen at once. This display mode is suitable for the **homepage**.
  * **The Summary display mode** provides **key information in a simplified format**, focusing on essential details while reducing visual clutter for a more concise view. This version is suitable for the **homepage**.

The screenshot below provide examples of the **three options**.

**Default** mode:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/beaOjseGg9P7XZgzVDJe" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

**Compact** mode:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/YmAEIVEVTqCUNsb32VC1" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

**Summary** mode:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/9cXciADYNbFDo0IKVhDx" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### Data sources

These settings allow you to specify the data sources to be linked to the web part. In this section, you can also select the specific sites from which to retrieve news.

Complete the section as follows:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Dtj0ekcvMh1b46C6SIhi" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Select sites**: select the sites from which to take the news to be shown in the archive. You can both enter the URL of each site or type the site name. Once you find the site(s) you want to enable, click the corresponding checkbox.
* **Use the hub site?** If you **enable** this option, the hub site will be used as the source for the news. This means that all news published on the hub site will appear in the web part. If **deactivated**, the news source will be the selected sites listed above.

### Filter settings

You should fill out this section if you need to **set which news each user will appear in the News Archive**.&#x20;

This helps to outline the following fields:&#x20;

* Classify news based on a **specific metadata**. For example, you can decide to show only news tagged as "Highlights" or "Company news".
* **Audience targeting**. You can also filter news based on audience targeting, ensuring that different users see only the news relevant to them based on their membership to a specific group.&#x20;
* Show or hide **untranslated news**. In case of multilingual news content, the web part can display articles in the user’s preferred language, providing a personalized reading experience.

These settings help tailor the news display to specific user groups, enhancing relevance and accessibility.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/VLHjzFDDlhBs9RXaiEL4" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Enter the column name**: enter “**owstaxId**” plus **column name** that you have set to assign news tags. You must fill in this field if you prefer to pre-filter news by tags. Only news with specific tags, such as People News, will be included.
* **Enter the unique id of the term set**: copy and paste the **id** **of the desired term set** (which you can find in the Term store).

{% hint style="info" %}
[Click here](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/other-configurations/creation-of-tag-systems-for-news-and-documents) for more information about the creation of **tag systems** for news.
{% endhint %}

* Then, **select values to pre-filter the results**: you can choose the tags for the news you prefer to display in the News Archive.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/jzhgU2aeFMLxntuqA4pl" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Configure filters/tags**: in this window, you can configure the various filters to be applied to your news. By filling in the fields, the available filters for the news will appear.

<figure><img src="/files/vAOL08CeQ1DTkv6BX9DS" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* In the first column, write: **owstaxId** + the **name of the column** used to assign metadata to the news. For example, owstaxIdIAINewsTags.
* In the second column, copy-paste the **id of the term set**. To do this, go to the Term store and find the id of the term set.

{% hint style="info" %}
[Click here](#access-the-term-store) to discover how to configure the id of the term set store.
{% endhint %}

* In the third column, enter the **custom filter name** you wish to apply. This is a name used to identify a filter you are creating, which will be applied to the news items. The custom filter helps organize and narrow down the displayed content based on specific criteria.
* **Show filter?** Indicate whether the filter dropdown should be displayed to users. Flag this option if you want users to see and interact with the filter dropdown; leave it unflag it if you want to hide it.
* **Show tag?** Determine if the tags assigned to the news should be displayed in the news preview. Flag this option to show the tags; unflag it if they should be hidden from view.
* **Show search bar?** Specify if a search bar should be shown in the filter dropdown to allow users to search for a specific tag. If you want a search bar to appear, flag this option; otherwise, unflag it. This functionality can be useful in case you think you’re going to have a large number of tags.
* **Stop reordering**: this option prevents the ability to reorder items. By default, the webpart sorts tags alphabetically. However, there might be cases (such as the Months) you might need to sort by the same order set in the Term Store. That said, flag this option if you want to follow the same sorting order available in the Term store, or unflag it if you want to keep the alphabetical order.
* **Open filter on startup?** Indicate whether the filter dropdown should be automatically applied when the page or view loads. Flag this option if you want the filter to be open as soon as the page starts; unflag it if you don’t.
* **Filter news based on publication day?** You can filter the news archive by selecting a specific time range. For example, you can decide to show only the news published during the past 30 days. If you disable this option, the archive will display all available news without any date-based filtering, showing the entire collection regardless of when they were published.
* **Do you want to filter news by audience?** If you enable this option, news will be visible only to the targeted groups. If you disable it, all news will be accessible to everyone within the Intranet, regardless of their group or role.
* **Hide untranslated news:** on translated pages, by default the web part also shows news that hasn't been translated. This option allows you to display only the news articles that have been translated into the language of the page. If you disable this option, untranslated news will also be visible, appearing in their original language if a translation is not available.

### General settings

By opening this area, this is what you'll see:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/N6U3Q5yi9t6NmIbQP9Bm" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Indicate the **number of news to load**: you can choose the number of news items to load in the web part.
* **Enter the name of the field to sort by** (if empty, the news will be sorted by date): you can then choose to sort news by author name (in this case, write "author"), or by title (in this case, write "title"). If you leave the field empty, news will be sorted by publication date.
* **Select the** **sorting of the results**: here you can choose to sort results in **ascending** or **descending** order.
* **Select where to open the news**: you can choose whether the news item will be opened on a new page or on the same page.

### Default display settings

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/bewOejcTpYP9YhHPqxHZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Enable the "New" tag:** you can choose to activate the display of the **"new" tag**. By default, it will not be visible.
* **Insert the "new" tag label**: it is possible to **customize the label of this tag**. You just need to type the name you would like to use in the **"Insert the "new" tag label"** box. If no custom text is entered, the default "New" label will be used.
* **Days after publication date in wich the tag "new" remains visible:** you can define the number of days the "New" tag will stay visible after the content is published.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/UaNfAZLSqi8xHlfevX3Q" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Show creation date?** Choose whether to display or hide the creation date of the news article. If **enabled**, the publication date will be visible to users; if **disabled**, it will be **hidden**.
* **Show author?** You can choose to display or hide the author of the news article. If **enabled**, the **author’s name** will be shown; if **disabled**, the news will appear **without attribution**.
* **Show the source site?** You can choose to display or hide the name of the news source site. If **enabled**, the original site where the news was published will be **visible**; if **disabled**, it will be **hidden**.
* **Select which icon to use for “likes”**: you can either use a thumbs up icon or a heart icon to identify likes.
* **Show likes?** You can choose to **display** or **hide** the **number of likes**.
* **Show comments?** You can choose to **display** or **hide** the **number of comments.**
* **Show views?** You can choose to **display** or **hide** the **number of views.**
* **Disable favorites?** You also have the possibility of **disabling the favorites functionality**. In this case, the favorites filter will **not** be visible in the web part.
* **Insert list of favorite news**: insert the URL of the **favorite news list** (stored in the Site contents of the intranet) to allow users to flag their favorite news. [Click here](/sharepoint-intranet/other-configurations/configuration-of-favorite-lists-and-user-lists) to learn more how to configure the favorite lists.

### Compact display settings

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/VMjcrpv6XgCHPlb2I3af" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Enable the "New" tag:** you can choose to activate the display of the **"new" tag**. By default, it will not be visible.
* **Insert the "new" tag label**: it is possible to **customize the label of this tag**. You just need to type the name you would like to use in the **"Insert the "new" tag label"** box. If no custom text is entered, the default "New" label will be used.
* **Days after publication date in wich the tag "new" remains visible:** you can define the number of days the "New" tag will stay visible after the content is published.
* **Show the source site?** You can choose whether to **show the source site of the news or not**. If you **enable** this option, the name of the site where the news was originally published will be visible. If you **disable** this option, the source site will be **hidden**, showing only the news content without its origin.
* **Enter the URL for the "view all" link**: this field corresponds to the **See all news** button and it’ll appear on the **top right** of the webpart. You can choose what page the user will land on by clicking on this button. This could be another news archive page with all the news of the site, for example.
* **Enter the name of the "view all" link**: enter the name or label of the 'view all' link.
* **Do you want to open the "view all" link on the current page?** You can decide whether to open the link on the **current page** or on **another** one.

### Summary display settings

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/0ZW2fh8LKa8fgyDkaICe" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Enable the "New" tag:** you can choose to activate the display of the **"new" tag**. By default, it will not be visible.
* **Insert the "new" tag label**: it is possible to **customize the label of this tag**. You just need to type the name you would like to use in the **"Insert the "new" tag label"** box. If no custom text is entered, the default "New" label will be used.
* **Days after publication date in wich the tag "new" remains visible:** you can define the number of days the "New" tag will stay visible after the content is published.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/W97jIJcgcJ3uFU5mfFPI" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Do you want to view pinned news?** Choose whether to include a section of pinned news (i.e., highlighted news) at the top of the web part.

{% hint style="info" %}
[Click here](/sharepoint-intranet/components/news-archive#create-a-column-for-pinned-news) to discover how to create a column for pinned news
{% endhint %}

* **Enter the manage property field for the pinned news**: if you have decided to show a section of pinned news, here you need to enter the name of the column used to pin news. Then, use the field below to decide the number of highlighted news you want to show.
* **Filter popular news based on publication day?** You can filter the news archive so that it displays only the most recent news. Enable this setting and set a time frame.
* **Do you want to show tags?** You can choose to display or hide the tags applied to news. If you enable this option, tags will be displayed, helping users quickly identify and filter relevant topics. If you disable this option, tags will be hidden, keeping the news display cleaner and more minimalistic.
* **Show creation date?** You can choose to display or hide the creation date.
* **Show the author?** You can choose to display or hide the author of the news.
* **Show likes?** You can choose to display or hide the number of likes.
* **Select which icon to use for likes in the summary view**: you can either use a thumbs up icon or a heart icon to identify likes.
* **Show comments?** You can choose to display or hide the number of comments.
* **Show views?** You can choose to display or hide the number of views.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/iu8mr7RheyliuKGFH7lZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Do you want to disable the popular news section?** If you want to deactivate the Popular news functionality, select Yes. The All news and Popular news buttons will disappear.
* **Enter the URL which will be opened by clicking “See all news”**: this field corresponds to the “**See all news**” button at the bottom of the web part. You can choose what page the user will land on by clicking on this button. This could be another news archive page with all the news of the site, or a system page.
* **Enter the "See all news" button label**: this field allows you to **customize the title** of the "**See all news**" button at the **bottom** of the web part. If this field is **not** filled in, the "**See all news**" title will appear **by default.**
* **Enter the "All news" link label**: this field allows you **to customize the title** of the "**All news**" button in the **upper right corner** of the web part. If this field is **not** filled in, the "All news" title will appear by default.
* Enter the "**Popular news**" **link label**: this field allows you to **customize the title** of the **Popular news button** in the **upper right** corner of the web part. If this field is **not** filled in, the "**Popular news**" **title** will appear by default. The **Popular news** section highlights **news with the highest number of views**. Therefore, if you click on this button you'll see the news articles which have obtained the most views. To go back to the previous view, you just need to click on the **All news** button.
* **Do you want to choose the height of the application?** If you want to choose the height of the web part, select **Yes** and enter the height of the application in the field below. If you select **No**, the web part will adapt to the number of news items you have chosen to display.

***

## Create a column for pinned news

This step will allow you to set up a column within the backend of your intranet for configuring pinned news.

* To enter your intranet backend, simply click on **Site Contents**.

<figure><img src="/files/DFfIC92K9QOW8UqmL6Ym" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* Scroll down to **Site Pages** and click on **Settings**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Rw9oIUm40mpgzq76XQSE" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Under the Columns section, click on **Create column**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/4sY8jAb0FbjOz9sz3oxg" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Name the column **“IAIPinnedNews”**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/RCCSD5wW3GvfjzIzk0BQ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Select the column type: **Yes/No** (check box).
* In the Default value field, select **No**.
* Click on **Ok** to save your updates.
* Once you've created the column, you need to go back to the Site Pages to select the news you want to highlight (pin).
* Select your news and click on the  <img src="/files/rSzB5UT7Ha4tCIVTuaUg" alt="" data-size="line"> icon at the top right of the page **to access information on this news**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Q5zQvB21iiBErdIFhhI1" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Scroll down and select the Pinned field.
* Repeat this step for the other news you wish to highlight.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/1FeCogeQuKRFZIVeYaCl" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Go back to the page with the News Archive web part and, in the Summary display settings, i**nsert the manage property field in the required field**. The manage property needs to start with the **internal name of the column type** you created **before: IAIPinnedNews**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Fz1zyHm7XqDiDI0LaPiG" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* If the pinned news doesn't show up at the top of the list, please be patient as the changes load.

{% hint style="warning" %}
It may be necessary to force the creation of the manage property, in this case you need to access to the **admin center** of your intranet (it is not always accessible to everyone). Please contact the contact person if you can't access this area.
{% endhint %}

### How to create a managed property

To create a managed property, you must have **SharePoint Online Admin** permissions. If you don’t have these permissions, you won’t be able to create the managed property.

Here are the steps to create a managed property:

1. Access the **Sharepoint admin center** for your tenant. For example: <https://intranetai-admin.sharepoint.com/>
2. Click on “**More features**”; then select “**Search**”.

<figure><img src="/files/BYgLx5pETpxIYzjF1vzd" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

3. You’ll be redirected to a page with various configurations. Click only on "**Manage Search Schema**" to manage search properties.

<figure><img src="/files/wFOxcrTFMgJlO3hzsYow" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

4. In this section, click "**New Managed Property**" to create a new one.

<figure><img src="/files/cbB87dGhoBfEOgioamm7" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

5. A new window with additional configuration options will appear:

<figure><img src="/files/y95XgNZdNAQTCO4ZnTH1" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/dyLyJiEryRrc7Kfpge8P" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* First, enter the property name. This must be the name of the [column created previously](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/components/news-archive#create-a-column-for-pinned-news): **IAIPinnedNews**.
* Then, select the type of information stored in this property. This must match the type you selected when configuring the original column in the Site Pages library. Select: **Yes/No.**

To configure the property, select the following options:

* **Query**: Flag this option to allow the property to be used in search queries.
* **Retrievability**: Flag this to ensure the property's content can be returned in search results.
* Leave the remaining options as **default**.

6. Scroll down the page to “**Mappings to crawled properties**” section.

<figure><img src="/files/ahQyJB51urx3ZjtAxELT" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* Flag the second option to include content from the crawled property.
* Click “Add a Mapping”, then OK.
* A new window will open. Search for and select the **relevant crawled property**: **ows\_IAIPinnedNews.**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/IIrdjsfirC2vuBAOvJJh" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% hint style="warning" %}
It may take a few hours for the content to be indexed. To speed up the process, you can manually trigger a reindex of the site pages
{% endhint %}

Here is the result of the web part displaying one pinned news item:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/hppDYkVRdHYHwJ0H0VBK" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

When you are done, don't forget to publish your edits by clicking on **Republish** at the **top right** of the page.

***

## Access the term store

To access the Term store, take the following steps:&#x20;

1. Click on the **Settings** icon at the top right of the page, then click on **Site information**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/IAZPa4vzct2jQOR1J5e4" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

2. Click on **View all site settings**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/FFaIKI971WNIqHuxymXC" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

3. Under Site Administration, click on **Term store management**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/vuy0cViYror2MbKEhPkz" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

4. You will land on the **Term store**, which is the area where you can create **term sets** and **terms**, i.e. **tags** to categorize your content. Here you need to copy the unique identifier of the taxonomy, which is a code composed of numbers, letters and hyphens.

<figure><img src="/files/1LSmcCkdIfNfx9xuJ2qJ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
If you want to discover more about filters and the Term store management, [click here. ](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/creation-of-tag-systems-for-news-and-documents)
{% endhint %}

***

## Configure the News archive favorites list

The News archive favorites list requires a **specific configuration** so that users can **interact with the list** and **mark news items as favorites**. To learn how to configure this list, read the [dedicated guide](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/other-configurations/configuration-of-favorites-lists-and-user-lists). In particular, please refer to the **First type of configuration** section. &#x20;

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Organizational Chart

The intelligent organizational chart integrated with our People Directory to navigate the company's structure.

## What is Organizational Chart

The **organizational chart** is a feature that allows you to **navigate through the company's structure** and get to **know your colleagues** with real-time profile cards based on the [People Directory](https://intranet.ai/features/people-directory/), all within your SharePoint intranet. This way, employees will be able to understand everyone's role in the company through a hierarchical structure.&#x20;

The company's organizational chart in intranet.ai is **synchronized daily with Azure AD**: all you need to do is add a new entry to Azure AD and assign the responsible manager. Subsequently, the new employee will appear in the company's organizational chart.

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **Organizational Chart** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/oganizational-chart/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the Organizational Chart web part to a SharePoint page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part and you'll see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/l5ySSL5qOCO7zmUJPhxZ" alt="" data-size="line">&#x20;
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **Organizational Chart** to quickly find and select the Organizational Chart web part, which is named "IAI - Organization Chart".

<div align="left"><img src="/files/bvozmuS3l37eFtwr2mof" alt=""></div>

* Click the **Edit** properties <img src="/files/XTEd4kyFQU91WXllipMV" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options such as Filters and properties setup, General settings, Detail settings and Assistant color settings. See below for more information on each of these options.

***

## Configuration

1. [Filters and properties setup](#filters-and-properties-setup)
2. [General settings](#general-settings)
3. [Detail settings](#detail-settings)
4. [Assistant color settings](#assistant-color-settings)

### Filters and properties setup

In this section, you need to **indicate the sources** from which the web part will **retrieve data**.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/RDIripTwYNn5lm088BBz" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Enter the contacts list site url:** insert the **url of the site where the People directory list is located**. Usually, it is the hub site of your intranet.
* **Select the contacts list**: select the **People directory** list from the drop-down menu.

### **General settings**

In this section, all the **necessary fields for displaying** both the **organizational structure** and the **preview of personal profiles** will be configured.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/eXu1cqEazV0YvBM3vgHf" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **User root position**: insert the name of the person at the top of the Organization Chart. **(1)**
* **Data source**: select the data source option, whether they are retrieved from SharePoint or Graph. By default, it's set to SharePoint. **(2)**&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
Leave it set to SharePoint because we usually use the People Directory list, which can contain a maximum of 5,000 items, while enable Graph in case the company has more than 5,000 employees.
{% endhint %}

* **Enter number of layers which have to be shown**: here you can enter the number of levels you want to display when opening the org chart page. **(3)**

{% hint style="info" %}
Our suggestion is to set it to 2.
{% endhint %}

* **Choose the field which will be displayed under the contact's name**: you can choose from the fields available in the dropdown menu. **(4)**

{% hint style="info" %}
Here we suggest putting Job Title.
{% endhint %}

* **Select the field from the list where the active/is-visible value is stored**: we suggest choosing **Active** so you can filter only the active contacts of your People Directory list. **(5)**
* **Choose field where the staff value is stored**: you can select **Assistant** from the list to find contacts who have this field filled out. **(6)**

{% hint style="info" %}
**Please note:** Assistant Function must be set before proceeding with this configuration. If you didn't and you don't know how to set up it, please find further information on how to set up the [Assistant Function](#assistant-function) down below on this guide.
{% endhint %}

* **Insert the staff value which identify assistants**: here you have to put the name you have used to identify staff people. **(7)**

> For example: Assistant&#x20;

* **Chart structure**: here you can choose the layout of the org chart. You have the following options: Normal, Mixed, Tree, Left tree offset or Right tree offset. **(8)**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/B5rUfxF0hhFyQPvcVSXz" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Choose the scroll type**: thanks to this flag, you can decide how the organigram behaves when you use the mouse wheel. There are **two scroll types**: if you select **Zoom**, when using the mouse wheel you will zoom in and out, making the organigram bigger or smaller. If you select **Scroll**, you will enable a vertical scrolling: if the expanded nodes take up more space than the height of the web part, you will be able to scroll up and down with the mouse wheel.&#x20;
* **Select the orientation type**: here you can choose the orientation of the organizational chart by selecting the **position of the root node**. The following options are available:&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/inDeW7c87sJYcmVv6iwy" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### **Detail settings**

In this section, we can **add the link** to the [People Directory](https://intranet.ai/features/people-directory/) so that when individual profile cards are clicked, **the details of that contact** can be viewed.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/GHM6koreQIQctpU50FcF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Detail page url**: insert the link to the [People Directory](https://intranet.ai/features/people-directory/) page.

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **People Directory** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/people-directory/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

* **Do you want to open contact detail in a new tab?** You can select the option you prefer.&#x20;

> By clicking on **Yes**, you’ll allow people to stay in the Organization Chart page and see a new tab opening with the contact detail.\
> \
> By clicking on **No**, once people will click the contact, it’ll be redirected to the contact detail, without opening a new tab.

### **Assistant color settings**

In this section, you can choose the color of the Assistant’s card (if the assistant field is provided).

* The first field is **Choose the background color for the assistant**, where you can either type the hex color code or choose directly from the panel.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/AMFKcNluBEiM5b7i22fm" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* The second field is **Choose the color for the border of the assistant card**, where you can either type the hex color code or choose directly from the panel.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/bACxy3pVdvJVsfUz4A62" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* And the last field is **Choose the color for the assistant card test**, where you can either type the hex color code or choose directly from the panel.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/OMEz3epHdEZfiXv3CTqG" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% hint style="info" %}
**Please note:** once you’re done with the amends, always remember to click on Republish. Otherwise, the amends you made will be discarded.
{% endhint %}

***

## Assistant function

The Organizational chart web part enables you to include assistants within the organizational chart accurately, without causing any confusion regarding levels and hierarchy. This web part operates on a hierarchical structure, where assistants are directly linked to their respective managers.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
**Please note:** it's important to note that assistants should not be regarded as colleagues of the subordinates, and they cannot have individuals reporting to them as subordinates.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

<div align="left"><img src="/files/uphHZRz595isRuPaVR0u" alt=""></div>

### Options for Configuring the Assistant Function

1. [**OPTION 1:** Creating a dedicated column via the People Directory list  (without using Azure AD)](#option-1-creating-a-dedicated-column-via-the-people-directory-list)
2. [**OPTION 2**: Editing an already existing tab on Azure AD](#option-2-editing-an-already-existing-tab-on-azure-a-d)
3. [**OPTION 3:** Inserting a script via Graph (IT colleagues support is required) to edit an ExtensionAttribute on Azure AD](#option-3-inserting-a-script-via-graph-it-colleagues-support-is-required-to-edit-an-extensionattribut)
4. [**OPTION 4:** In case you have a local Azure AD, it’s possible to edit an ExtensionAttribute without using Graph.](#option-4-in-case-you-have-a-local-azure-a-d-its-possible-to-edit-an-extensionattribute-without-using)

### OPTION 1: Creating a dedicated column via the People Directory list

This is the quickest solution because it does not require the use of Azure.<br>

{% hint style="info" %}
**Please note:** since we’re not going to use Azure AD, this column won’t be synchronized with AD.
{% endhint %}

#### **Procedure**

* Click on the **Settings** icon on the top right of the page, then click on **Site contents**.&#x20;

<div align="left"><img src="/files/yB356ikJFRAX9MHhXlb3" alt=""></div>

* Please scroll down until the **People Directory list** and click it.

<div align="left"><img src="/files/YFdgt9zveNwALPiJhXl5" alt="" width="563"></div>

* Once the People Directory is open, please scroll right until the last column, and click on **+ Add Column**. Select the **Text** button and click on **Next**.

<div align="left"><img src="/files/nPUQv6hhh4j1JrwCvjm9" alt=""></div>

* A **pop up will appear** on the right side of the page, with the following fields:&#x20;

<div align="left"><img src="/files/3WUXUY8lz1coqnFThyCH" alt="" width="237"></div>

* In the **Name** field, please write **"Assistant"** (or the name you’d like to use to identify staff position), then click on **Save**.
* Thereafter, please **select the person to whom you want to assign this attribute**, and click on **Edit**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/vxxnP6Xm8if0FB1AvHny" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* A sidebar will appear: simply look for **Assistant**, which is generally located toward the end of the list. Underneath it, please write "Assistant", or the name you’d like to use to identify staff position, and click on **Save**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/TtQbgOga71SmzBWyS7Fl" alt="" width="375"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% hint style="info" %}
Please remember to always use the same word to identify people in staff.
{% endhint %}

### Organizational chart page configuration

Once you’re done with this backend procedure, please go to the Organization Chart page, then click the **Edit** properties <img src="/files/W8PfgOCcmhpgYMSEcPcj" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the top right the page.

<div align="left"><img src="/files/DF7LjNNf9ohMpZ0q1P78" alt=""></div>

* Select the webpart and click the edit properties <img src="/files/gu5P03IkX6rYLFh2gK3S" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane.
* Select the **General Settings** window.
* Under the **Choose field where the staff value is stored** field, please select **Assistant** (or the word you have chosen).
* Under the **Insert the staff value which identify assistants** field, please write **"Assistant"** (or the word you have chosen).

<div align="left"><img src="/files/KvbvCFEp4VRZqypVHzn6" alt="" width="177"></div>

* Please always remember to click on **Republish**.

### OPTION 2: Editing an already existing tab on Azure AD

This option is directly linked to Azure AD. However, it’s not considered as a best practice as the procedure involves editing a label initially assigned to another value.

#### **Procedure**

* The first step is to **select an Azure AD field** that will never be filled in (i.e., About me or Birthday). Once this field is defined, please **rename** it as **"Assistant"**.
* Select **the person to whom you want to assign this attribute**, and fill in the field with "Assistant".

{% hint style="info" %}
Anytime you make a change on Azure AD, the People Directory is automatically updated during the night.
{% endhint %}

#### Organizational chart page configuration

Once you’re done with this backend procedure, please go to the Organization Chart page, then click the **Edit properties** <img src="/files/YpRQTBfYWzZKwg3BQ5ZD" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the top right the page.

<div align="left"><img src="/files/DF7LjNNf9ohMpZ0q1P78" alt=""></div>

* Select the webpart and click the edit properties <img src="/files/gJwG3cTk6rXypQWaP69I" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane.
* Select the **General Settings** window.
* Under the **Choose field where the staff value is stored** field, please select **Assistant** (or the word you have chosen).
* Under the **Insert the staff value which identify assistants** field, please write **"Assistant"** (or the word you have chosen).

<div align="left"><img src="/files/KvbvCFEp4VRZqypVHzn6" alt="" width="177"></div>

* Please always remember to click on **Republish**.

### OPTION 3: Inserting a script via Graph (IT colleagues support is required) to edit an ExtensionAttribute on Azure AD

This is a technical solution that involves modifying an ExtensionAttribute.

{% hint style="info" %}
**Please note:** to fill an ExtensionAttribute IT support is needed.
{% endhint %}

#### Procedure

* **Step 1:** go to <https://developer.microsoft.com/en-us/graph/graph-explorer>.
* **Step 2:** please log in with your proper account.
* **Step 3:** Select **POST > beta >** [https://graph.microsoft.com/beta/users/{userPrincipalName}/onPremisesExtensionAttributes](https://graph.microsoft.com/beta/users/%7BuserPrincipalName%7D/onPremisesExtensionAttributes).\
  Instead of {userPrincipalName}, please insert the name of the referring manager.
* **Step 4:** click on **Run** and type the following text inside the text box.

**Text:**

> {
>
> &#x20;   "extensionAttribute1": "Assistant"
>
> }

#### Organizational chart page configuration

Once you’re done with this backend procedure, please go to the Organization Chart page, then click the **Edit** properties <img src="/files/s194fuleM5sJNk5R3ief" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the top right the page.

<div align="left"><img src="/files/DF7LjNNf9ohMpZ0q1P78" alt=""></div>

* Select the webpart and click the edit properties <img src="/files/yxGPg5axcRiTVlc1PCVS" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane.
* Select the **General Settings** window.
* Under the **Choose field where the staff value is stored** field, please select **Extension Attribute 01** (or the word you have chosen).
* Under the **Insert the staff value which identify assistants** field, please write “**Assistant**” (or the word you have chosen).

<div align="left"><img src="/files/NoAwhPIRj25jQrNrQJu2" alt="" width="177"></div>

* Please always remember to click on **Republish**.

### OPTION 4: **In case you have a local Azure AD, it’s possible to edit an ExtensionAttribute without using Graph.**&#x20;

If you have a local Azure AD, you can simply edit an ExtensionAttribute, without using Graph.&#x20;

#### Procedure&#x20;

**Select the person to whom you want to** **assign this attribute**, and fill the field with "**Assistant**”.

{% hint style="info" %}
Anytime you make a change on Azure AD, the People Directory is automatically updated during the night.
{% endhint %}

#### Organizational chart page configuration

Once you’re done with this backend procedure, please go to the Organization Chart page, then click the **Edit** properties <img src="/files/bNX9o3PDnC62gRptwgy1" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the top right of the page.

<div align="left"><img src="/files/DF7LjNNf9ohMpZ0q1P78" alt=""></div>

* Select the webpart and click the edit properties <img src="/files/xmfpXc4EktDYEx1Fbpok" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane.
* Select the **General Settings** window.
* Under the **Choose field where the staff value is stored** field, please select **Extension Attribute 01** (or the one you have chosen).
* Under the **Insert the staff value which identify assistants** field, please write **"Assistant"** (or the word you have chosen).

<div align="left"><img src="/files/NoAwhPIRj25jQrNrQJu2" alt="" width="177"></div>

* Please always remember to click on **Republish**.

{% hint style="info" %}
Remember that every time you make a change in Azure AD, it will only be visible the following day. This is because our feature is automatically updated every night.
{% endhint %}

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Page alert

The component to display disclaimers on selected pages of your SharePoint intranet.

## What is Page alert

This useful component is a small, friendly reminder you can place anywhere on a page. It’s designed to gently nudge users when there’s something they might have missed—like an extra step, a required action, or an important note to check—helping them stay on track without interrupting their experience.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/6e9GeVzwONVLG1SoWn7e" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

It can be used to highlight upcoming events, deadlines, or important service communications. The alert can include a link for quick access to more details and can be customized using company branding and colors. All disclaimers can be scheduled in advance, and each user’s view can be tracked, helping ensure the right message reaches the right people at the right time.

For quick and lightweight communications, you may also want to consider other components such as: [Alerts and service communications](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/components/alerts-and-service-communications); [Disclaimer](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/components/disclaimer)

***

## Add the Page alert web part to a SharePoint page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part. You will see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="https://docs.intranet.ai/~gitbook/image?url=https%3A%2F%2F2718234637-files.gitbook.io%2F%7E%2Ffiles%2Fv0%2Fb%2Fgitbook-x-prod.appspot.com%2Fo%2Fspaces%252FriXlnuemuParrCf7Uotu%252Fuploads%252FccHplKgXfibd4tktmhas%252Fadvanced-search-2.png%3Falt%3Dmedia%26token%3D7d703967-c3f7-4125-834b-f695362bf90b&#x26;width=40&#x26;dpr=4&#x26;quality=100&#x26;sign=34b00d6f&#x26;sv=2" alt="" data-size="line">.
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **Disclaimer In Page** to quickly find and select the Discliamer in page web part, which is named "IAI - DisclaimerInPage".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/mJJ2k6DDac16Y869UMsG" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click on the Edit properties button <img src="/files/8kLiopLaumfpeePOrOwh" alt="" data-size="line"> on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options such as Layout settings, Data Sources and Display settings. See below for more information on each of these sections.

***

## Configuration

1\.   [Layout settings](#layout-settings)

2\.   [Data Sources](#data-sources)

3\.  [ Display settings](#display-settings)

### Layout settings

The view settings allows you to customize the appearance of your application by adjusting various layout settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/0aF6dd29587VKVApZCE0" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By opening this first configuration, you will see the following options:

* **Do you want to hide the background?** You can choose to hide or display the webpart background The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a white background. If you enable this option, the white card background will be completely removed, allowing the content appear directly on the page. As a result, the webpart will be transparent, showing either the selected background image or the chosen SharePoint page color.
* **Do you want to hide the background shadow?** You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the webpart stand out more against the rest of the page. If you enable this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.
* **Select the type of background shadow:** If you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from High Contrast, Light, or Dark options.
  * If you select **High contrast**, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.
  * By choosing the **Light background** shadow, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.
  * Finally, the **Dark background** shadow style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more.

### Data sources

This component is connected to a dedicated **SharePoint list**, where all communications can be easily managed. As mentioned earlier, messages can be added, customized, and scheduled directly from the list, allowing content owners to control timing, messaging, and visual appearance from a single place—without the need for page edits. This setup makes it simple to keep communications up to date and well organized.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/po1xNsD0Wc3jVd6Qkd3O" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* &#x20;Insert the the website URL and select the list **Disclaimer in page**.
* &#x20;Insert again the URL and select the **Disclaimer in page Users** list. This list allows the web part to identify users who have viewed and closed the disclaimer.

### Display settings

In the **Display Settings**, you can customize the **height** of the box. There is a standard default size, which can be adjusted by changing the pixel value.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/hZjyAleGNKUZj9uQ5CyN" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

***

## Add a new disclaimer in page&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/FOyEJdg3ymdaYPipSQKG" alt="" width="325"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Disclaimers are created by filling in a SharePoint list named **Disclaimers in page List**. To add a new disclaimer to this list, take the following steps:

*

```
<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/LtP1861UKFdHz80o78Zv" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>
```

* Scroll down and click on **Disclaimers in page List**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/2eiBHVN76nVK2dw9fmFk" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Press the Add new item button to add a new item to the list.

<figure><img src="/files/TiWLBZb2ayE7U6vMnC2s" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* A **panel** appears with a number of fields to fill in. The fields marked with **asterisks** are the **mandatory** ones.

### **Disclaimer in page information**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Mtcxi50fe2igMMv7bzN9" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Title**: enter the **title** of the disclaimer in page. Ex. Reminder.
* **Date from**: this is an optional field which allows you to schedule your disclaimer. This means that the disclaimer will be displayed starting from the selected date. The component considers this piece of information only if you have ticked the Is active checkbox.
* **Date to**: this is an optional field which allows you to set an expiry date after which the disclaimer will no longer be visible. The component considers this piece of information only if you have ticked the Is active checkbox.
* **Disclaimer body**: write the text of the disclaimer. You have several possibilities to customize your content. For instance, you can add formatting and include hyperlinks or change the text colors. When you have completed the text, click on **Save** in the lower-right corner of the text box.


# Page Hints

The component that facilitates communication and collaboration among SharePoint intranet editors.

## What is Page Hints&#x20;

Page Hints is a web part that is used exclusively by intranet editors and is visible only in edit mode. It allows them to share **requests, comments and ideas in the form of notes added to the page** they are working on. This feature makes **communication** and **cooperation** among editors **easy** and **effective,** as editors can use it to help each other, make suggestions, provide inputs and give feedback. In addition, notes can act as **memory aids**, reminding individuals of tasks and activities to be completed. Another advantage of this component is that you can add a note directly to a specific page or page section, which ensures **clarity** and **understanding**.

{% hint style="info" %}
Discover the **advantages** of Intranet.ai features by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the Page Hints web part to a SharePoint page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click on **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part. You will see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/l5ySSL5qOCO7zmUJPhxZ" alt="" data-size="line">.&#x20;
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **Hints** to quickly find and select the Page Hints web part, which is named "IAI - Page Hints".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/loT0Jeds9ZDgb0VJ89xb" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* When you select the web part, the following box appears. It shows you the position where the note will be inserted and informs you that this web part is visible only in edit mode, which means that it will disappear from the page when you click on Publish or Republish.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/fF0r3PCKFi1ii7OCwTsi" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click on the **Edit** **properties** <img src="/files/IsFjZFVa1vWdRU8xxppD" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane, which consists of a drop-down menu named Customization settings. See below for detailed information on the configuration.

***

## Configuration

As mentioned in the previous paragraph, the property pane of this web part has only one section, which is named Customization settings. Here you can write your **note** and configure options such as the **size** of the text and the **colors** of the web part.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/gqP3lm9H7dQ4Llcew2sG" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* First of all, you have a **box where you can write a note** to your colleague(s). As mentioned previously, this can be a **suggestion**, a **request**, a **comment** or a **reminder**, to give just a few examples; essentially, you can write whatever you deem useful and appropriate.
* After writing your note, you can choose the **size of the text**. There are four options available, which are illustrated in the screenshots below; the options are **small**, **medium**, **large** and **extra large**.

<figure><img src="/files/QtWE9RKYZO0z9K2hG5oH" alt=""><figcaption><p><em>Small</em></p></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/IoM8VSNR5pCl9rAsGpyg" alt=""><figcaption><p><em>Medium</em></p></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/YeIR3A5O2ELgW6ggLDEH" alt=""><figcaption><p><em>Large</em></p></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/dodtrT4JVdjAHW38zAZ0" alt=""><figcaption><p><em>Extra large</em></p></figcaption></figure>

* Then, you can customize the **colors** of the **text** and the **background**. Click on the drop icon on the right to open the **color panel**, where you can select a specific color by using the **color picker** or by entering a **hex code** into the corresponding box. The default color for the text is black, while the default color for the background is white.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/z7OU4YqIntg9darnTGy6" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Please, note that in order to customize the background color, you need to **disable the chosen background color**. So, make sure that this option is deactivated, otherwise the background color will not change.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/X98aMQzPTzMLFybMDE7I" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Here is an example of what the web part may look like:&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/bElhvVCdQUwfDB3WefH2" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

If you republish the page, the note disappears; you will see it again when you start a new editing session by clicking on Edit.

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Pages Menu

The component that clearly displays the structure of a knowledge base, making it easy to navigate and find information quickly.

## What is Pages Menu

Pages Menu is one of the web parts designed by intranet.ai to help companies **create a corporate knowledge base in SharePoint Online**. Creating a corporate knowledge base provides numerous benefits, such as **quick access to information**, **reduced time waste**, **standardized information**, **knowledge retention**, and **more effective collaboration**.

The Pages menu web part **displays the structure of a knowledge base in a clear way**. It shows the **contents of Site Pages** or a specific folder within Site Pages, showcasing **folders** first and then **pages**. It also offers the possibility to include internal and external **links**.

**Pages Menu** is essential for creating a well-organized knowledge base on SharePoint Online. For additional tools to enhance your knowledge base, refer to the manuals for [**In This Page**](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/components/in-this-page), [**Breadcrumb**](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/components/breadcrumb), and [**Contributors**](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/components/contributors).

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **Pages Menu** by [**clicking here** ](https://intranet.ai/features/pages-menu/)to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Before you start: suggested knowledge base structure

Having a **well-structured and organized knowledge base** is essential for ensuring **easy navigation**, **quick access to information**, and an overall **better user experience**. A clear structure helps users find relevant content efficiently and makes maintaining and expanding the knowledge base more manageable over time.

We recommend adopting the following structure:

* Within the **Site Pages** library, create a folder named **SystemPages**.
* Inside **SystemPages**, create a subfolder for each **top-level section** of articles. For example, in a knowledge base called "Employee Knowledge Base", the top-level sections could be: "Employee Resources", "New Employee Orientation", and "Professional Development".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/EbqZuwaniBcvqwonJWPl" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Optionally, within each top-level section, create additional subfolders for **subsections**, such as:
  * "Employee Resources": "IT Tools and Support", "Policies and Guidelines";
  * "New Employee Orientation": "Company Overview", "First Week Checklist";
  * "Professional Development": "Career Growth", "Learning Opportunities".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/qHPMWauUFKyNFirbKxXc" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* In each subsection, add individual **articles** (**SharePoint pages**) and any relevant **links**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/TCiYzvYsCBPnozlTR7xJ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

With Pages menu, a structure like this is displayed as follows:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/azJeMPq1ZTs9AVRAsJ45" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By clicking on each link, the user can access the corresponding page.

***

## Add the Pages Menu web part to a SharePoint page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click on **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part. You will see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="https://docs.intranet.ai/~gitbook/image?url=https%3A%2F%2F2718234637-files.gitbook.io%2F%7E%2Ffiles%2Fv0%2Fb%2Fgitbook-x-prod.appspot.com%2Fo%2Fspaces%252FriXlnuemuParrCf7Uotu%252Fuploads%252FccHplKgXfibd4tktmhas%252Fadvanced-search-2.png%3Falt%3Dmedia%26token%3D7d703967-c3f7-4125-834b-f695362bf90b&#x26;width=40&#x26;dpr=4&#x26;quality=100&#x26;sign=34b00d6f&#x26;sv=2" alt="" data-size="line">.
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **PagesMenu** to quickly find and select the Pages Menu web part, which is named "IAI - PagesMenu".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/HH4J7JdpWwAOsUXyLjvE" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click the **Edit properties** <img src="/files/NikPYPj5AuwEGt2ZLrvy" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options such as General settings and View settings. See below for more information on each of these sections.

***

## Configuration

1. [View settings](#view-settings)
2. [Generale settings](#general-settings)

### View settings

The View settings are as follows:&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/lWY30f72L18sOnn6vSQl" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By opening this first configuration, you will see the following options:

* **Do you want to hide the background tab?** You can choose to hide or display the webpart background. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a white background. If you enable this option, the white card background will be completely removed, allowing the content appear directly on the page. As a result, the webpart will be transparent, showing either the selected background image or the chosen SharePoint page color.
* **Do you want to hide the background shadow?** You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the webpart stand out more against the rest of the page. If you enable this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.
* **Select the type of background shadow:** if you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from **High Contrast, Light,** or **Dark** options.
  * If you select **High contrast**, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.
  * By choosing the **Light background shadow**, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.
  * Finally, the **Dark background shadow** style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more.
* **Insert title**: thanks to this configuration, you can customize the application title. If you keep it blank, SharePoint will show the default title “My apps” at the top left angle of the webpart.
* **Do you want to hide the title?** Here you can select whether to show the webpart title or hide it. If set to visible, the web part title will appear on the left side.
* **Enter the name that will be used for the "Home"**: here, you can customize the name of the entry point (**Site Pages**). The default name is "Home". This setting is linked to the last one (**Do you want to show the top-level folder?**), which means that it is useful if you decide to show the top-level folder. In addition, it works if a cutting path has not been entered. See an example below:&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Q4YS4gnNmQTi0qA34lO6" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Do you want to show icons for individual elements**: you can decide to show icons identifying different types of items.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/4pvNZSaqebmWZcMfrNdp" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Do you want to open the first folder by default**: you can decide whether the first folder will be open or closed by default.

<div><figure><img src="/files/iImyacN65IYs1pW6nk0m" alt=""><figcaption><p>The first folder is closed by default.</p></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/moZ5xXhuqTYF3EgnAhFB" alt=""><figcaption><p>The first folder is expanded by default, showing subsections.</p></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Do you want to enable scrolling?** You can activate scrolling and set the web part height.
* **Enter the height in pixel of the webpart:** you can set a fixed height for this section and use the scroll bar to read its content.
* **Do you want to show the top-level folder?** You can decide to hide or show the top-level folder, i.e., the entry point.

### General settings

The General settings are as follows:&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/onw1JotwlBilqTW9BG7K" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Insert title**: you can choose a title for this section. If you leave this field empty, the web part will have no title.
* **Enter the cutting path**: if you want to display only a subset of the **Site Pages** folder, like the **SystemPages** subsection, here you need to enter the **URL of the subfolder**.

> For example: <https://intranetai.sharepoint.com/sites/my-hub/KB/SitePages/SystemPages>

* **Do you want to open internal links in a new tab?** You can choose to open internal links in a new tab or the current tab.
* **Do you want to open external links in a new tab?** You can choose to open external links in a new tab or the current tab.
* **Do you want to open pages in a new tab?** You can choose to open pages in a new tab or the current tab.
* **Do you want to show the name or title of links?** You can choose to show the name or title of links.
* **Do you want to show the name or title of pages?** You can choose to show the name or title of pages.
* **Do you want to sort files alphabetically or by a specific field?** You can decide to sort items alphabetically or based on a specific field, the **Order** field. The steps required for creating the **Order** field are described below.

#### Create the Order field

To create the **Order** field, you need to manually add a column of the **Number** type to the **Site Pages** library. The necessary steps are as follows:

* Enter the **Site Pages** library and click **+Add column**.
* Select **Number** and click **Next**.

<img src="/files/qqXmlWoxD44Uje65q019" alt="" data-size="original">

* Enter the column **name**: **Order**.

<img src="/files/lzWvcBfQbuetzGZSzGVo" alt="" data-size="original">

* Save.&#x20;

To set the order of items in a specific folder, take the following steps:

* Click **Edit in grid view.**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/CHquKp9UqBTVkKyG97Uv" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* For each item, enter a number in the **Order** field.

<figure><img src="/files/740Jj7nFbXnK0rfQOrl7" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* Click **Exit grid view**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/uuDgmn0FKgatV9xfXMt5" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Now, make sure that the Pages Menu web part is configured so that the items are sorted based on the **Order** field.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Hto8qEFwcd20vKaNFlkM" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

The configuration is complete: sections, pages, and links will be displayed in the specified order.

{% hint style="info" %}
The Pages Menu web part does not work across sites; it only functions within the site where it is added and configured
{% endhint %}

{% hint style="info" %}
If a user doesn't have access to a page, they won't see that page in the structure.
{% endhint %}

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# People Directory

The intelligent People Directory that integrates with Microsoft 365 to help you find and contact your colleagues.

## What is People Directory

The People Directory is the component that allows you to have the **list of colleagues and their contact information at your fingertips with just one click**. The system is fully synchronized with **Azure AD**, Microsoft's database. Each time the component synchronizes with the corporate Azure AD, it ensures that colleagues' contacts are always available and continuously and automatically updated.

Thanks to the side filters and the dedicated search box, finding colleagues will be even easier and more immediate.

This feature is useful both for quickly finding colleagues' contacts and for getting to know and discovering more about those who work with us every day.

Within this component you are able to do all the following actions:

* Search for your colleagues with a free-text search and phone number
* Search for your colleagues applying filters
* Open the detail pane for every single person to view his/her details
* Contact quickly your colleagues via phone (if you have a Voip system), mail or Teams
* Navigate your company's structure with the use of the Manager field
* View related colleagues
* Choose from several data sources

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Sx6q9EaCffWor3Z8VB4g" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **People Directory** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/people-directory/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the People Directory web part to a SharePoint page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part and you'll see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/l5ySSL5qOCO7zmUJPhxZ" alt="" data-size="line">&#x20;
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **People Directory** to quickly find and select the People Directory web part, which is named "IAI - People Directory".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/n9oiK7Dahh7dLIgR2ZpE" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click the **Edit** **properties** <img src="/files/eFGbqehdvrZyZV9ld7Lo" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options.&#x20;

You can customize all the following features of our People Directory:

* The fields to view inside each box
* The fields to view inside the detail pane of each employee
* The field names&#x20;
* The manager field
* The field for the Other contacts feature
* The filters for searches
* Quick actions

See below for more information on each of these options.

***

## Configuration

1. [Layout settings](#layout-settings)
2. [Data sources](#data-sources)
3. [Filter settings](#filter-settings)
4. [General settings](#general-settings)
5. [Display settings](#display-settings)
6. [Fields settings](#fields-settings)

### Layout settings

The layout settings allow you to customize the appearance of your application by adjusting various layout settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/tRheZA4Psysx7ZyH5tfK" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By opening this first configuration, you will see the following options:

* **Do you want to hide the background?** You can choose to hide or display the webpart background The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a white background. If you enable this option, the white card background will be completely removed, allowing the content appear directly on the page. As a result, the webpart will be transparent, showing either the selected background image or the chosen SharePoint page color.
* **Do you want to hide the background shadow?** You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the webpart stand out more against the rest of the page. If you enable this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.
* **Select the type of background shadow**: if you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from High Contrast, Light, or Dark options.
  * If you select **High contrast**, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.
  * By choosing the **Light background shadow**, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.
  * Finally, the **Dark background shadow** style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more.
* **Do you want to hide the title?** Here you can select whether to show the webpart title or hide it. If set to visible, the web part title will appear on the left side.
* **Enter the title of the application**: thanks to this configuration, you can customize the application title. If you keep it blank, SharePoint will show the default title “People directory” at the top left angle of the webpart.

### Data sources

People Directory allows you to quickly find your colleagues. Therefore, it's essential to include People Directory details in this section.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Si3Sq2IpWHVb1iku35dp" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Data source**: select the **People Directory data source**, which can be either **SharePoint** or **Graph**. Since a SharePoint list can contain a maximum of 5,000 items, companies with more than 5,000 employees will be required to use Graph as the data source. For companies with fewer than 5,000 employees, the choice will be the SharePoint list of the People Directory, which is synchronized daily with Azure AD contacts.
* **Choose the fields to search on**: here you can define which fields the user will be able to search by, such as Title, Manager, Country, and more. If no option is selected, searches will be performed on the standard fields: **Title**, **Business Phone**, **Mobile Phone**, **Email** and **User Login Name**. If one or more fields are selected from the drop-down menu, these will replace the standard fields (they will not be added to them).&#x20;
* Enter the site URL where the People directory list has been installed. For example: <https://intranetai.sharepoint.com/sites/my-hub/>
* Insert the site url where the favorites list is: here insert again the site URL and choose the People directory favorites list. You need to include this list to enable colleagues to add their preferred contacts to a personal favorites list.

{% hint style="info" %}
Typically, the People directory and People directory favorites lists are installed on the main site.&#x20;

How to determine if the lists are on the main site?&#x20;

* Navigate to the home page,&#x20;
* Click on the site settings wheel at the top right,&#x20;
* Select the Site contents option,&#x20;
* Scroll down to see if the list named People directory is available.&#x20;

![](/files/yB356ikJFRAX9MHhXlb3)

![](/files/sErbPeg6rwqC156xZIuW)

If the list is not present, it indicates that the site you are checking is not the correct one.&#x20;

The People Directory now supports the configuration of cross site lists, so it is possible to have the people list in a site A and use the web part from a site B.
{% endhint %}

* Insert the site url where the badge lists are: badge management has been implemented and it is possible to select these lists to view the user's badges. Here it is possible to select these lists to view the user's badges.&#x20;

> For example: <https://intranetai.sharepoint.com/sites/Intranet>.

* Select the Badge categories list.
* Select the People badges list.

### Filter settings

In this section you need to:

* Configure the filters you want to use on your People Directory.
* Select the field from the list where the active/is-visible value is stored.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/RdglAnLNAG83ZuJJfKy3" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Here you need to configure the filters you want to display within the webpart by clicking on **Configure filters**.
* On the first box you choose the **field from your Azure AD you want to show**.
* On the second box, you type the **field custom name for that section**.
* With the first flag you choose if **you want to show that field as a filter**.
* The second flag you choose if you **want to show the filter open by default in the page** (open by default means extended).

<figure><img src="/files/B9Pw4XuDwAYneEycRwMZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* The filters for searches: it is possible to choose which fields to use to activate the search filters. Filters are not mandatory but are a useful research tool. The Favorites component is set by default in the web part, all other fields are optional.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/vgx3Ntrteb1KBHbyWuCT" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% hint style="info" %}
Always remember to click “Save” at the bottom of the page!
{% endhint %}

* **Select the field from the list where the active/is-visible value is stored:** we suggest choosing **Active**, so you can filter only the active contacts of your People Directory list.

### General settings

In this section, you need to configure the fields you want to display on the person’s card, as well as decide the number of users to be shown within the webpart and other options.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/tGxajITG8GPe2Em0dYYi" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Open field configuratior: click on **Configure fields** and a tab will open:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/MFMIwnnd3D706Qpuk8AU" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

1. On the first box you choose the **field from your Azure AD you want to show**.
2. On the second box, you type the **field custom name for that section**.
3. With first flag you choose if **you want to show that field in the profile section**.
4. With second flag you choose if you **want to show that field in the card details**.

Here’s an example of that panel already configured.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/l3osgP4KxXel41ogo1NY" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Always remember to click Save at the bottom of the page!

When SharePoint is selected as data source, it is possible to **choose one or more fields to use for searches**. Here you have a drop-down menu showing all the texts fields contained in the People directory list. If no option is selected, searches will be performed on the standard fields: Title, Business Phone, Mobile Phone, Email and User Login Name. If you select one or more fields from the drop-down menu, these will replace the standard fields (they will not be added to them).

* **Select the property to search for suggestions in profile card**: you can choose which field you want to show suggested contacts. We usually use **Department** or **Manager** to create a sort of organizational chart, but the choice is entirely based on your preferences. For example, if you select Department or Manager, the people who belong to the same department or have the same manager as the user you searched for will be shown as suggested contacts.
* **Choose the property to order the contacts**: in this section, you can choose the order of the people shown. We suggest you to select **Title**, so people will be sorted alphabetically, but you can choose to display the contacts from the Azure AD field in the order that you prefer the most.
* **Choose the number of users to show**: you can choose how many people you want to show on the page.
* **Do you want to show public infos from MyProfile app?** You can flag this option if you want to show public infos from My Profile.

{% hint style="info" %}
If I set the flag to Yes, it means that every time users enter information on their personal profile page and leave the Make visible to colleagues field active, the information they have entered will also be visible in the People Directory, just below the institutional information you have set before.

What is personal profile? Discover it by [clicking here](https://intranet.ai/features/my-profile/).&#x20;
{% endhint %}

Those fields are the same as your Azure AD’s, so you can choose any of them to make visible on the Intranet. Please find here all the screenshots for the configurable features.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/DsiGkRnVY5xzOME39bve" alt=""><figcaption><p>How a compact contact card is displayed with preview information</p></figcaption></figure></div>

<figure><img src="/files/JARqQseZ5i5wHRfNRmNt" alt=""><figcaption><p>How an extended contact card is displayed with information</p></figcaption></figure>

The field for the **Other contacts** feature: this area shows the contacts that have a certain property in common with the selected contact. For example, if you choose to set the Department field for other contacts, the contacts of colleagues who belong to the same department as the person you are looking for will be shown.

<figure><img src="/files/Y1irAKFBXbZ1VUveAYcc" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* Select the **property** to search for **suggestions in the profile card**: you can choose which field you want to show suggested contacts. We usually use Department or Manager to create a sort of organizational chart, but the choice is entirely based on your preferences. For example, if you select Department or Manager, the people who belong to the same department or have the same manager as the user you searched for will be shown as suggested contacts.
* Choose the **property** to **order the contacts**: you can choose the order of the people shown. We suggest you to select Title, so people will be sorted alphabetically, but you can choose to display the contacts from the Azure AD field in the order that you prefer the most.
* **You can choose how many people you want to show on the page**.
* **Do you want to show public infos from MyProfile app?** You can flag this option if you want to show public infos from My Profile.

### Display settings

Thanks to this configuration, you can decide how links behave on contact or profile cards. You can set a URL for the profile image, add a custom link with display text in the details tab, and choose whether links open in the same or a new tab and other options.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/K5DyRyU1ulolCR2I3NZ8" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Insert the link to open on profile image click**: provide the URL that should open when a user clicks on the profile picture.
* **Enter text for additional link on details tab**: type the text you want to display to the contacts. For example: Find out more!
* **Insert the link to the details page**: enter the URL that the additional link in the details tab should point to.

### Custom links settings

On this section, you can activate a **link to a specific content**.

First of all, you need to create a new column on the People directory list to insert a content for each employee. It can be a link to a video, to a presentation, to their LinkedIn or whatever you want.&#x20;

In this case, you need to insert every content individually to each person and the link will appear on the person’s card.

How create a new column in the People directory list?&#x20;

* Navigate to the home page,&#x20;
* click on the site settings wheel at the top right,&#x20;
* select the Site Contents option,&#x20;
* scroll down to see if the list named People directory is available.&#x20;

![](/files/yB356ikJFRAX9MHhXlb3)

![](/files/sErbPeg6rwqC156xZIuW)

Click on the list then click +Add column, choose a text column and then click Next. Then fill in the column for each colleague.

<figure><img src="/files/cJywpROK6mg0gGJiMPMo" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Then you go back to the webpart and:

* Enter the **link text** in the details tab: you can insert a common hyperlink to display on the person’s card. Type the text you want to display on the person’s card.

For example the Organizational Chart.

> Insert the link to the Organizational Chart’s page.
>
> Type the text you want to display on the person’s card.
>
> Select the flag if you want to open the contact detail in a new tab.

* **Do you want to open the contact detail in a new tab?** Select the flag on Yes if you want to open the contact detail in a new tab. Deflag it, if you do want it to be opened on the current page.
* **Enter the text for the unique link in details tab**: here you can insert customized text for the unique link in the details tab. For example: Find out more!
* **Select the field from the list where the unique link is stored**: you select the column you just created. For example: **LinkedIn**.
* **Do you want to open the unique link in a new tab?** Choose Yes if the unique link should open in a new browser tab, otherwise choose No.

And this is the result:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/K2LbCB9KbhTkUMD9Bwgf" alt="" width="395"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/zhRsuQjs2mZUfPvUoXRr" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* The **Show presence** option allows you to **show the user's Teams status** in his or her card. To activate this option, you just need to select **Yes**.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
To activate the Teams status in the intranet web parts, a few actions in the SharePoint admin center are needed. The SharePoint admin center can be accessed with a SharePoint Admin account. So, you need to take the following steps with a SharePoint Admin account:&#x20;

* Go to <https://yourtenant-admin.sharepoint.com/> to **access the SharePoint admin center**.

<img src="/files/c7buZRyoPGK1b9jsm5BQ" alt="" data-size="original">

* Expand the **Advanced** section in the left-hand menu and click on **API access**.
* In the **Pending requests** section, you should have the following row: **Microsoft Graph - Presence.Read.All**.

<img src="/files/GdDEaycov2CE1ZSeC3SE" alt="" data-size="line">

* Select the row and click on **Approve** at the top left of the page.
  {% endhint %}

You can choose the **shortcuts** to contact your colleagues:

1. On the first field, you can choose if you want to show the shortcut to send an **e-mail** to the person.
2. On the second field, you can choose if you want to show the shortcut to **call the person** directly from the Intranet – in that case, you need to have a Voip system!
3. On the third field, you can choose if you want to show the shortcut to open a **Teams chat** with the person.

### Fields settings

Here you need to select each box with the options below:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/OWr3AqhIePGRoFMqogEw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Select the image field from the list where the profile picture is stored**: select User Principal Name.
* **Select the mail field from the list where mail addresses are stored**: select Mail.
* **Select the field from the list where the manager is stored**: select Manager.
* **Select the field from the list where the username is stored**: select User Principal Name.
* **Select the field from the list where the mobile phone is stored**: select Mobile Phone.
* **Select the field where to take the caller's value**: this is an optional section, you should select it only if you have a Voip system.

***

## Configure the People directory favorites list

The People directory favorites list requires a **specific configuration** so that users can **interact with the list** and **mark contacts as favorites**. To learn how to configure this list, read the [dedicated guide](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/other-configurations/configuration-of-favorites-lists-and-user-lists). In particular, please refer to the **First type of configuration** section. &#x20;

***

## Data sources available

Here are the two types of sources that you can choose for showing your colleagues' information inside the intranet People Directory:

* **Azure AD** - The data source of the component are the users you have on your Azure Active Directory, which performs a synchronization every evening so that every change made to contacts on Azure AD (any new or deleted users, deleted, new fields filled in, deactivated profiles, etc.) is reported automatically in the intranet.

The users who are synchronized are those who have the Name and Surname fields filled in and who are active in Azure AD.

On the first configuration, the People Directory is set up to synchronize all of your Azure AD. So also the "admin" contacts or users external to the studio are displayed on the intranet. To not display these contacts on the intranet, we have two options:

1. **Manually deactivate the contacts you do not want to view** from the intranet: it is an activity that you will then have to remember to do manually when add new contacts to Azure AD that you do not want to view on the intranet. To manually deactivate a contact, take the following steps:\
   \
   \- Access the People directory list;\
   \- Select the contact you want to deactivate and click on **Edit**;\
   **-** Scroll down until you see the **Active** field;\
   \- **Remove the flag from Yes**; \
   \- Save.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Y9zzC4t11EKBL9O8nXZs" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

2. **Create an Azure group** (security group or O365 group) containing only the users that must appear in the People Directory. We will set the synchronization only on that group and not on all Azure AD (recommended solution).

* **SharePoint list** - You can manually create a SharePoint list and insert the contacts you want to show on the People Directory, so you will insert yourself all the information needed such as name, surname, mail, phone etc. This option is not updated automatically, so you must remember to always update the SharePoint list in order to show the current and valid information on your People Directory.

***

## Set the People Directory in order to pre-filter contacts for specific values

The possibility of defining pre-filters in query strings has been implemented, in order to load the People Directory already filtered for specific values.

To use it, the filters on the right must first be configured. After that, just insert the filter name (internal name, eg: Department) and the value into the query string.

It allows you to filter both multiple values of the same filter and multiple values of different filters.

> For example: ?Department=HR\&Department=IT\&Country=Italy

The query string is added to the URL of the page where the People Directory is located.

> For example: <https://intranetai.sharepoint.com/sites/iai-demo-saas/SitePages/SystemPages/en/People-directory.aspx?Department=HR&Department=IT&Country=Italy>

## Exclude specific users from the synchronization process

You can exclude specific users from the synchronization by using a **custom field in the SharePoint list**. The field must be of the **Yes/No** type (default value: **No**) and have the internal name **"IAIPDDisableSync"**.

To create this field, take the following steps:&#x20;

* Access the **People directory** list.
* Click on the gear icon at the top right and select **List settings**.
* Under the **Columns** section, select **Create column**.
* Enter the following information about the column:\
  \- Column name: **IAIPDDisableSync** \
  **-** Column type: **Yes/No**\
  \- Default value: **No**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/gy7YQl72AfXYOyiFocnK" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% hint style="info" %}
**"IAIPDDisableSync"** must be the internal name of the column. After creating the column, you can change the field name to make it more user-friendly.
{% endhint %}

This feature is useful for a **SharePoint list synchronized with Active Directory (AD) that also allows manually added users**. These manually added users **will not be removed during the synchronization process**.

Manually added users might not exist in Entra ID and therefore won’t have a **User Principal Name**. The User Principal Name field is a key for managing **detail links**, such as opening a specific user’s profile through the search component. Therefore, when manually adding a user to the **People directory** list, it is important to provide a value for this field, such as **name.surname**.&#x20;

> For example, if you add Marco Rossi to the list and he does not exist in Entra ID, you can type **marco.rossi** in the **User Principal Name** field. This ensures the user's detail page is opened correctly.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/SMnDSRaKRxurAiEGIEXb" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Pop-up

The component to showcase promotional videos, images, and carousels in the SharePoint intranet.

## What is Pop-up

This web part helps you to **promote your company's initiatives** with content that **automatically appears** on the first intranet access. Users can click on the pop-up to access in-depth pages and learn all the details about the promoted content. You can create **videos**, **images** and **carousels** and feature them prominently for colleagues, who will be more involved in company initiatives.

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **Pop-up** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/pop-up/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add a new pop-up to the SharePoint intranet

To create a new pop-up, take the following steps:&#x20;

* Click on the **Settings** icon on the top right of the page, then click on **Site contents**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/8Ad3MmsWgosbVuzWOL0N" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Scroll down and select the **Popup** list.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/s0VXqWg7vrYKb9838BNp" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* When you click on **New**, a panel appears with a number of fields to fill in. The fields marked with **asterisks** are the **mandatory** ones.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/hFxl3F0N3VzOTTU0NfQD" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Pop-up information

* **Title**: enter the title of the pop-up. The content of this field will not be seen.&#x20;
* **Publication date**: you can select a specific publication date. If you leave this field empty, the pop-up will be immediately visibile.
* **Expiry date**: you can select a specific expiry date. After this date, the pop-up will no longer be shown. If you leave this field empty, the pop-up will always be displayed.
* **Daily sessions number**: this is the number of times the user will see the pop-up in a daily session.&#x20;

> For example, if you write 2, each user will see the pop-up twice a day.

* **AD Groups**: by filling in this field, you can target your content to specific audiences instead of making it visible to all users.&#x20;

> For example, you may want to reach only colleagues from the offices and departments involved in the promoted initiative.

* **Image link URL**: in this field, you can enter the link to a page, a form or any other content that will be accessed by clicking on the pop-up. If you leave this field empty, the pop-up will not be clickable and will only have an illustrative function.&#x20;
* **Video url**: if your pop-up is a video, you need to copy and paste the video URL into this field.&#x20;

> This can be, for example, a Youtube video or a video you previously uploaded to your SharePoint intranet.

* **Video type**: in this field, you need to select the correct video source from the list.
* **Attachments**: if you want your pop-up to be a **picture**, you need to upload the picture from your computer and add it as an attachment. You can also upload **multiple pictures**, which will be displayed as a **carousel**.
* Once you have completed the panel, click on **Save**.

{% hint style="info" %}
Remeber that you cannot display more than one pop-up over the same period of time.
{% endhint %}

{% hint style="info" %}
Pop-up also relies on another SharePoint list, called **Popup users**,  which **records pop-up visualizations by users**. This ensures that **Pop-up works with** [**Viva Connections**](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/viva-connections), i.e., the app which allows you to access the intranet via Teams. The Popup users list should be set up so that all visitors have **contribute permissions**. To learn how to configure this list, read the [dedicated guide](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/other-configurations/configuration-of-favorites-lists-and-user-lists). In particular, please refer to the **First type of configuration** section.
{% endhint %}

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Quotes

The personalized banners to disseminate useful tips and practical suggestions on the SharePoint intranet.

## What is Quotes

Quotes is a web part that allows you to **spread tips and values** on your SharePoint intranet. Thanks to this feature, you can create **personalized banners** to make the intranet a **source of daily inspiration** and a powerful **means to convey corporate values**. You can feature quotes from iconic figures, the CEO, company leaders, or any colleague, thereby involving them in the company's culture and growth. The component can be configured so as a new quote is automatically published every day, which allows you to have a dyamic home page.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **Quotes** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/quotes/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the Quotes web part to a SharePoint page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click on **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* For this web part, it is recommended to use a full-width column. So, click on the **Plus** <img src="/files/F8M12kw0yvAITfg98Q97" alt="Web part edit button" data-size="line"> button to add a new full-width column.&#x20;
* You will see a number of web parts that can be added to this type of section. Choose **Quotes**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/y8t6DuxUCR0YvQvMzZ6z" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click on the **Edit** **properties** <img src="/files/dzw2V7sDSrnjfQXtUWL7" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and configure the List settings and the Customization settings. See below for more information on each of these sections.

***

## Configuration&#x20;

1. [List settings](#list-settings)
2. [Customization settings](#customization-settings)

### List settings&#x20;

In this section, you need to indicate the **list** from which the web part will retrieve information.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/VJPPYXj4GM4AQsfANcgo" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Enter the **URL of the Quotes list**.
* If the list contains more than one item, and you flag the **Get latest quotes** box, the web part will show the latest quote you have created. If you do not flag this box, the web part will show quotes according to their publication date (See [Create a new quote](#create-a-new-quote) for further details about the publication of quotes).&#x20;

### Customization settings

In addition to the text of quote, the banner can feature a picture. In this section, you can customize the settings related to the **picture** and the **colors** of the banner.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/aImG7Y7DkmKBemmHs6jR" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* You can change the focal point of the image by **moving it horizontally** (x position) and **vertically** (y position). You can also **zoom** the photo.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/7PojVos7ZO90wHKGjbT0" alt="" width="257"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Here you can change the **text color** and the **background color**, either by entering a specific hex code or by choosing a color from the panel.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/2zFtYZ8rFiaLZQWFJnlm" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Finally, you can set the **width of the image.**

***

## Create a new quote&#x20;

To create a new quote, take the following steps:&#x20;

* Click on the **Settings** icon on the top right of the page, then click on **Site contents**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/mjVTnmmP1ostFHcks0um" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Select the **Quotes** list.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/M2GpzyprYAAXJwlsponu" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click on **New** to add a new item. The following panel will appear:&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/TFIstJvRjJa7OlCKJj53" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Author**: write the author of the quote, or, alternatively, a short sentence that offers a tip or conveys an important value (see picture below). This text will be in bold.
* **Quote text**: write the text of the quote. &#x20;
* **Order**: the number you enter in this field corresponds to the day on which you want to publish the banner. This feature allows you to plan the publication of quotes.&#x20;

> For example, if you want to publish a quote on January 1st, you need to enter 1 in this field.&#x20;

* If you leave the Order field empty, the same banner will be displayed every day. Alternatively, if you have more than one quote, you can set a specific publication date for each of them. &#x20;
* **Image Url**: enter the URL of the picture featured in the banner. This should be a picture you previously uploaded to the SharePoint intranet (see below).
* Once you have completed the panel, click on Save.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/zCzxfNWeNzFGBIVk4iuK" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

**To create the image URL, follow these steps:**

* Upload the picture to the Site Assets folder in the Site contents (or any other folder on your intranet).
* In the **Sites Assets** document library, select the picture.&#x20;
* Click on the **Info icon** at the top right of the screen.
* Click on the **Path icon** to copy the icon URL.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/afZjwLVMpNQJiDv2YmEq" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Finally, paste the icon URL into the required field.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/cL8yxM9lQPASZ1RQ37sN" alt="" width="512"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

The final result will look like this:&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/GlfV4mbRwPpu33Wq1IY6" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
Intranet.ai has created over 100 ready-to-use quotes on different topics, including quotes designed for specific times of the year. [Click here](https://intranet.ai/features/quotes/) to learn more and receive support in the publication of quotes.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# RSS Feed

The component for importing content and news published from external sources into SharePoint Online.

## **What is RSS Feed?**

This web part transforms your intranet into the central hub for receiving news from different websites and blogs. This new component enables seamless **integration of a website's feed within the intranet**. Users have the flexibility to showcase news from various outlets or blogs. It's an engaging way to keep everyone updated by consolidating both internal and external company news in one accessible location.

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **RSS Feed** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/rss-feed/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the RSS Feed web part to a SharePoint page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part and you'll see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/l5ySSL5qOCO7zmUJPhxZ" alt="" data-size="line">&#x20;
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **Rss Feed** to quickly find and select the RSS Feed web part, which is named "IAI - RssFeed".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/YtlWKhNjaUnxfYaHC7tO" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click the **Edit** **properties** <img src="/files/gdV8jQL3Xt2S6rai8Zfq" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options such as View settings, Rss feed settings, and Setting up feed fields. See below for more information on each of these options.

***

## Configuration

1. [View settings](#view-settings)
2. [Rss feed settings](#rss-feed-settings)
3. [Setting up feed fields](#rss-feed-settings)

### View settings

In this section you can choose the **layout** of the RSS Feed.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/6CHVPQX29wfz5JQrmI1L" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% hint style="info" %}

* If you're not in edit mode already, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Select the Rss Feed web part, then click **Edit properties** <img src="/files/MWwk3p6dGCt4t7CTdAvd" alt="" data-size="line"> **button** on the left side of the Rss Feed web part.
  {% endhint %}

By opening this first configuration, you will see the following options:

* **Do you want to hide the background?** You can choose to hide or display the webpart background The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a white background. If you enable this option, the white card background will be completely removed, allowing the content appear directly on the page. As a result, the webpart will be transparent, showing either the selected background image or the chosen SharePoint page color.
* **Select the type of shadow you want to use:**  if you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from High Contrast, Light, or Dark options.
  * If you select High contrast, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.
  * By choosing the Light background shadow, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.
  * Finally, the Dark background shadow style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more.
* **Do you want to hide the shadow?** You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the webpart stand out more against the rest of the page. If you enable this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.
* **Do you want to hide the title?** Here you can select whether to show the webpart title or hide it. If set to visible, the web part title will appear on the left side.
* **Enter the title:** Thanks to this configuration, you can customize the application title. If you keep it blank, SharePoint will show the default title “rss feed” at the top left angle of the webpart.
* **Select the view mode:**
* The **Default** layout consists of a **list** of articles.

<figure><img src="/files/cNEwY0tSqkGJyCz6VlXP" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* The **Carousel** layout consists of a **slider** characterized by a graphic style similar to that of [**Highlights**](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/configurations/highlights). If you select this layout, you can choose whether to set up **automatic sliding**.

<figure><img src="/files/AGOQUsJCwFnaunSSrX7P" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Rss feed settings

These generic settings allow you to customize the display by choosing a title, the feed url you'd like to display and the number of news items.

{% hint style="info" %}

* If you're not in edit mode already, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Select the Rss Feed web part, then click **Edit properties** <img src="/files/vANkqI08iqS30TrTBWGh" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left side of the Rss Feed web part.
  {% endhint %}

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/EvaLWda2kaAwpw7Uk55R" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Title:** choose the title of the web part.
* **Feed URL**: insert here the feed URL you want to display in the webpart.
* **Number of items to show**: select the number of items to be displayed in the web part.

### Setting up feed fields

These settings allow you to indicate the name of the fields inside the Feed content (XML format) in order to link them to the web part.

{% hint style="info" %}

* If you're not in edit mode already, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Select the Rss Feed web part, then click **Edit properties** <img src="/files/gdV8jQL3Xt2S6rai8Zfq" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left side of the Rss Feed web part.
  {% endhint %}

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/q59V9Q4H3erftULggSmK" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Name of the field where the feed title will be present:** here you need to find the name of the field where the feed title is located in the XML code.&#x20;

See the following example with the nytimes RSS Feed (**title**):

<figure><img src="/files/yTxe0d1emuZbQm3jJ42s" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/cpy3bQmXD6wnsKmJttnG" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Name of the field where the feed body title will be present:** here you need to find the field where the feed body is located in the XML code.&#x20;

See the following example with the nytimes RSS Feed (**description**):

<figure><img src="/files/0hlaTX67dRjTX8bD65Ss" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/y27BJNCHMACOSeltQtrb" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Name of the field where the feed image will be present:** here you need to find the field where the feed image is located in the XML code.&#x20;

See the following example with the nytimes RSS Feed (**media:content**):

<figure><img src="/files/QbVTZklSfMKzs49rIILh" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/Fo1VFomQF3ZsZuwPwzsZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Name of the field where the feed url source will be present:** here you need to find the field where the feed url is located in the XML code. This option opens the news by clicking on the feed.

See the following example with the nytimes RSS Feed (**lin**k):

<figure><img src="/files/e0Yg9DDNiD1xgVIl494k" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Name of the field where the feed publication date will be present:** here you need to find the field where the feed publication is located in the XML code.&#x20;

See the following example with the nytimes RSS Feed (**pubDate**):

<figure><img src="/files/qnTbT1xmLzB5P1ykuyyX" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Name of the field where the feed author will be present:** here you need to find the field where the feed author is located in the XML code.&#x20;

See the following example with the nytimes RSS Feed (**dc:creator**):

<figure><img src="/files/5FpfdGYBXcl4he6PYw69" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

When you are done, don't forget to publish your edits by clicking on **Republish** at the top right of the page.

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Sections with Custom Background

The component for applying completely customized graphics to the sections of SharePoint pages.

## What is Sections with Custom Background

Our component boosts SharePoint Online's functionalities, **empowering you to enhance your SharePoint intranet's visual attractiveness with a modern design.**&#x20;

SharePoint Online's limitations become evident when you realize they are limited to just 4 background colors for sections. In response to this constraint, our component emerges as a valuable solution, enabling you to freely **choose your favorite colors or design custom graphics.**&#x20;

This flexibility allows you to **create backgrounds that align with your corporate brand**, **streamlining user navigation** and **elevating the overall user experience.**&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **Sections with Custom Background** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/sections-with-custom-background/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the Sections with Custom Background web part to a SharePoint page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part and you'll see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/l5ySSL5qOCO7zmUJPhxZ" alt="" data-size="line">&#x20;
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **Background** to quickly find and select the Sections with Custom Background web part, which is named "IAI - Background Section Editor".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/G5LUHQLiRuGLhKk7kKyU" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click the **Edit** **properties** <img src="/files/68yOBVe1xY3LEVIInrcv" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options such as Settings background color, Settings background image, and Settings background height. See below for more information on each of these options.

***

## Configuration

1. [Settings background color](#settings-background-color)
2. [Settings background image ](#settings-background-image)
3. [Settings background height](#settings-background-height)

### Settings background color <a href="#settings-background-color" id="settings-background-color"></a>

This section is designed to **customize the background color of specific sections** of your intranet, to enhance visual appeal and draw attention to key content areas.

To do this, you'll need to **select or enter (using hexagonal color codes)** **the specific color** you wish to apply as a background to these sections. This level of customization not only allows you to create a more **visually appealing and coherent intranet**, but also to guide users more effectively through your content by **emphasizing the most important areas.**

{% hint style="info" %}

* If you're not in edit mode already, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Select the Background web part, then click **Edit web part** <img src="/files/UFhC72tXYchTWhWzRQkA" alt="Web part edit button" data-size="line"> on the left side of the Background web part.
  {% endhint %}

Click on the **drop icon** <img src="/files/FrPkcdLbJwqUeb9TVNSx" alt="" data-size="line">

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/TFJ5hOXFsQQshpAsJkcE" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

You can choose a color by **rolling your mouse over the color panel,** or **insert the hexadecimal color code** in the fields below.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/weqOtw7WkxDR8qUYzcse" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Below is a preview **of a color background** chosen i**n edit mode**:

<figure><img src="/files/AeZsB3f4YVGZlfJyRf5Q" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Here's the final result of the preview's color background:

<figure><img src="/files/Kwg80m30HKPn0k2vJZbZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Settings background image <a href="#settings-background-image" id="settings-background-image"></a>

This section allows you to **customize your intranet's background image** to enhance visual and draw attention to key content areas.

To achieve this, you will need to **select** or **upload** the **specific image** you'd like to use as the background for these sections.

{% hint style="info" %}

* If you're not in edit mode already, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Select the Background web part, then click **Edit web part** <img src="/files/UFhC72tXYchTWhWzRQkA" alt="Web part edit button" data-size="line"> on the left side of the Background web part.
  {% endhint %}

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/zIDtnWWR78PvdxqtnwZO" alt="" width="357"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* In the first field, **copy-paste the link of the image** you want to use as a background.

{% hint style="info" %}
**Please note**: you need to **upload and save the image** beforehand in a folder on SharePoint Online in the Site contents of the intranet, where all users have access.
{% endhint %}

#### How do I get an image URL from Sharepoint Online?

* Open a new page and at the top right of the screen, click on **the Settings icon** <img src="/files/wpUXUUh0Q5xwzkwn99g9" alt="" data-size="line"> and on **Site contents.**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/EnW61ZRDMtMXAWDEhq1X" alt="" width="346"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Select the folder where you have uploaded your images** and you'll access the **image library.**

<figure><img src="/files/9NIHFIlALNrjLVyG9CCO" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Select your image** and click on the  <img src="/files/rSzB5UT7Ha4tCIVTuaUg" alt="" data-size="line"> icon on the top right button, **to access information on this image**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/IDmcVvEjSmKr3wqzM9ox" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Scroll down** and **copy the image path** by clicking on the <img src="/files/HN7YWhBPZeV9EO6avnVE" alt="" data-size="line">icon.
* **Go back to the page** with the background web part and **insert the path of the image** in the required field.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/IY6iaFMCmJtdfypOn8ak" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Below is a **preview of the background image** in **edit mode:**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/zwR6XuzR3XHqmO2m1ymd" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% hint style="info" %}
In this section, you can also **display GIFs in mp4 format**. You can create a gif on Canva, save it as mp4, upload it to an image library (on the intranet) and copy-paste its link into the required field.
{% endhint %}

* Finally, you can choose **the position of the image focal point (top, center or bottom)** of your background, by selecting one of the three options in the drop-down menu.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/C46R23VDy9sC5dqCq4ua" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### Settings background height

In this section, you can **adjust the height of the intranet’s background,** to enhance its visual appeal and emphasize content areas.

To do this, you'll need to **specify the background height in pixels**. This feature not only improves the aesthetics of your intranet, but it also **makes it easier for users to navigate**, by **emphasizing important sections.**

{% hint style="info" %}

* If you're not in edit mode already, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.

* Select the Background web part, then click **Edit web part** <img src="/files/UFhC72tXYchTWhWzRQkA" alt="Web part edit button" data-size="line"> on the left side of the Background web part.
  {% endhint %}

* **The default setting is 0px.** You can expand your image **up to 2000px.** The more you expand your image, the more it will fill and overflow the other sections (see examples below).

{% hint style="info" %}
Remember to choose the right size for your background image: 1900 x 545.
{% endhint %}

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/bi7yDO1gC02Yl0DCv9AP" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Below is a **preview of image height at 300px**.

<figure><img src="/files/C7pgF1lsNEOO5JLNy3DY" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* Below is a **preview of image height at 2000px.**

<figure><img src="/files/VxxlIaU2uZArqdjrYOt2" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Social Media Posts

Share content posted on corporate social media to enrich your SharePoint intranet communication.

## What is Social Media Posts

Social Media Posts allows you to share with your colleagues the best content from the company's **LinkedIn**, **Facebook**, **Instagram**, and **TikTok** profiles.

Filter the posts and add them to the bulletin board to complement the intranet news and **make internal communication more comprehensive**.

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **Social Media Posts** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/social-media-posts/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the Social Media Posts web part to a SharePoint page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part and you'll see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/l5ySSL5qOCO7zmUJPhxZ" alt="" data-size="line">&#x20;
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **Social Media Posts** to quickly find and select the Social Media Posts web part, which is named "IAI - SocialMediaPosts".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/QFxhpgUF1Bcjb9jpNkI1" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click on the **Edit** **properties** <img src="/files/18L5CPjFA9P6nW6u9M1U" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane, where you will have a few sections to configure. See below for more information on each of these sections.

***

## Configuration

1. [View settings](#view-settings)
2. [General settings](#general-settings)
3. [Visualization settings](#visualization-settings)

### View settings

The view settings allows you to customize the appearance of your application by adjusting various layout settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/eKfJiljuK9DH4NKAsFrO" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By opening this first configuration, you will see the following options:

* **Do you want to hide the background?**\
  You can choose to hide or display the webpart background The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a white background. If you enable this option, the white card background will be completely removed, allowing the content appear directly on the page. As a result, the webpart will be transparent, showing either the selected background image or the chosen SharePoint page color.
* **Do you want to hide the background shadow?**\
  You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the webpart stand out more against the rest of the page. If you enable this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.
* **Select the type of background shadow**\
  If you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from High Contrast, Light, or Dark options.
  * If you select **High contrast**, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.
  * By choosing the **Light background** shadow, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.
  * Finally, the **Dark background** shadow style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more.
* **Enter the application title**\
  Thanks to this configuration, you can customize the application title. If you keep it blank, SharePoint will show the default title “Social media posts” at the top left angle of the webpart.
* **Do you want to hide the title section?**\
  Here you can select whether to show the webpart title or hide it. If set to visible, the web part title will appear on the left side.

### **General settings**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/iY1YO6be8bIt1kicOMCx" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Enter the site where the social media list is present:** here, put the url of the site where the list is stored.

> i.e., <https://intranetai.sharepoint.com/sites/my-hub/>

* **Select the list:** once you paste the link of the site in the previous step, you'll be able to select the proper list between the ones available in it. Here, please select Social Media Posts.

### Visualization **settings:**

* **Do you want to set the height of the webpart?** This section will allow you to select a personalized height for the webpart. If you decide to keep this field on No, the webpart will adapt this size to the amount of posts uploaded to the dedicated list.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/zlENHukPNChnWT9fmQvb" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Once you're done with these configurations, **always remember to click on Republish** to allow the intranet population to see the webpart properly configured.

***

## Add new posts

Once you're done with the webpart configuration, the next step is to add the posts you'd like to highlight.&#x20;

First of all, click on the gear icon at the top right of the page, then click on **Site contents**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/VZXOJ8wxxjQpJ51ZPPQ4" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Then, please scroll down until you see the **Social Media Posts** list.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/qqQVl64ug1p43FmxprN1" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

To add new posts, click on **+New** on the top right of the page:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/DZltBEx5359sDXRwvX52" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

A sidebar will appear, with these three pieces of information requested:&#x20;

* **Social Media**: this field is mandatory. Here the information requested is to select between Instagram, TikTok, LinkedIn or Facebook.&#x20;
* **Post URL**: this field must be completed in case you select **Instagram** or **TikTok**.
* **Iframe Code**: this field must be completed in case you select **LinkedIn** or **Facebook**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/OIlOhWwKibi7Zc5HqhlS" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### Post URL

As previously mentioned, the Post URL has to be put in case you need to embed **Instagram** or **TikTok**.&#x20;

### Iframe Code

As previously mentioned, the Iframe Code has to be put in case you need to embed LinkedIn or Facebook.

To embed a **LinkedIn post**, click on the three dots on the top right of the post, then click on **Embed this post**. Lastly, click the blue button saying **Copy code**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Hk3l4UZ20T6yuGyfLLnX" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% hint style="info" %}
**Please note:** this feature will be possible in case you have **enabled the sharing functionality**. In case you need to know how to do so, [click here](https://www.linkedin.com/help/learning/answer/a529065?lang=en-US).&#x20;
{% endhint %}

To embed a **Facebook post**, please click on the three dots on the top right of the page, then click on **Embed**. Lastly, click the blue button saying **Copy code**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/tGQpXcKeFmBT7BHYt39G" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Surveys

The component to make the intranet more interactive, increasing daily visits.

## What are Surveys

The Surveys web part is designed to **enhance user engagement** and **feedback collection** within an intranet environment. This tool allows administrators to create **dynamic, interactive forms** that gather **valuable insights and responses from users** efficiently and effectively.

Our web part facilitates the creation of customizable forms that can be used for a variety of purposes, such as **surveys**, **polls**, **feedback forms**, and more. The main advantages of Surveys are as follows:&#x20;

* **Enhanced user engagement**: the Surveys web part encourages **active participation** from users by providing an **intuitive and user-friendly interface**.&#x20;
* **Customization and flexibility**: Surveys is characterized by a high level of customization, not only in terms of **content** but also in **graphical design**. Surveys can be tailored to reflect the organization's branding, particularly with **customizable colors**.&#x20;
* **Real-time data collection and analysis**: with Surveys, data collection is instantaneous. **Responses are recorded in real-time**, allowing administrators to access and analyze the data promptly.&#x20;
* **Multilingual support**: questions and response options can be **translated into various languages**, which means that the web part will adapt to **each user's browsing language**. This feature allows you to **engage all company locations** with a single survey.

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **Surveys** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/instant-form/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the Surveys web part to a SharePoint Page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part and you'll see a line with a circled +, like this: ![](https://docs.intranet.ai/~gitbook/image?url=https%3A%2F%2F2718234637-files.gitbook.io%2F%7E%2Ffiles%2Fv0%2Fb%2Fgitbook-x-prod.appspot.com%2Fo%2Fspaces%252FriXlnuemuParrCf7Uotu%252Fuploads%252FccHplKgXfibd4tktmhas%252Fadvanced-search-2.png%3Falt%3Dmedia%26token%3D7d703967-c3f7-4125-834b-f695362bf90b\&width=40\&dpr=4\&quality=100\&sign=34b00d6f\&sv=2)
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **instantform** to quickly find and select the Surveys web part, which is named "**IAI - Instant Form**".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/eAVJGhc22R8GGfAssdOP" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click on the **Edit** **properties** <img src="/files/vsFyb83JZVLfYJglRkqi" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options such as General settings, Display settings and Color settings. See below for more information on each of these sections.

***

## Configuration

1. [General settings](#general-settings)
2. [Display settings ](#display-settings)
3. [Color settings](#color-settings)

### General settings

In this section you need to specify the sources from which the web part will retrieve information. Specifically, the Surveys web part relies on three SharePoint lists:

* **Instant Form Questions**, which contains questions;
* **Instant Form Answers**, which contains answers to each question;
* **Instant Form Users Answers**, where users’ answers are recorded.

{% hint style="info" %}

* If you're not in edit mode already, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Select the Surveys web part, then click **Edit properties** <img src="/files/txW1iH7temoRU0VpvXIj" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left side of the Surveys web part.
  {% endhint %}

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/ndjVitOna3S7w2uQqfiD" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Enter the **URL of the site** where the list of questions (Instant Form Questions) is located.
* Select the list of questions: select **Instant Form Questions** from the drop-down menu.
* **Select the question to show**: the Instant Form Questions list may contain more than one question. Here you need to specify what question you would like to show.
* Enter the **URL of the site** where the list of answers (Instant Form Answers) is located.
* Select the list of answers: select **Instant Form Answers** from the drop-down menu.
* Enter the **URL of the site** where the **Instant Form Users Answers** list is located.&#x20;
* Select the list of users: select **Instant Form Users Answers** from the drop-down menu.

### Display settings

In this section you can set a number of display options.

{% hint style="info" %}

* If you're not in edit mode already, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Select the Surveys web part, then click **Edit properties** <img src="/files/ScfGHClojIN7FwCg1hma" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left side of the Surveys web part.
  {% endhint %}

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Oa3DcXa01xr0mHMu7F70" alt="" width="299"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By opening this first configuration, you will see the following options:

* **Do you want to hide the background?** You can choose to hide or display the webpart background The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a white background. If you enable this option, the white card background will be completely removed, allowing the content appear directly on the page. As a result, the webpart will be transparent, showing either the selected background image or the chosen SharePoint page color.
* **Do you want to hide the background shadow?**\
  You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the webpart stand out more against the rest of the page. If you enable this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.
* **Select the type of background shadow**\
  If you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from High Contrast, Light, or Dark options.
  * If you select **High contrast**, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.
  * By choosing the **Light background** shadow, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.
  * Finally, the **Dark background** shadow style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more.
* **Prevent changing answer once chosen?** If you enable this option, users won't be able to change their answer. A message will ask them to confirm their answer before submitting it, as shown in the screenshot below. If this option remains disabled, users will be able to change their answer whenever they wish.
* **Hide answers count for end users. Admins always see this data**: if you enable this option, visitors won't have access to the results of the survey. In other words, they won't see percentages. On the other hand, administrators will always see this data.
* **Choose the count type**: you can choose between **Percentage** and **Number**. In the former case, each answer option shows the percentage of total votes it received. In the latter case, each answer option shows the number of people who selected that option.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/GKrlgJnmjqWoOycIONOZ" alt="" width="295"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Select the survey expiration date (not mandatory)**: you can set an **expiration date** after which voting will no longer be possible. This is an optional field. You can also **remove the expiration date** by clicking the dedicated button.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/RShAV9Y0TKafWnkV7slI" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* When the survey has expired, the web part displays a **message that can be customized** in the dedicated field. If this field remains empty, the default text will be displayed: "Survey expired!"

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/cmnnQUbK6AuNtDC0CSiP" alt="" width="292"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Do you want to hide the title?** Here you can select whether to show the webpart title or hide it. If set to visible, the web part title will appear on the left side. You can also customize the title to better suit your content.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Cx4UHrRQtyCnJ9kTrMzd" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/dFkLlZrNUVBEyfNpt0ew" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Hide users count for end users. Admins always see this data:** if you enable this option, visitors won't see the total number of people who took part in the survey. On the other hand, administrators will always see this data.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/7SLZm4rP2SURG690Se5y" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Enter the text to display before the number of users**: you can customize the text introducing the number of users who answered the survey. The default text is "Users who answered", but you can customize it as you wish.

### Color settings

This section allows you to customize the colors of the web part.

{% hint style="info" %}

* If you're not in edit mode already, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Select the Surveys web part, then click **Edit properties** <img src="/files/U6apnCph052qMhAGusOE" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left side of the Surveys web part.
  {% endhint %}

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/rltknPoZemyEOknqvApn" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

You can customize the following elements:

1. The **background color** of the **unanswered questions.** If the you click 'yes', you can choose the color for the response text.
2. The **background color** of the **answers**;
3. The **color** of the **percentage bar** (if you don't select a specific color, the darker color of the intranet's graphic theme is used);

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/2B20e1hhVYVOJsPiYIdJ" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<figure><img src="/files/uB4F4pHH2BOjSMAfzqmv" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/MTiurHqsKFvIgMjTUPdM" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

When the configuration is complete, click on **Publish** or **Republish** to publish your changes.

***

## Fill in the Instant Form Questions list

This section explains how to **add a new question** to the **Instant Form Questions** list.

* First of all, click on the **Settings** icon at the top right of the page, then click on **Site contents**.
* Scroll down and select the list named **Instant Form Questions**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Db9RyBAfbqEGG2ilnh9q" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Each item on this list is a question. To add a new question, click the **New** button.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/4yaYGeZc3VeXUTlY5ZzY" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* By default, the list consists of just one field, i.e., the **Title** field. **Type the question** in the **Title** field and click on **Save**.
* If you want to **translate** the question into one or more languages, you need to create **an additional field for each language**. A detailed explanation of this process is offered in the sub-section below.

### Translate questions into one or more languages

To translate a question into one or more languages, you need an additional field for each language. This field must have a **specific nomenclature**. The nomenclature to adopt is **IAIIFQQuestion + language code.**

[**This link**](https://pkbullock.com/resources/reference-sharepoint-online-languages-ids) offers a list of language tags. However, please use only **lower case letters** and **no hyphen** between the first and the second part of the tag.

> For example, the language code for French is **frfr**. The complete nomeclature for the field dedicated to the French translation would be: **IAIIFQQuestionfrfr**.

To create an additional field, take the following steps:

* In the **Instant Form Questions** list, click on **+Add column**. Select **Text** and click on **Next**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/M4Ndk7ZAcqzYUYAQkR1A" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* In the **Name** field, enter the name of the column. Make sure to adopt the **nomenclature** described above, and save.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/EaDLEQ3NKvgAmXfv41iN" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **When creating the field, it is fundamental that you adopt the correct naming convention**. Then, you can **edit the display name** of the field to make it more user-friendly (e.g., "Question FR"). To rename the field, you simply need to select the column and click on **Column settings > Edit**. Edit the name of the column and click **Save**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/BCSS2BUAI4ggyMauv0XG" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Now, translate the question by following these steps:

* Select the question and click the **Edit** button.
* Add the translation by **filling in the newly created field**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/eysoqGNlWCQp4Ody8n80" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click on **Save**.

***

## Fill in the Instant Form Answers list

This section explains how to **add answers** to the **Instant Form Answers** list.

* First of all, click on the **Settings** icon at the top right of the page, then click on **Site contents**.
* Scroll down and select the list named **Instant Form Answers**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/CkcqlCVMr9Y32ZB7DAkb" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Each item on this list is an answer. To add a new answer, click the **New** button.

<figure><img src="/files/JWYg8F3w56DzERNkuj98" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* Fill in the **Title** field by typing the answer.
* Then, specify the **related question**.
* Finally, click on **Save**.
* If you want to **translate** the answer into one or more languages, you need to create **an additional field for each language**. A detailed explanation of this process is offered in the sub-section below.

### Translate answers into one or more languages

To translate an answer into one or more languages, you need an additional field for each language. This field must have a **specific nomenclature**. The nomenclature to adopt is **IAIIFAAnswer + language code**.

[**This link**](https://pkbullock.com/resources/reference-sharepoint-online-languages-ids) offers a list of language tags. However, please use only **lower case letters** and **no hyphen** between the first and the second part of the tag.

> For example, the language code for French is **frfr**. The complete nomeclature for the field dedicated to the French translation would be: **IAIIFAAnswerfrfr**.

To create an additional field, take the following steps:

* In the **Instant Form Answers** list, click on **+Add column**. Select **Text** and click on **Next**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/mi01L80EHEm6waNanIN9" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* In the **Name** field, enter the name of the column. Make sure to adopt the **nomenclature** described above, and save.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/JiNpuaNgRDmMliMbiQAN" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **When creating the field, it is fundamental that you adopt the correct naming convention**. Then, you can **edit the display name** of the field to make it more user-friendly (e.g., "Answer FR"). To rename the field, you simply need to select the column and click on **Column settings > Edit**. Edit the name of the column and click **Save**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Ir6EwfB0ut1sAAc8Pa5A" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Now, translate the answer by following these steps:

* Select the answer and click the **Edit** button.
* Add the translation by **filling in the newly created field**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/OMshqorrLEWRb9pw4M2I" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click on **Save**.

***

## Configure the Instant Form Users Answers list

The Instant Form Users Answers list requires a **specific configuration** so that intranet visitors can take part in surveys and see survey results. To learn how to configure this list, read the [dedicated guide](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/other-configurations/configuration-of-favorites-lists-and-user-lists). In particular, please refer to the **Second type of configuration** section.

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Videos

The component that allows you to engage colleagues with original videos or content from YouTube, Vimeo, and SharePoint sites.

## What is Videos&#x20;

Videos is a web part that allows you to share **updates**, publish **educational content**, spread **values** and disseminate **key information** with **short videos** on your SharePoint intranet. Thanks to this feature, you can publish content that is useful for the entire company audience and engage colleagues in **clearer and more direct communication**. This web part collects videos from **three different sources** in one single area; specifically, you can share original content or videos from:

* **YouTube**
* **Vimeo**
* **SharePoint sites**

Videos can be **categorized** and **indexed** in [Advanced Search](https://docs.intranet.ai/configuration/advanced-search) using personalized tags. This way, the intranet will show users the most relevant videos for their searches and work.

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **Videos** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/videos/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the Videos web part to a SharePoint page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click on **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part. You will see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/l5ySSL5qOCO7zmUJPhxZ" alt="" data-size="line">.&#x20;
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **Company Media** to find and select the Videos web part, which is named "IAI - Company Media".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/I0KTk4RyPJyEtb64Dql9" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click on the **Edit** **properties** <img src="/files/0VE6kUjPZqm0blREQTRo" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options such as Layout settings, Data sources, and General settings. See below for more information on each of these sections.

***

## Configuration

1. [Layout settings](#layout-settings)
2. [Data sources](#data-sources)
3. [General settings](#general-settings)

### Layout settings

The layout settings allow you to customize the appearance of your application by adjusting various layout settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/MytjVARGkmQuyL2EWjRu" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By opening this first configuration, you will see the following options:

* **Do you want to hide the background?** You can choose to hide or display the webpart background. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a white background. If you enable this option, the white card background will be completely removed, allowing the content appear directly on the page. As a result, the webpart will be transparent, showing either the selected background image or the chosen SharePoint page color.
* **Do you want to hide the shadow?** You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the webpart stand out more against the rest of the page. If you enable this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.
* **Select the type of shadow you want to use**: if you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from High Contrast, Light, or Dark options.
  * If you select **High contrast**, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.
  * By choosing the **Light background shadow**, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.
  * Finally, the **Dark background shadow** style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more.
* **Do you want to hide the title?** Here you can select whether to show the webpart title or hide it. If set to visible, the web part title will appear on the left side.
* **Enter the title of the application**: thanks to this configuration, you can customize the application title. If you keep it blank, SharePoint will show the default title “Company media” at the top left angle of the webpart.

### Data sources

In this section, you need to indicate the **sources** from which the web part will retrieve information.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/zwj8XEqYSizMitAZszQJ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* In the first field, select **Company Media**. This is the list where you will **upload your videos** (see [Add a new video](#add-a-new-video)).
* In the second field, select **Company Media Tags**. This is the list where you will create **tags to categorize** your videos (see [Create video tags](#create-video-tags)).

### General settings

In this section, you can decide to activate the **autoplay** feature, which is **disabled by default**.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/fzttQXe7FsspORk2MlNj" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

In addition, you can choose the **video sorting criteria** from the drop-down menu, and use the checkbox below to select the **sorting direction**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/kP5wkj9vLrx5d1KfB1ha" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/IYtX1kePl3v9Y0w910fN" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

The Videos web part looks like this:

<figure><img src="/files/iGQXB0OhpnLAtx9sAgsB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* In the top left corner of the application, you can see the **house** **icon** mentioned above. Clicking this icon will allow you to **clear filters**.
* To the right of the icon, you can see the video **categories**, which correspond to tags. If you click on one category, e.g. Corporate news, the web part will display only the videos that belong to that catetegory. Below is a guide on how to [create video tags](#create-video-tags).
* There is also a **search bar** which allows you to quickly find a specific video.
* When you select a video, you will see it in the central section of the web part. Below are the **title**, the **release date** and the **description** of the video.
* On the right, you can find the list of the **latest videos** added to the Company Media list (see [Add a new video](#add-a-new-video)).
* In the lower part of the application there is an area of **suggested videos**. As will be explained in the section titled [Add a new video](#add-a-new-video), when you add a new item to the Company Media list, you need to complete a panel with a number of fields, including a box called **Suggested**, which is flagged by default. If you leave this box flagged, the video will be included in the area of suggested videos.

***

## Create video tags&#x20;

By using tags, you can categorize your videos to highlight news, initiatives, global communications, colleague interviews and so on. To create video tags, follow these steps:

* Click on the **Settings** icon on the top right of the page, then click on **Site contents**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/nTlfbUPDqEpwMp47g6nJ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Select the **Company Media Tags** list.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/8bUBbulAXvwJGUyJpNT0" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* To add a new tag, click on **New**. The following panel will appear. The Title field, which is marked with an **asterisk**, is **mandatory**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/T9RTRg3O4pHYjIDiu95j" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Title**: write the name of the tag.

> For example: Awards, Corporate news, Interviews, Training courses, Webinars

* **Description**: here you can enter a description, which is optional.
* **Tag Order**: you can set the order in which the tags will be shown in the application. In this field, you need to enter a number to specify the position of the tag.

***

## Add a new video

As mentioned above, videos are collected in the Company Media list. To upload a new video, follow these steps:&#x20;

* Click on the **Settings** icon on the top right of the page, then click on **Site contents**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/mjVTnmmP1ostFHcks0um" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Select the **Company Media** list.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/eOOzjy0dLewFjeONqvcF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* To add a new video, click on **New**. The following panel will appear. The Title field, which is marked with an **asterisk**, is **mandatory**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/FYadiK30AgQaHuRcQNY5" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

As mentioned in the [introductory section](#what-is-videos), you can share videos from three different sources: YouTube, Vimeo or your SharePoint intranet. These three options will be explained in detail in the following sections.

### Add a new video from YouTube

Too add a new video from YouTube, the first step is to open the **Company Media** list and click on **New**, as described in the [previous section](#add-a-new-video). When you click on New, a **panel** appears. Complete it as follows:&#x20;

* **Title:** write the title of the video.
* **Description**: you can add a description which summarizes the content of the video. The description will be shown under the release date.
* **Duration:** enter the duration of the video.

> For example, if the video lasts 20 seconds, you need to write in this field:
>
> * 0,20 for English-language sites (using a comma to separate minutes and seconds)
> * 0.20 for Italian-language sites (using a period to separate minutes and seconds)

* **Link:** enter the link to the video, which is a YouTube link in this case.
* **Suggested:** if you leave this blox flagged, the video will appear in the area of suggested videos, in the lower part of the application.
* **Tag**: select the tag you want to assign to your video from the drop-down menu. This menu shows you the tags you created previously (see [Create video tags](#create-video-tags)).&#x20;
* **Release Date:** enter the release date of the video. This date will be shown under the title of the video.
* **Source:** select the source site of the video from the drop-down menu, which shows you the available options. Choose **YouTube**.
* **Preview Image Url:** you can create a cover image for your video, upload it to your intranet and copy-paste the picture URL into this field (see [Create the preview image URL](#create-the-preview-image-url)). This will be the preview image of the video.
* Once you have completed the panel, click on Save.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/o4SKQECFOQu2lORwNweW" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### Add a new video from Vimeo&#x20;

Too add a new video from Vimeo, the first step is to open the **Company Media** list and click on **New**, as described in the section titled [Add a new video](#add-a-new-video). When you click on New, a **panel** appears. Complete it as follows:&#x20;

* **Title:** write the title of the video.
* **Description**: you can add a description which summarizes the content of the video. The description will be shown under the release date.
* **Duration:** enter the duration of the video.

> For example, if the video lasts 2:44 minutes, you need to write in this field:&#x20;
>
> * 2,44 for English-language sites (using a comma to separate minutes and seconds)
> * 2.44 for Italian-language sites (using a period to separate minutes and seconds)

* **Link:** enter the link to the video, which is a Vimeo link in this case.
* **Suggested:** if you leave this blox flagged, the video will appear in the area of suggested videos, in the lower part of the application.
* **Tag**: select the tag you want to assign to your video from the drop-down menu. This menu shows you the tags you created previously (see [Create video tags](#create-video-tags)).&#x20;
* **Release Date:** enter the release date of the video. This date will be shown under the title of the video.
* **Source:** select the source site of the video from the drop-down menu, which shows you the available options. Choose **Vimeo**.
* **Preview Image Url:** you can create a cover image for your video, upload it to your intranet and copy-paste the picture URL into this field (see [Create the preview image URL](#create-the-preview-image-url)). This will be the preview image of the video.
* Once you have completed the panel, click on Save.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Y7uz4HoPrE6BaVLW47id" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### Add a new video from your SharePoint intranet

Besides YouTube videos and Vimeo videos, the Videos web part can display content uploaded to the SharePoint intranet. First of all, you need to **upload the video** to the Site Assets folder in the Site contents (or any other folder on your intranet). Then, open the **Company Media** list and click on **New**, as described in the section titled [Add a new video](#add-a-new-video). When you click on New, a **panel** appears. Complete it as follows:&#x20;

* **Title:** write the title of the video.
* **Description**: you can add a description which summarizes the content of the video. The description will be shown under the release date.
* **Duration:** enter the duration of the video.

> For example, if the video lasts 1 hour and 6 minutes, you need to write 66 in this field.&#x20;

* **Link:** enter the link to the video.&#x20;
* **Suggested:** if you leave this blox flagged, the video will appear in the area of suggested videos, in the lower part of the application.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Ahy2L7R8N9HtdPGO1LzQ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Tag**: select the tag you want to assign to your video from the drop-down menu. This menu shows you the tags you created previously (see [Create video tags](#create-video-tags)).&#x20;
* **Release Date:** enter the release date of the video. This date will be shown under the title of the video.
* **Source:** select the source site of the video from the drop-down menu, which shows you the available options. In this case, choose **Url**.
* **Preview Image Url:** you can create a cover image for your video, upload it to your intranet and copy-paste the picture URL into this field (see [Create the preview image URL](#create-the-preview-image-url)). This will be the preview image of the video.
* Once you have completed the panel, click on Save.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/nCgTcFitOdsq2aI1qHRL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### Create the preview image URL

To create the preview image URL, follow these steps:

* Upload the picture to the Site Assets folder in the Site contents (or any other folder on your intranet).
* In the Sites Assets document library, select the picture.&#x20;
* Click on the Info icon at the top right of the screen.
* Click on the **Path icon** to copy the URL of the picture.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/R8TxWoYzMqbHfYjdgVsM" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

The Videos web part will look like this:&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/iGQXB0OhpnLAtx9sAgsB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Welcome Box

The component to increase visits to the SharePoint intranet by offering content and useful links for users' activities.

## What is Welcome Box

Welcome Box is a **welcome space to greet users in your SharePoint intranet**, where you can say hello and provide quick access to recommended resources and/or the personal profile. Thanks to this feature, you can encourage personal profile completion and **increase site visits** by offering **helpful content and links** for your colleagues' daily tasks. Additionally, there is a **notification icon** that allows you to view all **items** created or modified during a certain period of time.

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **Welcome Box** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/welcome-box/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}

***

## Add the Welcome Box web part to a SharePoint page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part and you'll see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="/files/l5ySSL5qOCO7zmUJPhxZ" alt="" data-size="line">&#x20;
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **Welcome Box** to quickly find and select the Welcome Box web part, which is named "IAI - Welcome Box".

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/tGUEjjHa8eU6F3GIgGsR" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Once the web part is added, it defaults to the following view, with two default icons displayed on the buttons below the image.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/NdpHIofHrEfjaLkQ3Y6p" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click the **Edit** properties <img src="/files/2Pd8WL6hFK96IFtkSfq6" alt="" data-size="line"> button on the left of the web part to open the property pane and set options such as View settimgs, Profile settings, Settings, Left icon settings and Right icon settings. See below for more information on each of these sections.

***

## Configuration

1. [View settings](#view-settings)
2. [Profile settings](#profile-settings)
3. [Data sources](#data-sources)
4. [Settings](#settings)
5. [Left icon settings](#left-icon-settings)
6. [Right icon settings](#right-icon-settings)
7. [Notification icon settings](#notification-icon-settings)

### **View settings**

The layout settings allow you to customize the appearance of your application by adjusting various layout settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/QMN3kfVFeRx7LYVHGgjw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

By opening this first configuration, you will see the following options:

* **Do you want to hide the background?** You can choose to hide or display the webpart background. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a white background. If you enable this option, the white card background will be completely removed, allowing the content appear directly on the page. As a result, the webpart will be transparent, showing either the selected background image or the chosen SharePoint page color.
* **Do you want to hide the background shadow?** You can choose whether to show or hide the background shadow. The default setting is “No”. This means that, by default, the webpart is characterized by a subtle depth effect that can make the webpart stand out more against the rest of the page. If you enable this option, the shadow behind the background will be removed, giving the web part a flatter, cleaner look without any depth.
* **Select the type of background shadow**: if you decide to set the background shadow, a further configuration will appear and you can select the style from **High Contrast, Light, or Dark** options.
  * If you select **High contrast**, this option creates a strong, bold shadow effect that provides a high level of contrast between the background and the content.
  * By choosing the **Light background shadow**, it will create a soft and subtle effect, giving a more delicate and gentle depth to the background.
  * Finally, the **Dark background shadow** style provides a darker, more intense effect, adding depth and emphasizing the background even more.
* **Enter the title of the application:** thanks to this configuration, you can customize the application title. If you keep it blank, SharePoint will show the default title "Welcome box" at the top left angle of the webpart.
* **Do you want to hide the title?** Here you can select whether to show the webpart title or hide it. If set to visible, the web part title will appear on the left side.
* **Mobile view in 3 columns**: activating this option allows you to adopt the mobile view, which is more compact than the default one.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/ADEzmCoqfkcBlb4LuVFV" alt=""><figcaption><p>Default view</p></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/qZCbup14E695Z9KT1PUI" alt=""><figcaption><p>Mobile view</p></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Do you want to hide the webpart on mobile devices?** If you activate this option, Welcome Box won't be displayed on mobile devices.

### Data sources

The data sources section allow you to configure the data sources related to the **notification icon** and **My Profile** are&#x61;**.**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/3FUYl1GYFygwfjQwLVA8" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Enter the **site URL** where the **last access list** is.
* Choose the **last access list** from the drop-down menu.
* To configure data sources for your notification area, click on **Configure data sources** and complete the panel as follows:

<figure><img src="/files/N4QU4RYa4puTywwHMDHw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* Enter the **absolute URL** of the site where **the list** you are interested in is located.
* **Enter list URL**: enter the list URL respecting the **/sites/site/Lists/list format**. For **documents**, you can enter just the **document library name**.
* Click to **sort items** by **creation** date (**uncheck**) or **last change** date (**check**).
* Select the **list data type** you want to visualize between **News**, **Documents**, **Events**, **Pages**, **Notice Board** and **Engagement Board**.
* Insert the **URL** where the **notice board page** is only if 'Notice Board' data type was chosen.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/bbROpkNZSFV5vOItKwtM" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* insert the site **URL** where the **My Profile** **list** is.
* Choose the  **My Profile** **list** from the drop-down menu.

### **Profile settings**

In this section, you can link the user's personal profile to the Welcome Box web part and setting the profile completion percentage bar.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/4v5tDZqYKHsW4rJw2pK4" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Insert user link:** here you can input the link to the [**My Profile**](https://intranet.ai/features/my-profile/) page (if available). If you fill in this field, you'll be able to access the above-mentioned section by clicking on the profile picture.
* **Select where to open the page:** you can choose to open the link on a new page or the current page.
* **Choose sections to be shown from the list**: from the dropdown menu, you can choose the **My Profile** fields you want to use for the percentage bar. The percentage will be calculated based on the fields you select from this list.
* Choose to **show/not to show** the profile completion **percentage bar**.
* Choose to **show/not to show** profile completion **percentage in numeric values.**
* **Use custom measurements:** by enabling this option, you can choose the percentage bar height and width. For a better viewing, 5-15px difference between the 2 is recommended.

{% hint style="info" %}
**Please note**: it is not mandatory to fill in these fields.
{% endhint %}

### Settings

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/0Kk3Yo3WQAwT7qQ3NivQ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

In this section, you can customize the text of the **welcome message**. Three placeholders are supported:&#x20;

* **{givenName}**: the web part replaces this placeholder with the user's name;
* **{surname}**: the web part replaces this placeholder with the user's surname;
* **{welcomeText}**: the web part replaces this placeholder with a localized text which changes according to the current time:\
  \- From 6 AM to 1PM: "Good morning"\
  \- From 1PM to 6PM: "Good afternoon"\
  \- From 6PM to 6AM: "Good evening"

> For example: {welcomeText}, {givenName} {surname}!

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/BIP5nlGbYRRtKhE0dVGT" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% hint style="info" %}
The placeholder {welcomeText} starts with an uppercase letter if it is placed at the beginning of the text or after a period; otherwise, it is all lowercase.
{% endhint %}

You can choose whether to include all placeholders or select just one or two. If you leave this field blank, Welcome Box will only show the user's name and surname, which is the default behaviour of the web part.

### **Left icon settings**&#x20;

In this section, you can customize the left button by choosing a link and an icon.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/d5XP1cKOhPwGipAXJgYx" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Insert the **link** to associate with the **left button**.&#x20;

> For example: <https://intranetai.sharepoint.com/sites/iai-demo-saas/SitePages/SystemPages/MyProfile.aspx>

* Type the name of the **icon**. You can find the list of the available icons[ here](https://developer.microsoft.com/en-us/fluentui#/styles/web/icons).

> For example: People

* You can also choose whether to open the link on a new page or the current page.

### **Right icon settings**&#x20;

In this section, you can customize the right button by choosing a link and an icon.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/d3ZReEz4PkSR4jemgTuv" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Insert the **link** to associate with the **right button**.&#x20;

> For example: <https://intranetai.sharepoint.com/sites/iai-demo-saas/SitePages/SystemPages/People-directory.aspx>

* Insert the **icon**. You can find the list of the available icons[ here](https://developer.microsoft.com/en-us/fluentui#/styles/web/icons).

> For example: Phone

* You can also choose whether to open the link on a new page or the current page.

### Notification icon settings

In this section you can define the settings related to the notification area.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/O99i2Ly2fw7rIzQrR4Du" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Show notification icon**: if you enable this option, the **notification icon** will be **displayed**.
* **Show content X days before last login**: you can choose the number of **days** before **your last login** to the intranet in which the **contents** were published. The content will be displayed in the first tab of the notification area.
* **Show content in the last X days**: you can choose the **number of days** within which the **content is published**. The content will be displayed in the second tab of the notification area.
* **Open link in a new tab**:  if you enable this option, the link to the content will open in a new tab, otherwise it will open on the current page.
* **Hide untranslated news**: on translated pages, by default the web part also shows news that hasn't been translated. This option allows you to display only the news articles that have been translated into the language of the page. If you disable this option, untranslated news will also be visible, appearing in their original language if a translation is not available
* **Filter news by audience**: if you enable this option, news will be filtered by audience.

{% hint style="info" %}
This On/Off command will allow you to have the news filtered by audience: if you put a specific Security AD Group in Audience property of the news, this will be proposed to the users inside that specific group. If you leave this property blank, the news will be visible for everybody. If you want to discover more about SharePoint audience feature, [click here](https://support.microsoft.com/en-au/office/target-content-to-a-specific-audience-on-a-sharepoint-site-68113d1b-be99-4d4c-a61c-73b087f48a81).
{% endhint %}

* **Hide the first tab**: if you enable this option, the first tab won't be displayed.
* You can **enter the title** of the **first tab**.
* You can **enter the title** of the **second tab**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/uAGEKB4YfR93MLBbekx6" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Show the author**: by enabling this property, the authors of the contents will be displayed.
* **Show the date**: by enabling this property, content dates will be shown.

{% hint style="info" %}
**Please note**: the button links can be changed at any time and are visible to all users.
{% endhint %}

{% embed url="<https://intranet.ai/>" %}


# Other configurations


# Intranet branding

On this page you can find all the details about the options you have for your SharePoint intranet branding in terms of themes and layout.

## Intranet theme

For your SharePoint intranet, you can choose a primary color and three different secondary colors.\
The primary colors are used for buttons, calls to action, links, news titles, and some other content.\
The secondary colors are used for backgrounds, so it is mostly suggested to choose "white" for one of them, and some light colors for the other two.

![](/files/U6DCEfKqsuYOcy6GfSnG)

Please find here a sample layout.

![](/files/aD49fDW32YuaUbbiJhIv)

## Header

### Header layout

It is possible to choose between 4 different layouts for the header of your SharePoint intranet

* Minimal
* Compact
* Standard&#x20;
* Extended

Please find here below some examples.

**Minimal - Low height of the header, with small icon and title**

<img src="/files/5d5v3y5pSApz9poEDSLt" alt="" data-size="original">

**Compact - Normal height of the header, with normal logo and title**

![](/files/bMbT2DWyijX4LGzRYsw6)

**Standard - Normal height of the header, with a bigger logo and title**

![](/files/6hLfsvilphdzfJwAebkn)

**Extended** **- Max height of the header, with logo, title, and the possibility to add a custom background image and choose the logo+title alignment**

![](/files/Lhv3si2TUJPu31lotAHa)

### Header colors

The header color can be one of the colors of the theme or you can choose a background image for your SharePoint intranet header (but only if you choose the layout "Extended").\
Please note that if you choose a color different from "white" the navigation menu will have an automatic color created using a darker version of the color you choose for your header, and this darker color cannot be changed.

![](/files/xi4KfPgkcPy54qNhnPVD)

![](/files/bQ2k6fgcEEL1RdTTeAwb)

## Footer

### Footer layout

It is possible to choose from two different layouts for your SharePoint intranet footer:

* Simple

![](/files/yw4ZqLSLg7c60EHgQpTP)

* Extended

![](/files/ITHyQVYfYDWP1koNXqjG)


# Image dimensions

This section provides useful information on the dimensions to adopt for the creation of images and icons.

## Site logo and header

### Site logo

Dimensions: **1220 x 305**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/bDuBQTu6zWTUA0s1CjrI" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### Extended header

Dimensions: **2560 x 164**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/vtob3Diu4ozZqLBCHTcu" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

***

## Pages

### Page header

Dimensions: **1920 x 320**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/d6ZMKJo30O5Pvd7vgs0D" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

***

## News

### **News header**&#x20;

Dimensions: **1920 x 320**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/FluTk5InamhTk8OKFPCv" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### **Preview image**

Dimensions: **1920 x 1080 (16:9)**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/SiLE6JelKkyAoDDD1pBu" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

***

## Web parts

### **Background Section Editor**

Dimensions: **1900 x 545**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/hH7IRauwFnaYUTookvmb" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### **Company Apps**

Dimensions: **80 x 80**

![](/files/FkfMOOoAghmoDfJxEGpA)

### **Company News**

The aspect ratio of the image should be **16:9** (**1920 x 1080**) for the picture to be correctly shown in the news archive. However, the IAI News web part is characterized by a layout with multiple squares, which shows only what is inside the green square below (**400 x 400**).

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/qOqNXsBWc6bGjgvp1Rej" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/lKPoFyATVlgTRyvlICQu" alt="" width="375"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### **Event Calendar**

* Dimensions for **event categories**: **55 x 55**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/UKTAyw3jKw5HixVaAS33" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Dimensions for **event pictures** (supported only by the Compact with details layout): **379 x 213**

<figure><img src="/files/9MwvjshHtsalYtBnFYK4" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Graphic Buttons

* Dimensions for the **small** button: **250 x 250**&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Z5H6PTgT59hxS0U9VsVD" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Dimensions for the **medium** button: **250 x 300**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/IlAMFEPC4edP13jLKjIR" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Dimensions for the **large** button: **250 x 400**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/xbtZ0ybxveukPOeZHurn" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### Highlights

We suggest using this web part in a 2/3 section and adopting the following dimensions: **1920 x 800**&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Bocd7sGEZ6UDmkvixsNa" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### **Hover Buttons**

We suggest that you choose a **100 x 100** image but keep some **margins**, as shown in the picture below:&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/BSES3JU5d2WU8vdh8wNk" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### Image slider

This web part is particularly suitable for **rectangular** pictures. For example, the screenshot below features 2740 x 500 pictures:&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/wkpCggJHeqXg2HAWrAKD" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### **Key Initiatives**

* Dimensions for the **pictures**: **400 x 400**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/MWDIOISJh4MasTit3dga" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Dimensions for the **masks**: create a **400 x 400** image, put the desired **shape** at the center of this area, and save the image as a PNG with transparent background

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Hwew4DD21NF0Ik4KKE8P" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<figure><img src="/files/IthA8lv1XfcfNyJeJtdV" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Leadership Team

**Dimensions**: 800 x 800

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/KUuqSMPmrkcHQFDWZkN9" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% hint style="info" %}
**Please note**: to ensure optimal performance, avoid using images with excessive file sizes. High-resolution images may significantly delay the loading time of the web part.
{% endhint %}

### Locations Map

Dimensions for the **pin icon**: either **50 x 50** or **30 x 50**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/o3Q3un6z1Xn5Q3lIyH5Z" alt=""><figcaption><p>50 x 50 </p></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/goqAF28HP7TNoyhSuaQm" alt=""><figcaption><p>30x50</p></figcaption></figure></div>

### Mood

If you decide to create a custom icon, it is important that you adopt a **square image**. Good results are obtained with **50 x 50** images.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/KBCN9bWP5wtgyVm34NUk" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### My Profile

* Dimensions for the **cover image**: **800 x 300**

<figure><img src="/files/BGd3TuJ2IvTd3zQK7DlL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

{% hint style="info" %}
Maximum size accepted: **4 MB**
{% endhint %}

* Dimensions for the **tag image**: it is important that tag images are **150x150** in size; otherwise, the tag will not be visible.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/0Afde8ZyuiKJLJY9ZsMm" alt="" width="375"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### Pop-up

Dimensions: **1160 x 765**

<figure><img src="/files/AX0JN52P9w17Pp3lo2nO" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### **Quick Links**&#x20;

* Dimensions for the **compact**, **tiles**, and **list** layouts: **400 x 400**

![](/files/9S8KGoiyLl8bfBfKFTB4)

* Dimensions for the **grid** and **filmstrip** layouts: **210 x 120**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/1ew3lknwP5ZjGZ2wB4io" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### **Quotes**

We suggest creating a **620 x 620** **project** with a **290 x 290 image**. Then, the web part allows you to move the image and zoom in.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/pkFgfTkI32GGmr4potmW" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

#### ![](/files/1LSlvWGht1i5BrfFktyP)

### Videos

* Video Channel **logo**: the aspect ratio of this picture should be **4:3**. We suggest adopting the following dimensions: **1000 x 750**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Z91NcK84VtfoXN0s0QbL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Video **thumbnails**: **1280 x 720** (good results are also obtained with 1920 x 1080 pictures)

{% hint style="info" %}
**N.B. Sharepoint is responsive**. This means that regardless of the dimensions of the screen, the image with the correct dimensions will fit everywhere.
{% endhint %}


# Icons

[CLCK HERE](https://developer.microsoft.com/en-us/fluentui#/styles/web/icons) to find the Microsoft icons that are useful for your configurations.&#x20;


# Creation of tag systems for news and documents

The system for categorizing news and documents shared on your SharePoint intranet.

## Introduction&#x20;

With **tags**, you can **categorize contents** such as **news** and **documents** uploaded to your SharePoint intranet. This helps users **find such contents more quickly** thanks to the **filter function**. In addition, you can configure webparts so that they display only **contents belonging to specific categories**.

Tags are created using the **Term store** **management tool**, which can be accessed from the SharePoint intranet site. Tags (also referred to as **metadata**) are **terms** belonging to **term sets**, which in turn belong to **term groups**. After creating term sets and terms, you need to go back to your SharePoint intranet and create **columns of the Managed Metadata type**, which allow you to **apply tags** to your contents.&#x20;

To sum up, you need to take the following steps:

1. **Create term sets and terms** in the Term store;
2. **Create Managed Metadata columns** to assign metadata to your contents (news and documents);
3. **Apply tags to your contents** (news and documents).

These steps will be explained in detail in the following sections. Section 2 and 3 are divided into two sub-sections concerning documents and news respectively.

## Create term sets and terms in the Term store

{% hint style="info" %}
As this procedure requires high levels of permissions, it is recommended to perform it with an IT member.
{% endhint %}

First of all, you need to open the Term store, which is a section of the Site Administration area. To access the Term store, take the following steps:&#x20;

* Click on the **Settings** icon, then click on **Site information**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/ROJESLdoFix6rwVcIG6A" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click on **View all site settings**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/JDtLsOYuDosxxdPyT7U5" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Under Site Administration, click on **Term store management**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/t2AKLXRC9ws5x3DrTL6Y" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* You will land on the **Term store**, where you can create term groups, term sets and terms.

<figure><img src="/files/EKALATKiAnLvSWWIEOGn" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Let us assume that you want to divide a set of **documents** into categories corresponding to different Departments (e.g. Marketing, HR, IT, etc.). As a first step, you need to **create a new global term group**. A term group is a set of term sets that share common security requirements. To create a new term group, click the **three dots** to the right of the Taxonomy section. Then, click on **Add term group**.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/M9ZyU86LVj3NTUaGLWuy" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Enter a **name** for your new term group and press **Enter**. You can simply write what **type of content** you are going to manage with the tags in this group.&#x20;

> For example, "Documents".&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/CnQla0o7MbYd9YrznA3Q" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% hint style="info" %}
You can create a new term group only if you are a **term store admin**.&#x20;

You can **edit the group managers or contributors** by clicking on **Edit** next to **Group Managers**. A panel appears, where you need to enter the names or email addresses of the people you want to add and assign them a role (either manager or contributor). When you are done, click on **Save**.
{% endhint %}

As a second step, you need to **create a new term set**. A term set is a group of related terms. To add a new term set, click the **three dots** next to the term group name, and select **Add term set**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/v7dbQTrLs0QiWiAgnz3u" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Enter a **name** for your new term set and press **Enter**. The name should correspond to the general topic to which the tags will be related.

> For example: "Departments"

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/bUnYKT4YBKO6VD1P1ug8" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% hint style="info" %}
**The term set name should not contain spaces**. If the name you want to use includes more than one word, please use hyphens or capital letters without spaces. For example: DocumentTypes.
{% endhint %}

{% hint style="info" %}
To add a term set, you must be a **contributor**, a **group manager** or a **term store admin**.
{% endhint %}

Finally, as a third step, you need to **add terms (tags) to your term set**. A term is a specific word or phrase within a term set, and it has a unique ID. To add a new term, click the **three dots** next to the term set name, and select **Add term**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/aISkIgkrPVqsYzGvPl8k" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Enter a **name** for your term and press **Enter**.&#x20;

> For example: "Marketing".

Repeat these steps to add more terms, e.g. "HR", "IT", "Finance" and so on.  If you need to delete a term, click the three dots next to the term name and select **Delete term**.

You can create **multilingual tags**. To add a translation, select the term you want to translate and, on the **General** tab, under **Translations and synonyms**, select  **+ Add**. The **Add translation and synonyms** panel appears. Select your language, type the translation, and click **Save** at the bottom left of the panel.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/vy3fUpwTFQ6T0F1P3X0t" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/6yKnRdr7muyLgoqWBTy2" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% hint style="info" %}
To create and manage terms, you must be a **contributor**, a **group manager**, or a **term store admin**.
{% endhint %}

If you want to use tags to categorize **news**, you need to follow the procedure described above. For example, let us assume that you want to divide the news published on your intanet into categories corresponding to different news types. To create these tags, you need to:&#x20;

* Access the Term store;&#x20;
* Create a new term group which could be named, for example, "News";
* Create a new term set which could be named, for example, "NewsType";
* Add terms to the term set, for example, "Corporate news", "Welcome", "HR", etc.&#x20;

To apply tags to your news and documents, you need columns of the Managed Metadata type. Read the following section to learn how to do so.&#x20;

## Create Managed Metadata columns

After creating your tags, you need to open the library where the contents to be categorized are collected. Here, you need to create a Managed Metadata column, which will allow you to select and apply terms from a specific term set. The first part of this section explains how to create Managed Metadata columns to categorize documents, while the second part describes how to create Managed Metadata columns to categorize news.&#x20;

### Create Managed Metadata columns: documents

First of all, open the document library where your documents are collected. Then, click on **+Add column**. A panel appears, showing you different column types: scroll down and select **Managed metadata**, then click **Next**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/VJuC1CMsD7sW41rLMHVv" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

The **Create a column** panel appears. The panel features a number of fields to fill in. The fields marked with an **asterisk (\*)**, i.e., **Name** and **Term set or term**, are **mandatory**. Fill in these fields as follows:&#x20;

* **Name**: enter the **name of the column**. If the name you want to use includes more than one word, please **avoid spaces**: use capital letters.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
**The column name should coincide with the name of the term set** you are going to select.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/dGsqKrPgdD99gbjNiORm" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Select term set or term**: here you need to associate the colum with a term set. Click on **Select** to open the **Select term set or term** panel. This panel shows you the term groups available in the Term store. Click on the **term group** you are interested in and select the correct **term set**. Then, click on **Save** at the bottom left of the panel.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/N3iCyTl1Q3dXzyaNl96a" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Mg8TlwZsJNpvhYOFGGOA" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* After the selection of a term set, the **Default value** field appears: here you can select or type a default value, i.e., a tag that will be automatically applied by default.&#x20;

The **Create a column** panel also includes additional options which can be accessed by clicking on **More options**. Here you can set further options, such as:&#x20;

* **Allow multiple values**: if you enable this option, you will be able to apply more than one tag to a document.
* **Require that this column contains information**: if you enable this option, it will be mandatory to add a value to this column.&#x20;

When you have completed the panel, click on **Save**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/adVYWwd8NhRbSdyPeGvP" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

To **edit** a column, you need to **select** **it (1)**, click on **Column settings (2)** and select **Edit (3)**. By so doing, you will open the **Edit column** panel, which is identical to the **Create column** panel. When you have completed your changes, click on **Save** at the bottom left of the panel.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/HWH7BugXDXo7DST4cXJF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### Create Managed Metadata columns: news

First of all, you need to access the page library where your news are collected. To do so, follow these steps:&#x20;

* Click on the **Settings** icon at the top right of the page, then click on **Site contents**.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/cjQ5zfpMdKYpor6r3WTv" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Scroll down to the bottom of the page and select the **Site Pages** page library.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/eF368nMgfGckjRyBsHWa" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Now, add a new Managed Metadata column by taking the steps described in the [previous sub-section](#create-managed-metadata-columns-documents) concerning documents. First, you need to click on **+Add column** and select the **Managed metadata** column type. Then, click **Next**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/VJuC1CMsD7sW41rLMHVv" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

The **Create a column** panel appears. The panel features a number of fields to fill in. The fields marked with an **asterisk (\*)**, i.e., **Name** and **Term set or term**, are **mandatory**. Fill in these fields as follows:&#x20;

* **Name**: enter the **name of the column**. If the name you want to use includes more than one word, please **avoid spaces**: use capital letters.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
**The column name should coincide with the name of the term set** your are going to select.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/wf5v8NDan9LTnNavWDfx" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Select term set or term**: here you need to associate the colum with a term set. Click on **Select** to open the **Select term set or term panel**, which shows you the term groups available in the Term store. Click on the **term group** you are interested in and select the correct **term set**. Then, click on **Save** at the bottom left of the panel.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Ss299T7606c8QwNOTQQ9" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/cCEKdwKkMUHj0DCMtcvO" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* After the selection of a term set, the **Default value** field appears: here you can select or type a default value, i.e., a tag that will be automatically applied by default.&#x20;

The **Create a column** panel also includes additional options which can be accessed by clicking on **More options**. Here you can set further options, such as:&#x20;

* **Allow multiple values**: if you enable this option, you will be able to apply more than one tag to a news.
* **Require that this column contains information**: if you enable this option, it will be mandatory to add a value to this column.&#x20;

When you have completed the panel, click on **Save**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/EX3RJEekaaAgLpKlZ0XE" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

You can **edit** a column by taking the steps described in the previous sub-section: **select the column** and click **Column settings > Edit** to open the **Edit column** panel, which is identical to the **Create column** panel. Make the necessary changes and click on **Save** at the bottom left of the panel.

Now you can use the Managed Metadata columns you created to apply tags to your contents. Read the following section to learn how to do so. &#x20;

## Apply tags to contents&#x20;

This section will show you how to assign metadata to news and documents by using the Managed Metadata columns you created previously, In particular, the first sub-section focuses on documents, while the second one concerns news.&#x20;

### Apply tags to documents

To apply a tag to a document, take the following steps:&#x20;

* **Select** the document you want to categorize **(1)**.
* Click on the **info icon** at the top right of the page to open a panel containing information on this document **(2)**. &#x20;
* This panel features the **name of the Managed Metadata column** you created previously **(3)**. Click inside the **box** under the column name to apply a tag from the term set associated to the column. You can **type the name of the tag** and press **Enter**. Alternatively, you can click on the **tag icon** to view all the tags belonging to the term set and **select the correct tag from the list**. &#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/TyJL6bpzrgGzOufMJmuW" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/zi6A5F73inRHSmL9R0ju" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* After selecting the correct tag, click on **Apply** at the bottom left of the panel.&#x20;
* If you have activated the **Allow multiple values** option, **repeat these steps** to add more tags.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/kdunzwBtGcnTJ6I8fC44" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### Apply tags to news&#x20;

To apply a tag to a news, take the following steps:&#x20;

* **Select** the news you want to categorize **(1)**.
* Click on the **info icon** at the top right of the page to open a panel containing information on the news **(2)**. &#x20;
* This panel features the **name of the Managed Metadata column** you created previously **(3)**. Click inside the **box** under the column name to apply a tag from the term set associated to the column. You can **type the name of the tag** and press **Enter**. Alternatively, you can click on the **tag icon** to view all the tags belonging to the term set and **select the correct tag from the list**. &#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/rUpl02XTauarYjK4cpx0" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/FDCP3oNJDDLA2xgxfn28" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* After selecting the correct ta&#x67;**,** click on **Apply** at the bottom left of the panel.&#x20;
* If you have activated the **Allow multiple values** option, **repeat these steps** to add more tags.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/dpx4tSCCvE8YaokIujNB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

After the selection of the tag, a yellow book icon appears next to the news title. This means that the news needs republishing. To republish the news, just hover your mouse over the icon. A window appears: click on **Republish now**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/MS6hiKtCmgymN4WuSx6V" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

You can assign metadata to a news also in the **Page details** panel in the news itself. The steps to follow are listed below:&#x20;

* Open the news.
* Click on **Edit** at the top right of the page, and then on **Page details** on the left bar.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/4wOLBIKw6wB95u8gCONq" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* The **Page details** panel opens. This panel also features the **name of the Managed Metadata column** you created previously. The steps to take to apply metadata to the news coincide to those described above.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/HoAqbEi9OrQWUq390T6R" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click inside the **box** under the column name to assign a tag from the term set associated to the column. You can **type the name of the tag** and press **Enter**. Alternatively, you can click on the **tag icon** to view all the tags belonging to the term set and **select the correct tag from the list**.&#x20;
* After selecting the correct ta&#x67;**,** click on **Apply** at the bottom left of the panel.&#x20;
* Finally, click on **Update news** at the top right of the page to republish the news.&#x20;


# Teams push notifications

This guide provides a complete overview of our Teams push notifications system.

## Preliminary information

When you create a new team on Microsoft Teams, an Office365 group is also automatically generated. O365 groups can exist without an associated Team, but to which, at any time, the corresponding Team can be linked.

## Membership management

It is important to remember that, unlike security groups, Office 365 groups **cannot contain other groups**.

If you try to do this,  the users of the first group are brought back to the second group. Any subsequent changes to the membership of the first group **are not reflected in the second**.

There are four main ways of maintaining team members.

1. **Creation of an Org-wide Team**\
   All tenant users are automatically added to the Team.\
   More details: [Creation of an org-wide team](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/microsoftteams/create-an-org-wide-team)
2. **Use of Office 365 Groups configured with Dynamic Membership**\
   You can define a query (for example on users' Active Directory attribute values), and all users who match the query are automatically added to the group. Anyone who no longer matches the query is automatically removed.\
   For this functionality it is necessary to have an "*Azure AD premium P1" license*.\
   More details: [Groups dynamic membership](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/active-directory/enterprise-users/groups-dynamic-membership)
3. **GroupsSync tool**\
   For those who do not have the "*Azure AD premium P1*" license we have implemented a tool that, when properly set, creates and maintains O365 groups based on certain values ​​of Active Directory attributes.\
   This tool is **not** part of the Intranet AI solution, therefore is usually sold separately.
4. **Manual management**\
   The last possibility is the manual maintenance of Team members.\
   It is entirely your IT’s responsibility to manually add/remove users from the group. These actions can be performed either by Teams itself or by managing the members of the related O365 group.

## What to do in case of secondary sites associated with a hub?

In situations with secondary sites associated to a hub, we can find many options and make sure we choose the best solution to implement.

Case study:

*Client X has the Global site and the Local (Italy) secondary site.*\
*Whoever connects from Italy sees everything, whoever is outside Italy will only see the Global contents.*\
*The two sites differ in some pages and apps, but above all in news, because some news is published exclusively on the Local site and only people from Italy will be able to read it. While the news published on the Global site will be readable by everyone on a global level.*

Technically, the solutions can be two and both valid.

### **Option 1: Create two teams:**

One team will include the users who must see the global news, the other team will include the users who must see the local news.

**PROS**

There are no special precautions when posting news on the two sites.

**CONS**

A user who is part of both teams will obviously have two different teams to see the notifications.

**???**

If a user has access to both SharePoint sites, they will be able to see all the news on both (from SharePoint) regardless of belonging to the Teams group, which at this point pilots only the notification on Teams.

### **Option 2: Create a single team with audience on the news**

SharePoint includes the audience functionality.

The news that will be visible to everyone can be inserted normally. Regarding news that must be visible only to selected users, you need to add the correct AD group of users as an audience.

**PROS**

A single team.

**CONS**

Each time, you need to insert the group as the news audience.

**???**

If a user has access to both SharePoint sites and news web parts are set to use the audience, on SharePoint they will see only the news without audience and the news with an audience they belong to. In practice, the audience can drive both the Teams notifications and the visibility on SharePoint.

**NB: If a user has the Azure AD Free license, they don't have Azure dynamic groups**.

Since both solutions involve the use of groups, it should be noted that:

* groups are maintained manually
* you purchase our group sync tool (at an annual cost, without user restrictions)
* you purchase a higher Azure license (with cost per user added)

You need to have a way to recognize the types of users through Azure AD attributes.

***

## How do Teams push notifications work?

Push notifications help promote news, corporate events, and important messages. This means that whenever you publish a news article, an event, or an alert, users will receive a notification through a bot. You can also choose to activate just one or two of these three features.

### Creation of the Teams group and configuration of the chat bot

To configure our push notifications, it is necessary to **create a new group in Microsoft Teams**.

* It is important to add **one of our accounts as an owner of the group**, so we can retrieve the team ID autonomously.
* You can choose the **name** and the **image** of the group.

In addition, the following materials are required for the **configuration of the chat bot**:&#x20;

* The **name of the bot**. Users will see the bot name when they receive the notifications.
* The **image of the bot**. The image must be in PNG format, with a maximum size of 30 KB, and a shape compatible with the available space (a square, round, or hexagonal picture). The optimal dimensions for the bot image are **192x192** with a **logo centered at 96x96**.

You can also use the same name and image for the Teams group and the bot.&#x20;

> Here are some examples of group/bot names: "Intranet Notifications", "Intranet Updates", "Intranet Alerts" "\[Company Name] Comms" (e.g., "intranet.ai Comms")

### Notifications

Users will receive notifications related to news, events, or alerts in three areas:

1. **"Activity" section located in the Teams sidebar**&#x20;

* The "Activity" button allows you to view a feed that includes all recent actions in Teams. The notifications sent by the bot appear in this area.
* Notifications remain visible in the feed for 30 days; after this period, they expire and are no longer viewable.
* By clicking on the notification, users can access the chat with the bot configured for the intranet.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/SPS1MM0J5EIGPo2vPmVR" alt="" width="355"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

2. **Chat with the bot**

Push notifications also appear in the chat with the bot. When a news item, an event or an alert is published on the intranet, users receive a message of this kind in the Chat section:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/06S74uYwPuKytG4f0DKW" alt="" width="352"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

For news and events, the default text is **"\[Bot Name] sent a card"**. However, this text **can be customized**.

The notifications in the chat consist of cards with detailed information about the update. By clicking the dedicated button, users can open the intranet and read more. For example, a notification related to a news post consists of a card with the following elements:

* The **text** “Here are the latest News published on the Intranet!” **(which can be customized) (1)**
* The **title** of the news post **(2)**
* The **publication date (3)**
* The **preview image (4)**
* The **“Open News”** button, to access the intranet and read the article **(5)**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/xEyK7o2oeJ7Fthc5VbLv" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

3. **“Updates” channel of the Teams group**

Notifications will appear as posts in the "Updates" channel (which can also have a different name). We create this channel and configure it so that users cannot reply to posts; only the Teams group administrators have the ability to manage them.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/P8EngJ2VcNOe1qkRdlk3" alt="" width="350"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

***

## The Disable Notification and Notification Date columns

By default, users receive a Teams notification just as a news item is published. However, if you don't want your audience to be notified, you have the possibility to **disable notifications**. Instead, if you do want to send a notification, but you don't want the notification date to coincide with the publication date, you can **set a different notification date**.&#x20;

You can set these options while creating the news post, by filling in the **Disable Notification** and **Notification Date** fields. These fields are available only if the **SitePages library** includes the **Disable Notification** and **Notification Date columns**. The following sections explain the process to enable these columns on the main intranet site and on secondary sites.&#x20;

### How to enable the Disable Notification and Notification Date columns on the main site

To create the Disable Notification and Notification Date columns on the main intranet site, follow these steps:&#x20;

* Access the **SitePages** library.
* Click on **Library settings**, and then on **More library settings**.&#x20;
* Under the **Columns** section, select **Add from existing site columns**.&#x20;
* You will land on the following interface, where you can add columns from site columns.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/RwfCKkgYwcdNbzzWkciL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Select site columns from**: select **IAI Notifications** from the drop-down menu.
* **Available site columns**: you will see the two columns you need in this box. Select the first column and click on **Add**. Then, do the same for the second column. &#x20;
* Finally, click on **OK**.

### How to enable the Disable Notification and Notification Date columns on secondary sites

To create the Disable Notification column on secondary sites, follow these steps:&#x20;

* Access the **SitePages** library.
* Click on **Library settings**, and then on **More library settings**.&#x20;
* Under the **Columns** section, select **Create column**.
* You will land on the following interface, where you can create a new column. Here, you need to enter information about the column, namely the **column name**, the **column type** and the **default value**.

<figure><img src="/files/PycjCR5u7go5TuQEQeCn" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Column name**: write **IAINoNotification**. **This must be the internal name of the column**. Therefore, it is important that you write exactly this name at this stage. Then, at a later time, you may change the column name by making it more readable.
* **The type of information in this column is**: select **Yes/No (check box)**.
* **Default value**: select **No**.This means that notifications will be enabled by default. To disable them for a specific news, you will need to **activate the Disable Notification option** while creating the news.

To create the Notification Date column on a secondary site, follow these steps:&#x20;

* Access the **SitePages** library.
* Click on **Library settings**, and then on **More library settings**.&#x20;
* Under the **Columns** section, select **Create column**.
* You will land on the following interface, where you can create a new column. Here, you need to enter information about the column, namely the **column name**, the **column type** and some **additional column settings.**&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/O7CxLgWKz3DC5ELelfvP" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/8SlAokQc4VD5jgABEyzC" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Column name**: write **IAINotificationDate**. **This must be the internal name of the column**. Therefore, it is important that you write exactly this name at this stage. Then, at a later time, you may change the column name by making it more readable.
* **The type of information in this column is**: select **Date and Time**.
* **Description**: write **"If not set, publish date is used"**.
* **Enforce unique values**: select **No**.
* **Date and Time Format**: select **Date & Time**.
* **Display Format**: select **Standard**.


# Configuration of favorite lists and user lists

This section provides instructions for configuring favorite lists and user lists. This step is essential for some intranet.ai components to work properly.

Many intranet.ai components involve the possibility for intranet visitors to interact with the lists on which such components rely. For example, when users mark news items as favorites, they interact with the News archive favorites list. To make this happen, it is important to configure favorite lists and user lists by following a specific process. In particular, two types of configuration can be identified.&#x20;

***

## First type of configuration

The first type of configuration requires you to:

* Allow intranet visitors to **contribute** to the list;
* Make sure that each user can **see and edit only the items created by the user him/herself** (e.g., each user will be able to see and edit only his/her favorite apps, contacts, FAQs, and so on);&#x20;
* Make sure that the **list items** **won't appear in search results**.

&#x20;The configuration process involves the following steps:

* Click on the **Settings** icon at the top right of the page, then click on **Site contents**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/cjQ5zfpMdKYpor6r3WTv" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click on the **three dots** to the right of the list name, then click on **Settings** to access the Settings area.
* Under Permission and Management, click on **Permissions for this list**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/21ngLHWzahEec6Rcpcwo" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* First of all, you need to click on **Stop Inheriting Permissions**, as you want to set unique permissions for this list. This means that the list will no longer inherit permissions from its parent.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/cSZ0PSIy37JkmGjaYCAg" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* As soon as you click on Stop Inheriting Permissions, you will see the following pop-up, which explains you the action you are going to perform. Just press **Ok**.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/TeuIPwh3HOTrqh2SqEQj" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Then, select the group of **Visitors** and click on **Edit User Permissions.**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/4nYaRFGSnvRiDh5dOdTn" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* You will land on the following interface, where you can set different types of permissions. The default option is Read; change it to **Contribute**, so that users will be able to intract with the list. Then, click on **Ok**.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/W59M28Rv4YgIFNEOz19k" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* Go back to the general area by clicking on **Browse > Settings**. Under General Settings, click on **Advanced Settings**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/A22P9Ab1A2BIfVQiEqhh" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* You will land on the following interface, where you need to set some options concerning **item-level permissions** and **search**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/nWPfOPhQfc2EOAu6LalE" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/L1Dzr5aHbfWFF7WDW3V0" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Item-level Permissions**: here you need to specify which items users are allowed to read, create and edit. Select **Read items that were created by the user** and **Create items and edit items that were created by the user**.
* **Search**: here you need to choose whether to allow items from this list to appear in search results. Select **No**.
* Finally, click on **Ok** at the bottom of the page. The configuration is complete.

The process described above applies to the following lists:&#x20;

* **Apps favorites**
* **Disclaimer users**
* **Faq favorites**
* **Job applications**
* **Lists of favorite documents**
* **My profile info**
* **News archive favorites**
* **People directory favorites**
* **Popup users**
* **User apps list**

***

## Second type of configuration

The second type of configuration requires you to:

* Allow intranet visitors to **contribute** to the list;
* Make sure that each user can **see all the list items** (e.g., each visitor will be able to see everyone's notice board posts);
* Make sure that each user can **edit only the items created by the user him/herself** (e.g., each visitor will be able to edit only the notice board posts created by him/herself);&#x20;
* Make sure that **the list items won't appear in search results**.

The configuration process involves the following steps:

* Click on the **Settings** icon at the top right of the page, then click on **Site contents**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/cjQ5zfpMdKYpor6r3WTv" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click on the **three dots** to the right of the list name, then click on **Settings** to access the Settings area.
* Under Permission and Management, click on **Permissions for this list**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/21ngLHWzahEec6Rcpcwo" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* First of all, you need to click on **Stop Inheriting Permissions**, as you want to set unique permissions for this list. This means that the list will no longer inherit permissions from its parent.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/cSZ0PSIy37JkmGjaYCAg" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* As soon as you click on Stop Inheriting Permissions, you will see the following pop-up, which explains you the action you are going to perform. Just press **Ok**.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/TeuIPwh3HOTrqh2SqEQj" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Then, select the group of **Visitors** and click on **Edit User Permissions.**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/4nYaRFGSnvRiDh5dOdTn" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* You will land on the following interface, where you can set different types of permissions. The default option is Read; change it to **Contribute**, so that users will be able to intract with the list. Then, click on **Ok**.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/W59M28Rv4YgIFNEOz19k" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* Go back to the general area by clicking on **Browse > Settings**. Under General Settings, click on **Advanced Settings**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/A22P9Ab1A2BIfVQiEqhh" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* You will land on the following interface, where you need to set some options concerning **item-level permissions** and **search**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/6inBw7fZ8LDeLVZDVss7" alt="" width="536"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/1J1CCPl1QPZTadaCrzvQ" alt="" width="547"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Item-level Permissions**: here you need to specify which items users are allowed to read, create and edit. Select **Read all items** and **Create items and edit items that were created by the user**.
* **Search**: here you need to choose whether to allow items from this list to appear in search results. Select **No**.
* Finally, click on **Ok** at the bottom of the page. The configuration is complete.

The process described above applies to the following lists:&#x20;

* **Engagement likes**
* **Engagement posts**
* **Instant Form Users Answers**
* **My profile images**
* **Notice Board Posts**
* **User mood record**


# Viva Connections

Viva Connections is one of the modules of the Microsoft Viva platform and a powerful internal communication tool.

## Premises

Viva Connections facilitates internal communication and engagement and fosters a culture of inclusion.

Thanks to Viva Connections, you can set a unique entry point in which to have all the business tools your colleagues need.

{% hint style="info" %}
[**Click here**](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/viva/connections/set-up-admin-center) to follow the guide and proceed with the configuration.
{% endhint %}

## Before starting: materials you'll need to set up Viva Connections

Before starting, please be sure to have these materials available:

* **The name of your intranet site**. It will be shown under the intranet icon in the left bar of Teams. Our suggestion is to make it as short as possible (e.g., “Intranet”).
* **A short description**. You can either decide to personalize it or leave the Microsoft preset.
* **The Privacy Policy URL**. You can either decide to personalize it or leave the Microsoft preset. The best practice is to have your own Privacy Policy. You can also change it at a later time and use, in a first phase, the Microsoft default one.
* **Your website URL**.
* **The Term of Use URL**. You can either decide to personalize it or leave the Microsoft preset. The best practice is to have your own Terms of Use. You can also change it at a later time and use, in a first phase, the Microsoft default one.
* **A longer description**. You can either decide to personalize it or leave the Microsoft preset.
* **A big logo**: 192x192 colored PNG with transparent background.
* **A** **small logo** to be used as icon: 32x32 colored PNG with transparent background.


# Creation of dynamic groups in Microsoft Entra ID

This guide provides a comprehensive overview of how to create a dynamic group in Microsoft Entra ID.

This guide covers the necessary steps to set up a **group with dynamic membership** in Microsoft Entra ID. This is particularly useful for the correct configuration of the [People Directory](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/configurations/people-directory), ensuring that it displays only employee contacts while excluding service accounts, admin contacts, and other users who should not be visible on the intranet.

Dynamic groups offer several benefits, the most important of which being **automated membership management**: dynamic groups automatically update their membership based on defined criteria, reducing the need for manual updates.

Please note that to create a dynamic group, an **admin account of Microsoft Entra** is needed.

{% hint style="info" %}
[Click here](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/entra/identity/users/groups-create-rule) to learn more about creating or updating a dynamic membership group in Microsoft Entra ID.
{% endhint %}

## Create a new group

To create a new group, take the following steps:&#x20;

* Go to the [**Microsoft Entra**](https://entra.microsoft.com/) portal.
* Select **Groups** in the left-hand navigation pane.
* Click on **All groups**.
* Choose **New group**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/mBQ3b6aQBkXu5YU6Qu4G" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* On the **Group** page, enter a name and a description for the new group.
* Select a **Membership type** for either users or devices.

***

## Create a dynamic query

* Select **Add dynamic query** to open the rule builder. The rule builder supports up to **five expressions**. To add more than five expressions, you must use the text box.
* In order to create a query that adds users according to a specific parameter (e.g. business email), use the text box and enter **-contains**.
* After creating the rule, select **Save**.
* Select **Create** to create the group.

***

## Create an associated Team

A Microsoft 365 group can be used to create a team in Microsoft Teams. The necessary steps are as follows:

* Go to the [admin exchange portal](https://admin.exchange.microsoft.com/).
* Click on **Groups** and select the newly created group.
* On the right-hand panel, click on **Microsoft Teams**.
* Select **Create a team**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/qxzrSd1OzXQRgo1SglJU" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Now you have a Microsoft 365 group with a dynamic membership and an associated team. You can also use it for [Teams push notifications](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/other-configurations/teams-push-notifications) in production.


# Releases


# Version 1.1

Here the list of changes included in this release.

## Main changes

### Intranet Analytics

It is available, as a new add-on, the solution for monitoring intranet usage with detailed information and the possibility to filter using the company's professional families.\
Here are the main features:

* Monitoring of page views and unique users
* Monitoring of events
* Monitoring of searches (from intelligent search, people directory, and documents area)
* Filters using the company's dimensions (like department, country, city, etc..) from AzureAD

The intranet usage monitoring solution allows you to understand the daily needs of the people who work in the company and the way in which people look for things that are useful for their work. Thanks to intranet.ai and its guided search functions, it is possible to fill the gap found during the monitoring phase, with new targeted content, with a general saving of time for everyone.

Please find [more info](https://intranet.ai/features/intranet-analytics/) on our website.

### New layout for Advanced Search

With the goal to improve the user experience of our final users, we enriched our quick search box with a new user interface that makes the overall experience during searches more friendly and immediate.\
[Contact us](https://intranet.ai/about/contact-us/) for a live demo.

## Minor changes

#### Alerts and service communications

Added a field to choose if the intranet must send the notification or not.

#### Company News

Added a field to choose if the intranet must send the notification or not.

#### Event Calendar

Added a field to choose if the intranet must send the notification or not.


# Version 1.2

Here the list of changes included in this release.

## Main changes

### Organizational chart

It is available, directly inside the Premium plan, the solution for displaying the organization chart inside your intranet. The tool is perfect for the visualization of the relationship between managers and each direct report.\
Here is the list of features:

* Choose the first item of the structure
* Navigate the company structure on every level
* Zoom-in and zoom-out
* Search and identification of people inside the company structure, with animations
* Integrated with our People Directory (and with AD / Azure AD of course)

Close-up of the company's structure\
With the Company Organizational Chart web part, you will have access to the entire company’s structure on your intranet. With a few clicks, you will be able to figure out who plays what role in the company thanks to the head-subordinate structure, a type of organogram popular in the last period.

Dynamic navigation of the structure\
Using the Drag and Drop and Zoom functions, intranet.ai configures the Company Organizational Chart tool to navigate the company structure quickly and dynamically.

Please find [more info](https://intranet.ai/features/oganizational-chart/) on our website.

## Minor changes

#### Intranet Tour

Added the possibility to highlight contents inside the page, after the intranet go-live

Updated the mechanism for editing tour details

#### Company News

Updated the layout for mobile

#### Event Calendar

Fixed issue with cross-months events


# Version 1.3

Here the list of changes included in this release.

## Main changes

### Resource reservation

It is available, as an add-on, the solution for reserving locations or resources within the intranet. A very flexible tool that makes you able to:

* Configure the list of resources to manage (cars, parking, rooms, desks, monitors, etc..)
* Configure the list of resources' properties (location, floor, monitor available, etc..)
* Add as may resource you prefer
* Book resources based on slots
* Search for availabilities on dates or specific properties
* View your agenda of bookings
* View your next booking

Please find [more info](https://intranet.ai/features/resource-management-software/) on our website.

## Minor changes

#### Alerts and service communications

The "target group" now is a multiple choice

The "target group" now is able to manage both security groups and Microsoft 365 groups

#### Departments

Fixed issue for people no more available inside the People Directory


# Version 1.4

Here the list of changes included in this release.

## Main changes

### Professional services

This is not a product update, but it is a very important company update. We added to our proposal all the professional services useful to:

* apply a governance plan on your intranet
* help you with internal communication activities
* help you in creating digital contents (images, videos, podcasts)
* digitalize internal processes within the intranet
* dematerialize documents and forms within the intranet

Please find [more info ](https://intranet.ai/pricing/intranet-services/)on our website.

## Minor changes

#### Company Documents

Now the component is able to view also not-tagged documents

#### Event Calendar

Added the "Target group" field for targeting events push notifications

**Company News**

Added the possibility to see news tag

Added the support for SharePoint Online default Audience feature

**People Directory**

Enriched the UI for the "manager" field

**Advanced search**

Added the support for SharePoint Online default Audience feature

Now the component is able to view also not-tagged documents

#### Resource Reservation

Added a "Description" field

Added a configuration flag for display with ease of the booking time


# Version 1.5

Here you can find the changes included in this release.

## Main changes

* **Informative Buttons**

It is now possible to add an **hyperlink** inside the hover button webpart. You can now insert in the text box a clickable link that takes the user to another page or external web site.

<figure><img src="/files/aRsxZXCAEltHn9KmYCQQ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Event Calendar**

Some changes has been implemented to the web part:

As to the calendar’s layout, it is now possible to choose to see the events in a **vertical list** instead of at the bottom:

<figure><img src="/files/5gOzeZltNOrkA7RroSPj" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

It is also possible to add a **category** and an **icon** to customize the event.

<figure><img src="/files/wL5Iv7maH295JHtkdUVy" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

It works with a list where to add a category name associated with an image, so that each event pertaining to that category will appear with the same icon. Imagine for example, to assign the icon <img src="/files/Jbodh9ia0QTyMGaDknVy" alt="" data-size="line"> to the category: “internal events”. Each event of the category “internal even” will appear with this icon on the left. The same will happen for the category “business updates” which will appear with this icon: <img src="/files/tk2ouqfeaEnEKXMHCwP9" alt="" data-size="line">

Sundays won’t be automatically highlighted as a non-working day. This function allows to choose whether to show Sundays as holiday or not, so that one company can adjust the calendar to its working habits.

* **People Directory**

This web part is now **cross site**, which means that the people directory web part can now take as data source a list of another website of the intranet. &#x20;

Thanks to a new development that allows the configuration of a **pre-filter** for the People Directory, it becomes possible to set specific values for the pre-filter, such as country or department. For example, if there is a need to create a page that displays the colleagues from the Back Office department, the People Directory can be configured with this pre-filter. As a result, when accessing that specific page, the People Directory will already be filtered to show the colleagues from the Back Office department. This makes it easier to view and locate the desired individuals within the director.

<figure><img src="/files/mlAIZlRjbGjVN6mpUkwd" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

It is now possible to manage the **badge function**. This allows the administrator to attribute a specific badge (or more than one) to a user. This function works with two lists: one to insert all the badges available with the possibility to associate an icon to each item and another list to assign the badges to the users. For example, the badges "Innovation Champion" and "Best team player" will then appear in the People Directory like this:

<figure><img src="/files/Su5fodB8bAqgUy3BV2D2" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

The new function of the badge is available not only in the People Directory but also in My Profile area.

<figure><img src="/files/BzdwbVvOCLgVprtSvEUV" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

• **My Profile**

It is now possible to personalize the user profile image with some **tags** like this one:

![](/files/ZEbES1lgZh6DPrEuXq9q)

This function changes the user profile image throughout all Microsoft 365 environment, so for example the tag will be visible also in Microsoft Teams.\
The image will appear like this:

![](/files/8zFDnMsuxNXUcGxWBjmb)

• **Job Posting**

It is now possible to set an **expiry date** to the job postings. There will be a new field called “Expiration Date” which, if filled, will make the job posting disappear on a certain date (date indicated will be included). On the other hand, if the field will be left empty, the job posting will not expire.

## Minor changes

* **FAQ**

This improvement allows the FAQ web part to be **cross site**, which means that the web part can now take the information not just from the website where it is set up but also in other websites. The same it is true for the FAQ Favorites list.\
This is particularly useful when inside your intranet there are more than one site but you need the FAQ to be referred not just to one site in particular but all of them.


# Version 1.6

Here you can find the changes included in this release.

* **Event Calendar**

It is now possible to choose whether to show or to hide the description of the event, thanks to a new flag in the settings of the webpart.

<img src="/files/ffcUbq1xoUc8QZ8YJwo9" alt="" data-size="original">

The event description will appear just positioning the mouse on the event title like this:

<figure><img src="/files/UOlAUjCZTkas5DH6YW4z" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **News Archive**

It has been added the possibility to show the name of the source site, thanks to a flag in the settings of the webpart News Archive.

<img src="/files/hElzudKYFOSAajODlCcF" alt="" data-size="original">

<figure><img src="/files/DUAvKJCK3KhJhM5QM5l2" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Advanced Search**

Advanced Search can finally show also the contents of the FAQ section. This means that typing a keyword in the search box, it will be shown the question and the corresponding answer of the FAQ section.

<figure><img src="/files/M3oMRxfVezY6SFSNwJz2" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Documents**

It has been added the option to show or hide the download icon that appear on the side of the document.

<figure><img src="/files/t34BSJTrVYpEQUf4mhxJ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

You just need to flag the option Show download icon? In the Visibility settings, that can be reached from the settings of the web part.

<img src="/files/6VKn2nX8D9JqiXySxZEU" alt="" data-size="original">

* **Company Locations**

It has been added the possibility of loading the map in a specific zone.&#x20;

&#x20;The web part has three new web part properties:

o Latitude

o Longitude

o Zoom level (default 1)

<figure><img src="/files/3KqiQ9EQ0nmOwcaVoJpn" alt="" width="563"><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

How do you centre the map? Latitude and longitude can be taken from google from the point you want to see in the centre of the map.


# Version 1.7

Here you can find the changes included in this release.

## **Advanced Search**&#x20;

The hand lens has been moved inside the search bar.

<figure><img src="/files/x58mCrpQMptlXUWQmeul" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## **Bulletin Boards**&#x20;

1. Our latest release includes the possibility of adding an **approval flow** whereby **advertisements are published** on the notice board only **after an approver has checked and approved them**. In order to add this flow, two actions are required:

* Implement the flow manually with **Power Automate**;&#x20;
* Activate the **Enabling approval?** option while configuring the web part, so that it supports the approval flow.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/OFVniVMiNiaL8n3e1t8V" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

When the **Enabling approval?** option is activated, the following fields appear:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/NyZ3FnplL0g4YcCFEVZx" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Select users or approver group**: the **Azure AD group** including the approvers must be entered in this field.&#x20;
* **Enter the text to be shown as a disclaimer**: thanks to this field, it is possible to **customize the text shown as a disclaimer**. This text informs the user that the post will be published after being approved. If this field is left blank, the default text will be used, which is "The announcement will be visible after the approval". &#x20;

Besides, four **fields** have been **added to the Notice Board Posts list** to save **information on the approval flow**:

* **Approval date**;
* **Approver**;
* **Approvers emails**;&#x20;
* **Status**.

2. Thanks to a new web part property, it is now possible to **set the maximum number of pictures the user can upload** when creating a post. The minimum value is **0**, while the maximum value is **5**.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/REMhofAE2o9ZGazcnIm1" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

**NB**: **Selecting 0 means deactivating this feature**. In this case, users won't have the possibility of uploading photos. If you change the maximum number of photos from 1-5 to 0, any pictures users may have attached to posts published previously will be hidden.&#x20;

If this functionality is active, users can upload photos from the **Add a post** panel by clicking the **Load images button**.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Mo2cuO9n4jdIUAPuk3Lv" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

The following screenshot shows an example of a post with pictures.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/MwuIZW8bwfayiCI6OWLR" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## **Company Documents and Company Documents with Folders**

By default, the tags in the filter drop-down menu are ordered alphabetically. Now, while configuring filters, it is possible to flag the **Stop reordering box**, thanks to which **tags will not be ordered alphabetically**, but will keep **the same order they have in the term set**.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/gDvTQ921eYf1X3BXP1iR" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

## Company Documents with Folders

1. Thanks to a recent update of this component, it is possible to **customize the name of root label** of the breadcrumb. You just need to type the name you would like to use in the **Custom root label** box. If you don't write anything in this field, the name of the document library will be used.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/RZDAOHo4vKvJsA4i5qVm" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/kOnjAuaiNV2x3zBUujjx" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

2. You can also choose to **hide the root label of the breadcrumb when you are viewing the root folder**. You just need to activate the **Hide root label** option shown in the screenshot above.

## **Highlights**

The latest version of Highlights includes a graphic improvement which concerns the background of the web part. Now, when the component is used in a **section of a color other than white**, its **background** is **white rather than transparent**, so that it stands out more.

<figure><img src="/files/64WqLzUHXyGfYvatKNpN" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## **News Archive**&#x20;

1. By default, the tags in the filter drop-down menu are ordered alphabetically. Now, while configuring filters, it is possible to flag the **Stop reordering box**, thanks to which **tags will not be ordered alphabetically**, but will keep **the same order they have in the term set**. For example, this is useful when tags with month names are used.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/VXk4sAJrOdy4e5ZbeyHu" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

2. The possibility of disabling the favorites functionality has been added. This can be done by activating the **Disable favorites** option.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/gcTDB14TVe0Azdrx22GJ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

## **Organizational Chart**&#x20;

A new option has been added to the General settings. It is called **Choose the scroll type** and it consists of a flag through which you can decide how the organigram behaves when you use the mouse wheel. There are **two scroll types**: if you select **Zoom**, when using the mouse wheel you will zoom in and out, making the organigram bigger or smaller. If you select **Scroll**, you will enable a vertical scrolling: if the expanded nodes take up more space than the height of the web part, you will be able to scroll up and down with the mouse wheel.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/7ilcFIldoujdVfygvqE7" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

## **People Directory**&#x20;

When SharePoint is selected as data source, it is now possible to **choose one or more fields to use for searches**. This new web part property consists of a drop-down menu showing all the texts fields contained in the People directory list.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/YzM0U91UbL9aMy2AeJDT" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

If no option is selected, searches will be performed on the standard fields: Title, Business Phone, Mobile Phone, Email and User Login Name. If one or more fields are selected from the drop-down menu, these will replace the standard fields (they will not be added to them).&#x20;

## **Resource Reservation**&#x20;

It is now possible to **add a description** while booking a resource. This feature must be enabled in the web part property pane, by activating the **Description** field. If you activate only the Description field, the description will be optional. If you also activate the **Mandatory description** field, the description will be mandatory.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/fBqAafFLAHvLceKWImix" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

This way, when the user clicks on **Book**, the following **description box** will appear:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/jjIJ0ZZtBsxH9qALRlE0" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

The description can be modified by administrators.&#x20;


# Version 1.8

Here you can find the changes included in this release.

## Advanced Search&#x20;

1. Thanks to a new option in the People settings, you can choose to **show the user's Teams status** in the search bar. You just need to activate the **Show presence** option.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Q4WrIjx7bf7zm2jBA9e1" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/H6Lst4r0MXoJTatLj1QZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

2. A new section has been added to the configuration pane of the web part. This section, named **External links settings**, allows you to add a link to an external source of information.  For instance, you can add a button for searching on Google. &#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/rBPKWoLYdWfBM0VgyNGk" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/bHW9nG89EV4X37dvCzac" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

To configure this section, you need to take the following steps:&#x20;

* In the first field, enter the **button label text**, i.e., the text you would like to display on the button (for example: Search on Google)
* In the second field, enter the **URL** you would like to use, followed by the **{searchText} placeholder** (for example: [https://www.google.com/search?q={searchText}](https://www.google.com/search?q={searchText}”))

## Company Apps

The latest version of this component includes a new option which allows you to **activate the tab mode**. If you enable this option, **the user will open the apps area by clicking on a small button**. To configure the tab mode, follow these steps:

* Enter the **name of the icon** that will be used for the button. You can choose an icon from the library at [this link](https://developer.microsoft.com/en-us/fluentui#/styles/web/icons) and then copy-paste the name of the icon into this field.
* Define the position of the button on the page by entering the **top margin** and the **right margin**.
* Finally, choose the **height of the apps section**.

![](/files/JRFCRpm6qctcaiCwZC4U)

<figure><img src="/files/pUIkltSb5nET0tvOaGxB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Event Calendar

Now, in the Layout settings, you can choose from **three layouts**: the new layout is called **Compact with details**. It basically consists of a compact calendar with details displayed on the left. The details section includes the date, the title and the description of the event. You can use the arrows in the lower left corner of the web part to browse events.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/2mAK7qw52BCFY84G62Ll" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Job Posting

It is now possible to **choose the number of job offers to load**. For example, if you enter number 10, at first the page will display ten offers; when you click on the Load more button, ten more offers will be shown. By entering an unrealistically high number (e.g., 999), all the offers will be shown. &#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/6k3t3rEsHUqLAO94jLZA" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

## My Profile&#x20;

Now, thanks to the **Show presence** option, you can choose to **show the person's Teams status**, which will appear next to his or her name.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/v2qQwmIhbNwTUITjJ7Vj" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

## People Directory&#x20;

The current version of this component also includes the **Show presence** option, which allows you to **show the user's Teams status** in his or her card. To activate this option, you just need to select **Yes**.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/yyQeQiDL7CSO8CXzVQGq" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>


# Version 1.9

Here you can find the changes included in this release.

## Company Apps

A new option has been added to the General settings section of the property pane. This option allows you to hide the web part when there are no apps to view for the current user.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/n3aZpjwOIUONHLKactWs" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

## Company Documents

The Document settings section of the property pane includes a new option named **Open or download the document?**. Thanks to this update, you can choose whether the document will be opened in Word Online or downloaded when the user clicks on it. The former option is the default one.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/o8n6G0n1qfDQrL1fVRkN" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

## Company Documents with Folders

1. In the Order settings section of the property pane, it is now possible to choose the **folder display order: from A to Z or from Z to A**.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Eh7tsac0OiiXoqotFAgu" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

2. The Document settings section of the property pane includes a new option named **Open or download the document?**. Thanks to this update, you can choose whether the document will be opened in Word Online or downloaded when the user clicks on it. The former option is the default one.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/exMlP1Lgnvz2q1akMmZx" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

## Event Calendar

1. If you select the **Compact with details** layout, you have the possibility of **customizing the colors of the calendar**. In particolar, you can choose:

* The **background color (1)**;
* The **text color (2)**;
* The **color of the pagination and off range days (3)**;
* The **color of the current day (4)**;
* The **text color of the current day (5)**.

In addition, you can decide if you want the **text of the current day** to be **in bold**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/sqNA06xiCmOay1ggfly0" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<figure><img src="/files/AqJlvErI3EzRmgehWlQe" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

If you do not customize colors, the web part will use the colors of the intranet graphic theme.

2. If you select the **Compact with details** layout, you have the possibility of **activating a scroll bar** for the **information box**. If you enable this option, the possibility of **setting the height of the info section** becomes available. This means that you can set a **fixed height** for this section and use the scroll bar to read its content. This may be useful when you have long descriptions and you don't want this section to take up too much space.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/vRhYudY4ZDsE7cVAUh7v" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/ZpyaaT6U93AVo7lZENkd" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

3. The **Compact with details** layout allows you to **include a picture in the event details**. When creating the event, you can insert a picture by clicking on **Attach File** in the top bar of the Events - New Item panel. Click on **Choose File** to upload an image, then press OK.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/LzK5nDyqaieujFMf8jWR" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/MqDXOSBLwCBFAcm13E18" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/s4GjWv6D95tH9BCXxeky" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

## FAQs

The possibility of configuring prefilters has been added. Now, the **Filter settings** section of the web part property pane is divided into **two sub-sections**:

1. The **filter configurator** allows you to add filters to the web part to **help users find information quickly**. These filters are used to **categorize** FAQs.
2. The **prefilter configurator** allows you to **show only FAQs that belong to specific categories**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/xX1WcINn0vBDfqcOT91O" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

To configure prefilters, take the following steps:&#x20;

* Click on **Configure prefilters**.
* A dialog box will open with two fields to fill in.
* In the first box, you need to choose the filter: select the single option, **Categories**.
* In the second box, you need to insert the **categories you want to show**, divided by the **| symbol**.

> For example: Disease|Injury

<figure><img src="/files/P6sSyPrhGp7t7A4N9Nwt" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

In this example, **only the FAQs related to the selected topics** (disease and injury) **are shown in the web part**:

<figure><img src="/files/c16eRjRVGfq7B88I2f9L" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Image Slider

It is now possible to choose the **order in which pictures will be displayed**. The **Order column** serves this purpose. To establish the order of images, you need to click on **Edit in grid view**: this will allow you to edit the items in the document library. Then, **assign a number to each picture** and click on **Exit grid view** to save your changes.

![](https://docs.intranet.ai/~gitbook/image?url=https%3A%2F%2F2718234637-files.gitbook.io%2F%7E%2Ffiles%2Fv0%2Fb%2Fgitbook-x-prod.appspot.com%2Fo%2Fspaces%252FriXlnuemuParrCf7Uotu%252Fuploads%252FolWlVgIuaYS8eTpWpGRM%252FImageSlider.png%3Falt%3Dmedia%26token%3Db894ead7-c9a9-436b-99cb-8886159914d8\&width=768\&dpr=4\&quality=100\&sign=7dd108ea\&sv=1)

## Leadership Team&#x20;

The property pane of the web part includes a new section named **Dislplay settings**. Here you can decide **how many cards will be shown on each line**.

![](https://docs.intranet.ai/~gitbook/image?url=https%3A%2F%2F2718234637-files.gitbook.io%2F%7E%2Ffiles%2Fv0%2Fb%2Fgitbook-x-prod.appspot.com%2Fo%2Fspaces%252FriXlnuemuParrCf7Uotu%252Fuploads%252FiiuGix8Q0pCE3rZw472n%252FLeadershipTeam.png%3Falt%3Dmedia%26token%3D49cf061a-5e01-46b0-b4de-4d62d0f1ee36\&width=768\&dpr=4\&quality=100\&sign=e842c318\&sv=1)

The first two fields refer to the **sections without filters**. In the first field, select **Yes** if you want to choose the number of cards to display on each line. In the second field, enter the **number** of items you want to see on each line.

The third and the fourth fields refer to the **section with filters**. If you want a specific number of users to be displayed on each line, repeat the steps described above.

## My Favorites

It is now possible to **hide the web part when there are no favorites** to be displayed. This option is included in the Viewing options section of the property pane.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/megLRy5El5rXjEA0W4TS" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

## My Profile

Thanks to a new option in the Image settings section of the property pane, you can decide to show the name of the tag in the selection of tags to be applied to the profile picture.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/aplAvWBk9yonyvAMOGrK" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

## News Archive

Several web part properties have been added to make the component more versatile.

#### Summary layout

* You can now **customize** the **titles** of the **See all news** button and the **Popular news** button.
* You can now choose between a **thumbs up icon** or a **heart icon** to **identify likes**.
* You can now **hide the Popular news section**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/oLj6Jv0d9U4PFF4scqpo" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure> <figure><img src="/files/shrJ3VjhoNQKuVqZOi6p" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

These new fields are available in the **Summary display settings** section.

#### Default and Compact layouts

You can now choose between a **thumbs up icon** or a **heart icon** to **identify likes**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/WO23nBDFDLbAPW9zvLwP" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

This new field is available in the **General settings** section when the **Default** or the **Compact** display mode is selected.

#### All layouts

There are now **individual options** to decide whether to **display the number of likes, comments and views**.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/rYJtEyOU44lh3689fTrP" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

These new fields are available in the **General settings** section when any layout is selected.

## Organizational Chart&#x20;

1. The **General settings** section of the property pane includes a new field named **Select the orientation type.** This option allows you to choose the orientation of the organizational chart by selecting the **position of the root node**.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/acXwRijOj1PnFjIk5Ckr" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

The following options are available:&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/inDeW7c87sJYcmVv6iwy" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

For example, when the **Left** option is selected, the organizational chart looks like this:

<figure><img src="/files/Xwof1AXoCJrB16QyIlJo" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. **Cross-site configuration** is now supported. When configuring the **Filters and properties setup** section, you need to enter the **url of the site where the People directory list is located** (usually, it is the hub site of the intranet), and then select the **People directory list** from the drop-down menu.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/RDIripTwYNn5lm088BBz" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

## Pop-up

Thanks to a recent update, the Pop-up web part works with Viva Connections. Previously, Pop-up was visibile only if you accessed the intranet via web, and not via Teams, because the component relied on cookies (which are not available on Teams) to function properly. Now, **pop-up visualizations by users are recorded by a SharePoint list called Popup users**. This list should be set up so that all visitors have **contribute permissions**.

## Videos

A new section named **Playback settings** has been added to the property pane of the web part. It allows you to **activate the autoplay feature**, which is now **disabled by default**.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/v4Cr0Fq1OlYRWwAtmI2Q" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>


# Version 2.1

Here you can find the changes included in this release.

## Advanced Search

In the latest version of the component, it is possible to **set the entire hub as the source for documents, pages, and news**. By enabling the corresponding option, the component can search for documents, pages, and news across all sites connected to the hub.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/eBXhCY6k5Tyg4Qq94LI2" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

## Bulletin Boards

Thanks to a new web part property, you can customize the **text of the button** that allows users to add posts. If you leave this field empty, the text "Add a post" will be displayed.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/hIchj5npvuCTXut1tpjL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

## Company Apps

It is now possible to choose between two layouts: **Default** and **List**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/xlun71BVX5q89XLsjNn1" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

The **new List layout** has been added as an alternative to the **already existing Default layou**t. It displays apps in the form of a list:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/XxkI4NC5zmSE8fQb0YmL" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

If the **List** view is selected in the **View settings**, the following specific fields are included in the **General settings**:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/ci0DLbzYIaZLWoQ5c2Cw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* You can **set the height of the web part**. If you enable this option, an additional field will allow you to enter the height of the web part in pixels.
* You can choose whether the **Favorites section** will be **expanded** by default. If you don't enable this setting, the section will be collapsed by default.
* You can choose whether the **Personal apps section** will be **expanded** by default. If you don't enable this setting, the section will be collapsed by default.
* You can choose whether **all other categories** will be **expanded** by default. If you don't enable this setting, all sections will be collapsed by default.

## Company Documents

The following fields have been added to the **General settings**:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/UtO9Q1vA8T0n1gNy3EE0" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Now, you can choose the **number of documents to load**.
* You can also decide whether to **display the search bar at the top or on the side**. If you choose to display it **on the side**, **all filters will be hidden**. This feature allows for a cleaner layout if the web part is used in a narrow section:&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/4yRmtucOmsrZULA5CWtH" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Then, you can customize the **text of the** **Load more** button. If you leave this field blank, the default text ("Load more") will be displayed.
* You can also decide whether the **Load more** button should simply **load more documents** or **take you to a different page**. If you choose the latter option, two additional fields will be activated: use them to **enter the page URL** and decide whether to **open the link on a new page or the current page**.
* Finally, you can choose **audiences** by selecting one or more **AD groups** from a drop-down menu.

## Event Calendar

1. The default value of the label introducing upcoming events has been changed to **"Next events"**. This label is now displayed in the **Compact** layout as well.
2. Thanks to a newly added web part property, **the Next events label can be customized**. This applies to **all layouts**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/aP8eMZJ0nDWgfQ5tjUyc" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/32fmr03asP7AIxDvDxMP" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/zOo76WBaeCz4BRHG9jlZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<figure><img src="/files/t6jPAKxFOhfJkvr5f5Yw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

3. Now, Event Calendar can display events from **multiple Events lists**. The **Source Settings** section in the property pane has been updated as follows:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/G8pNHWkdnQHoFzAdXS4H" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* You need to click on **Configure** to configure one or more Events lists.&#x20;

<figure><img src="/files/119GdeobnTfyXsCqu1kw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* Then, you need to complete the configuration pane as follows:\
  \- Enter the **URL** **of the site** where the Events list is located. \
  \- Enter the **list URL in the required format (/sites/site/Lists/list,** e.g., /sites/iai-demo-saas/Lists/Events). The Events list of the current site is added by default. \
  \- To add more lists, click the **+** symbol on the right and repeat the same steps. \
  \- When the configuration is complete, click **Save**.
* **Do you want to show the site name?** You can decide whether the web part will display the source site name. The screenshot below offers an example.
* **Do you want to show the list name?** You can decide whether the web part will display the source list name. The screenshot below offers an example.

<figure><img src="/files/mqhjllAZQbKtfJvc7ajj" alt=""><figcaption><p>INTRANET is the source site. Events is the source list.</p></figcaption></figure>

## Informative Buttons

Two web part properties have been added to **link a URL to the button**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/oq7xs9WVebQPi1vt1ZvH" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Button url**: here you can copy and paste an internal or external link. Users will simply need to click the button to access the link and explore content.
* **Open on a new tab**: thanks to this option, you can choose whether to open the link on the same tab or a new tab.

It is still possible to insert a hyperlink into the text of the back button.

## My Profile

Thanks to a newly added section, you can **customize the label of the buttons** used to add information.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/7se9d5IJ70zTrSk9iSBQ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

## News Announcements

1. Two properties have been added to the **General settings**:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/xCEJEQJHYjuQ0zhwMUmn" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Invert title and content**: thanks to this property, you can invert the position of the news title and content. The default option is No: in this case, you have the news content on the first line of the preview and the news title on the second line. If you select Yes, the position of these two elements will be inverted, with the title on the first line and the content underneath.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/jBhgQHFrezXbQp9HsIoB" alt=""><figcaption><p>Invert title and content: No (default option)</p></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/XlCX7FsVjHy53gcQ3ddZ" alt=""><figcaption><p>Invert title and content: Yes</p></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Hide date**: this property allows you to **hide the news publication date** from the web part.

2. Thanks to a newly added property in the **News source settings**, you can choose to display the **name of the source site** in the web part.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/gDw32Gj9uL0zufIiA86d" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

## News Archive

Thanks to a new option in the **General settings**, you can **filter** the news archive by selecting a **specific time range**. Enable this setting and choose the desired time frame.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/aArmrFvoOz9snptMyESa" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

## People Directory

It is now possible to exclude specific users from the synchronization by using a **custom field in the SharePoint list**. The field must be of the **Yes/No** type (default value: **No**) and have the internal name **"IAIPDDisableSync"**.

This feature is useful for a **SharePoint list synchronized with Active Directory (AD) that also allows manually added users**. These manually added users **will not be removed during the synchronization process**.

Manually added users might not exist in Entra ID and therefore won’t have a **User Principal Name**. The User Principal Name field is a key for managing **detail links**, such as opening a specific user’s profile through the search component. Therefore, when manually adding a user to the **People directory** list, it is important to provide a value for this field, such as **name.surname**.&#x20;

> For example, if you add Marco Rossi to the list and he does not exist in Entra ID, you can type **marco.rossi** in the **User Principal Name** field. This ensures the user's detail page is opened correctly.

## RSS Feed

It is now possible to choose between **two layouts**:&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/JATnwKnmo6IOopLi9jWr" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* The **Default** layout consists of a **list** of articles.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/7Nya7S7wKag9M44dU0Tu" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* The **Carousel** layout consists of a **slider** characterized by a graphic style similar to that of [**Highlights**](https://docs.intranet.ai/sharepoint-intranet/configurations/highlights). If you select this layout, you can choose whether to set up **automatic sliding**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/XJ7lYgEoRTVxLYSebXJd" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

## Teams push notifications

Thanks to a recent update, it is now possible to customize the message users receive in the Teams chat when a news post or an event is published. The default text is "\[Bot Name] sent a card". Instead of "Sent a card", you can have a **custom message**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/hugYcmsTAfJRQHt3RPJh" alt="" width="375"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

## Welcome Box

1. Thanks to a new section in the property pane, you can customize the text of the **welcome message**. Three placeholders are supported:&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/0Kk3Yo3WQAwT7qQ3NivQ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **{givenName}**: the web part replaces this placeholder with the user's name;
* **{surname}**: the web part replaces this placeholder with the user's surname;
* **{welcomeText}**: the web part replaces this placeholder with a localized text which changes according to the current time:\
  \- From 6 AM to 1PM: "Good morning"\
  \- From 1PM to 6PM: "Good afternoon"\
  \- From 6PM to 6AM: "Good evening"

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/BIP5nlGbYRRtKhE0dVGT" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% hint style="info" %}
The placeholder {welcomeText} starts with an uppercase letter if it is placed at the beginning of the text or after a period; otherwise, it is all lowercase.
{% endhint %}

You can choose whether to include all placeholders or select just one or two. If you leave this field blank, Welcome Box will only show the user's name and surname, which is the default behaviour of the web part.

2. Thanks to a new web part property, you can choose to **not show Welcome Box on mobile devices**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/1M5yILReqxM8jl3roKNJ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>


# Version 2.2

Here you can find the changes included in this release.

## Company Documents

The following field has been added to the **Display Settings:**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/jOJJDAJkvpmr5frkna5E" alt="" width="299"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* When a new document is uploaded, it will automatically display a **"New" tag** to indicate its recent addition. You can also **customize this tag's label** by entering your preferred text in the **Custom "New" Tag Text** box. If no custom text is entered, the default "New" label will be used.

The following field has been added to the **Filters** **Settings:**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/IuLvQW3motbeImem1RSn" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/lUkWAPXQEJ4eG72sJ6Af" alt="" width="284"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Added option for Filter persistency**. This feature is available both in the web part properties and in the filter configurator. When a user selects a filter configured as Persistent within the web part settings, that filter will be stored for the individual user. As a result, if the user navigates away from the page and later returns to the Documents web part, the previously selected persistent filters will be automatically reapplied.

The following field has been added to the **General Settings**:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/GnHcZdkueaACf9elNEVi" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Enter the title for the favorites filter**: you can enter a custom title for your Favorites filter label.
* **Enter a custom title for "Your favorites"**: you can enter a custom title for the "Your favorites" section inside the Favorites filter.

## Company Documents with Folders

The following field has been added to the **Display Settings:**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/wnXrA4ajBBbPM3bsVu17" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Thanks to a new webpart property, when a new document is uploaded, it will automatically display a **"New" tag** to highlight its recent addition. You can also **customize the label of this tag** by entering your preferred text in the **Enter text for the "new" Tag** box. If no custom text is entered, the default "New" label will be used.

## My Favorites

Two news properties have been added:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/HDLUdNts43AYhnIqS5Fg" alt="" width="291"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Maximum number of items per tab**: A generic property has been introduced to set the maximum number of items displayed in each tab. This value is shared across all tabs and cannot be customized individually.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/6M8SdyFE9XYtnDw5hEYX" alt="" width="285"><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Custom "Load More" button behavior:** It is now possible to configure the "Load More" button to redirect to a specific link. Additionally, the button text can be customized. These settings are available individually for each tab.

## Highlights

The following properties has been added to the **Display Settings:**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/iKx0PAcJzOZMoHelQ3E8" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Enable the "New" tag:** you can choose to activate the dispaly of the **"new" tag**. By default, it will not be visible.
* **Insert the "new" tag label**: it is possible to **customize the label of this tag**. You just need to type the name you would like to use in the **"Insert the "new" tag label"** box. If no custom text is entered, the default "New" label will be used.
* **Days after pubblication date in wich the tag "new" remains visible:** you can define the number of days the "New" tag will stay visible after the content is published.

## News Announcements

The following field has been added to the **Display Settings:**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/iKx0PAcJzOZMoHelQ3E8" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Enable the "New" tag:** you can choose to activate the display of the **"new" tag**. By default, it will not be visible.
* **Insert the "new" tag label**: it is possible to **customize the label of this tag**. You just need to type the name you would like to use in the **"Insert the "new" tag label"** box. If no custom text is entered, the default "New" label will be used.
* **Days after publication date in wich the tag "new" remains visible:** you can define the number of days the "New" tag will stay visible after the content is published.

## News Archive

The following field has been added to the **Display Settings:**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/iKx0PAcJzOZMoHelQ3E8" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Enable the "New" tag:** you can choose to activate the display of the **"new" tag**. By default, it will not be visible.
* **Insert the "new" tag label**: it is possible to **customize the label of this tag**. You just need to type the name you would like to use in the **"Insert the "new" tag label"** box. If no custom text is entered, the default "New" label will be used.
* **Days after publication date in wich the tag "new" remains visible:** you can define the number of days the "New" tag will stay visible after the content is published.

The following field has been added to the **General Settings**:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/GnHcZdkueaACf9elNEVi" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Enter the title for the favorites filter**: you can enter a custom title for your Favorites filter label.
* **Enter a custom title for "Your favorites"**: you can enter a custom title for the "Your favorites" section inside the Favorites filter.

## Company News

The following field has been added to the **Display Settings:**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/iKx0PAcJzOZMoHelQ3E8" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Enable the "New" tag:** you can choose to activate the display of the **"new" tag**. By default, it will not be visible.
* **Insert the "new" tag label**: it is possible to **customize the label of this tag**. You just need to type the name you would like to use in the **"Insert the "new" tag label"** box. If no custom text is entered, the default "New" label will be used.
* **Days after publication date in wich the tag "new" remains visible:** you can define the number of days the "New" tag will stay visible after the content is published.

## Videos

The following fields have been added to the **Company Media List**:

<figure><img src="/files/hVsDHKYmNsJESnzC0FoB" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Release Date**: you can enter the video's release date.
* **Order**: you can enter the order number you want to assign to your video.

Additionally, the following property has been added to the **General Settings**:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Z6hddpHz4CgIVECkMkE2" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Select the video sorting criteria**: you can **choose the order criterion** with which to display the videos. The "**Creation**" criterion orders the videos according to the creation date of the item, while the "**Order**" criterion orders the videos according to the order number entered in the list.

## Intranet Tour

The following property has been added to the **Layout Settings**:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/u7OrUNsuBy9rTIANvrUv" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Do you want to avoid automatic launch on first load?**: You now have the possibility to to **disable the automatic tour loading.** If set to 'Yes', the tour will only be displayed when its button is clicked


# Version 2.3

Here you can find the changes included in this release.

## Welcome Box

A new feature called **Notification Icon** has been added, which allows you to access a **notification area containing** all the content published in a certain **time interval**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/9C3XehL2MuvHDAzbNt0H" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<figure><img src="/files/w5TXTJy6BEjF2oxNlxgJ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

As a result, the **Data sources** and **Notification icon settings fields** have been added.

You can configure the notification area data in the **Data Sources field**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/gS6VheFJPHe1oeoYuf4c" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Enter the **site URL** where the **last access list** is.
* Choose the **last access list** from the drop-down menu.
* To configure data sources for your notification area, click on **Configure data sources** and complete the panel as follows:

<figure><img src="/files/N4QU4RYa4puTywwHMDHw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* Enter the **absolute URL** of the site where **the list** you are interested in is located.
* **Enter list URL**: enter the list URL respecting the **/sites/site/Lists/list format**. For **documents**, you can enter just the **document library name**.
* Click to **sort items** by **creation** date (**uncheck**) or **last change** date (**check**).
* Select the **list data type** you want to visualize between **News**, **Documents**, **Events**, **Pages**, **Notice Board** and **Engagement Board**.
* Insert the **URL** where the **notice board page** is only if 'Notice Board' data type was chosen.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/yqQiyuFEx9aprNEe40ni" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Insert the site **URL** where the **My Profile** **list** is.
* Choose the **My Profile** **list** from the drop-down menu.

You can configure notification settings in the Notification Icon Settings field.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/zQRIfD9fChLIGxKSNaSz" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Show notification icon**: if you enable this option, the **notification icon** will be **displayed**.
* **Show content X days before last login**: you can choose the number of **days** before **your last login** to the intranet in which the **contents** were published. The content will be displayed in the first tab of the notification area.
* **Show content in the last X days**: you can choose the **number of days** within which the **content is published**. The content will be displayed in the second tab of the notification area.
* **Open link in a new tab**: if you enable this option, the link to the content will open in a new tab, otherwise it will open on the current page.
* **Hide untranslated news**: on translated pages, by default the web part also shows news that hasn't been translated. This option allows you to display only the news articles that have been translated into the language of the page. If you disable this option, untranslated news will also be visible, appearing in their original language if a translation is not available
* **Filter news by audience**: if you enable this option, news will be filtered by audience.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/uAGEKB4YfR93MLBbekx6" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Show the author**: by enabling this property, the authors of the contents will be displayed.
* **Show the date**: by enabling this property, content dates will be shown.

{% hint style="info" %}
This On/Off command will allow you to have the news filtered by audience: if you put a specific Security AD Group in Audience property of the news, this will be proposed to the users inside that specific group. If you leave this property blank, the news will be visible for everybody. If you want to discover more about SharePoint audience feature, [click here](https://support.microsoft.com/en-au/office/target-content-to-a-specific-audience-on-a-sharepoint-site-68113d1b-be99-4d4c-a61c-73b087f48a81).
{% endhint %}

* **Hide the first tab**: if you enable this option, the first tab won't be displayed.
* You can **enter the title** of the **first tab**.
* You can **enter the title** of the **second tab**.

## Social Media Posts

A new **Visualization settings field** has been added.

* **Do you want to set the height of the webpart?** This section will allow you to select a personalized height for the webpart. If you decide to keep this field on No, the webpart will adapt this size to the amount of posts uploaded to the dedicated list.

![](https://docs.intranet.ai/~gitbook/image?url=https%3A%2F%2F2718234637-files.gitbook.io%2F%7E%2Ffiles%2Fv0%2Fb%2Fgitbook-x-prod.appspot.com%2Fo%2Fspaces%252FriXlnuemuParrCf7Uotu%252Fuploads%252FOEsuYDPDprqgq30snht6%252Fimage.png%3Falt%3Dmedia%26token%3D5f60b446-2976-46dc-8fca-91019ceba72f\&width=768\&dpr=3\&quality=100\&sign=cceeb4de\&sv=2)

Once you're done with these configurations, **always remember to click on Republish** to allow the intranet population to see the webpart properly configured.

## Event Calendar

A new "**Events only**" view has been added.

<figure><img src="/files/mDjn3VVh0dIMjovrxxvi" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/0PDQzoqggImH8FDONupZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* To set this view, go to the **Layout settings** and, inside the **Choose the view** field, click the "**Events only**" option.

A new field has been added in **General settings**:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/y8Drh2jgjEnRCMzIwQSU" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Filter by audience**: by enabling this property, events will be filtered by **recipient groups**.

## Disclaimer

A new field has been added in the Configuration list:

<figure><img src="/files/uteMOewGCd2jYaG8ME4h" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Show only in these pages**: you can enter the URLs of the pages where you want the disclaimer to appear. If you leave this field blank, the disclaimer will appear on all pages.

## Company Apps

The following field has been added to the **General Settings**:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/ByMbMuv4Vw281jl2KefN" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Enter the title for the favorites filter**: you can enter a custom title for your Favorites filter label.

## People Directory

The following field has been added to the **General Settings**:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/GnHcZdkueaACf9elNEVi" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Enter the title for the favorites filter**: you can enter a custom title for your Favorites filter label.
* **Enter a custom title for "Your favorites"**: you can enter a custom title for the "Your favorites" section inside the Favorites filter.

## FAQs

The following field has been added to the **General Settings**:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/GnHcZdkueaACf9elNEVi" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Enter the title for the favorites filter**: you can enter a custom title for your Favorites filter label.
* **Enter a custom title for "Your favorites"**: you can enter a custom title for the "Your favorites" section inside the Favorites filter.

## Bulletin boards

The wollowing feature has been added  to the General Settings:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/96F8DLcxDFnLtmSb0gI9" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* You can now customize your disclaimer by **inserting HTML code** in the disclaimer's text field.


# Version 2.4

## Highlights

A new property has been added to the **General settings**:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/5k5FnQtXFLHzLIyTYav8" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

**Hide webpart if there is no result**: by enabling this property, the webpart won't be displayed if there are no news.

## Engagement Board

A new property has been added to the **List settings**:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/fgTsxK7cWGtGWNKcoBfK" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* You can now decide to **show or not to show** the **Category** field when adding a new item.

## Event calendar

A new property has been added to the **General Settings**:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/tQHG6dpYwcLKl1ZommQ0" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Filter by audience**: by enabling this property, events will be filtered by recipient groups.

## Quotes

A new property has been added to the Customization Settings:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/2zFtYZ8rFiaLZQWFJnlm" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Through this property, you can set the **width of the image.**

## Company News

A new **"Filters" visualization mode** has been added. This view allows you to filter the news through a series of filters and, using buttons, to be able to select the news you want to view each time.&#x20;

As a result, a new "**Filter view**" property has been added inside the **Layout settings** and&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Q9OehvruqVKWjkhFeKgO" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

A new **Filters mode settings** has been added inside the webpart configuration settings:

<div align="left"><img src="https://docs.intranet.ai/~gitbook/image?url=https%3A%2F%2F2718234637-files.gitbook.io%2F%7E%2Ffiles%2Fv0%2Fb%2Fgitbook-x-prod.appspot.com%2Fo%2Fspaces%252FriXlnuemuParrCf7Uotu%252Fuploads%252FYMbv7MhL0HdWdpWnQ3Zz%252FNews%2520filter%2520mode%2520settings.png%3Falt%3Dmedia%26token%3D22af7fc7-ddfe-4a20-b370-e654ecaad497&#x26;width=768&#x26;dpr=3&#x26;quality=100&#x26;sign=1510edad&#x26;sv=2" alt="" height="719" width="324"></div>

* Filter term store id: enter the term store ID of the filter group you want to apply.
* **Open filter configurator**: these settings let you define which tag you want to filter news.

<figure><img src="/files/hv7v2wWkejqXBQzPfl7o" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* In the first column, write: **owstaxId** + the **name of the column** used to assign metadata to the news.
* In the second column, enter the unique **id of the managed property term se**t. To do this, click here to go to the Term store and find the id of the term set.
  * Once you've finished, click on Save.
* **Choose the filters to visualize**: by opening this field, you can select the filters you want to display from those you set in the previous field.

<figure><img src="/files/rIQP5jhrSRMv9zeeOhEC" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* **Enable pagination**: by choosing this option, the various news items can be browsed using a slider, otherwise they will all appear in the same section.
* **Choose the news limit**: indicate the maximum number of news you want to display.
* **Show "Read more" button**: by enabling this option, a "show more" button will appear under each news item, which will allow you to access the individual news item's page so you can read it better.
* You can type a **custom title** for the "**View all**" link.

<img src="https://docs.intranet.ai/~gitbook/image?url=https%3A%2F%2F2718234637-files.gitbook.io%2F%7E%2Ffiles%2Fv0%2Fb%2Fgitbook-x-prod.appspot.com%2Fo%2Fspaces%252FriXlnuemuParrCf7Uotu%252Fuploads%252FR4fMSdheOTBKbAWcUJF5%252Fnews-filters-settings-2.png%3Falt%3Dmedia%26token%3D32dc0a56-f6bf-44a2-b463-19b70b6a1291&#x26;width=768&#x26;dpr=3&#x26;quality=100&#x26;sign=9eba5e02&#x26;sv=2" alt="" height="163" width="394">

* **Do you want to filter news by audience?** If you **enable** this option, news will be visible only to the targeted groups. If you **disable** it, all news will be accessible to everyone within the Intranet, regardless of their group or role.
* **Hide untranslated news**: on translated pages, by default the web part also shows news that hasn't been translated. This option allows you to display only the news articles that have been translated into the language of the page. If you **disable** this option, untranslated news will also be visible, appearing in their original language if a translation is not available.


# Version 2.5

## Welcome box

A new feature has been added. The web part now offers a profile completion percentage bar. This is based on the fields populated in the My Profile web part. Depending on the number of populated fields, the bar will indicate the percentage of your profile completion.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/MPhXODm6qvOovQ6svkCP" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

As a result, these new properties had been added to the Profile settings:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/1trnCCBIFY99wCfLtkGO" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Choose sections to be shown**: from the dropdown menu, choose the My Profile fields you want to use for the percentage bar. The percentage will be calculated based on the fields you select from this list.
* Choose to **show/not to show** the profile completion **percentage bar**.
* Choose to **show/not to show** profile completion **percentage in numeric values.**
* **Use custom measurements:** by enabling this option, you can choose the percentage bar height and width. For a better viewing, 5-15px difference between the 2 is recommended.

## Company documents with folders

### A new Description Field

* Within each document item, the ability to insert a **description field** within the **document library properties** has been added. If this field is populated, the item's description will be displayed within the item.

<figure><img src="/files/27t0ZhrH4063bZ9VPGJy" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/gVjGcsD6LGKjhuif5KcM" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* In order ton display the description field, two new fields had been added to **Data sources** settings:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/lGdL5ztyxnJUY1t2POnx" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Choose the field containing the description**: enter the **managed property** related to your list's Description field in order to display the description.
* **Enter the internal field name used for the description**: choose the item corresponding to the **Description** field from the dropdown options.

In order to **add a description to a document item**, follow these steps:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/ztQM3ns6vfZJfUt5FTh4" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Go to the settings of the single item and click on **Details.**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/BFWJfxKoYMRzyAwDgAr4" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Inside the details properties, type the description of the item inside the Description field of your document library.

### A new Date Filter

A new **date filter** has been added. This filter allows you to **set a time range** that will only display documents within the selected time frame. The configuration fields can be "**created date**" or "**last modified date**." As a result, a new field "configure date filters" has been added to the Filters Settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/bs5odnkUEl9u3URVHelu" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* To configure date filters, click on the configure fields button under the "Configure date filters" section. A collection data panel will be displayed:

<figure><img src="/files/uNc6GZNZVmwMRcIFWI9D" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* Enter the **managed property** for the date criterium you want to apply. If you want to filter documents by the **last modified date**, enter "**Write"**, if you want to filter documents by the **creation date**, enter "**Created"**.
* Enter a **custom** title for the **"From" label**.
* Enter a **custom** title for the **"To" label**.
* Enter a **custom** label for the **filter name**.
* Choose if you want to **show/not to show** the filter.
* Choose whether or not you want the **accordion containing the calendar** for setting the date to be **open by default** when the page opens.
* Once you have configured the fields, **save** your changes.

<figure><img src="/files/gSES4CVOGBuoFAPHYL4i" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

## Company documents

### A new Description Field

* Within each document item, the ability to insert a **description field** within the **document library properties** has been added. If this field is populated, the item's description will be displayed within the item.

<figure><img src="/files/27t0ZhrH4063bZ9VPGJy" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/gVjGcsD6LGKjhuif5KcM" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* In order ton display the description field, a new field had been added to **Data sources** settings:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/WeSOUXVZLvY90X5PhOnw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Choose the field containing the description: enter the **managed property** related to your list's Description field in order to display the description.

To **retrieve the value** of the **managed property** you want to enter, follow these steps:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/UVeFzx1nN2gmBwYtTm22" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Open **Settings** and go to **Site contents.**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/YmB05fK7Yg75TB15pn1X" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Once you arrive at Site Contents, click on the **Site settings** button located at the top right of the page.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/naQRyTxYgbjLjWuEW3F8" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Inside site settings, find and click on the **Schema** item found within the **Search subsection**.

<figure><img src="/files/XQI0RHvyAzMqJXVALjWy" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* In the **Managed property search bar**, **type the name** you gave to the list field containing the items' descriptions and click the green arrow to search the results. The name of the managed property will appear, which you must enter in the field. Typically, a managed property is written something like ***field name*****OWSText**.

In order to **add a description to a document item**, follow these steps:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/ztQM3ns6vfZJfUt5FTh4" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Go to the settings of the single item and click on **Details.**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/BFWJfxKoYMRzyAwDgAr4" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Inside the details properties, type the description of the item inside the Description field of your document library.

### A new Date Filter

A new **date filter** has been added. This filter allows you to **set a time range** that will only display documents within the selected time frame. The configuration fields can be "**created date**" or "**last modified date**." As a result, a new field "configure date filters" has been added to the Filters Settings.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/bs5odnkUEl9u3URVHelu" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* To configure date filters, click on the configure fields button under the "Configure date filters" section. A collection data panel will be displayed:

<figure><img src="/files/uNc6GZNZVmwMRcIFWI9D" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* Enter the **managed property** for the date criterium you want to apply. If you want to filter documents by the **last modified date**, enter "**Write"**, if you want to filter documents by the **creation date**, enter "**Created"**.
* Enter a **custom** title for the **"From" label**.
* Enter a **custom** title for the **"To" label**.
* Enter a **custom** label for the **filter name**.
* Choose if you want to **show/not to show** the filter.
* Choose whether or not you want the **accordion containing the calendar** for setting the date to be **open by default** when the page opens.
* Once you have configured the fields, **save** your changes.

<figure><img src="/files/gSES4CVOGBuoFAPHYL4i" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>


# Introduction

Acknowledgement is the intranet.ai tool for requesting confirmation of content consultation, ensuring colleagues read key documents, pages, and news on the intranet.

Our Acknowledgement tool simplifies internal communication and content management, helping you **distribute the most important documents, pages, and news while tracking their consultation**. Thanks to this component, you can **ensure that your colleagues read fundamental documentation and key updates**.

The tool allows you to send an **email notification** directly from a document library, providing colleagues with quick access to the **documents** to be read. Additionally, by inserting the component within a **page** or **news article**, you can request confirmation of their consultation. Users, in turn, will be able to **confirm** that they have viewed a document or a page by pressing a **dedicated button**.

All confirmation data—whether related to documents or pages—are consolidated into a single **Power BI report**, enabling **real-time monitoring** and a **comprehensive overview of consultation activities**.

In summary, our component offers a simple and effective way to ensure that employees review the procedures, guidelines, and key updates they need for their daily activities.

{% hint style="info" %}
Explore the **advantages** of Intranet.ai **Acknowledgement** by [**clicking here**](https://intranet.ai/features/document-acknowledgement/) to learn more.
{% endhint %}


# Hosting options

This page provides information about the available hosting options.

First of all, Acknowledgement will be installed in your Microsoft 365 tenant. The tool is based on an **SQL database** where acknowledgement data is stored.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
The database costs **€4.50** **per month** for 2GB of storage, which is sufficient for small businesses. Larger companies may require more storage, in which case the cost increases to €13.60 per month.
{% endhint %}

Regarding the available hosting options, the tool can be installed in **SaaS** or **self-hosted** mode.

### SaaS

To install the SQL databas&#x65;**,** an **Azure subscription is required**. SaaS customers can choose between two options:

* **If you already have an active Azure subscription** and would like to use it, we will ask you to create a **Resource Group** for the database and grant us **Contributor** permissions. These permissions are needed to access the subscription and install the database.
* **If you don’t have an Azure subscription**, we can provide one for yo&#x75;**.** In this case, we will activate a **new pay-as-you-go Azure subscription**. After that, our technical specialist will contact you to obtain access and install the database. Specifically, our specialist will need to work with someone who has a **Global Administrator** role to assign **our account** as the **owner** of the subscription.

### Self-hosted

In the case of the self-hosted setup, we can generally proceed autonomously with the installation of the application and the database. We will leverage the same **Azure subscription** and the existing **resource group** already used for the other **intranet.ai resources**. We will contact you in case any specific actions are required from your side.


# Requirements

This page specifies the necessary requirements for setting up the Acknowledgement system.

To set up the Acknowledgement system, **the following resources are needed**:

1. [An Azure Subscription to host the SQL database;](#id-1.-azure-subscription)
2. [A dedicated Resource Group;](#id-2.-resource-group)
3. [Registration of the Microsoft.Sql provider in the relevant subscription;](#id-3.-azure-provider)
4. [The Microsoft Graph Mail.Send permission for email notifications;](#id-4.-permission-to-send-email-notifications)
5. [A mail-enabled service account;](#id-5.-mail-enabled-service-account)
6. [A security group to manage access to the Power BI report](#id-6.-security-group-for-power-bi-report-data-access).

Further details are provided in the sections below.

### 1. Azure Subscription

An Azure subscription is required to host the **SQL database** for the tool.

In SaaS mode:&#x20;

* The Customer can use an existing Azure subscription.
* Alternatively, a resold Azure subscription can be provided by intranet.ai.

In self-hosted mode:&#x20;

* The installation is performed on an Azure subscription already in use for the other intranet.ai resources.

Please refer to the [Hosting options](https://docs.intranet.ai/acknowledgement/hosting-options) section for further details.

### 2. Resource Group

A dedicated Resource Group is required.&#x20;

In SaaS mode:&#x20;

* The Resource Group is usually created by the Customer within the dedicated Azure subscription. The **Contributor** role needs to be assigned to the intranet.ai service account on the Resource Group.

In self-hosted mode:

* The Resource Group already exists.

Please refer to the [Hosting options](https://docs.intranet.ai/acknowledgement/hosting-options) section for further details.

### 3. Azure Provider

The **Microsoft.Sql** provider must be registered in the subscription associated with the Resource Group.

### 4. Permission to Send Email Notifications

The **Mail.Send** application permission for **Graph** is required.

In SaaS mode:

* The permission should be configured on the **intranet.ai** app registration.

In self-hosted mode:

* The permission should be configured on the **intranet.ai-managed** app registration.

### 5. Mail-Enabled Service Account

A mail-enabled service account is needed to send **acknowledgment request emails**. This user will appear as the **sender** of such emails. It can be an existing account, or an account created specifically for this purpose.

### 6. Security Group for Power BI Report Data Access

Access to the **Power BI report** is managed through a security group.

The group can be **created by intranet.ai**. In this case:

* **Permission to create security groups** is required.
* The **list of users** to be included should be provided to intranet.ai.

The group is usually named Acknowledgement Report Readers.

Alternatively, the group can be **created by the Customer**, who will then **share the group name** with intranet.ai.

In both cases, **the customer can independently manage the group at any time**, adding or removing members as needed.


# Installation

Here you can find some useful information about the installation process and post-installation actions.

Please read carefully the following topics:

* [Installation process](https://docs.intranet.ai/acknowledgement/installation/installation-process)
* [Actions after the installation](https://docs.intranet.ai/acknowledgement/installation/actions-after-the-installation)


# Installation process

This section describes the main steps of the installation process.

The installation of our Acknowledgement tool involves the following steps:

1. The Customer completes the [requirements](https://docs.intranet.ai/acknowledgement/requirements) by themselves, or with support from intranet.ai's technical specialists.
2. The Customer sends the necessary information to the intranet.ai team.
3. The intranet.ai team sets up the SQL database, installs the components on the Customer's intranet, configures the ["Acknowledgement"](https://docs.intranet.ai/acknowledgement/features/acknowledgement-for-documents#create-the-acknowledgement-page) page on the Customer's intranet, and configures the Power BI report.


# Actions following the installation

This section describes the activities that follow the installation.

After the installation, the following activities take place:&#x20;

* The intranet.ai team arranges a recorded training session to show the Customer how the tool works.
* After the training session, the intranet.ai team shares the meeting recording and the Power BI report.


# Features

This section consists of two subpages where the features of Acknowledgement are explained in detail.


# Acknowledgement for documents

This page explains how to request confirmation of document consultation.

With the **Acknowledgement** component, you can request confirmation of **document** consultation, ensuring that selected users acknowledge important documents. In this section, you will learn how to send notifications from a document library, integrate the Acknowledgement tool with the document sections of the intranet, and track users' acknowledgements through the reporting system.

***

## Send documents and request a**cknowledgement**

When the tool is installed, the **Acknowledgement command** is added to the actions available in a document library. With this action, you can email employees to inform them that one or more documents should be read. The Acknowledgement button **appears when one or more documents are selected**. So, the first steps you need to take are as follows:

* Click on the **gear icon** at the top right of the page, and then on **Site contents**.
* Select a **document library**.
* Select **one or more files** and click on **Acknowledgement**.

<figure><img src="/files/z6x79yLd9lcWeB33mlUk" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/I32jcjC3fe9b2BJgedHF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% hint style="info" %}
The following **file formats** are supported: .pdf, .png, .jpg, .jpeg, .mp3, .mp4, .docx, .xlsx, .pptx.
{% endhint %}

After clicking the **Acknowledgement** button, you'll see the following panel:&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/1HGvlCwJKT1SVksktYyU" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Here, you can **select one or more individual users or groups**. The following group types are supported:

* **Microsoft 365 groups**;
* **Mail-enabled security groups**;
* **Distribution groups (even with guest users)**.

If you need to write additional comments or you want to customize the message, use the **Additional email message** box. Then, you have two options:&#x20;

* If you click the **Send email** button, you will send an email to the selected users, inviting them to open the document and confirm acknowledgement.
* If you click the **Generate links** button, you will generate a link to open the document through the “Acknowledgement” page [(see below)](#the-acknowledgement-page).

### Send email

If you click on **Send email**, a confirmation message appears informing you that the acknowledgement request has been sent successfully.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/5lWfgSJ5nRU5UEA5jyIh" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

The selected users will receive an **email** of this kind:&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/VSrgTN48BOCDzaovNAmi" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

The email features the **title of the document** and a **button** to open it. Clicking on **Open and confirm** takes the user to the **“Acknowledgement” page**., i.e., a page where the **Acknowledgement web part** is configured. To learn how to configure the Acknowledgement web part, please refer to the [Create the "Acknowledgement" page](#create-the-acknowledgement-page) section.

{% hint style="info" %}
The screenshot above shows the default template, featuring a black background, white text, and a few icons. A simpler version, shown in the screenshot below, is also available. This alternative was developed to ensure that Acknowledgement is supported by most email services.&#x20;

If you prefer the simpler template, please contact Intranet.ai specialists, and they will configure the tool accordingly.
{% endhint %}

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Kw7vf7PCFuPrkgoQWhzp" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### Generate links

Clicking **Generate links** creates a link to open the document via the “Acknowledgement” page. This allows you to share the document through other channels (e.g., Teams) or include the link in a news post or intranet page. Simply click **Copy** to copy the link and use it as needed.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/ZqQypgPC9iRmKmEtYqng" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### Modify the user selection

You can view the users and/or groups already selected for a file by selecting the file and clicking the **Acknowledgement** button.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/mZQpXCOEnScJLXzgGDyo" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

If needed, **you can modify your selection by adding or removing users/groups**.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/BRqltApgIuO4TcXOfIlJ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

If you add new users or groups, those already selected will not receive a new notification. If you remove a user or group, the report will update accordingly, removing the related data.

### The “Acknowledgement” page

Clicking the **Open and Confirm** button in the email or the link generated via the **Generate links** option directs the user to the **"Acknowledgement" page**. On this page, the user can view the document and confirm that they have read it. In particular, the page features two buttons:

* By clicking the **Acknowledgement** button, the user can confirm that they have read the content;
* By clicking the **Acknowledgement and download** button, the user can download the document besides confirming that they have read it.

These buttons can be activated or deactivated when configuring the Acknowledgement web part. See the [Create the "Acknowledgement" page ](#create-the-acknowledgement-page)section to learn more.

<figure><img src="/files/e00xZPlvsY84YMHE1M2U" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

When the user confirms acknowledgement, the following **pop-up** appears:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/PwbXBsFiWOAo1zxh4KzV" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

And the “Acknowledgement” page is updated as follows:

<figure><img src="/files/CY5K6prmMfieUkisye6L" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Integration with Company Documents and Company Documents with Folders

You can configure the [Company Documents ](https://docs.intranet.ai/intranet-sharepoint/configurations/company-documents)and [Company Documents with Folders](https://docs.intranet.ai/intranet-sharepoint/configurations/company-documents-with-folders) web parts in order to integrate them with the Acknowledgement system. This way, **when the user clicks on a file, they will access the “Acknowledgement” page**. There, they will be able to confirm that they have viewed the content. This configuration is carried out in the web part property pane, specifically in the **Document settings** section. This section includes the following field:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/ttVaJJJyytXNAIKwh7NZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Here, you need to **enter the URL of the “Acknowledgement” page**.&#x20;

> For example: <https://intranetai.sharepoint.com/sites/intranetai/SitePages/SystemPages/Acknowledgement.aspx>

This way, **all the documents** displayed in the web part **will be opened via the “Acknowledgement” page**.

***

## Create the “Acknowledgement” page

To build the “Acknowledgement” page, first of all you need to **create a new page**. To do so, take the following steps:

* Click on the **gear icon** at the top right of the page, and then on **Site contents**.
* Scroll down until you see the **Site Pages** folder and click on it.
* Click on the **SystemPages** folder.
* Click on **New > Site Page** to create an empty page.
* Add a **title** to the page, which can simply be **“Acknowledgement”**, and choose your preferred layout for the title area.

### Add the Acknowledgement web part to the page

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click on **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse below the title area. You will see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="https://docs.intranet.ai/~gitbook/image?url=https%3A%2F%2F2718234637-files.gitbook.io%2F%7E%2Ffiles%2Fv0%2Fb%2Fgitbook-x-prod.appspot.com%2Fo%2Fspaces%252FriXlnuemuParrCf7Uotu%252Fuploads%252FccHplKgXfibd4tktmhas%252Fadvanced-search-2.png%3Falt%3Dmedia%26token%3D7d703967-c3f7-4125-834b-f695362bf90b&#x26;width=40&#x26;dpr=4&#x26;quality=100&#x26;sign=7f44a44ec69ae8b3b4af6d7ed58f0f7704fe7244845ab88822e28b1847b3ee14" alt="" data-size="line">.
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **Acknowledgement** to quickly find and select the Acknowledgement web part.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/qlsALqSgcIR3hHNfi3e6" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click the **Edit** **properties** button on the left of the web part to open the property pane,  which consists of one section: Display Settings. See below for more information on this section.

### Configuration

The configuration pane of the Acknowledgement web part allows you to customize texts and to activate or deactivate buttons and sections.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/1agKwKo4QymwGo7YnlMu" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* The first field allows you to **customize the text of the Acknowledgement button**. If you leave this field blank, the default text will be used, which is “Acknowledgement”.
* With the **Hide Acknowledgement button** option, you can deactivate the Acknowledgement button.
* The third field allows you to **customize the text of the Acknowledgement and download button**. If you leave this field blank, the default text will be used, which is “Acknowledgement and download”.
* With the **Hide Acknowledgement and download button** option, you can deactivate the Acknowledgement and download button.
* Next, you can decide to **hide or show the pdf toolbar**. If you choose **Yes**, the following bar will not be displayed:

<figure><img src="/files/50JaV2dNHbkRr4IqQA7j" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

* You can then **customize the introductory text**. If you leave this field blank, the default text will be used, which is “By clicking on the following action buttons I confirm that I have read this content”.
* The last option allows you to **choose the position of the button section**, which can be either at the top or at the bottom of the page.

<figure><img src="/files/e3BpEuFqBGGeNPvZF5XH" alt=""><figcaption><p>Buttons at the top of the page</p></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/Fqlh1Kj83s9Jr7InQjne" alt=""><figcaption><p>Buttons at the bottom of the page</p></figcaption></figure>

When you have completed the configuration of the web part, click on **Publish**.

{% hint style="info" %}
The “Acknowledgement” page should be created on the main site of your intranet, even if company documents are stored in a subsite.
{% endhint %}

{% hint style="info" %}
The “Acknowledgement” page can be cross-site.
{% endhint %}

***

## Notify users of a new file version

To manage file versions, an additional button, **Notify new version**, is available. When a new version of a file is uploaded, it can be notified to the same users who received the previous version. Simply select the document and click **Notify new version** to send an email notification.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/sqoc5Fy9ODO9JGpdG2oE" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

When you click the **Notify new version** button, the following message appears:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/HS47n4I2uIPIBZ7L2iv0" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

You don't need to select users again: the same users who received the previous version of the file will automatically be notified of the new version. Therefore, you just need to click on **Send email.** When you do so, the following confirmation message appears:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/y8f0jmsOzjc3RHXTCMz9" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

The email explicitly states that it refers to a new version of the file.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/wF0SaohOO8xZHLXKE9gT" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Similarly to what happens when the first email is sent, clicking **Open and confirm** directs the user to the "Acknowledgement" page, where they can confirm the acknowledgement of the new file version.

{% hint style="info" %}
The **Notify new version** button is always visible, even when a new document is selected.
{% endhint %}

***

## Track acknowledgements

Thanks to the **integration with Power BI**, Acknowledgement provides you with a **dynamic report** which offers a detailed overview of the documents shared with this tool. The report consists of **3 pages**:

### Page 1 - Acknowledgement Requests

The first page contains a **comprehensive list of all documents** for which an acknowledgement request has been sent. For each file, the following details are available:

* Document title;
* Link to the document;
* Total number of users requested to acknowledge the document;
* Total number of users who have confirmed acknowledgement;
* Percentage of users who have confirmed acknowledgement;
* Acknowledgement status;
* URL of the document library where the file is stored;
* URL of the site where the file is stored.

<figure><img src="/files/m351tTVhsGRIiLPQbRwH" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Page 2 - Details

The second page provides an **in-depth view of a specific document**. This page is accessible through the **Drill through** function: right-click on a document title in the overview page and select **Drill through** to access additional details.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/fjlB34yopMVZR7VaYLHt" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

This section includes:

1. **Detailed user information**

* Name of the user requested to acknowledge the document
* Country and office location
* Job title
* Department
* Email sent date
* Acknowledgement date (if the user clicked the **Acknowledgement** button)
* Download date (if the user clicked the **Acknowledgement and download** button)
* Latest acknowledged version (the version of the document the user has confirmed reading)
* Document link

<figure><img src="/files/J3Ti5Rgc6kc0Dxgs4N2S" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. A **graph** tracking **acknowledgement over time**

<figure><img src="/files/z9LYUKT00qUeMLynpowq" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

3. A summary section about the **acknowledgement status**

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/mss4kt0spzLkl3feWCwQ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

4. A **filter section** to refine the displayed data

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/hDzpfjs7jbD9Oi2Ut5wj" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

### Page 3 - Complete Data

This page **also** includes **acknowledgement confirmations submitted directly by users through the document pages**. In these cases, no email is sent — the user accesses the document library, clicks on a file, and opens it through the "Acknowledgement" page, where they can confirm they have read the content. To learn more about this feature, refer to the section titled ["Integration with Company Documents and Company Documents with Folders"](https://docs.intranet.ai/acknowledgement/features/acknowledgement-for-documents#integration-with-company-documents-and-company-documents-with-folders).

<figure><img src="/files/nLAoK3Uy9IttmyVsS993" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

A **filter section** is available on this page, too.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/6JUCYLAO7CSYzrTiE9bb" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>


# Acknowledgement for pages and news

This page explains how to request confirmation of consultation for intranet pages and news.

With the **Acknowledgement Pages** component, you can request confirmation of consultation for **intranet pages** and **news**, ensuring that selected users acknowledge important updates. In this section, you will learn how to insert the Acknowledgement Pages component within a page or news article and monitor consultation through the reporting system.

***

## Add the Acknowledgement web part to a SharePoint page or news post

To activate the Acknowledgement function for a page or news article, you need to **insert the Acknowledgement Pages component into the page or news article**. To do so, follow these steps:

* If your page is not already in edit mode, click on **Edit** at the top right of the page.
* Hover your mouse above or below an existing web part and you'll see a line with a circled +, like this: <img src="https://docs.intranet.ai/~gitbook/image?url=https%3A%2F%2F2718234637-files.gitbook.io%2F%7E%2Ffiles%2Fv0%2Fb%2Fgitbook-x-prod.appspot.com%2Fo%2Fspaces%252FriXlnuemuParrCf7Uotu%252Fuploads%252FccHplKgXfibd4tktmhas%252Fadvanced-search-2.png%3Falt%3Dmedia%26token%3D7d703967-c3f7-4125-834b-f695362bf90b&#x26;width=40&#x26;dpr=4&#x26;quality=100&#x26;sign=34b00d6f&#x26;sv=2" alt="" data-size="line">.
* Click on it and, in the web part search box, enter **AcknowledgementPages** to find and select the Acknowledgement Pages web part.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/JDMUqZH26ir7nOk58Oht" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* Click the **Edit properties** button on the left of the web part to open the property pane, which consists of one section: Display Settings. See below for more information on this section.

***

## Configuration

The configuration pane of the Acknowledgement Pages web part allows you to customize texts and to activate or deactivate buttons and sections.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/pF1hRqfXI6sdEU9GzZOg" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* The first settings allows you to **customize the introductory text**. If you leave this field blank, the default text will be used, which is “By clicking on the following action button I confirm that I have read this content”.
* The second setting allows you to **customize the text of the Acknowledgement button**. If you leave this field blank, the default text will be used, which is “Acknowledgement”.
* The third setting allows you to **hide** the **Acknowledgement** button.
* Thanks to the fourth setting, you can choose whether **users** who are **not selected** will see a **message** indicating that **no acknowledgement is required**. By default, this message is hidden. To display it, change the **default option** from **Yes** to **No**.&#x20;

***

## Select users for acknowledgement request

Now, **select the users or groups** who need to confirm they have seen the content. Take the following steps:

* Select **individual users or groups** (**Microsoft 365 groups**, **mail-enabled security groups** and **distribution groups, even with guest users**, are supported).

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/DrPeXVSSoVPvetOqwNTz" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* **Save your selection**. A confirmation message will appear, indicating that the chosen users have been assigned.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/uwJbdXq1aIwlL4hCkSrE" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

* You can **modify the selection** at any time by adding or removing users or groups. The [Power BI report](#track-acknowledgements) will update accordingly.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/R0qrbx2kOM4IO0gSKALt" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Finally, publish or republish the page to make it available to your colleagues.

***

## User Experience

When accessing the page or news article, **selected users will see a button** prompting them to **confirm** they have read the content.

<figure><img src="/files/N1bg7ygWRKWtRTI4a4uk" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Once they click the button, the page will update to display the **acknowledgement date**, confirming that the consultation has been registered.

<figure><img src="/files/kms0zLDfZ8GoHF7OSTdM" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

**Users who were not selected** will experience different behaviors depending on the configuration of the **Hide the message for unsolicited read confirmation?** option.

* If this option is **enabled** (default setting), unselected users **will not see any message** related to the acknowledgement request.
* If the option is **disabled**, these users will see a **message explicitly stating that their acknowledgement is not required**.

<figure><img src="/files/EScWHM0sYFwD0aWEv2Vv" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

To learn more about this option, please refer to the ["Configuration"](https://docs.intranet.ai/acknowledgement/features/acknowledgement-for-pages-and-news#configuration) section.

***

## Track acknowledgements

**All confirmation data**—whether for **documents**, **pages**, or **news**—are consolidated in a **single Power BI report**, allowing real-time monitoring and a complete overview of consultation activities. Please, refer to the **"**[**Acknowledgement for documents**](https://docs.intranet.ai/acknowledgement/features/acknowledgement-for-documents#track-acknowledgements)**"** section for more details on the features and functionalities of the report.


# Use cases

Our Acknowledgement tool has a wide range of use cases across various industries and organizational needs. Here are some of the potential use cases.

## Acknowledgement for documents

Our Acknowledgement tool is essential for ensuring that **crucial documents** are not only distributed efficiently but also acknowledged by the intended recipients. Here are some key use cases:

### Human Resources and Training

* **Onboarding documentation**. Distribute onboarding materials (such as company policies, handbooks and procedures) to new hires and ensure they have been read.
* **Training materials**. Distribute educational materials (such as slides and manuals) and ensure that employees complete training.&#x20;
* **HR documents**. Notify employees of changes in HR policies, such as updates on leave policies or employee benefits, and ensure acknowledgment.

### Compliance

* **Compliance documents**. Share compliance documents and request acknowledgment to ensure all employees are aware of and comply with company regulations.
* **Policy updates**. Distribute internal policy updates, such as changes to the company’s code of conduct, and confirm that all employees have read them.

### IT and Security

* **Cybersecurity policies**. Notify employees of IT security policies, phishing awareness, and best practices for data protection.
* **Acceptable use policies**. Ensure employees acknowledge IT policies regarding the appropriate use of company devices and networks.

### General Document Management

* **Health and safety protocols**. Distribute safety guidelines and emergency procedures to employees.
* **Project documentation**. Share project charters, scope documents, or timelines with project team members to confirm their understanding of project requirements.
* **Other**. Notify and track acknowledgment of updates to any critical internal documents.

## Acknowledgement for pages and news

With the possibility to request acknowledgment for intranet pages and news, our tool ensures that **important communications and contents** reach employees and are properly acknowledged. Here are some common use cases:

### Internal communications and corporate announcements

* **Company-wide announcements**. Ensure employees acknowledge major announcements, such as leadership changes, mergers, acquisitions, or strategic initiatives.
* **Corporate events and town halls**. Make sure employees have seen important event details – including agendas and key takeaways – distributed via intranet news.
* **Sustainability and corporate social responsibility (CSR) initiatives**. Ensure employees are informed about environmental and social responsibility programs and know how to participate.

### Human Resources and Employee Engagement

* **Diversity, equity, and inclusion (DEI) initiatives**. Ensure employees acknowledge corporate commitments to diversity, equity, and inclusion and are aware of related programs.
* **Workplace benefits and incentives**. Notify intranet users of new benefits, changes to existing benefits, or wellness incentive programs and confirm acknowledgment.
* **Performance review guidelines**. Ensure your colleagues acknowledge deadlines, procedures, and expectations for performance evaluations.
* **Employee surveys and feedback requests**. Confirm that employees have received and reviewed survey invitations, feedback forms, or participation guidelines.
* **Learning and development opportunities**. Track acknowledgment of available training programs, leadership development initiatives, and professional growth resources.

### Policy and compliance updates

* **New policy releases**. Publish news to inform employees of new company policies and track acknowledgment.
* **Regulatory updates**. Ensure intranet users acknowledge compliance updates and procedural changes communicated via intranet news.
* **Workplace ethics and conduct guidelines**. Reinforce ethical standards and behavior expectations by distributing reminders via intranet news.

### IT and security alerts

* **Security advisories**. Publish IT security updates, such as password policy changes, phishing alerts, or new authentication procedures, and track acknowledgment.
* **System maintenance notices**. Ensure that employees acknowledge planned system downtimes, software rollouts, or IT service interruptions.
* **Remote work security guidelines**. Ensure that employees working remotely acknowledge best practices for accessing company systems securely.


# Releases


# Version 1.1

Here you can find the changes included in this release

## Notify users of a new file version

To manage file versions, an additional button, **Notify new Version**, is now available. Thanks to this feature, when a new version of a file is uploaded, it can be notified to the same users who received the previous version. Simply click on **Notify new version** to send an email notification.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/ltKVGyuHVxIhpMYazFGI" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/Cwc7GX7foiEB7nfSvGbr" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

When you click the **Notify new version** button, the following message appears:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/HS47n4I2uIPIBZ7L2iv0" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

You don't need to select users again: the same users who received the previous version of the file will automatically be notified of the new version. Therefore, you just need to click on **Send email.** When you do so, the following confirmation message appears:

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/y8f0jmsOzjc3RHXTCMz9" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

The email explicitly states that it refers to a new version of the file.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/aNTKShY3WSLGJSeKCEli" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

{% hint style="info" %}
The **Notify new version** button is always visible, even when a new document is selected.
{% endhint %}


# Version 1.2

Here you can find the changes included in this release

## Acknowledgement for documents

The possibility of **modifying user selection** has been introduced. Specifically, you can view the users and/or groups already selected for a file by selecting the file and clicking the **Acknowledgement** button. You can also **modify your selection** **by adding or removing users**.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/WdPvUkA4yzNIaxP5hiNu" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

If you add new users or groups, those already selected will not receive a new notification. If you remove a user or group, the report will update accordingly, removing the related data.

## New feature: Acknowledgement for pages and news

Initially designed for business documents, **the Acknowledgement tool has now been extended to intranet pages and news**. This means you can request confirmation not only for documents stored in libraries but also for pages and internal communications. To do so, you need to:

* Insert the **Acknowledgement Pages** component within the page or news article you’re interested in;
* **Select individual users or groups** (you can modify the selection at any time by adding or removing users);
* Publish or republish the page to make it available to your colleagues.

When accessing the page or news article, **selected users will see a button** prompting them to **confirm** they have read the content.&#x20;

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/btuHSJnHxamlnaaZ6NHJ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

Instead, **users who were not selected** will see a **message** informing them that **no confirmation is required**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/oO7cZKFMVUwqpi8EUnbj" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

## Power BI report

The latest version of the Acknowledgement report introduces a **more structured and dynamic approach** to tracking document and content acknowledgements. The new report consists of **3 pages**:

1. **Acknowledgement Requests**: this page displays an **overview of all documents and pages** **with acknowledgement requests**, including **key metrics** such as total users notified, percentage of acknowledgements, and document storage locations.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/m351tTVhsGRIiLPQbRwH" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

2. **Details**. This page allows an **in-depth analysis of individual acknowledgements**, including **user-specific data** (office location, job title, department), along with **timestamps for email notifications and acknowledgement confirmations**. This page also includes a visualization of **acknowledgement trends over time** and **advanced filtering options**.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/5uTWxBBOvPLryzApPczs" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>

3. **Complete Data**. This page **also** includes **acknowledgement confirmations submitted directly by users through the document pages**. In these cases, no email is sent — the user accesses the document library, clicks on a file, and opens it through the "Acknowledgement" page, where they can confirm they have read the content.

<figure><img src="/files/nLAoK3Uy9IttmyVsS993" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

A **filter section** is available on this page, too.

<div align="left"><figure><img src="/files/6JUCYLAO7CSYzrTiE9bb" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure></div>




---

[Next Page](/llms-full.txt/1)